《Hard To Reincarnate Into World Of Naruto As Iwa Shinobi》


 Chapter 1 - 01 Death and Meeting with God

    I was a Game Programmer who was working at the Famous Game Company.


    The company manager was a slave-driver, as I and co-workers couldn''t even go back home until we finish the project that we were given in time.


    I definitely was planning to quit this company and that horrible manager after I finish developing the project.


    I was eager to finish the project and go home and chill on the bed. Suddenly I was getting hungry and looked at the clock. It was already 10 pm and I realized that I missed the dinner.


    I asked my co-workers if they had dinner, out of reflex.


    They had dinner, in fact, they purposely didn''t call me out for dinner to prank me. Those Bastards!!! Remember this!!


    I hurriedly went outside and ran off to the restaurant before they close. There were no restaurants but after wandering around, I saw one restaurant across the street still didn''t close yet, but was preparing to close.


    I shouted out to them not to close the restaurant while I cross the street. That was all I could remember before I got blacked out.


    When I wake up, I had a massive headache. I found this very average looking unknown man walking towards me. I kind of panicked coz I couldn''t even recognize the place I was.


    Danny: "Umm Excuse me, Do you know where am I and why am I here?? "


    Unknown Being: "Sorry buddy, you are dead. You are right now lying on the Life-Judgement Platform"


    Danny: "What?? Dead?? Gosh!!! The first thing I wake up and some unknown guy is pranking me. What''s your name bro?? Tell me, did my friends told you to do this ?? "


    Unknown Being: "Hey I am not KIDDING, You are dead!!! DEAD!! Because you were crossing the street without looking, You crashed the truck and boom instant death. As for my name, you just said it yourself. I AM THE ''GOD''!!!!!!"


    Danny: "What??? I am dead?? Truck crashed me?? How the hell I didn''t see the freaking big ?ss car coming right at me?? I am so unlucky"


    God: "Enough Whining. You are dead, Just Accept it.


    Okay, It seems like you didn''t do anything illegal or bad, then let''s proceed with the procedure."


    Danny: "procedure?? what procedure??"


    God: "Listen carefully, You have two options.


    1: you reincarnate back to the Earth again with my blessings.


    But you should know, if you can not pass trial, you won''t get even reincarnated back to earth. "


    Danny: " What??? why am I getting system and why do I have to pass a trial to reincarnate to another world??"


    God: "Your human bodies will not get adapt to another world environment and will die immediately. There is no chance of survive, absolutely 0%. It''s like you are trying to survive in the moon without oxygen.


    So you need to alter or modify your body to adapt and survive another world''s environment. System can help you on that"


    Danny: "Okay, I get the part that I need a system, but why do I have to go through a trial?"


    God: "Rather than calling trial, it is actually the process of synchronization of system and your soul. It will be the most painful thing you will experience. If you can not hold the pain, your soul will dissipate.


    That''s why I recommend you to option 1. "


    I was thinking carefully about which option I should choose. Option 2 is too dangerous and highly risky, but what if I survive??. Option 1 is just way too plain, no fun, no adventures, just a safe to live. Umm, what should I choose...


    Danny: "Okay I choose option 2, I already led a life in Earth, I will take a risk and try my luck. "


    God: "It seems you are very determined to choose option 2. Okay then, I will respect your choice. Which world would you like to reincarnate to ??"


    Danny: "Naruto World please, I am a super fan of naruto so, if I do survive, I wish I can live in naruto verse."


    God: "Alright. I will now present to you the system that can alter your body to adapt in Naruto''s world environment.


    Be ready to feel pain in 3 seconds."


    God disappeared after saying those words.


    I just sat down and waited for the pain to come.


    After 3 seconds, I heard a mechanical sound in my brain.


    System: "Commencing Integration with host''s mind!!! Host, be prepared!!!


    3, 2, 1, 0!!!!!


    INTEGRATION: 0%"


    ''Oh, is it starting? AHHHHHHHHHHH~~~~~~~


    Shit Shit Shit!!!!


    What the heck is this pain ?? AHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH,


    WAIT FOR SECOND, STOP THIS!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!''


    I was expecting pain, but not this much!!!!


    System: "Host, unfortunately, Integration can not be stopped unless Integration reached 60% or 100%.


    The host has the option to stop Integration at 60%. When integration reached 60%, it meant the system has fully adjusted the host''s body to survive in Naruto world''s environment.


    The other 40% is about installing the system''s mini functions such as Inventory, Map, Menu View, etc.


    But once the host, decided to stop integration at 60%, the host can not reintegrate forever.


    After a round of calculating the host''s body, System estimates host will survive the pain until 61%.


    INTEGRATION: 1%"


    ''What?? I can stop this damn pain when it reached 60% Oh hell NO!!! AHHHHHHHHH IT''S SO PAINFUL.''


    ------------------- 5 Minutes later----------------------


    System please, tell me we are almost there.


    System: "Host is holding pain well. The host is almost there. Just 1% away from 60%. The host needs just a bit of willpower.


    INTEGRATION: 59%."


    YESS!!!! AHHHHHHH!! Finally, I can exempt from this pain.


    System: "Congratulations, Host has successfully reached integration 60%. Does host wish to continue Integration further to get the system''s mini- functions or permanently stop it? "


    ''Stop this fu?k?n? Integration. I don''t wanna experience that pain anymore, I don''t need mini functions, my life is more valuable. If I continue, I will probably die at 62% just like you calculated.''


    All the pain I was feeling was gone instantly.


    God: "Congratulation for passing trial. You should be thankful for your slavedriver manager since it helped to toughen your mind and soul. Otherwise, you wouldn''t even survive until 60%. "


    I was speechless that I was able to survive due to my company manager''s hard criticism.


    God: "Anyway since you survived, you will be reincarnated to Naruto world.


    There is a lottery wheel behind you, it will pick your settlement place and which generation you will be born. Settlement can be village leaf, stone, lighting, sand, mist, etc.


    While generation can be legendary sannin generation, third Hokage generation, etc


    So spin it"


    Danny: "WHAT??? I thought I can choose where and when I get to born?"


    God: "hey everything is not free, I already let you chose which world you would like to get reincarnated, so don''t be greedy. Now hurry up and spin the wheel will ya?? I am very busy"


    I had no problem living in any village except Mist, Rain, and Oto.


    I am not a fan of civil war and creepy pedophile.


    I spun it and it pointed to Stone which meant I will be born in Iwagakure (Stone Village) and a decade years after the First great ninja war. Umm, Iwagakure, no bad.


    But am I gonna be sent to the wars at an early age???


    Let''s calm down first. I am sure the system will help me survive three wars.


    God: "Ok are you ready to get incarnated?? System has consciousness and it will try it''s best to help out. So just try your best. I spent too much time now, so I am sending you now. Bye!!!!"


    Danny: " Wait wait, I still have tons of que..."


    Suddenly the world of black consumed me.

 Chapter 2 - 02 Being Born in the Iwagakure

    In the Iwagakure (stone village) General Hospital emergency room.


    There were several doctors and nurses gathered around over one pregnant woman, trying their best to deliver the baby.


    Inside the waiting room, there were unexpectedly several high-ranking elders and shinobi waiting for the news.


    If it is an ordinary woman who is in the emergency room giving birth, then all those high ranking elders and shinobi wouldn''t even spare glance.


    But the person giving birth in the emergency room was not a simple person.


    Despite her young age, she achieved a rank of Iwagakure Hospital Director, member of the village council, one of village''s rare S rank ninja, and powerful medical ninja whose medical skills are on the par with Chiyo.


    (A/N: I didn''t put Tsunade as a comparison because she is not well known yet. The current timeline is around a decade later after the first great ninja war.)


    "I can''t believe that third Tsuchikage sama ordered all of us to be here just for Miyu''s pregnancy" one of the elders complained.


    "Come on, Miyu lost her husband a few weeks ago. She still hasn''t recovered from her depression state. As her fellow members of the council, it is our job to check up on her. There is also a chance that her enemies might come to ?ssassinate."


    "There is plenty of shinobi protecting her now.


    Even without us, she is safe as she can be"


    Suddenly nurse came in and reported them the current situation.


    "Reporting, the operation was a huge success and Miyu-sama has given birth to a healthy boy"


    "See, I told you. Even without us, she is safe. There was no point of us being here"


    That one elder still kept complaining.


    Others didn''t say anything and just laughed at it.


    "Now we just have to congrats Miyu and give a report to the Third Tsuchikage sama."


    --------------------------------------------------------------------


    When I wake up, I could feel that all around me was dark. I tried to move my hands but soon tired of me out.


    I freaked out a bit, then realised that I am in my mother''s belly


    System: "Congratulation host. You have successfully reincarnated to Naruto world!!!''''


    When I heard the system, I confirmed that I was being born.


    I could b?r?ly open my eyes due to sudden exposure to light but still could see that there were several people.


    "Boy is healthy and fine. Miyu sama. Congratulations." Nurse holding me said to the woman lying on the bed.


    But I had no idea what she was talking. I couldn''t understand her language.


    I quickly asked the system to translate.


    I realised that the woman lying on the bed is my mom. She looked beautiful.


    (A/N: tbh, even normal average woman in anime are all beautiful.)


    Nurses started to clean me. It was a whole new experience for me as several women were looking and touching my n?k?d body.


    Don''t touch my thing!!!


    How dare they touch my thing as it was natural for them to touch !!!!!


    I was violated right after I was born.


    After cleaning, nurses took me to my mom.


    "Oh, darling. You are so cute. You look just like your father. Try to smile at your momma"


    My mom kept hugging and looking at me.


    Along the way, I got to know that Miyu was my mother''s name.


    "It seems like you are hungry. I guess I have to feed you right now."


    I was shocked by her words.


    Then I realized all the people here (nurses and doctors) are women.


    My mom was trying to show her br??st to feed me.


    Holy shit. She is about to feed me. Which means I get to see her br??st !!!!!!! I even get to suck...


    I didn''t know being a baby was such a great blessing.


    I tried to open my eyes fully to have a better view.


    Just as my mom was about to show and feed me, I heard several footsteps coming inside to room.


    My mom quickly wore the clothes back.


    Several old looking people came inside with gifts and congratulated mom.


    ''Ahhhhhhh, I was so close to seeing her br??st. Fu*k!!! You stupid old men came at the wrong time and ruined it all.


    Right now, I really hope you old geezers die faster!!!''


    I cursed them again and again.


    (A/N: I felt a bit pervert while writing this part. So I just stopped here. Apologies if you guys somehow got disturbed by this part)


    I learned that those old geezers are elders of Tsuchikage (Onoki) and members of the Council by listening to a conversation between mom and them.


    Suddenly all of them, including my mom, looked at a certain direction quickly with a serious face.


    "This massive explosive chakra... There is no mistake about it. It is 5 tailed beast(Gobi)!!!


    How did it get free?"


    One of the elders said.


    "Tch, I heard Roshi took Kan to train him and control the 5 tailed beast power. I guess he messed up real bad."


    (A/N: We know Roshi is 4 tailed beast Jinchuriki. I decided to make Kan as previous 5 tailed beast Jinchuriki before Han.)


    "That Roshi can''t even control his own tailed beast fully and trying to teach Kan how to control???"


    "Fortunately, the beast seems to be out of the village for now. But it''s coming to us with incredible speed."


    Suddenly shinobi messenger came in.


    "To all the esteemed elders, Kan lost control and transformed into 5 tailed beast (Gobi) uncontrollably and now heading to our village. Third Tsuchikage sama called elders to his office."


    All elders nodded and went out hurry to Tsuchikage building.


    I was surprised that on the day of my birth, the freaking tailed beast got free.


    ''Wtf? I am not a Naruto, how the hell I was born in such unlucky day? How shit is my luck?''


    I saw my mom was also dressing up to go to Tsuchikage building.


    ''You are also going too?? Don''t go!


    Besides, didn''t you just give birth?


    Didn''t you lie on the bed a few minutes ago?


    How in the world can you even move now??''


    "Sorry, my baby. Mom has to go. Its mommy job to protect Iwagakure. Mommy will try to come back soon."


    After saying goodbye to me, she nodded to nurses to take care of me.


    No matter how much I cried to stop her from leaving, she just smiled at me and left hurry.


    The nurse took me to place seems like a bunker. She left me there alone and ran hurriedly.


    I won''t blame her for not staying with me. She has her own child or family to take care of.


    Although I was alone in the bunker, it gave me peace and soon, I fell asleep.


    Boom!!! BOOM!!!


    I got awake by the loud sudden noise. I b?r?ly opened my eyes and saw the bunker''s ceiling is gone and all were in shambled.


    I could hear the loud sound of the roar.


    ''What the hell? I was sleeping in the bunker and when I awake, I am in ruins?!!


    System, what happened?''


    System: "Host, Transformed 5 tailed beast (Gobi) is now going rampage in Iwagakure, along the way, he/she destroyed the hospital and the bunker also partially got damaged."


    ''What? I thought it was outside of the village and elders and mom went out to stop he/she? No?''


    System: "Indeed, but 5 tailed beast (Gobi) is known for speed. Therefore, by the time Third Tsuchikage summoned and gave out evacuation orders, Gobi already reached Iwagakure."


    ''Fu*k, just how shit is my luck? I can''t even move since I got born just now.''


    I cried out loud to get the attention of anyone, so they can get me out of here.


    System: "Host, it''s useless to cry. All of the members of the hospital and civilians are already evacuated and only shinobi are out there fighting Gobi"


    ''What? Then why didn''t you wake me up when people are evacuating?''


    System: "Unfortunately, System can only alert or notify the host when the host is in an awakened state."


    ''Oh God!!, what a useless system you are!!''


    I still cried out of desperation. But my cries were overwhelmed by Gobi''s roar.


    Suddenly leftover tiles started to fall down rapidly. I saw a few tiles falling towards me.


    ''Shit!!!! System, do something, I am going to die!!!''


    *falling* *Crash*


    ------------------------------------------------------------------


    Subduing 5-tailed beast (Gobi) took 3 hours.


    Onoki and other experienced Jounins worked together to distract the Gobi while sealing team tried to make it transform back to Kan.


    Gobi tried its best to resist, but combined powers of Iwagakure shinobi managed to win in the end.


    There were only building casualties and no huge life casualties as most of the civilians are already evacuated and only capable shinobi participated in dealing 5-tailed beast.


    After making sure everything is alright, Onoki ordered everyone to rest.


    Miyu straightly went to evacuation place to find her baby. But no matter how hard she searched, she couldn''t fund her baby.


    She felt bad feelings and went off to the hospital to continue her search.


    When she arrived at the hospital location, she was shocked to see that hospital is completely destroyed.


    After looking around the hospital, she decided to go to Bunker.


    As soon as she entered the bunker, she stopped her movement.


    There she shockingly saw her baby DEAD, crushed by tiles.


    "NO NO NO NO!!!"


    Miyu quickly cried and hugged her baby.


    Miyu *crying* looked like it was the end of the world.


    Miyu who was a genius in the Medical department secretly started to develop the Jutsu to bring back dead people since her husband''s death.


    She wanted to revive her lover and her dead family members.


    Of course, she told Onoki about this before starting to develop the Jutsu to avoid backlashes.


    Originally Onoki wanted to refuse Miyu''s project. This project would need a lot of human sacrifices and funds.


    But when he thought about it, leaf village already has Kinjutsu to bring dead life back, created by the second Hokage.


    Prideful Onoki who hated Konoha to the core was worried about this Kinjutsu. Even though Konoha said they have already forbidden from using this Kinjutsu, who would believe that kind of bullshit??


    So Onoki accepted Miyu''s project and gave his full support. Miyu had a lot of free time (because she is pregnant) and with Onoki''s full support, she managed to resurrection Kinjutsu. But this jutsu hasn''t perfect yet.


    This Kinjutsu has to be performed within 10 mins after a person dead or else it will no work.


    -------------------------------------------------------------


    Now Miyu who is standing in front of her dead baby was planning to use this Kinjutsu to bring her baby back to life.


    Right now she lost too much chakra and extremely weaken state after fighting with the 5-tailed beast (Gobi). Therefore she knew she would die if she used this Kinjutsu now but for her baby, she was willing to sacrifice herself.


    "Mommy is very sorry she couldn''t protect you during the incident.


    Don''t worry, Mommy will bring you back. I am sorry when you awake, mommy will not be there for you. Please grow up well, live happily, Mommy will always love you."


    After saying everything she wanted, she started to do hand seal for Kinjutsu.


    "Kinjutsu: Resummoning Dead Soul"


    ------------------------------------------------------------------


    ''Ugh, Where am I? Am I gonna meet God again? Ugh, It will be very embarrassing and awkward to meet him again after living in the world at most 30 mins.''


    System: "Host is not dead yet. The host has been resurrected by the host''s mom to live again."


    ''What??? I am not dead yet?? I resurrected?? What do you mean system??''


    System: "Host''s mother used to Kinjutsu and resurrected the host after host died.


    And now the host''s mother died after using Kinjutsu."


    I opened my eyes and saw my mom lying next to me.


    ''I suffered great pain to reincarnate in Naruto world, and born in a day, the 5-tailed beast attacked, right after that I died by falling tile, then got resurrected again by my mom while sacrificed her life.....


    I dont know if I am lucky or not...''


    I feel extremely guilty and grateful at the same time. Although she never raised me, she gave birth and resurrected me by sacrificing her life.


    ''Thank you for fiving my second chance. I will definitely lead a good life.''

 Chapter 3 - 03 Obtaining Kekkei Genkai

    Onoki was heading to Tsuchikage''s office after dealing with 5 tailed-beast rampage.


    He was super tired.


    Although he was angry at Roshi for letting Kan lose control of its'' jinchuriki power, he was relieved that few lives were lost during the rampage.


    But on the way to the office, Onoki had a very bad premonition.


    To ninja, especially well-experienced people like Onoki, bad premonition indicated something grave was going to happen.


    Just like the during first great ninja war, and before 5 tailed-beast rampage on today, Onoki felt the same bad premonition.


    Onoki didn''t let his guard down even after arriving at Office.


    Then suddenly the office door was opened and the Medical shinobi who is in charge of supporting Miyu came in with a sad look.


    "Tsuchikage-sama, Miyu-san is dead !!!" the shinobi reported to Onoki.


    Onoki was surprised to hear Miyu''s death.


    "What? I just fought along with her against 5 tailed beast while ago and now after 10 minutes, you are telling me Miyu is dead? How could that happened?? Explain now!!!!" Onoki angrily questioned the shinobi.


    "It seems her baby was in hospital bunker alone and lost its life during the rampage.


    The shock of losing her born-baby was too great to Miyu-san, so she has performed Kinjutsu to resurrect her dead infant.


    But she lost too much blood and was in a very weak state. After she performed the Kinjutsu, she couldn''t handle after effect and passed away."


    The shinobi explained to Tsuchikage what happened after they found Miyu''s corpse with her baby.


    "You idiot!!! How could you leave her child alone in hospital bunker?? If you idiots properly took her baby to safe evacuation, none of this would have happened!!" Onoki was very pissed.


    He just lost valuable Iwa medical shinobi worth more than hundreds of shinobi.


    He couldn''t believe Miyu used kinjutsu to save her child.


    The shinobi didn''t say any excuse to Onoki''s question as he knew if he said something more, it will only infuriate Onoki more.


    Seeing the shinobi couldn''t answer him, Onoki was about to ask him to get out of the office before he recalled the Miyu''s baby.


    "Was the resurrection jutsu success?? Don''t tell me Miyu sacrificed for nothing?" Onoki asked the shinobi.


    "No, Tsuchikage-sama. Baby is safe and healthy. The Reincarnation Jutsu was successful. What shall we do with a baby?" Asked the shinobi.


    "Just put him in the orphanage and tell Matron to take good care of that child.


    Although Miyu didn''t die for the village, Miyu and her husband contributed great service to this village. Keeping their child safe is all I can do for them."


    Although Onoki was thought to be cruel by other villages, he is very kind to his village members.


    --MC pov---


    ''By the way, system, since I didn''t agree to install your mini functions in my brain, I am curious what you can do??''


    System: "System only has Quest-Reward Function and database which contains bits of knowledge about naruto world."


    I deeply sighed at the system''s reply. Well, I shouldn''t be unsatisfied in fact, I should consider myself lucky since I died and survived that ordeal at the same time.


    I definitely didn''t want to experience that pain ever again. Just who the hell are the 1% of people who freaking survived that pain??


    While I was contemplating about Integration Pain deeply, the system made an announcement.


    System: "Host, Congratulations for Surviving 5 tailed beast rampage!!!


    Host now has ''anime body-mind'' passive skill."


    I was surprised by the system''s sudden announcement, but calm down after realizing I am getting rewarded.


    ''What is ''anime body-mind'' skill? What does that do, system? Does it give me chakra or something??''


    System: "Exactly, host. ''anime body-mind'' skill awakens special DNA that every person of the world has. As the host knows, in the naruto world, everyone has special DNA inside them called ''chakra''.


    Therefore host has now awaken chakra.


    Not only this skill gives chakra to host, but it also heightens the host''s brain processing speed."


    Ohh. It also gives me the ability to think fast?? Damn, that''s op!!!


    Just imagine I can think twice as fast as other ninjas. I can easily beat them in mind games too.


    System: "Host, although you have became fast thinker, Other genius ninjas are also capable of think quickly as host.


    System only improved the host''s thinking process to be a bit higher level than an ordinary ninja in Naturo world.


    Technically, the host is just like the average person in Naruto world who can only think a bit faster than normal shinobi."


    What??? Shit, I thought that was an OP skill. but it just makes me think only a bit faster than normal.


    This meant genius shinobi like Kakashi, Minato or other characters could have thinking process faster than me.


    How am I supposed to survive in this world if I am an average ninja?


    System, is there another reward that can make me strong or just this ??


    System: "Don''t worry host. The system is here to help the host survive.


    Host''s parents are all dead, therefore, the host is an orphan.


    *Quest: Currently host doesn''t have a name. Please give a name to yourself, host.


    Reward: one Kekkei Genkai


    Failure: none*"


    Wait, I thought only my mom died to reanimate me, but my dad also dead?? Then I am an orphan??


    Come to think of it, who were my parents?


    System: "Host''s mother''s name is Miyu who was an expert medical ninja, head of Iwa''s general hospital, and one of S-rank ninjas of Iwa.


    Host''s father''s name is Shinjo, one of the founders of Explosion corps and one of S-rank ninjas of Iwa. He died recently during S rank mission."


    Holy shit!!! Both of my parents are S rank ninjas, and very influential too.


    Nice!!! My life in Iwa might be not bad due to my parents'' influences and achievements even if they are dead.


    Anyway, enough about my parents, I can get Kekkei Genkai by just naming myself?


    System, you are awesome!!


    Now, what should I name myself? It must be a Japanese name or else others will make fun of me.


    That sounds alright to me. Okay, system. I decided my name will be Genji. And for kekkei Genkai, it''s obvious that I choose Sharingan. Every naruto fan knows sharingan is literally hack.


    System: "Sorry, the host can not have Sharingan. Since the host is born in Iwa, the host must choose kekkei Genkai only available in Iwagakure.


    Also, the host can''t pick Dust release because it is kekkei tota, not a kekkei Genkai."


    ... ????????


    Is there even a kekkei Genkai in Iwagakure except for Explosion release??


    System, you just gave me no choice but to choose Explosion release.


    Why don''t you just say the reward is Explosion release???


    But I guess, I should be grateful for even getting Explosion release.


    Explosion release is strong kekkei Genkai so I shouldn''t be too sad.


    System: "Alright. Host, what type of explosion release do you want? There are 3 types of Explosion release.


    1: Allowing users to cause explosions in objects they come into contact with. An example would be gari''s explosion release.


    2: Creates clays that can explode whenever the host wants. An example would be Deidara''s explosion release.


    3: It''s the rarest type of explosion release. It allows users to generate an explosion to any solid Earth Style Jutsus that users created. But the user must have a considerable amount of chakra to use this explosion release. Host''s father had this explosion release."


    ''Wow!! There are 3 types of explosion release?? I didn''t know the explosion release would be so complicated.


    I don''t think the first type of explosion release is strong. I need to be close to an opponent to use the first type of explosion release. Short-range and have to be careful not to get caught by my own explosion.


    Yep, I definitely not picking the first type.


    Well, the second type of explosion release is really tempting. Just imagine riding on your clay bird, looking down on everything like a thug.


    But I don''t want to have creepy mouths in my hands and the most important, where the hell can I get clay?


    Do I have to learn how to create clay? That''s just pain in the ?ss. This Explosion release will also be completely useless without clay just like Deidara.


    So the final option is the third type of explosion release.


    Although I might have an average amount of chakra, I can always train to increase the chakra amount and have the ability to explode any Earth-style Jutsu that I create is just too OP.


    Just create a gigantic mountain and BOOM!!! It should be at least strong as pain''s almighty push.


    Muhahahahahah.


    I have decided, system. I shall choose the third type of explosion release.''


    System: "Host has now explosion release, can explode any Earth-release Jutsu that host created.


    Since the host now has kekkei Genkai, the host can not have another kekkei Genkai nor f?r??b?? implement kekkei Genkai.


    REMEMBER!!!


    The host has an average physical constitution.


    Therefore experimenting with the host''s body or f?r??b?? implementing new kekkei Genkai or curse mark to host will be instant death since average shinobi will also die instantly if they experience conditions above."


    ''Alright.''


    I paid little attention to the system''s warning since I was not planning to perform any experiment nor getting a curse mark on me.


    I am a freaking human, not a monster. I may have the d?s?r? to become strong but not that much to get crazy about powers and becomes a monster and experiment on others and myself like Orochimaru.

 Chapter 4 - 04 Orphanage & Training

    ---------- 5 years later--------------


    It''s been 5 years since I got reincarnated to Iwagakure.


    I was brought to the orphanage and lived there until now.


    I thought orphanage would be kinda shabby, but I realized my ?ssumption is wrong. The orphanage has training ground, a large canteen, a huge playground, and has room for each kid in the orphanage, they even have a freaking swimming pool.


    I thought I was in paradise but soon realized that most of the facilities are for kids to prepare to be ninjas.


    We have a lot of staff in Orphanage and most of them are ninjas. I guess they are here to train us to be loyal ninjas of Iwa.


    We started official ninja training at the age of 4.


    Instructors lectured us about how other villages want to harm Iwagakure, and it is our ninja duty to become strong and protect Iwa from dangers.


    To be honest, most of the ninja lectures about propagandas about the will of stone and how other villages are evil.


    Although I already decided to be loyal to Iwa, propaganda was starting to annoy me.


    As for my training, I have b?r?ly done any taijutsu. I don''t want to feel any pain.


    So instead, I kept doing chakra control training and exercise to increase my chakra reserve.


    It seems like I have a knack for chakra control. I guess I inherited my mother''s chakra control talents.


    So I mainly focused on increasing my chakra reserve.


    The system suggested I should do Guy''s insane special morning exercise which was 100 push-ups, running around village 10 ??ps, sit up 100 times, and dumbbell for 2000 times.


    I thought the system got some kind of virus for suggesting that.


    I obviously cursed at the system for proposing that kind of insane workout routine to freaking little child.


    Now my chakra control reached around the genin level, mainly because, I have a low chakra reserve.


    Even though I have been training for 5 years (since birth) to increase chakra reserve, my current reserve is still below to normal genin.


    I am not a freaking genius like Itachi who freaking went to war at 4.


    I still haven''t used my explosion release for two reasons, first is the system recommends that I should wait until I reached the genin chakra reserve, and second is because I simply don''t have any Earth-style Jutsu in my arsenal.


    Heck, forget about Earth-style ninjutsu, I don''t even know how to perform E-rank Jutsu since they don''t teach ninjutsu and genjutsu in the orphanage.


    I just did Shuriken training moderately. I don''t get why would ninja focus so much on Shuriken.


    Take a look at TenTen, she was weak in naruto show, and later in Shippuden, she downgraded SO MUCH that, she only had group fights, and literally didn''t get to fight anyone one on one.


    I am willing to bet that she is one of the weakest in her generation.


    I spend 70% of my free time for training and the rest is for making friends and building a pleasant image for me.


    I tried to make a lot of friends in the orphanage as I didn''t want to be a loner.


    I thought it would be difficult to make friends since my ?du?t thinking does not line up with the kid''s thinking.


    But it seems ''anime body-mind skill'' also let me think like kids, so I had no problem understanding kid''s logic and building friendships with them.


    Also, I exactly know how important social network is, especially in the anime world where all these true friendship bullcraps are real here. Maybe they can save me at a critical time.


    All according to plan, hehe.


    I also made a good relationship with the matron.


    I am sure Deidara and Han, the future 5 Tails Jinchuriki will also stay in this orphan in future because former betrayed Iwa easily which means he doesn''t have any ties (including parental ties) with Iwa and the latter would be Jinchuriki which shows a high probability that he is an orphan.


    I will be needing matron to alert me when they show up in the orphanage.


    We would be going to the Academy when we are 7 years old in Iwa.


    Originally, We were supposed to go at 8 years old, but tensions between villages made children enroll in the academy 1 year earlier than normal.


    I guess we would have the second great ninja war soon. I should train hard and prepare to save my ?ss on the war battlefield.

 Chapter 5 - 05 Academy Battle event

    It''s been 7 years. It''s time to go to the Academy.


    I''m very excited to enroll in the academy since they would be teaching some serious ninja stuff.


    For the past 7 years, I have been training myself to survive the upcoming second great ninja war.


    My chakra control is already on chunin''s level, thanks to my mother''s chakra control talent.


    Also finally, constantly doing chakra reserve exercises such as running, sit-up, push-ups for 6years, my chakra reserve has grown to the as same level as the average genin''s chakra reserve.


    I am very proud of myself for achieving the genin''s chakra reserve level at age 6. I am don''t have genius talent, but I guess hard work really pays off.


    Although my chakra control and reserve training are going great, my taijutsu and shuriken throwing is just average. I have only learned basic stances for taijutsu that orphanage staff teaches to us.


    I rarely trained on taijutsu as chakra control and reserve training took all of my time.


    I am ?ssigned to Class 1A. That''s the class where most of the students are from noble clans and influential families.


    I''m sure I got in this class due to my parent''s accomplishments despite being an orphan.


    Also, none of my friends from the orphanage are in my class since they didn''t have impressive background support unlike me. I have to start making social networks again.


    I entered to my homeroom class and looked at my classmates to see if there are any kids I can recognize. Despite my effort, I didn''t find anyone familiar.


    I guess no one in my generation was famous.


    I can tell most of my classmates are selfish and have mindsets that the world revolves around them, basically spoiled brats. It''s going to be hard to befriend them.


    System: "


    *Quest: Since host officially started the path to ninja, a host should aim to be well known and loyal shinobi. Please make 70% of Iwagakure citizens know the host''s name until the host reaches the age of 9.


    Reward: Pill which increases in chakra reserve thrice with 2 million ryo.


    Failure: Decrement of chakra reserve by half.


    progress: 1%*


    "


    System, are you crazy?? This is just the second quest you gave me and why is it so damn hard?


    I have to make 70% of the Iwa population to know my name within 2 years or all of my 7 years hard work of increasing chakra reserve will be in vain!!!!!


    Difficulty between first and second quest is like heaven and earth!!!! What are you being so cruel all of sudden, system?


    Did you got pissed because I cursed you for suggesting Guy''s training routine??


    While I was panicking at the system''s quest, our homeroom teacher came in. Standing 5'' 11" tall, this tan-skinned man has a mad feel about him. A particularly notable feature is his crooked smile, and he has a noticeable welt on his left ear which he always to hide from view.


    He has a square face, a small nose, puffy lips, a birthmark on his face, and his light brown eyes are narrow.


    He is naturally bald, and he has an unkempt beard.


    He has strong arms, a muscular torso with a well-defined waist, and toned legs. He has a violent tattoo on his arms.


    Fuza: "Hello, class. From now on, I will be your homeroom teacher. My name is Fuza. I will be teaching you basic math, literature, history, economy, cooking, basic taijutsu, clone, and transformation Jutsu in the first year of Academy. Since you guys are the best students in this year, I expect great results from you. Now let''s check attendance, bla bla bla bla bla...."


    I was shocked by my homeroom teacher''s appearance. He has these gigantic tattoos all over on his arm and huge muscle that can put any bodybuilders in the Earth to shame. He looks like a muscle brain idiot, and he would be teaching us literature, math, and even cooking ???


    Iwa''s academy teacher''s quality is damn low than I expected. No wonder, they rarely produce genius, unlike Konoha or Kumo or Mist. Most of Iwa shinobis are just straight forward type that doesn''t think before they act.


    ------------ 6 months after enrollment -----------


    It''s been 6 months since enrollment. We were taught the history of Iwagakure, the creation of other villages, first great ninja, etc.


    Fuza was very surprised that I managed to perform clone and transformation Jutsu in 3rd try.


    Even if those are E-rank Jutsu, it will take months for academy students to perform them. Now my transformation level is already on par with most of the teachers.


    I also won first place in the fitness test which gained me a lot of attention. Fuza and other teachers also found out I have a high level of stamina, and chakra reserve compared to other academy students.


    Due to these incidents and coupled with my parents'' great status, I was deemed to be a genius in my class.


    I was happy because quest progress has risen from 1% to 8% due to gaining the title of Genius of class. Now all the academy staff, some low ranking ninjas, and academy students and parents know me well.


    At the same time, I was getting impatient, since only one and a half year is left, but quest progress is not even at 10%. It was too slow. I gotta do something big quickly.


    Shuji is my deskmate and can be considered a best friend in my class.


    "Hey, Shuji. Do you know any way to become famous quickly?" I asked my friend for advice. Having two heads thinking is better than one after all.


    "There are plenty of ways to become famous. You can pull the pranks on everyone or you can challenge to Tsuchikage or you can blow up the whole academy. Be creative bro."


    Sometimes I think something is wrong with this kid''s brain.


    "Dude, I am serious, is there any way I can get well known in a short time??"


    Shuji pretended to think for a moment and answered me.


    "Dude, Every year of the academy which is 6 months away from now, we will hold a battle event where academy students will compete with each other to earn the title of biggest genius in their generation. We can even challenge the final year students or Genins to graduate academy earlier. This is a tradition of Iwagakure so thousands of people are coming to look at events even Tsuchikage. Participating in the event is obligatory for academy students. It''s the best chance for us, academy students to show off."


    "We can even challenge Genins or above ?!! This is the best chance to get famous. Thanks for telling me." I was excited.


    If I managed to beat genin in that event, I am sure my name will be known to everyone. Muhahahaha.


    "I know you are getting impatient to become famous, but don''t get crazy and challenge everyone. No one has ever challenged Genins or ranks higher before. Even if you are called a genius, you can''t handle everyone." seeing me making a crooked smile, Shuji warned me.


    "I know bro, don''t worry," I answered Shuji but I didn''t heed the warning.


    I AM GOING TO CHALLENGE EVERYONE AND BEAT THE SHIT OUT OF THEM!!!!!


    I have 6 months to prepare for the academy battle event.


    No one knows I have an explosion release yet, which is going to be my huge advantage in the event.


    First, I need to learn some earth-style jutsus. I am sure the academy library has few useful C-rank earth-style jutsus which is only accessible to teachers.


    Well, I learned and even excelled at transformation jutsu, so why don''t I put it to practical use.


    I will transform to Fuze-sensei and sneak into the off-limit library. Hehehehehe.


    Most urgently, I need to learn taijutsu. Most of the academy students will use taijutsu in a battle event as only a few would know how to perform decent ninjutsu or genjutsu. My taijutsu''s level is slightly above my classmates since I have better strength and physical body than others due to chakra reserve exercises.


    But I am sure, most of the upperclassmen can beat me in taijutsu.


    I heard from Shuji that his father is a jounin and he always brags about his father is the best taijutsu specialist in Iwa. I should ask him to train me in taijutsu.


    "Hey Shuji, Can I join your taijutsu training with your dad. In return, I will teach you how to walk on the water."


    Since I have chakra control of the chunin level, I easily mastered how to walk on waters or trees.


    "Really? alright, Genji. Let''s go to my house tonight and I will ask my dad tonight if he can teach us together. If my dad agrees, you gotta keep your promise and teach me to walk on waters."


    I''ve been friend with him for months, I knew what kind of bait to throw out to make him agree. Shuji was always jealous of me able to walk on water while he couldn''t.


    So when he heard about a walk on water, he agreed to my request easily.

 Chapter 6 - 06 Shujis parents and Training Taijutsu

    After the academy, I walked to Shuji''s house with Shuji to ask his dad to train me a taijutsu.


    I was very surprised when we reached his house. His house is god damn huge.


    I am sure at least 20 people can live in this place. This house is as huge as an orphanage.


    "Hey, How many people are there in your family?"


    "Only me and my parents, so that makes it 3."


    MY GOD!!!


    Only 3 people are living in this gigantic house?!!


    What a waste of space!!!!! There are at least more than 50 people living in an orphanage, and this house, which is as big as an orphanage has only 3 people living in it?!!!!!


    I bet not even Tsuchikage''s resident is bigger than this.


    Shuji was laughing at my shocking expression and explained.


    "My grandfather was a president of the weapon factory and my mom inherited all of his fortunes as his only child. Now grandpa retired so, my mom manages weapon factory."


    Oh, that makes sense. So his father married to tycoon''s daughter.


    Lucky bastard.


    Now that Shuji is the only child in the family, all of this fortune will belong to him in the future.


    We entered to house and went straight to the living room.


    Shuji''s parents were all there, waiting for Shuji to come back from the academy.


    Sitting in the chair, readin'' newspaper, this fair-skinned man has a quick-tempered feel about him.


    A particularly notable feature is his faint freckles, and he has a small scar on his face.


    He has a triangular face with a rounded jaw, a bulbous nose, narrow lips, and his purple eyes are heavy-lidded. He has long arms, a broad torso with chiseled abs, muscular legs, and large feet.


    There was also a tall Oliver skinned blonde and beautiful lady with a crooked smile standing next to the man. She wore light make-up and jewelry accessories.


    They were Shuji''s parents.


    They were a bit surprised that their child brought a friend home but still welcomed me with kindness.


    "Dad, he is my friend Genji. He wants to join our taijutsu training session. Can we please let him train with us?"


    "Hello. So you are the genius in the academy who mastered clone and transformation jutsu in just 3 attempts. My name is Masashi and my wife who standing there is Ami. And, it''s alright for you to join my training session with my son.


    Lately, Shuji is losing competitiveness, maybe you can reignite it, Hahaha. You can come train starting tomorrow after the academy with my boy."


    Shuji''s dad was a very optimistic and cool guy. I guess I was worried for nothing.


    "Alright you boys, go wash your face and hands. Genji, since it''s already late, why don''t you have dinner with us together. Today, I cooked too much accidentally. So there is enough food for you too."


    Shuji''s mother asked me to stay for dinner.


    "Well, Thank you very much. I''ll stay here for a meal then." I was getting sick of orphanage food, so I agreed to it


    ----during dinner----


    "So, Genji-kun. Did you have to tell your parents that you are having dinner here? They will be worried about you." Shuji''s mother asked me.


    "My parents died. I am an orphan, uncle Masashi already contacted to Orphanage, aunt Ami."


    Suddenly, the atmosphere got awkward.


    "OH, I am very sorry for asking Genji-kun. It seems you are having a hard life. You can come to us whenever you feel lonely. We will always welcome you."


    "Thank you for consideration."


    Shuji''s father suddenly looked at me when he heard I''m an orphan. He stared at me for 1 min and asked.


    "Hey Genji, Does your dad name happen to be Shinjo??"


    ''I was confused for a second. Who the heck is Shinjo???


    Hey system, do you know who this Shinjo is??


    System: "Host, Shinjo is the name of the host''s father. The system once mentioned the host''s father''s name when the host was getting explosion release."


    Really?? So Shinjo is my dad''s name. I only remember his title as co-founder of an explosion release.


    "Yes, Shinjo is my dad''s name, uncle Masashi."


    I answered Shuji''s father''s question. Suddenly, Shuji''s father looked surprisingly guilty and abruptly stood up.


    "No wonder you looked familiar to Shinjo when he was a child. I can''t believe I meeting Shinjo''s son. hahaha, this must be fate. Genji, did you know that me and your dad were teammates and I owe my life to him. Yes, I can finally repay Shinjo. Genji, if you need any help, just ask this uncle. I will do my best to help you."


    ''What''s with him all of sudden? Did my dad save him or what?


    System, do you know what happened between uncle and my dad?''


    System: "Host''s dad sacrificed his life to save Shuji''s uncle in S-rank mission."


    ''No wonder why he was being so emotional and making a guilty face. Well, I don''t know anything about my dad, so I do not grudge on him.


    I am not that petty. But surely now, uncle Masashi will definitely train me more willingly.''


    We ate dinner with a good atmosphere after that.


    They asked me to stay sleep. But I refused kindly and went back to the orphanage, feeling happy.


    The next day, Shuji and I officially started harsh taijutsu training under the guidance of uncle Masashi in the private training ground.


    Although Shuji''s taijutsu skill was superior to me, he didn''t train his body, so he had no power to deliver impact.


    Therefore, all of his punches and kicks didn''t do much damage to me.


    I knew Shuji''s taijutsu skill is higher than me. Direct confront is bad for me.


    He kept attacking me and I just tanked all of his attacks until Shuji exhausted.


    As I expected, Shuji''s movement started to get slower and sluggish. I immediately grabbed Shuji''s right arm, so he can''t escape and delivered powerful upper-cut to his chin.


    Shuji got shocked by my sudden surprise attack and couldn''t defend it. It was an instant knock out for him, but I was also in a bad shape.


    Uncle Masashi stopped the spar and began to explain our weakness.


    "Shuji, although you are very nimble and has good skill, your stamina and strength is too low.


    Genji, you are quite opposite with Shuji. You have great stamina and strength compared to your age children.


    But your taijutsu skills are downright terrible. If it wasn''t your tough body, you would have lost to Shuji.


    Shuji, from now on, you will only have muscle and strength building training and as for Genji, here, take them."


    Uncle Masashi gave me a book containing several taijutsu styles.


    "Genji, I want you to look and study this book and learn all the taijutsu skills in that book.


    We will rest for 10 minutes and you two will have a spar with me next until you guys land a hit on me."


    System: "Host has triggered special Quest.


    *Quest: Land a hit on Masashi.


    Reward: Book containing Wing Chun Kuen Kungfu Style.


    Failure:Masashi''s impression on host will drop down *"


    ''Another Quest?


    Holy, reward is Wing Chun Kuen Kungfu style!!! Isn''t that Ipman and Bruce lee''s Kungfu style.


    If I learn Wing Chun, then I might be invincible in Taijutsu.


    Hehehehehehe,


    Although it''s going to be near impossible to land a hit on Jounin, I will try my damn best to complete the quest as a reward is too great.''


    After resting for 10 minutes, Shuji and I started a spar with uncle Masashi.


    I was in great determination to land a hit on him.


    But as time went, I started to doubt if this quest was even possible.


    It was not even a fight, more like he was playing and bullying us.


    He kicked me and I flew to the other side of the training ground. I honestly think Uncle Masashi is one punch man of naruto version. His power, speed, and technique are just terrifying.


    But I will never give up on this one. I gotta think of something to distract him for a second.


    Suddenly a great idea came to me. I told Shuji about my great and sure-win plan to him.


    Uncle Masashi just let us have a strategic meeting since he was so confident.


    Shuji was very surprised when he heard my plan and hesitated for a minute.


    "Are you sure this plan is going to work, Genji? If it didn''t, we would be in real big trouble."


    "Don''t worry. My plan always works. Just believe me and do as the plan or else we would get bullied until we cant'' even stand."


    Shuji didn''t look convinced but still did what I told him to do.


    First step of my brilliant plan, we surrounded the uncle Masashi.


    Second step, Shuji distracted uncle Masashi until I finish hand sign for particular jutsu.


    Then I shouted out loud to get uncle Masashi''s attention.


    "SSS rank Ninjutsu, Sexy Jutu!!!!!!!!!!!" and transformed into a super s?xy, almost n?k?d female teenager.


    Uncle Masashi got flustered and got a nosebleed. I could see that he is trying his best to keep his cool.


    Suddenly the sound of aunt Ami was heard behind uncle Masashi. "WHAT THE HELL ARE YOU LOOKING AT, YOU PERVERT. HOW DARE YOU CHEAT ON ME!!!!!!"


    Uncle Masashi finally lost his cool when he heard aunt Ami''s voice. He turned around to aunt Ami and tried to explain.


    "Ami, this is not what you think it is. This is a misunderstanding."


    I smirked and dashed off to uncle Masashi who completely let his guard down, then punched his face with all of my strength. Uncle Masashi was obviously not ready for it and fall down.


    System: "Congratulation on completing a special quest. Host has successfully landed a hit on Masashi. Since the host doesn''t have inventory, the reward will be in the host''s room."


    Aunt Ami suddenly laughed really hard at uncle Masashi and turned into Shuji.


    Uncle Masashi was gobsmacked and just stared at us.


    Shuji was cheering and high fived me while I was happy because of the reward.


    My plan was to use s?xy Jutsu to make uncle Masashi lose his nerve.


    I refused to believe that s?xy Jutsu will have no effect on him, even freaking Kagura got effected by reverse s?xy jutsu.


    Just in case uncle Masashi still didn''t lose his nerve, I ordered Shuji to transform into aunt Ami and shout at uncle Masashi.


    This would completely destroy the uncle''s nerve.


    Hahahahahaha I am such a Genius!!!!


    Uncle Masashi realized what really happened, he reprimanded us for even thinking about such a dirty jutsu and ended the training.


    He obviously ordered us not to mention any of this. He had his pride and didn''t want others to know that he got punched by two academy students.


    I returned from my uncle''s training and dashed off to my room to take a look at Wing Chun Book.


    Wing Chun is a concept-based traditional Southern Chinese Kung fu style and a form of self-defense, that requires quick arm movements and strong legs to defeat opponents.


    Softness and performance of techniques in a relaxed manner are fundamental to Wing Chun. Although Wing Chun Kung Fu style was created by a female, Ipman and Bruce lee already showed how powerful this kung fu style is.


    I needed the training dummy for Wing Chun style. Fortunately in the Orphanage training ground, there is a one dummy exactly same as Wing Chun wooden dummy.


    I can also claim that I have invented this style since no body in naruto world knows Wing Chun style.


    I am sure I will get more well known for inventing new style at age of 7.

 Chapter 7 - 07 Stealing Ninjutsu from Library

    It''s been 3 weeks since I started training taijutsu with Shuji by his dad.


    I had muscle aches all over my body in the first week of training, which is why I delayed my plan to steal earth-style ninjutsu from the library.


    I also didn''t stop training to increase my chakra reserve and control.


    Here is my training schedule, in the morning, I practice Wing Chun style and chakra reserve training.


    During school hours, I practice chakra control since I knew most of the stuff they teach in the academy.


    After school, I would have a taijutsu lesson from uncle Masashi. Sometimes I skipped school with Shuji to teach him how to walk on water.


    Of course, I didn''t forget to spend my time with friends, teachers, and orphanage staff and matron.


    Today, I decided to sneak into the Library by transforming into Fuze-sensei.


    So, I mostly spend time with my homeroom teacher, Fuze-sensei to observe him so that I can transform into him better.


    I also stole his identification card to give an impression to others that I am very naughty and he will not always have his identification card on him.


    At first, when I stole his Identification card, he was very very mad.


    He reprimanded me and told me off to never do that again.


    But I still kept doing it and he couldn''t punish me too much because of my parent''s achievement and my class genius status.


    As time goes, the punishment he gave me for stealing his ID card got weaker until he got used to it and didn''t even care about it.


    But he set the rule that I must return his ID card back immediately within 1 hour if it gets stolen by me.


    So I can''t use his ID card to enter Iwa Public Library.


    But others don''t know that I will return the ID card after stealing within 1 hour.


    This was my AIM!!!


    I want others to have the impression that Fuze-sensei always gets his ID card stolen by me, but also will not get his ID card back in a short time.


    So that when I transform into Fuze-sensei, I can have an excuse to borrow other teacher''s ID card.


    BEHOLD MY BRILLIANT PLAN!!! MUHAHAHAHA!!


    Now, I just need to make an excuse for WHY I need an ID card.


    It''s simple actually.


    Tomorrow, we will have a parents-teachers meeting since the first term(six months) is already over.


    Parents will be asking a lot of questions to see if the teachers have a qualification to teach their child.


    If a teacher couldn''t manage to answer, then there would be a lot of requests to change the teacher.


    Not only teachers would get a bad impression, their pride will be damaged.


    That''s why there would be many teachers coming to the library to study the day before a parents-teachers meeting.


    But as Fuze-sensei doesn''t give a damn about it, this is my main reason why I decided to transform into Fuze-sensei.


    ----------------


    After the end of school, I told Shuji that I couldn''t go to training because I got a stomachache.


    Shuji bought my lie easily and told me to take care of my health.


    I hide and waited outside of Academy until Fuze-sensei goes back to his home.


    I started to move after confirming that Fuze-sensei went home. I transformed into Fuze-sensei and went inside to the academy library.


    We didn''t need an ID card to enter the academy library.


    Although, there were no B-rank as expected. luckily I found very useful C-rank Earth-style Ninjutsu. It was Earth clone Ninjutsu.


    Nice, With this clone Jutsu and explosion release, I can create the same effect as Exploding clone technique, but costs less charka, and gives more exploding power.


    But I can''t find any more useful ninjutsu in Library except this.


    I guess most of the earth-style ninjutsu are in Iwa public Library.


    Suddenly, the door of the library opened and certain male shinobi came inside.


    His name is Osamu, one of a teacher in the Academy.


    He is a carefree guy, and a bit dumb. But he doesn''t teach a class since he just joined as a teacher, so nobody will ask him a question tomorrow. That''s why I am planning to borrow his ID card to enter the Public Library.


    He looked around and approached me.


    "Hey, Fuze-senpai, why did you call me out to the library? Are you going to treat me to dinner? Hahaha."


    "Oh, Osamu. I called you out for a reason. You see, I couldn''t find my ID card. So can you do me a favor and let me borrow your ID card to enter Public Library. Tomorrow is a parents-teachers meeting and I have to get prepared."


    "Ahh, I see. That naughty kid Genji stole your ID card again, am I right? Senpai you should punish that kid seriously. Well, I can let you borrow my ID card, but please return them until midnight."


    "Thanks, Osamu. I owed you one. Don''t worry, I will give it back to you when the Public Library closes."


    ---------------------


    Public Library has two parts, one for citizens and others for shinobi.


    Library for Shinobi has three floors. The first floor is available to any shinobi regardless of the rank. This floor only contains E-rank, D-rank Jutsu scrolls, and low-rank information.


    The second floor is only for Chunins and above rank shinobi. The second floor contains C-rank, B-rank Jutsu scrolls, and various types of mid-level information.


    The third floor is only for Jounin and the leaders of the clan. It mostly contains A-rank, few S-rank Jutsu scrolls, and high-ranking information.


    There is a rule that we have to keep in the Library.


    We don''t need to money to enter the Public Library. You can take a look at Jutsu scroll for free too.


    You can only borrow scrolls, but they will ask for a fee. If you don''t return them within one week, you will be considered a traitor.


    They will check if you have any notebook or pen or photographic memory before you enter the library, in order to capture any cheaters.


    After getting Osamu-sensei''s ID card, I transformed into Osamu-sensei and passed through Public Library checkpoint easily.


    I didn''t have any pen or notebook. I didn''t need things such as a notebook or a pen to copy down the scroll.


    The Great ME has a system,


    I can just ask the system to just record all the jutsu scrolls to the database. MUHAHAHAHHAHA


    I quickly went to the second floor and asked System to record all the C-rank and B-rank earth-style ninjutsu to the system''s database.


    After System recorded all the ninjutsu, I left immediately as I finished my object.


    I need to go back to the orphanage within 6:30 or they would start to search for me.


    Last time, uncle Masashi told them I would have dinner with him to Orphanage so they didn''t send the search team.


    --------------------


    I quickly transformed into Fuze-sensei again and went to Osamu-sensei''s house to return his ID card.


    "Oh, Fuze-senpai, you have returned fast. So did you finish preparing for tomorrow''s parent''s meeting?"


    "Yea, I think I am ready. thank you, Osamu. Here is your ID card. And don''t tell others that I borrowed your ID card. I don''t want others to make fun of me for losing ID card to the kid and has to borrow from others. Don''t even talk about this incident to me in the future, My pride would get hurt."


    "I got it, senpai. Don''t worry. I will just forget about this incident."


    After sealing Osamu-sensei''s mouth, I went back to the orphanage with a smile.


    It''s really easy to manipulate Iwa shinobi since they are all dumb. HAHAHAHA!!!!!

 Chapter 8 - 08 Begin Academy Battle Event and Rude Kitsuchi

    -----day before academy battle event-------


    It''s finally time for an academy battle event.


    During the past six months, I trained like crazy for this moment.


    My taijutsu skill has risen up to the chunin level. Always battling with Jounin (uncle Masashi) and adding Wing Chun style, I am sure I won''t lose to chunin in taijutsu.


    When I used Wing Chun for the first time in a spar with uncle Masashi, he was gobsmacked and surprised since he never has seen this kind of style.


    He thought I created this taijutsu and praised me as a taijutsu genius. I didn''t refute his word since I needed to create more commotion to increase my popularity for the quest.


    I completely mastered the Wing Chun basic style and now practice mid-level.


    (A/N: If you think MC mastered Wing Chun too fast, you are wrong. Since MC has anime body-mind skill which let mc have faster thinking and reaction, 6 months will be enough for mastering basic of Wing Chun.)


    My Chakra Control is good as always, around the jounin level now, since I didn''t stop training it.


    My Chakra reserve is still at Genin''s level but almost near to Chunin. If I can''t complete the quest about making my name well-know, my chakra reserve will be cut down to half.


    This is why I must win this event and earn fame to complete the quest.


    My Ninjutsu has progressed the most.


    I have learned Earth style: Earth wall.


    We can say it is must-have ninjutsu for any Iwa shinobi.


    I learned this because I didn''t have a defense measure for ninjutsu. Although opponents in the event are just academy students,


    I don''t believe they don''t have any ninjutsu in their arsenal. Even fu?k?n? Iwabe from Boruto could use ninjutsu.


    Just in case my earth wall can''t hold, I practiced body-replacement Justus to an expert level, so I can escape.


    As for my offensive ninjutsu, I learned Earth style: earth pistol Jutsu.


    This Justus let bullet-sized bits of rock expelled from the user''s mouth with great speed and force. After they are fired, the chunks expand into huge boulders. It is stated that when used collaboratively, this technique can destroy a mountain.


    They can be used from all ranges which is why this would be my main explosion jutsu. Just spit the rock and it will expand, if it gets near to the enemy, I will explode it.


    With my explosion release, I can make any half-assed C-rank or B-rank to OP A-rank.


    I also learned Earth-clone. They are very useful, as I can use them for distraction, diversion, and Explosion. They use little chakra unlike shadow clone, so it is very practical.


    Next offensive ninjutsu is earth style: headhunter jutsu.


    This is the jutsu Kakashi used to fu?k Sasuke up during his genin-test.


    While lurking underground, the Kakashi grabs Sasuke and drags them into the earth, leaving only Sasuke''s head above the surface.


    Because victims are rendered unable to move in this state, they are easily subjected to torture or decapitation. However it is also easy to evade this jutsu, so it is ranked D-rank.


    But for me, I see potential in this jutsu. After I use my explosion release, the opponent will be shocked. That''s when I will use this jutsu to give them a surprise attack.


    Finally, My last earth-style ninjutsu is Earth-style Barrier: Earth Prison Dome.


    This would be my ace in the hole. The user creates a dome of the earth around a target or targets, trapping them inside.


    The walls of the dome have chakra flowing within, which quickly repairs any damage that its prisoners may do to it. If the user remains in contact with the dome, they are able to absorb the chakra of those who are imprisoned, making them weaker over time.


    This is often used by Jirobo, one of four guards of Orochimaru.


    It would be often that I run out of chakra quickly when using Explosion release.


    That''s why in case my chakra gets low, I will trap opponents and just absorb their chakra until I have enough chakra and get further away to blow it up.


    I have learned all of these in 6 months, and I am 8 years old!!!! Just this fact alone can make me famous.


    I am sure with this 6 ninjutsu, coupled with my taijutsu, I can go toe to toe with Chunin. Wining Battle event would be a piece of cake.


    ------day of academy battle event-----


    system: "*Quest: Get the attention of Onoki and head of Explosion corps and make them acknowledge you as the greatest Genius who appeared in Iwa.


    Reward: Earth style Earth Super Dome(S-rank)


    Failure: none *"


    I still haven''t finished quest about making my name well-know yet, but you still gives me more??


    Also, System, from now on, alert me before you give me the quest. You always freak me out.


    Making that prideful Onoki and unknown head of explosion corps to acknowledge me as the greatest genius??


    I don''t know if I can get acknowledged by explosion corps head, but for Onoki, the chance is literally none.


    That stupid old man is too stuck up and has a bigass ego. I would say this quest is impossible.


    but it seems the reward is S-rank jutsu.


    Damn!! More difficult the mission, the higher the reward. But I never heard this jutsu. Explain it to me System.


    System: "Earth style Earth Super Dome is S-rank defense jutsu that can even block Tail-beast bomb. But this jutsu requires tremendous chakra to perform and even more chakra to maintain the jutsu. At host current chakra level, the host can b?r?ly perform this jutsu for 0.01s "


    What??? I can only perform this jutsu for 0.01s and will run out of chakra completely?


    That''s insane, but OP as fu?k.


    It can even block the tail-beast BOMB!!!


    But I guess that''s S-rank technique for you.


    Alright, I will just try my best and see how it turns out.


    ----------------


    I can see hundreds of people gathering to the Iwagakure official arena.


    Battle event will be performed in the Iwa official arena since the academy arena is too small for both contestants and spectators.


    Academy battle event has 2 competitions. The first is the battle one on one between their respective year. Winner of their year will get the title of Genius of Year.


    With loud cheers of spectators, the battle event has begun. I will have a battle against my classmates and other classmen.


    To be honest, most of my year students are weak. I think only Shuji and our class prefect can give me a good fight.


    Our class prefect''s name is Kimiko (female) and she has special Kekkei Genkai like me. It was a Lava style, allows the user to create several different materials, such as lava, rubber, or lime, by combining Earth and Fire Releases.


    This kekkei Genkai has a variety of forms depending on who''s using it and widely spread, used by ninjas from Kiri, Iwa, and Kumo. Kimiko(class head)''s Lava style took the form of lava, the same as Mei''s or Roshi (four tailed Jinchuriki) lava style.


    Also, She has the same face as Kurotsuchi. My guess is that she is the mother of her.


    Suddenly a kid who was around the same age as me came up to me with an angry face.


    "Keep your dirty off to MY Kimiko. Also, if you are matched with her, you better give up. I will kill you if you even scratch her hair. This is not warning, THIS IS AN ORDER FRM YOUR FUTURE TSUCHIKAGE!!!!"


    After he said what he wanted to me, he went to threaten other students.


    ''What the fu?k was that?


    A dying fan of Kimiko?? But he said ''My Kimiko''!!!!


    Wait a minute!! Is that Kitsuchi?? He looks the same age as me.


    If he is Kitsuchi, then why have I never seen him in the academy?


    That guy was looking at us like we are insects to his eye, but Kitsuchi I know is like a totally different person compared to him?


    System, do you have an explanation?''


    System: "Host is right, he is Kitsuchi, the son of Onoki and the same age as host.


    But the reason host never seen him in the academy is because he simply didn''t join the academy.


    He became Genin at the age of 7 since he got training directly from Tsuchikage.


    In his childhood he was very arrogant boy, but after experiencing wars, he fixed his attitude."


    I suddenly got triggered, hearing the System''s explanation.


    So basically, he is now an ?sshole and became Genin just because his dad is a Tsuchikage and trained by Tsuchikage!!!!


    That''s literally backdoor!!


    While I am working so hard to make my name well-known and trying to become genin, he just got all that by his status of being the son of Tsuchikage.


    He is just a spoiled kid, thinking that everything revolves around him.


    Not only that, but He also had ''look-down'' facial expression when threatening us.


    That piece of shit!!!!! Pissed me off!!!!!!!


    Screw cannon. I can''t to wait until he fix his attitude by himself. I will definitely fix your damn attitude in the Second competition.


    System: "host has awakened special quest!!!


    *Special Quest: Please wreck, pulverize, and destroy Kitsuchi to fix his attitude towards academy students.


    Reward: Earth travel jutsu scroll (A-rank)


    Failure : Title of Genius will be lost*"


    Perfect timing, System. But I was going to beat him up without even your special quest!!!!


    Reward is Earth travel jutsu?!!!


    Isn''t that jutsu Orochimaru used to disappear mysteriously during the canon chunin exam!!


    Heck yeah, now I am more fired up to beat him.


    --------------------------------------------


    I fought with nameless classmates in the first round of the competition.


    Nameless: "Genji, I know you are considered a genius, but I will show you that hard-work can beat genius. While you are lazing around, I trained hard to beat you. Now I will show you the fruit of my training."


    ... ....


    ''Dude, just what in the god''s name do you think I didn''t train?


    This idiot thinks he is the only one who trained hard. I am in a bad mood because of Kitsuchi and now you made it worse.''


    PAAHHH!!!!!!!!!


    I one-punched him and knocked him out.


    After that match, I kept getting weaklings until I reached semi-final. I was matched with Shuji.


    He became a taijutsu expert due to constant training with me and uncle Masashi, but his ninjutsu and genjutsu are downright terrible.


    I wanted to teach him Wing Chun style, but he refused me, saying that he has his pride and will create his own style, doesn''t need mine. I think being prideful is just an unstoppable disease in Iwa.


    "Hey Genji, all the time I was jealous of your talent. You have amazing chakra control and could even create your own taijutsu style. But I will show you that hard-work can beat genius. While you are lazing around, I trained hard to beat you. Now I will show you the fruit of my training."


    ...?


    '' Why the heck are you saying the same shit as that nameless mob in the first round.


    I always trained with you and why do you think I am lazying?? Did you guys plan to annoy me or you just hit your head or something?''


    As soon as the referee whistled, Shuji dashed at me with his fastest speed.


    Although others are surprised by Shuji''s speed, I am used to it since I kept battling with him for the past 6 months.


    He tried to punch me, but I blocked with my using Wing Chun and countered back at him. We got into intense hand-to-hand combat.


    Hit, dodge, front-kick, round-kick, evades, ax-kick, block, punch, side-kick, grab...


    Audiences were surprised and excited to see this level of taijutsu in the Academy Battle event.


    Radom Ninja 1: "Oh my god, Look at their fight. They are just academy students, but it''s like I am watching Chunins fight. Academy education''s standard became much higher."


    Random Ninja 2: "I know right. I heard that kid is a Genius, even creating his own taijutsu style. His opponent is the son of Masashi-san and already at chunin level at taijutsu."


    We kept fighting until I finally saw an opening. I curled my hand into a fist and aimed for the front of his nose.


    My fist hit the bridge of his nose. His blood splattered all over the ground of the arena.


    The referee stopped the fight there and declared me as the winner.


    Shuji suddenly stands up, smiling, and asked for a handshake with me.


    "Sorry, Genji. I wanted to piss you off so your form will get sluggish. But I guess my plan didn''t work out there. Hahaha"


    I realized it was Shuji''s plan to annoy me in order to win the spar against me, but didn''t quite work out.


    I felt guilty about breaking his nose, but he told me off to not to worry. Well, at least I am proud of him for even thinking about plans.


    With Shuji''s defeat, I advanced to Final and will be fighting with Kimiko (class president) after 10 minutes.


    -----------------------------------


    "Huhuhuhuhu. That was a very wonderful fight. I am sure even my personal guard will hard time if he fought with those two. It seems like this year academy students are outstanding, Onoki"


    "Yes, apparently there were a lot of geniuses in this year. But of course, my son has the most outstanding talent than any of them. Daimyo-sama"


    Onoki is a very proud person and he is very proud of his son. Although he didn''t have a particular release, he is very talented in Erath-style release.


    He believes that nobody in young generation could match with his son in Ninjutsu. So he always praises and shows off his son to every time.


    But lately, Kitsuchi is showing some bad attitude to his elders, look down on kids, think he is the best and doesn''t listen to him.


    Onoki thought all of these rude behaviors would ruin Kitsuchi and wanted to fix his problems.


    That''s why he brought his son to this battle event and teach him that ''there will always be someone better you''.


    "Son, what is your thought about the match just now? I heard that the winner of the match created his own taijutsu style. He is very talented in charka control. He is also the same age as you."


    "Well, I will admit that kid has some talent in taijutsu, but his ninjutsu probably sucks. His next opponent is MY Kimiko. My Kimiko is not only beautiful but super strong. I am sure he will lose to MY Kimiko miserably."


    Kitsuchi answered his father confidently and particularly loudly to show his support over Kimiko.


    Onoki knew that his son is head over heels about this girl called Kimiko.


    Kimiko is from the oldest clan in Iwagakure, she has a powerful kekkei Genkai. Her personality seems also good and kind. Therefore, Onoki had no problem accepting her as a daughter-in-law.


    ---------------------------------------


    A lot of heard Kitsuchi''s loud and confident predictions in next month. Kimiko got a bright red face after hearing it and wanted to hide in the hole.


    Of course, I heard it too. That piece of ************


    His future-self is a cool and awesome guy, but current him is just shitface. I don''t know what Kimiko sees in current him.


    ''Just you wait, after I beat Kimiko, I will challenge you and destroy you until your father can''t even recognize you.''


    The referee called Kimiko and me out. It''s time for the final.

 Chapter 9 - 09 Battle against Kimiko and Challenging Kitsuchi

    Kimiko knew she was no match for in taijutsu after watching a battle between me and Shuji.


    Therefore she decided to keep a distance with me and use ninjutsu to me.


    She performed several hand-seals and expelled a large amount of lava from her mouth, which quickly solidifies into multiple boulders of molten rock that are fired towards me with tremendous force.


    "Lava-style: Scorching steam rock jutsu"


    I dodged them carefully. All lava style offense jutsu are deadly, just one hit, and you are finished.


    I originally didn''t plan to use any ninjutsu in this match for two reasons, to save charka as much as I can and to show off others (especially to Kitsuchi) that my taijutsu and Wing Chun style is enough to beat Kimiko.


    But seeing her using powerful Lava style right off the start, I would need to use ninjutsu to end this match quickly.


    I used the smoke bomb to stop her repeated lava attacks and threw several shurikens to her left to create a diversion while I dashed off to her right.


    She saw shurikens and me dashing to her at the same time and surprised a bit. Then, she used another lava style to stop my advance quickly while dodging my shurikens.


    "Lava style: Quicklime Congealing Technique."


    She expels a large quantity of quicklime from her mouth, capable of inflicting powerful damage.


    This ability can also be manipulated in order to restrict the intended target''s movements, as after the initial blast the remnants of the substance can act in a similar manner to quick-drying cement.


    Then she used additional water jutsu to set off the necessary reaction to make the substance harden and also to increase the area covered by the substance, thus further increasing the potential range of the technique.


    Although I was pretty fast, I got stuck by her jutsu.


    I was quite surprised to see her using this combo-jutsus. They were exactly what Kurotsuchi used to capture Kabuto during the fourth great ninja war.


    She smiled at me and told me to give up since I can''t get out of it no matter what I do. She was right, I couldn''t get out this jutsu no matter how hard I tried. Hell, even Kabuto couldn''t get out of it.


    Spectators cheered seeing me I got trapped by her jutsu.


    "Wow, that was amazing!!! She used several high-rank Lava release Jutsu."


    "She completely ruled this match!! She is just 8 but her talents in Lava style is simply incredible"


    "Huhuhuhuhu, that Lava girl is descendant of First-Tsuchikage, right? I guess it is expected from her then."


    "Hmm *snort*, I told you that you are no match for MY Kimiko, idiot."


    "That Genji kid can''t even do anything. But I guess it is understandable that he couldn''t do anything. He is 8 and still academy students. He has no experience fighting with kekkei Genkai users."


    Even Uncle Masashi couldn''t help but pity me for battling with Kimiko.


    Seeing that I was not planning to give up, She decided to end this match by using her Lava jutsu.


    "Sorry, but I wish to end this match.


    Lava style: Scorching steam rock jutsu!!"


    She expelled several molten rocks at me and I was directly hit by them.


    But then something that shocked her happened. I turned into Earth and crumbled down.


    Earth Clone!!!!!!!!!


    She was shocked that her eyes couldn''t stop staring at my crumbled earth clone.


    "How??? When???"


    It all happened when I used the smoke bomb. I used to earth clone to act as bait and threw shuriken to distract her from thinking carefully.


    Then, I just waited in the smoke until she uses all of her tricks on my clone, or she runs out of chakra.


    I would say her plan was not a bad one, especially against taijutsu users. She is just 8 years old, have great thinking and strong if compared to her generation.


    But she is against the GREAT ME!!!!.


    I don''t fall for tricks that planned by 8 years old. She also only focused on and worried about my taijutsu, ignoring possiblity I use Ninjutsu, which shows her naivety.


    "You are right, Kimiko. It''s time to end this match. Your plan was a good one but make sure not to let your guard down until the end."


    I dashed off to her with great speed by pumping chakra to my leg.


    Kimiko couldn''t do anything to stop my advance since her chakra is almost near to 0.


    I appeared to in front of her and knocked her out easily.


    Crowds were shocked at the sudden turn of event, cheered greatly to me and send appeals to her.


    "Wow, That kid has some great ability to think. It''s like he predicted every move of her!!!!"


    "Just only used smoke bomb, clone and shurikens to win the kekkei Genkai user. Damn, he must have the highest IQ in his generation!!"


    "Now, that''s the person what you call Genius"


    "Hahahahaha, I always believed that you can win this, Genji. There is no way a smart kid like you would just do nothing."


    Uncle Masashi quickly changed his statement when he saw me wining.


    "Don''t talk nonsense. You pitied Genji-chan just while ago. While I always believed that he can win." Aunt Ami rebutted uncle Masashi.


    Kitsuchi''s face was a mixture of confusion and anger. He couldn''t believe His Kimiko lost and he wanted to punch Genji for not listening to his threat.


    The referee approached me and declared me as the winner of Final-match and gave me a medal and rewards.


    "Winner of Final-match is Genji!!! From now on Title of Genius of the year belongs to him, Here is your medal and reward!!"


    Audiences cheered while I looked at rewards. Rewards are shiny, sharp Kunais, one-time free access to the Third floor of Public library ninja section where A-rank and S-rank are contained, and 50,000 ryo.


    Not bad, access to the final floor of the ninja section library. This reward might seem useless to others but to me who has a system, it''s like the greatest reward.


    Referee asked me suddenly. "Do you wish to challenge your upperclassmen or Genin? If you want to challenge, please call them out."


    "Yes, I would like to challenge Genin please," I answered his question.


    The referee got surprised by my answer. Although he has seen some of the previous kids challenging upperclassmen, this is the first time in the history of Battle event that he saw someone challenging to Genin.


    Obviously, not only the referee, spectators, and even Onoki and Daimyo were surprised.


    "Kitsuchi, Come out and Face me, You piece of shit!!! Today I will fix your damn attitude. I will destroy you for looking down on me. Also, I challenge your genin team too. You alone are too boring for me!!!"


    Others were shocked by hearing and looked at me like I was alien.


    But Kitsuchi was happy since he thought he got a chance to beat me up and looked at me like I am stupid. His genin teams also surprised since I challenged them too.


    There is a rule , you can not decline the challenge. Therefore Kitsuchi and his genin team came up to stage.


    All the crowds got excited. It was the unexpected challenge but it was definitely a welcome one for them.

 Chapter 10 - Defeating Kitsuchi

    Crowds were cheering out loud as the tension between me and Kitsuchi with his team grew.


    To be honest, there is no way I can beat the whole seasoned genin team.


    The Genin team has superior numbers, combined chakra reserves are greater than me and they can rely on each other while I am just on my own.


    But Kitsuchi''s team is very different or rather special case than the others.


    Kitsuchi is a son of Tsuchikage, therefore Kitsuchi will be the captain, decision-maker, attacker, and leader of the team automatically.


    The other two will just obediently follow Kitsuchi even it is the wrong decision.


    I am sure even their Jounin leader would only focus on training Kitsuchi, ignoring others.


    If Kitsuchi attack, the other two will only support him.


    Basically, the team will just collapse by itself if Kitsuchi falls as the team used to depend on Kitsuchi too much.


    Considering how I easily beat Kimiko and words that I spoke to challenge Kitsuchi, I am 100% sure that Kitsuchi will fight me one on one and tell his teammates not to interfere or support him.


    Therefore, in my theory, even if I challenged Kitsuchi''s team, it''s no different than just only challenging Kitsuchi.


    ---------------------


    "I have to commend you for even challenging me, the greatest genius. How dare you make my Kimiko lose face in front of so many people!!!


    I already told you I will crush you if you hurt my Kimiko.


    Now prepare to feel my wrath!!!!! peasant"


    Kitsuchi shouted at me with great confidence.


    "Stop blabbering and come at me, you arrogant bastard. Today I will destroy you and fix that damn attitude. Only you is no fun, all 3 of you, come at me!!!!!!" I replied to Kitsuchi to agitate him.


    "Stop trying to show off. Me alone is enough to deal with a weakling like you. You just got lucky when facing Kimiko.


    Guys, don''t interfere with this match. Me alone is enough to deal with that peasant."


    Kitsuchi ordered his two teammates not to interfere just like I expected. The other two obediently followed Kitsuchi''s order and stayed at the corner of the arena.


    Kitsuchi and I stared at each other for a minute. I am sure Kitsuchi has some skills to back up his title as Genius, but I believe in my explosion release.


    Kitsuchi couldn''t wait longer and raced towards me with kunai in his hand.


    I raised my hands to the Wing Chun stance and calmly readied myself. (A/N: Just like Ip man)


    Kitsuchi tried to stab me with his kunai, I blocked him with my left hand and counterattacked him. Kitsuchi tried to kick me, but I blocked it with my feet and counterattacked him.


    I always waited for him to attack, and counterattacked him.


    Kitsuchi got annoyed. He has superior physical strength and was using one of the best taijutsu styles in Iwa, but for some reason, all of his attacks are getting blocked easily and he was receiving Genji''s attacks more and more.


    Kitsuchi wanted to beat Genji in taijutsu to humiliate him more but unexpectedly he was slowly losing in taijutsu. He decided to make a distance and use ninjutsu.


    "Earth style: Rising Stone Spears"


    This technique lets the user condense mud or stone from the ground and shape it into spikes that protrude from the ground in order to skewer the target.


    I quickly retreated a few steps back and performed hand seals.


    "Earth style: mud wall"


    I blocked the protruding spikes with a mud wall.


    "Oh, you surprised me, peasant. You know B-rank Jutsu. It seems I underestimated you a bit. But enough playing around, It''s over now. I will get serious."


    "yea, it''s time to get serious. I would have been disappointed if Tsuchikage''s son is at this level."


    Kitsuchi got angry but my words and performed several hand signs.


    "Earth Style: Earth Dragon Jutsu"


    I didn''t expect Kitsuchi to know earth Dragon Jutsu. Although Earth dragon Jutsu is B-rank, it''s power is on the par with A-rank.


    The only side effect is that it takes a great amount of chakra to perform that jutsu, which is why I didn''t learn it.


    I hurriedly performed "Earth style Mud wall" jutsu to block an incoming attack.


    But my mud wall didn''t seem like it could hold on earth dragon jutsu. Earth Dagon jutsu was too powerful for my mud wall to block.


    When my mud wall was finally broken, I quickly used replacement jutsu and avoided the Kitsuchi''s Earth Dragon jutsu.


    I gotta admit, Kitsuchi is strong. It seems like he has more chakra reserve than me and more physical power.


    Since I fought with several people before challenging Kitsuchi, my chakra reserve is getting low. I guess I gotta use my trump card.


    "Hahaha, it seems like your pathetic mud wall can''t hold my earth dragon jutsu. Let''s see if you can dodge another one"


    Kitsuchi got more overbearing after seeing my mud wall couldn''t hold one and performed another earth dragon jutsu.


    "Earth style Earth Dragon Jutsu"


    I performed another mud wall again in response but a smaller one than before.


    But my mud wall was able to hold out for 3 seconds which was enough time for me to get out of Earth Dragon''s range.


    "Haha, your mud wall is smaller than before. you must be out of chakra. what a weakling"


    I ignored Kitsuchi''s provocation. Why the hell does he talk so much during battle? Is it a tradition of anime battle??


    I quickly performed hand signs in fast.


    "Earth Style: Earth Pistol Jutsu"


    I spitted out small rocks from my mouth towards Kitsuchi which turned into huge boulders.


    Kitsuchi didn''t perform defence jutsu instead he decided to dodge. He was also getting low on chakra due to constantly using Earth Dragon Jutsu. He wanted to save chakra if possible.


    I smirked when he decided to dodge the Earth Pistol jutsu.


    When Kitsuchi was about to dodge the boulders, I shouted to him.


    "I was waiting for it, Kitsuchi.


    Behold, EXPLOSION!!!!!!!!"


    Boulders flying to Kitsuchi suddenly exploded and Kitsuchi got caught in the explosion.


    --------------------------


    Everyone was surprised when boulders suddenly exploded. This includes the Onoki, Daimyo, Uncle Masashi, Explosion corps leader, and many high ranking shinobi.


    "Onoki, could you please tell me what happened? How did the boulders explode?" Curious Daimyo questioned to Onoki.


    While Onoki was hesitating to answer the question, the explosion corps leader answered.


    "Daimyo-Sama, Tsuchikage-Sama, that was definitely an Explosion release, a rare one that has the ability to explode any solid earth-based ninjutsu. Iwagaure had one person who used the same explosion release, but he passed away 8 years ago."


    After hearing the Explosion corps leader, Onoki remembered certain hospital incident and others were surprised.


    ------------------------------


    After showing off my explosion release, I quickly performed another jutsu.


    "Earth Barrier style: Earth Prison Dome"


    (A/N: Jirobo used this jutsu to entrap naruto and others during Sasuke retrieval and m


    Dome started to surround Kitsuchi until it completely sealed off Kitsuchi inside.


    I placed my hand on dome and started to absorb Kitsuchi''s chakra to replenish mine.


    Two of Kitsuchi''s teammates didn''t know what to do. Should they make a move or stay still and wait for Kitsuchi''s order.


    Suddenly, they heard their Jounin sensei screaming at them.


    "What are you two idiots standing for!! Go and help Kitsuchi"


    After receiving their Jounin''s order, they started to attack me to free Kitsuchi.


    I already replenished enough chakra. I quickly dodged their attacks and made a distance between me and them.


    But what they did after that surprised me. Two of them started to use all of their offensive Jutsu on the dome, completely ignoring me. They just left their backs wide open.


    I guess they were only thinking of rescuing Kitsuchi. As I expected, without Kitsuchi, they are just losers who didn''t know what to do.


    I had enough of their idiocy and decided to end it.


    "KATSU!!!!"


    I blow up the dome using my explosion release. Of course, those two got caught by explosion and became unconscious.


    Audiences cheered after those two got knocked out, thinking match was the end.


    I also thought the match ended but suddenly a mysterious yellow light flashed and Kitsuchi was covered by that mysterious light and glared at me.


    ''WTF?? What the heck is that? Did Kitsuchi turn into Super Saiyan or what? System, explain this situation''


    System: "The mysterious light is a protective seal in Kitsuchi''s bandaged right wrist. Onoki was worried about Kitsuchi''s life, therefore he planted a protective seal on Kitsuchi''s right wrist a few years ago.


    Kitsuchi activated the protective seal last minute to protect himself from Earth Prison Dome explosion."


    Oh, so he has a seal to save himself. Not so surprising since he is the son of Tsuchikage. It will be weird if he didn''t have anything to protect him.


    "You thought you got me?? Your explosion didn''t do any damage to me!!!!"


    Although Kitsuchi was talking like he was okay, I knew he wasn''t. He got direct hit by my first explosion and I absorbed his chakra near to 0 when he was in Prison Dome.


    Kitsuchi dashed to me to continue the match. But it was obvious to everyone who would win at this point. Kitsuchi had only taijutsu to fight me while I had recovered a few of my chakra, and my taijutsu was superior to Kitsuchi''s


    Kitsuchi was desperate to land a hit on me while I just kept beating him up using Wing Chun style just like how Ipman destroyed karate master.


    I decided to end this match quickly. I kicked his leg and punched his ?h?st several times consecutively with incredible speed. Then I performed hand signs for Earth-style Headhunter Jutsu.


    "Earth style: headhunter Jutsu"


    I grabbed Kitsuchi''s leg and dragged him to the underground, leaving only his head to the surface.


    "It''s over, Kitsuchi. I won and you lost. You should give up now!!!!


    Hehe, now the title of greatest genius belongs to me."


    "No No No No !!!! You cheated!!!! I want a rematch now!!"


    Kitsuchi screamed and tried to move his body but no avail. Kitsuchi kept shouting and cursing at me.


    Suddenly I saw a small figure appeared out of nowhere and slapped Kitsuchi.


    "That''s enough, Kitsuchi. I am very disappointed by you. Don''t embarrass yourself and me further.


    You lost. Accept reality.


    A real man should accept reality and tries to improve to be better. "


    Onoki was very embarrassed when Kitsuchi kept his tantrum. Obviously prideful Onoki couldn''t let this happen any further, therefore he stepped up himself.


    After hearing Onoki, Kitsuchi lowered his head and stopped his tantrum.


    Onoki suddenly turned around to me.


    "Your father is Shinjo, am I right, boy? He must be very proud of you if he was still alive.


    You have the same explosion release as your father, great chakra control like your mother.


    At the age of 8, you managed to win an academy battle event and defeated the Genin team.


    Your Taijutsu is at least Chunin''s level, and know several B-rank ninjutsu.


    On top of that, you are smart and have the ability to make great plans despite your age.


    I always thought my son is the greatest genius, but you proved me wrong and defeated him.


    To be honest, I never seen someone talented like you before in Iwagakure. It seems like the future of Iwagakure will be bright.


    Thereby at this moment, I declare you as a Greatest Genius of Iwagakure!!!!!!!


    I hope you don''t disappoint me in the future."


    System: "Host has successfully completed two Quest.


    *Quest: Grab the attention of Onoki and head of Explosion corps and make them acknowledge you as the greatest Genius who appeared in Iwa.


    reward: Earth style Earth Super Dome (S-rank)*


    *Special Quest: Please wreck, pulverize, and destroy Kitsuchi to fix his attitude towards academy students.


    reward: Earth travel jutsu scroll (A-rank)*


    Earth style Earth Super Dome (S-rank) and Earth travel jutsu scroll (A-rank) now are available for the host to learn."


    I was very surprised by Onoki''s speech. I didn''t expect I would get acknowledged by Onoki and explosion corps leader just for defeating Kitsuchi, showing off my explosion release and several B-rank ninjutsu.


    System: "Host, don''t underestimate yourself.


    It is not normal for 8 years old kid to awaken explosion release, can perform several B-rank Ninjutsu and have a great mind.


    Host should be thanks to the system for making all of these, possible."


    Yeah Yeah, I''m very thankful for the System''s hard work.


    But I guess, System is right about normal 8 years old can''t pull off what I did.


    After Onoki''s speech, Audiences clapped, cheered loudly for me. I quickly kneeled down and thanked Onoki for praising me and all the things he spoke.


    Thus ending the Academy Battle Event.

 Chapter 11 - Cleaning the stones

    After the academy battle event, uncle Masashi and aunt Ami invited me to have dinner together to celebrate me and Shuji.


    "Genji, I can''t believe you beat Kitsuchi.


    Come and have dinner with us. We will celebrate Shuji and your victory. Don''t worry about the orphanage. I already contacted them."


    "Okay, uncle Masashi."


    I agreed to uncle Masashi''s invitation since I felt like I deserved aunt Ami''s cooking for winning a battle event.


    -------------During Dinner -----------------


    "You stinky brat, you even didn''t tell me you had explosion release, a rare one at that. *hiccup* If I remember correctly, Shinjo had the same type of explosion release as you. You really are his son."


    Uncle Masashi shouted while he was drinking beer.


    "Also, Shuji. You need to train much harder from now on. Your friend Genji *hiccup* already know several ninjutsus and created his own taijutsu style. From now on, I will teach you a few ninjutsus."


    "Yes, father. I will train harder to catch up to Genji and not disappoint you." Shuji answered his dad with great determination.


    I was just silently enjoying aunt Ami''s cooking while asking System for quest progress.


    ''system, Show me progress of quest spreading my name to Iwa population''


    System: "*Quest: Since host officially started the path to ninja, host should aim to be well known and loyal shinobi.


    Please make 70% of Iwagakure citizens know the host''s name until the host reaches the age of 9.


    Reward: Pill which increases in chakra reserve thrice with 2 million Ryo.


    Failure: Decrement of chakra reserve by half.


    Progress: 80%*"


    Progress has risen to 80%. Not bad.


    People are still talking about my fight with Kitsuchi. I am sure by the end of tomorrow, quest progress would be 100%.


    Uncle Masashi looked at the paper and showed it to me.


    "Genji, This is an order from Tsuchikage. Tomorrow morning, go to the Tsuchikage office."


    I didn''t know why Onoki wants to meet me.


    Maybe he wanted to punish me for beating up Kitsuchi since he couldn''t do it in front of people!!!!!


    Maybe I am overthinking about this?


    I decided to worry about it tomorrow and enjoy dinner with Shuji and his parents.


    ---------------------------


    I went back to the Orphanage at 9 pm. Orphanage gatekeeper saw me and welcomed me with a smile.


    I was very surprised or freaked out by his action.


    I guess this is one of the privileges of having the title of Greatest Genius. Even if I''m 8, people will suck up to me with praises and respect me.


    It seems like most of the orphanage kids and staff waited for me to congrats me. They prepared a feast to celebrate my victory.


    Some of them even waited for me to come and eat together. Although I was already full, I felt bad for them to wait for me, so I still ate with them.


    After that, they gave presents that they prepared beforehand for me.


    Most of the gifts were toys which made me greatly disappointed. But I guess this is what you would expect when bunch kids are gifting you.


    Fortunately, Matron and few staff members presented me with Shurikens, smoking bombs, and items of clothing.


    ---------------Next Day---------------


    I awake early and prepared myself to meet Onoki. I dressed up nicely and went out to the Tsuchikage building.


    Unlike Konoha, where Kage building located at the back of the village, Tsuchikage building is located in the middle of Iwagakure.


    Suddenly I heard System''s mechanical sound.


    System: "Congratulation host for completing the quest.


    *Quest: Since host officially started the path to ninja, host should aim to be well known and loyal shinobi.


    Please make 70% of Iwagakure citizens know the host''s name until the host reaches the age of 9.


    Reward: Pill which increases in chakra reserve thrice with 2 million Ryo.


    Failure: Decrement of chakra reserve by half.


    Progress: 100%*


    Since the host doesn''t have inventory, the rewards will be in the host''s room."


    I was happy that I completed the quest. I felt like l took a huge burden off from my shoulder.


    But I also got a bit worried about rewards would be in my room. I didn''t feel safe leaving 2 million Ryo and pill which can increase chakra reserve thrice in my room.


    I quickly went back to Orphanage to hide my rewards.


    In my room, there was a small brief-case, contained 2 million Ryo and pinky finger-sized pill.


    I hid to the money brief-case where I kept my Wing Chun book and brought a pill with me.


    After satisfied, I headed off to Tsuchikage building again.


    I decided to become independent as fast as possible so I don''t have to worry about quest reward being stolen or seen.


    On the way, I was very shocked that people were calling my name out and greeted me.


    "Hey, Genji. I saw yesterday''s battle. That was so awesome."


    "Good morning, Genji. Have a nice day"


    "Hey Genji, my shop is the number one restaurant in this district. Come and have a taste."


    "Wow, you are so young but have the title of greatest genius. I wish my son is at least half as good as you."


    I greeted everyone as many as I can and rushed off to Tsuchikage building.


    --------------------------------


    "Greetings, 3rd Tsuchikage-sama. Academy student Genji is arrived by 3rd''s order." I respectfully and carefully greeted Onoki since I didn''t know what he wanted from me.


    "It seems like you are enjoying the privileges of Greatest Genius.


    But don''t get bigheaded. Train harder to become strong.


    I was a bit curious about how you were able to know a few B-rank jutsu despite being an orphan and without any backing.


    So I looked into your recent movement.


    I gotta say you are very clever. Transform into your teacher and infiltrate to the chunin level section ninja library."


    I was very surprised that Onoki found out my scheme.


    I tried to make an excuse.


    But Onoki raised his hand and gestured to stop.


    "Although what you did was illegal, but it doesn''t change the fact that you are a very talented Iwagakure kid.


    So I will forgive you just this once, but there is no next time."


    Onoki spoke to me with a threatening tone.


    "I thanks for Lord-3rd''s forgiveness. Don''t worry, I will never do it."


    I let out a breath of relief and thanked Onoki. I thought I was going to jail for a moment.


    "Now follow me, kid. There is a place I want you to come with me."


    ----------------------


    I was curious where Onoki was taking me.


    I obediently followed Onoki to the underground floor of Tsuchukage''s building.


    Once we got there, I felt I had seen this place before despite not coming.


    Wait a minute, isn''t this place the Stone Monument of our village??


    This is the place where the first Tsuchikage tasked Onoki to clean and explained how the stone was a symbol of the tough, unmovable will of the shinobi of Iwagakure or something bullcrap like that.


    In the middle of the room, I saw an unexpected person, Kitsuchi cleaning up the rock, also whining loudly.


    "Genji, I will now give you a task to clean up our village stone monument with Kitsuchi.


    Since this place represents our village, if I find even speck of dirt on the stones, you two will clean all over again" Onoki ordered me.


    I gave him ''Are you kidding me'' look to Onoki.


    Onoki looked at my eye back and said "Consider this a punishment for entering into Library"


    Fuck you Onoki!!!!! Just because you were suffered here, doesn''t mean that you have to make future generation to suffer too.


    You fu?k?n? petty man.


    "What, I refuse to clean up with this ?sshole, dad. Why do I have to clean up this place." this time, Kitsuchi wh?n?d to Onoki.


    But Onoki looked at two of us sternly and said "I don''t give a fu?k what you two say. I only take yes for an answer."


    Kitsuchi and I started to clean this place while glaring each other.


    "Hey ?sshole, don''t clean that stone. I was about to clean it. You go and clean that stone"


    "Shut up Muscle Head, I don''t take orders from you. I clean the stone I want."


    We kept fighting each other and managed to finished cleaning in 2 hours.


    Onoki inspected a bit and said.


    "Do it again, I see tiny dust in the corner.


    Don''t even try to argue with me. I always right."


    Me and Kitsuchi were dissatisfied but started to clean again.


    We finished cleaning the rocks the second time but took less time than before.


    We still kept bickering each other.


    But this time, Onoki didn''t even spare glance and told us to clean again.


    Kitsuchi and I finally lost our cool and shouted at Onoki at the same time.


    ""At least, pretend to look before you say, SHITTY OLD MAN!!!!!!!"


    Onoki looked at us and flew to the centre of the room.


    He suddenly threw the so-called ''special'' rock we cleaned to the water.


    I felt an eerie sense of Deja Vu.


    After Onoki threw the rock, Kitsuchi got mad saying how hard he cleaned that rock and how that special rock is just an ordinary stone.


    "You are right, Kitsuchi. That was just an ordinary stone. If you replace it with a new one, no one will notice.


    But what''s really important is the will of stone inside of you guys.


    Bla Bla Bla Bla Bla Bla Bla Bla... "


    (you know the drill, he will say will of stone craps and how important it is to Iwa shinobi)


    After finishing his speech, Kitsuchi looked like he has received enlightenment while I was dead inside.


    I had enough of this will of stone craps.


    I will explode my head if I hear more.


    System: "Host can simply get out of this room, there is an exit door right behind the host."


    I just ignored the system''s sarcastic suggestion.


    "Normally I wouldn''t tell the meaning of will of stone to anyone. But you two are the greatest geniuses in your generation. I am sure you two will lead your generation of Iwagakure in the future."


    Onoki said to us like he was giving limited-edition p?rn magazine he kept for so long to us for free.


    "And I want you to make up each other.


    I can not have two great geniuses fighting each other and split Iwa into two in the future.


    So until you guys make up each other, you two will come here every day and clean the stones all day long."


    Kitsuchi and I looked like we were given a death sentence.


    I would rather be in prison that clean the stones all day long with Kitsuchi.


    I bet Kitsuchi is having the same thought as me.

 Chapter 12 - Joining Explosion corps

    It''s been 3 weeks since Kitsuchi and I started cleaning the stone monument.


    We received various lessons from Onoki, mostly about the will of stone and how Iwa shinobi must be strongest among other ninja craps.


    Kitsuchi slowly started to show signs of changing his attitude and personality.


    But we still can''t see eye to eye with each other and always fight. However, when Onoki appears, we act like we made up completely.


    During those 3 weeks, I didn''t practice any Ninjutsu. I just only practiced chakra control training in my free time.


    I didn''t have to do Taijutsu training since I always fought Kitsuchi in a stone monument instead of cleaning.


    I haven''t eaten the charka increase pill yet.


    I meet Onoki every day now since he always comes to teach us useless things.


    If I eat the pill and suddenly increase chakra reserve tremendously, Onoki will get suspicious.


    I will save the chakra increase pill for later.


    Today I was called to Tsuchikage''s office.


    I entered the room and didn''t see anyone except Onoki.


    "I have come, lord-3rd. Do you need anything from me? " I asked him casually.


    I didn''t get nervous like last time.


    I was used to Onoki''s presence.


    "Ahh, Genji you are here. Come closer.


    The reason I called you is, I think it''s time for you to stop cleaning stone.


    I am sure you have learned the true meaning of the will of stone by now thanks to my lesson.


    Your talent in explosion release is incredible but you are still lacking fine control and power.


    Therefore I want you to join the Explosion corps and learn how to use your explosion release properly."


    ''True meaning of the will of stone my ?ss!! The only thing I learned from you is that you are a very pervert and stubborn old man.''


    But I agreed to join Explosion corps.


    I was happy that I finally don''t have to clean the stones and listen to Onoki''s bullcraps.


    Also, I was planning to join the explosion corps to train my explosion release before.


    "Alright, You need to at least become Genin in order to join Explosion corps.


    You already proved yourself capable to be Genin in Academy Battle event.


    I already registered you as a genin and member of the explosion corps.


    Go to the first floor and receive your headband and ID card.


    After that, go to the explosion corps headquarter to receive further instruction.


    Genji. I hope you don''t disappoint me."


    "Understood, lord-3rd."


    I answered him. I was grateful for his support.


    It was obvious at this point that he is nurturing me as one of the pillars that support Iwagakure in the future.


    I went to the first floor and receive my hitai-ate(headband) and ID card.


    I was very fascinated by my headband and ID card. I quickly tied my headband on my forehead.


    But I didn''t go explosion corps headquarter immediately.


    I went to the stone monument where Kitsuchi was cleaning stone.


    I was definitely going to annoy him to death.


    I entered the stone monument and as expected I saw, Kitsuchi working his ?ss off.


    Kitsuchi saw me entering and loudly shouted.


    "Hey, ?sshole. How dare you skip your work. Beg and ask for forgiveness to me, then I might consider not tell to the old man."


    I laughed out and stuck my tongue out to him.


    "You stupid muscle head. Guess what, I am exempt from this stupid punishment now and joined explosion corps.


    You can just clean the stones for the rest of your life while I become legendary shinobi. Ahahaha"


    "WHAT?!!, You must be lying, How can you be exempt while I am not!!!!"


    Kitsuchi got very angry and launched a surprise attack on me, but I was prepared for this and blocked the attack.


    "Haha, nice try muscle Head. Now I am very busy and have no time with you. Have fun cleaning stones !!!"


    I quickly exited the room, leaving screaming Kitsuchi alone.


    Next, I went to the academy to say goodbye to everyone in my class including Shuji.


    I was supposed to go study at the academy like normal students after the battle event.


    But because of Tsuchikage''s order, I couldn''t go to the academy instead became cleaner of stone Monument.


    I entered my class and told them I am leaving the academy.


    Everyone was sad and jealous of me leaving the academy.


    I bragged a bit about becoming Genin.


    I couldn''t see Shuji and class president Kimiko.


    I asked Where they are and others told me that those two skipped the year since they did good in academy event and now in upper-class.


    I went upper class to say goodbye to Shuji and Kimiko.


    Shuji was more determine to carch up to me after hearing I became Genin.


    Kimiko just asked how Kitsuchi was doing since she somehow already knew I cleaned the stone monument with Kitsuchi.


    I thought it was only one-sided love from Kitsuchi but I guessed wrong.


    I just told her, Kitsuchi is having a mental breakdown for no reason and she should go see him now.


    Obviously, I didn''t tell her that it was because of me pissing him off.


    After saying goodbye to everyone in the academy, I quickly went to the explosion corps headquarter.


    I showed my ID card to security and they directly brought me to the Explosion Corps Head''s room.


    In the room, there was a one big person standing.


    Standing 7'' 0" tall, this big man has a frightening feel about him, and he has a faint burn mark on his right arm.


    He has an oval face, a small nose, very thin lips, and his sea-blue eyes are close-set.


    He has knee-length, curly, brown hair which worn in dreadlocks, and he has long sideburns.


    He has long arms and powerful hands, a powerful torso with chiseled abs, a well-defined waist, and short legs.


    "Hello, My name is Genji, 8 years old.


    I have come to join explosion corps by Tsuchikage-sama''s recommendation."


    "Welcome to explosion corps, Genji.


    I am Goro, the head of the explosion corps. You can call me Goro-san.


    No need to be nervous, I was one of the best friends of your father.


    Now that I look closer, you really look similar to your father.


    You will be in the 5th division under Ishika.


    5th division is where we train newbies and Ishija is the captain of that division.


    Since you are a member of the explosion corps, you will be living in an explosion corps dormitory so that you can respond to your order faster.


    You will have your own private room in the dormitory.


    Do you have any questions?"


    "No, Goro-san."


    I didn''t expect I will get my own private room.


    I wanted to get a private room for myself since my room in the orphanage is not exactly private.


    Now that I would have my own private room in the dorm, I don''t have to worry about being independent.


    "Good, You have until sunset to bring all your necessary properties to your room in the dorm.


    Your room number will be 108. Here is your key.


    Report on your duty starting tomorrow.


    You are the greatest genius in our village, I have high hopes for you.


    Now dismiss."


    After I received my room key and I quickly went out to Orphanage to bring all my stuff to my room.


    Matron, staffs, and kids in the orphanage were sad that I am leaving the orphanage but still congratulated me for becoming Genin and joining Explosion corps.


    When I entered my own room in the explosion corps dormitory, I was wowed by how spacious the room was.


    The room even had it''s own bathroom. I legit felt like I was in a 4-star hotel.


    -------------------------Next Day--------------------------


    I was pretty excited since today is the first day as an explosion corps member.


    I quickly searched for the 5th division section.


    I saw a familiar kid who was also searching for the 5th division.


    He has spiky, light-brown hair and prominent jaw-lines.


    I asked the system who he was.


    System: "Host, he is Gari, the same age as the host.


    In naruto show, he was a famed Iwagakure shinobi and a member of the village''s Explosion Corps and was reincarnated by Kabuto Yakushi to fight against the Allied Shinobi Forces"


    Ohh, Gari!!!! I remember now.


    Okay, I didn''t expect Gari would be in my generation. I thought he was from the Deidara generation.


    Then why haven''t I seen him in the academy?


    System: "He accidentally blew his house and became coma state for a year.


    Coincidentally, his parents are dead from the mission at the same time.


    So he was hospitalized until days ago, instead of going to the orphanage.


    He has awakened from a coma several days ago and recruited to explosion corps."


    Ohh, it seems Gari is having a tough time now.


    I approached him and said "Hey, are you also looking for 5th division? I am also looking for it. Why don''t we search together."


    He smiled at me and replied "Okay".


    Along the way, we exchanged our names, age, and hobbies, etc. We got along pretty quickly.


    We finally found the 5th division training ground and entered.


    There were at most 30 kids in the training ground and I heard a husky voice behind us.


    "Finally, you two showed up.


    I am Ishika, captain of the 5th division of Explosion corps.


    I will forgive you two for coming late since you didn''t know the way. But next time you late, I will personally beat you up until you can''t stand.


    Here, I don''t care about your background or title. You are all equal here.


    Am I clear? "


    Gari and I nodded to him.


    But he suddenly disappeared and punched us.


    "Answer me with your voice!!!!"


    Gari and I stood up quickly and answered him


    .


    "YES, SIR!!!!"


    "Welcome to the 5th division."


    Captain Ishika smirked and introduced us to our new division crews.

 Chapter 13 - 3 years and Uzushiogakure

    It''s been 3 years since I and Gari joined Explosion corps.


    Gari and I spent two years in the 5th division and transferred to the 1st division last year.


    Explosion corps has 5 divisions in total.


    The first explosion corps division can be said that it''s our explosion corps'' main combat division personally lead by the head of the explosion corps. They will be sent to most of the major battles and conflicts.


    The second explosion corps division''s works are mostly about setting up traps and bombs. Members of the second explosion corps don''t have the requirement to have an explosion release.


    Therefore, most of none kekkei Genkai shinobis in explosion corps are sent here.


    The third explosion corps division is our second combat division. Members who are not powerful and inexperienced enough to join the first division would be sent here.


    They usually do low ranking missions and escort or support second explosions corps.


    Fourth explosion corps are very special because they are suicide bomb division. They don''t have a division captain. They will take only orders from Head of Explosion corps (Goro-san) and Tsuchikage (Onoki).


    This division was created solely for war. Basically, it is a death sentence for anyone who are deployed here.


    Members in this division are all either shinobi who will soon die by incurable disease or psychopaths, but extremely loyal to Iwagakure more than anyone.


    The two years in the 5th division was hell for me.


    All they did was beat me and Gari up continuously to make us tougher. This seemed to be a tradition of the 5th division newly recruits.


    Of course, since I was stronger than any of the members in the 5th division, I was beaten and trained personally by Captain Ishika.


    He was too fast to my n?k?d eyes and used his explosion release on all over my body while smiling. I think he enjoys bullying people.


    Next, he analyzed me to find weaknesses and fix that problem. He concluded my biggest weakness was speed and genjutsu.


    From then, I was forced to do similar Guy''s training routines (wearing weights, running, etc) to make my speed faster. If I don''t run, he will just blow the shit out of me.


    He also invited a genjutsu user to train me to break genjutsu. If I didn''t manage to break it within 5 seconds, he will beat me up.


    He even put poison in our 5th foods or threw us to room full of poison gas for 1 hour so that our body can build resistance to poison.


    That was pretty much I did in the first year. He beat me up, feed poison, and oversee speed and genjutsu breaking training.


    After spending 2 years in the 5th division, I was sent to the first division due to my excellent performance. I was glad that I finally got free from that Sparta Ishika captain.


    Gari was also being sent to the first division. He also trained rather forced to train hard to increase his explosion power and taijutsu and promoted to the first division.


    He will be a future captain of the explosion corps division, so I didn''t get too surprised for his talent.


    In the first division, we were taught how to keep our emotions calm.


    For this practice, we had to kill several prisoners which at first made me sick for a while, fortunately, ''anime body-mind'' skill helped me stabilize my mind.


    Unfortunately for Gari, he got sick for a few weeks after this practice.


    I was very curious how the heck Naruto didn''t kill anyone in series!!!!! It was just beyond a miracle.


    We also sent to various missions to gain experience.


    I also went to a solo C-rank mission for one month.


    I tried to learn as many earth-style ninjutsu as I could, due to my unique explosion release.


    I can see that tension between each great ninja village is skyrocketing. I am guessing war will happen in at most 3 months later.


    ----------------------------------


    During the past 3 years, my shinobi strength has risen tremendously.


    First of all, I have Jounin level charka control. I am not surprised about this since I knew I have talent in chakra control.


    I have a Chunin level chakra reserve. It took me 3 years to increase my chakra reserve from Genin level to Chunin level.


    But I am not worried about chakra reserve anymore since I still have a chakra increasing pill. I am planning to eat the pill amid war.


    I am sure no one will care about it since they would be busy saving their own life.


    As for Taijutsu, I can go head to head with Jounin, thanks to Captain Ishika''s Sparta training.


    Although I didn''t learn any genjutsu, I am an expert in breaking genjutsu.


    I used one-time access to the final floor of the ninja section library which I received as a reward for winning the academy battle event, to copy all the A-rank and S-rank ninjutsu in that floor to system''s database.


    Therefore, now I don''t have to worry about asking others to teach me ninjutsu. I have all the information on ninjutsu that are kept in the library in the system''s database.


    I learned 3 earth style ninjutsu and Body Flicker jutsu (Shunshin) so far.


    It took me less than an hour to learn Iwa version of body flicker jutus since I had Jounin level charka control.


    I learned one of my reward jutsu I obtained from defeating Kitsuchi quest, Earth travel jutsu. This jutsu required me to hold breath when I travel through the earth.


    It took me almost 6 months to learn this unique jutsu. But it was worth it. Now, I have confidence that I can escape from anyone below the Kage-level. This jutsu will ensure my safety during the war.


    I also learned A-rank earth style: swamp of underground.


    This jutsu creates a swamp by changing the ground beneath a target into the mud, which the target sinks into.


    The mud is infused with chakra to make it sticky, ensnaring the target and preventing escape. The size and depth of the swamp are determined by the user''s skill and the amount of chakra used; ideally, it will be made large enough for targets to become completely submerged.


    This jutsu is very very useful for immobilizing enemies. Jiraiya used this jutsu to stop naruto''s four tailed rampages and also used to stop Orochimaru''s summon snakes.


    Lastly, I learned earth style: earth dragon jutsu. I was wowed by this jutsu''s destructive power when Kitsuchi used it on me during the academy battle event.


    I can add my explosion release to add more power to this jutsu.


    I also spent time making my earth style: mud wall tougher. I realised my mud wall is simply too weak compared to other shinobi mud wall.


    Therefore, I have a few E, D-rank ninjutsu, several B-rank Ninjutsu, and 2 A-rank ninjutsu in my arsenal.


    Not bad!


    ----------------------------


    Gari and I were having lunch together after training, suddenly a messenger bird came and gave the paper to us. It was an order of emergency ?ssemble.


    We quickly arrived at the explosion corps ?ssemble hall. There were already many people. I realized the ones who were called here are all first division and third division members.


    "Attention Everyone. Get ready for war.


    All of you here will be in the S-rank mission.


    By the order from 3rd Tsuchikage-sama, we explosion corps will cooperate with Kiri and Kumo shinobi and JOINT-ATTACK ON UZUSHIOGAKURE!!!!!"

 Chapter 14 - Invasion on Uzushiogakure 1

    By the order of Onoki, all members of the first and third explosion corps division along with hundreds of regular Iwa shinobi are sent out to completely eliminate Uzushiogakure with aid of Kumo and Kiri shinobi.


    Total Iwa force which would be invading Uzushiogakure was around 1000 (including explosion corps).


    Onoki and other Kages learned their lesson from the first great ninja war. Although Konoha lost it''s leader second Hokage during the first ninja war, they still won the war.


    How? you ask?


    It''s because of Uzushiogakure helped Konoha. Uzushiogakure had close ties with Konoha, due to them being distant blood relatives with Konoha''s Senju can.


    (A/N: I don''t know who won first great ninja war, so I just decided that Konoha won)


    Although Uzushiogakure was small, their power is rivalled great ninja villages due to their renowned fuinjutsu.


    After the first great ninja war, Konoha has risen up to power with aid of Uzushiogakure, faster than any other villages.


    Onoki and other kages were very worried about this Uzushiogakure.


    Konoha itself was already strong enough, but with the aid of Uzushiogakure, the balance between five great villages will ruin.


    Therefore they decided to destroy Uzushiogakure with combined power once for all.


    All the members of explosion corps got tense since if we attack Uzushiogakure, they were sure this would bring domino effect and cause another ninja war.


    Goro (head of the explosion corps) naturally was the leader of our invasion force.


    We were to meet Kumo and Kiri shinobi at the border between Kumo and Uzushiogakure.


    Our Iwa force moved at a fast pace.


    Since it was inevitable to hide the movement of huge shinobi force going towards Uzushiogakure, we decided to move as fast as we can.


    Also, in order to give a surprise invasion, three allied villages made set up.


    Set up was like this: Iwa and Kiri mobilized the army to attack each other to avenge their previous kages.


    They would fight at the border of Kumo and Uzushiogakure.


    Kumo mobilized their own army under the pretext of stopping this battle since two sides are fighting in Kumo land.


    In summary, Iwa and Kiri fight each other while Kumo comes in to stop the fight.


    Although it wasn''t a perfect plan, it was a good one.


    If I have to guess who came up with this plan out of 3 kages, I will pick Onoki or Third Raikage.


    The third Mizukage looks calm and smart on surface, but if I consider his actions such as Kiri bloody graduation ritual or planting third tailed beast inside unknown Konoha shinobi (Rin) to destroy Konoha inside? It makes me presume that he is not very skilled at strategy.


    I remember the third Raikage mentioning the second Hokage as if he was in the same generation with the second Hokage when he got resurrected in the fourth great ninja war.


    That proofs he was still Raikage during the First ninja war.


    This also meant while other village kages died during the first ninja war, only third Raikage survived.


    I don''t believe he survived that bloody first great ninja war just with strength. I am sure he is good at planning too.


    Therefore, there is a chance he planned this scheme.


    Onoki is very crafty in politics and diplomacy and strategizing.


    This made me respect Onoki.


    Although his teaching is not excellent, his intelligence is certainly at a high level.


    The only reason Iwa lost to Konoha every ninja war is because they lack talented shinobi compared to Konoha.


    Onoki might have planned this scheme instead of third Raikage.


    -------------------


    Our forces have arrived at the meeting location after marching for 4 days straight.


    Kiri forces were already there, waiting for us and Kumo forces.


    It seems Kiri is also serious about eliminating Uzushiogakure. Their forces seemed to be as big as our Iwa forces.


    Most importantly, all seven great ninja swordsmen were in the force.


    Although both sides are allied with each other to attack Uzushiogakure, it doesn''t mean that they trust each other.


    One day later, Kumo force arrived too. They were also settled camp 1km apart from Iwa and Kiri.


    Kumo forces were around 700 shinobi.


    Although Kumo''s force was less than Iwa or Kiri, Kumo sent almost every storm corps members.


    I was really fascinated by these lineups.


    Approximately 2700 shinobi force including Explosion corps, Seven ninja swordsmen, and Storm corps would invade Uzushiogakure.


    No wonder why, it became ruins in one day!!!


    Later, 10 representatives from each side gathered around to discuss when to attack, who would initiate the attack, etc.


    Although I was not there, I bet tension was immeasurably high.


    All representatives returned to their respective camps to prepare to perform according to the battle plan.


    Goro-san was one of our Iwa force representatives. He came back from the meeting and told us about a battle plan.


    Battleplan was like this: Iwa explosion corps act first.


    We use our explosion power to destroy the barrier surrounding Uzushiogakure, important buildings such as weapon warehouse and shinobi Barack to confuse Uzushiogakure shinobi.


    Then, Kiri forces use the all combined water styles to flood Uzushiogakure.


    This would make shinobi from Uzushiogakure to prioritize saving civilians instead of fighting back.


    Next, Kumo force with their fast speed (due to their lighting attribute) to break in and kill most of the high-ranking Uzushiogakure shinobi.


    Lastly, Iwa and Kiri forces join the battle and eliminate Uzushiogakure shinobi.


    The Invasion was decided to commence at 10 pm.


    Kiri, Kumo, and Iwa forces arrived Uzushiogakure at 9;45 pm and got into their battle positions immediately.


    All of our explosion corps members surrounded Uzushiogakure and waited for the signal.


    Uzushiogakure gatekeepers were not idiots.


    They heard huge numbers of footsteps coming towards them.


    They were worried and reported to their sensor shinobi.


    Uzushiogakure sensor shinobis were very shocked when they scanned through around the villages.


    Around 2700 shinobi forces were surrounding Uzushiogakure!!!!!


    As soon as they were about to report to their higher-ups, they heard a bright signal lighted up.


    ---------------------


    At exactly 10 pm, the signal was fired and all of our explosion corps members used their explosion release at the same time.


    I also used Earth style: Pistol Gun jutsu and exploded them at the barrier.


    BOOOOOOOOOMMMMMMMMM!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!


    No matter how sturdy the barrier was, it couldn''t hold our combined explosion powers and has fallen.


    All Uzushiogakure shinobi and civilians were shocked by the loud explosion and panicked.


    After the barrier was collapsed, the Kiri force didn''t wait any longer and used all of their water styles to flood Uzushiogakure.


    As we expected, most of the active Uzushiogakure shinobi didn''t counter back, instead, they were busy saving civilians as much as they could from the flood.


    Finally, Kumo force broke in and started to massacre Uzushiogakure shinobi.


    Soon our Iwa force and Kiri force joined them and started to destroy Uzushiogakure.


    -------------------------


    Me, Gari, and other 3 explosion corps members are tasked to destroy weapon warehouse and try to steal fuinjutsu related to explosion tag as much as we could.


    I killed a few Genins so far.


    They all just got emotionalized seeing their village getting crushed, messing up their fighting form which led to their death.


    All of our explosion corps members were used to killing prisoners, therefore we didn''t feel anything.


    I will admit I felt a bit bad for killing them. But that was it. These are all what ninjas do in war or battle, as we kill each other.


    We have so far successfully destroyed 3 weapon warehouses.


    Suddenly I saw flying chains passing through me at incredible speed. Chains then pierced 3 of our explosion members instantly.


    ''What?? What just passed through me?


    Those chains!!!!


    Don''t tell me those chains are hidden jutsu: Adamantine sealing chain???''


    Then another wave of chains was coming at me and Gari.


    We both used Shunshin (body flicker) to evade the chains.


    We looked at the attacker. He was a jounin uniform of Uzushiogakure and very tall with bright red hair color.


    I didn''t need to see his face to know that he was very angry.


    ''Alright, He is the enemy''s jounin who can use one of deadly Uzushiogakure''s hidden jutsu: Adamantine sealing chains.


    I am DEFINITELY sure he is one of the strongest Jounin in Uzushiogakure.


    Why is he here, shouldn''t he be saving civilians instead of fighting? ''


    "HOW DARE YOU SHITS ATTACK OUR SACRED VILLAGE AND KILL EVERYONE INCLUDING MY SON!!!!


    I WILL KILL YOU ALL.


    I WILL AVENGE MY SON!!"


    ''Okay, it seems like one of the genins I killed was the son of this guy. Just how bad is my luck to face this monster this soon after entering Uzushiogakure?''


    There was 0 % that he will let us go. Our only option is to fight back.


    There was no way I can beat this guy alone. Gari also thought the same as me.


    We decided to cooperate and defeat him.

 Chapter 15 - Invasion on Uzushiogakure 2

    I looked around the surroundings. There were only me, Gari and infuriated Uzushiogakure jounin, also the corpse of our explosion corps members.


    And reinforcements won''t likely to come either due to how desolate this place was.


    The only good thing was Kiri shinobi''s water styles didn''t affect this area, therefore we could use Earth styles freely.


    I felt uneasy fighting with this kind of opponent.


    Gari felt also uneasy after seeing his other explosion corps members dying.


    I wanted to use civilians as a hostage to get away from this jounin, but unfortunately, there were no civilians.


    And it seems like this jounin guy would not hesitate to attack us even if we had hostage, to avenge his son.


    "DIE NOW"


    Uzushiogakure used 4 chains and attacked Gari and Me at the same time.


    Gari who didn''t know Adamantine sealing chains tried to deflect chains by blasting them using his hand.


    I was surprised by his action.


    These adamantine sealing chains would pierce his hand and him instead of getting deflected.


    I quickly kicked his back and used body flicker jutsu to avoid the chains.


    Gari didn''t expect kick from me and fell, b?r?ly dodging the chains.


    Gari quickly stood up and shouted at me angrily.


    "Hey Genji, That hurt!!!!! Why did you kick me?"


    "You idiot, Be thankful.


    I saved your life. that''s Uzumaki''s secret jutsu Adamantine Sealing chains. It''s an indestructible chain.


    You will get pierced instead of deflecting it. Those chains can even suppress freaking Tailed beast with ease."


    Gari was shocked by words indestructible and subdue the tailed beast.


    He really was being foolish, trying to deflect those chains.


    "Hahaha, I am surprised that you Iwa idiots know about Our village hidden jutsu: Adamantine Sealing Chain.


    This hidden Jutsu was created by our first and the only Uzushiokage-sama.


    The history of this jutsu is....."


    (A/N: he is explaining the jutsu in details to mc and Gari even though they didn''t ask for it. typical conversation during anime fights)


    Gary was patiently listening to jounin''s explanation of on adamantine sealing chains.


    Obviously, I didn''t listen to any of his bullcraps. Instead, I was thinking about the plan to defeat him.


    At moment, I wanted to attack him during his speech about jutsu, but I decided not to. Adamantine Sealing chains are close to him and can easily protect him.


    "...and that''s why this jutsu is so powerful and indestructible. There is no chance you two can break these chains.


    Now time to die!!!"


    Uzushiogakure Jounin increased the number of chains to 10 and started to attack us fiercely.


    I pulled out a bunch of smoke bombs and threw them to ground, creating huge black smoke surrounding us.


    His Adamantine chains stopped advancing.


    Although he was angry and furious, he was very careful. He wasn''t jounin for nothing.


    He quickly retracted 3 of his chains to protect himself in case and used the rest of 7 chains to attack randomly at the smoke.


    After telling the plan, Gari agreed to follow my plan and split up with me.


    I created an earth Clone and performed several hand signs.


    "Earth style: Earth travel jutsu"


    After going inside the ground, I started to travel through the earth to Jounin''s behind.


    Of course, none of these activities was seen by Enemy Jounin since it was covered by smoke.


    My Clone came out of the smoke and threw 5 kunai attached with explosion tags to Enemy Jounin.


    Suddenly Gari also came out of the smoke, avoiding random chains attacks and performed offence Ninjutsu.


    "Earth style: earth falling spears"


    Stones around Enemy Jounin shaped into spikes and protruded from the ground to pierce him.


    Enemy Jounin quickly jumped behind and avoided Gari''s jutsu.


    "Is that all you got? It''s not good enough."


    Then he controlled all of his 10 chains to split attack on Gari and my clone.


    5m behind him, I came out of ground slowly and shouted to surprise him.


    "Earth Style: Earth Dragon jutsu"


    Enemy Jounin was indeed surprised by me showing up behind him.


    He backstepped a few times while also retracting all of his chains to erect a barrier.


    He managed to erect a barrier in time and completely unharmed by kunai explosion tags and my earth dragon jutsu.


    I didn''t use my explosion release to explode earth dragon jutsu since I already knew he would defend it anyway and I couldn''t let him know my explosion release yet.


    "Nice try. You almost got me. But this ends here"


    Just as he controlled 10 of chains to attack me and Gari, he realised Gari was nowhere to be seen.


    Then, he saw the ground below him was cracking and a hand came out.


    Gari used earth style: headhunter jutsu to grab his leg and explode it.


    but Jounin was well experienced and quickly dodged Gari''s hand by jumping back again.


    He counterattacked Gari using 5 of his chains while jumping. But my clone quickly blocked the chains and Gari used that chance to Shunshin away.


    I immediately performed Earth style: Stone Pistol jutsu. I fired off 5 stone pistols at him and 3 stone pistols at each corpse of explosion corps members.


    But Uzushiokage Jounin controlled the rest of his chains to block only 5 of my stone pistols which were flying at him and ignored 3 of stone pistols which were flying at corpses.


    I smirked at this. All the conditions were met.


    He is standing next to corpses of our explosion members.


    He doesn''t know I can use explosion release.


    He didn''t block my stone pistols which were flying to the corpses of dead explosion members.


    "Katsu!!!!"


    I exploded 3 stone pistols, and obviously, Uzushiokage Jounin caught off guard and got a direct hit.


    I knew just 3 stone pistols explosion can''t kill him. But I was sure this move would kill him.


    All of our explosion corp members would receive a special powerful suicide explosion tag as a last resort before going out to battle.


    My 3 stone pistol explosion caused those special explosion tags inside our explosion Corp members'' pockets, to go off, creating a series of loud and powerful explosions.


    "BOOOOMMMM!!!!"


    -------------------------------------------


    We saw Enemy Jounin lied on the ground after that huge explosion. His body was literally burned.


    We threw kunais and shurikens at him just to be sure.


    Just as we were thinking he is dead, he stood up slowly.


    Gari and I were shocked that he survived that explosion.


    ''HOW THE HELL IS HE STILL ALIVE??


    Is this the legendary power of Uzumaki''s strong life force?''


    "HAHAHAHA, that.....?hurt


    But I am... not..going down..yet.


    Even if I.....die.....I will...BRING YOU TWO WITH ME"


    He screamed at us and summoned the pill and ate it.


    Suddenly he had a red aura surrounding him and his chakra level was spiking up at incredible speed.


    ''System, what is that pill? what is happening to him? explain now!!''


    System: "Host, that is Uzumaki''s forbidden secret death pill which they use at last resort just like explosion corps'' special explosion tag.


    That pill will increase the charka level tremendously by using life force.


    Host, according to system''s calculation, the enemy only has 5 seconds before his lifeforce runs out and die"


    ''Uzumaki have that kind of pill?


    Thanks, system. I just need to hold out until 5 seconds.''


    "I will definitely kill you two before dying"


    Uzushiogakure jounin shouted at us and pulled out 50 Adamantine sealing chains.


    His Chains surrounded us and attacked us in all directions.


    We were too surprised by the sudden turn of event.


    There was no opening within those chains.


    They were at everywhere.


    We were sure we couldn''t dodge or avoid this attack.


    At this rate, we would surely die.


    With no choice, I quickly ate the chakra increasing pill to increase my chakra and asked system.


    ''system, how long can last with my current chakra if I use Earth Super Dome jutsu?''


    system: "2 seconds host"


    (A/N: In case you guys don''t remember, Earth super dome is jutsu mc received from completing quest about ''getting the attention of onoki and explosion head'' during Academy event.


    It can even block a tailed beast bomb with ease but need an intense amount of chakra.


    And don''t bother googling it up, I made up this jutsu. Let''s just say this is long lost jutsu.)


    ''3 seconds already passed since he ate the pill. 2 seconds are plenty enough to survive incoming attack!!!''


    I quickly performed a few hand signs and shouted.


    "Earth style: Earth Super Dome Jutsu!!!!"


    A large dome appeared, surrounded us and blocked all the adamantine sealing chains.


    I felt like thousands of leeches were su?k?n? me. My chakra was disappearing at a crazy speed


    Gari was very surprised that I was able to use jutsu that can even block adamantine sealing chains.


    After 2 seconds, my charka was completely sapped and earth super dome jutsu was cancelled.


    We looked at Uzushiogakure Jounin, chains we''re already disappeared and his face was full of disbelief.


    "Da..mn...it"


    He closed his eyes and finally died.


    After checking whether he is really dead, Gari found a safe place for us to rest.


    We decided to rest until the sunrise.


    If we go out now, continue to wander around and meet another freaking Uzumaki jounin, them we are dead for sure.

 Chapter 16 - Invasion on Uzushiogakure 3

    I was resting comfortably until Gari urged me to continue our mission.


    After fighting with that enemy Jounin, I didn''t want to go out again to the battlefield.


    Suddenly, we heard a loud explosion from the direction of Uzushiokage''s building.


    -------------------------------------


    Goro and several high ranking members of explosion corps were sprinting to the Uzushiogakure''s Kage building.


    When they arrived at Uzushiokage''s building, there were already 7 great ninja swordsmen and storm corps leader, waiting for them.


    They all had the same goal for coming here, to kill Uzushiokage.


    While they were discussing the battle plan, they concluded Uzushiokage would be the biggest threat and must be eliminated first.


    500 combined allied shinobi force (mostly storm corps) surrounded Uzushiokage''s building.


    But Uzushiokage won''t come out from it''s building.


    Goro and other villages'' respective leaders didn''t believe Uzushiokage was scared to come out.


    Uzushiokage, also known as Uzumaki clan''s head is considered to be the best fuinjutsu user.


    ''He must be up to something'' was what Goro and other leaders thought.


    They already checked the around the Uzushiokage''s building and disarmed all the traps and sealings.


    500 shinobi started to throw weapons, kunai, shuriken, and even explosion tags at Kage building but it didn''t take any damage.


    As expected, Uzumaki used the strongest sealing barrier on its Kage''s building.


    10 Iwa Jounins came up and all slammed the ground at the same time.


    "Earth style: Vast Mobile Core jutsu"


    This technique grants the users the ability to freely lower or raise the terrain within a specific area surrounding them.


    10 Iwa Jounins lowered the elevation of Uzushiokage''s building ground by -50 meters.


    Then Kiri ninjas started to use Water styles to submerge Uzushiokage''s building.


    Even if they couldn''t destroy the Kage building, they can bring Uzushiokage out by sinking the kage''s building.


    Shortly after, Uzushiokage and his 20 jounins came out from sinking building.


    Storm corps immediately used various storm release offence jutsu on them.


    But Uzushiogakure''s jounins and Kage created a sealing which absorbed all the storm release jutsu and was unharmed.


    "I am a failure as Kage since I couldn''t even protect my shinobi, people and village.


    But I won''t let you invaders have our clan''s legacy at least.


    It took a while to burn all the seals that were kept in the building, but we finally managed to destroy all of them.


    Now, all we gotta do is to kill these filthy invaders as many as we could.


    Let''s show them how powerful the Uzumaki clan is.


    ATTACK!!!"


    Uzushiokage ordered to all 20 of his Jounins to attack.


    Goro, storm corps leader and 7 great ninja swordsmen led 500 shinobi force and charged at them.


    -------------------------------------------


    Gari and I could hear a series of battle screams, loud explosions at the direction of Uzushiokage''s building.


    Even though we were not there, we could feel the intense battles see going on right there.


    This actually discouraged me more to wander around the Uzushiogakure.


    But I got up f?r??b?? to continue to destroy the weapon warehouse and steal fuinjutsu as much as we could.


    We got to the last weapon warehouse in the district.


    There were already a few Jounins and several Chunins and some of Kumo storm corps members were fighting.


    Normally, there would be only Genins to protect the weapon barrack, but this one has Jounins and Chunins as it''s the defender.


    There is no doubt that this last weapon warehouse has some sort of treasures or fuinjutsu.


    I told Gari to quiet down and just wait until both sides are exhausted.


    There is no way we would go down and help Kumo storm corps, even if they are allied with us now, it''s just temporary.


    Luckily, both sides didn''t seem to have sensors with them as none of them has noticed us.


    Both sides were fighting hard while we were bored of waiting.


    Gari suggested a bet with me on who would win the battle. The reward was 10 explosion tags. He betted on Uzumaki and I betted on Storm corps.


    Battle was on storm corps favour until Uzumaki shinobi all ate last resort pill and completely annihilated storm corps.


    But most of the Uzushiogakure shinobi died soon after due to pill''s side effects. Only one Uzushiogakure jounin was alive.


    Gari was happy that he won the bet and soon tried to attack the Jounin.


    I quickly stopped him.


    "Don''t be too hasty, Gari.


    Do you see the seal encrypted to the entrance door of the weapon warehouse?


    So, We will wait until that Jounin takes out all the fuinjutsu or whatever they were protecting to outside.


    Then we will finish him off."


    "How do you know he is going to take things out from the warehouse? What if he destroys the warehouse instead?"


    "Look carefully. He obviously came here to destroy all the treasures or ninjutsu scrolls in the warehouse.


    But due to the previous fighting with storm corps, he is heavily injured and exhausted.


    He doesn''t even have the strength to perform ninjutsu. How the hell can he destroy the warehouse? "


    Gari nodded to me and waited for more.


    After a few minutes, Jounin took out 50 scrolls and books from the weapon warehouse.


    I signalled Gari to attack now.


    Jounin was about to burn all the scrolls and books, then he saw hands popped out from the ground and grabbed his legs.


    After grabbing Jounin''s leg, Gari used explosion release and blasted off Jounin.


    Jounin couldn''t do anything and died instantly.


    After checking if there was anyone around, we quickly collected scrolls and books.


    Scrolls contained various fuinjutsu and books were about basic of fuinjutsu.


    There were protective seal scrolls, storage seal scrolls, offensive seal scrolls, etc.


    There was even seal scroll that can make people sterile!!!!!


    These Uzumakis!!!! How evil!!!


    I must definitely learn this seal. It will be very useful in the future.


    Another seals that took my interest was Five Elements Seal and Five Elements Unseal.


    I didn''t expect to find these golds here.


    Five Elements Seal is a technique which produces a powerful seal that is used to block or disturb the flow of chakra in a targe.


    Orochimaru used this jutsu on Naruto and knocked him off during Chunin''s exam.


    Five Elements Unseal is a fuinjutsu that removes or undo pretty much all the seals.


    Of course, it can''t undo the special seals such as Eight Trigram Seal or Reaper Death Seal.


    These two fuinjutsu are very useful but incredibly hard to master.


    I just asked System to record all of these fuinjutsu scrolls and books to the database.


    After we put all of these scrolls and books, we decided to retreat since we already accomplished our job here.


    -----------------------------


    While on the way, we heard a lady screaming for help.


    Although the chance of that lady being Iwa shinobi was low, just in case we went to the source of screaming.


    As expected, the lady was an Uzumaki. She was with her husband.


    But her husband didn''t have red hair like Uzumaki, instead had black hair.


    (A/N: I don''t know how the heck Naruto got his blond hair when he has his Uzumaki genes)


    Both of them were scared of us when we arrived. They stopped screaming and was shivering.


    I guess they are just normal civilians.


    We didn''t want to kill them since we felt bad for them.


    Gari was about to knock them out


    Suddenly, I heard the kid crying loud, calling mom.


    "Mom, Dad, Help hurry. *crying* It really hurts"


    It seemed like the kid got stuck when their house was collapsed.


    I looked at the kid subconsciously and greatly shocked.


    ''What? Nani? But How??


    That face, that looks, that hairstyle...


    There is no doubt that kid crying for help is Nagato!!!!!


    But what the hell is he doing here?


    Since most of the Uzushiogakure shinobi were deployed to save citizens, Nagato and his family should have escaped here by now.


    System, do you what happened?''


    System: "Host, Nagato and his family should have escaped from Uzushiogakure with the help of high ranking Jounin who was just passing by


    But since host and Gari killed that Jounin a few hours ago, Nagato and his family are still stuck in Uzushiogakure."


    Wow, that crazy adamantine sealing chains user helped Nagato and his family to escape?


    Shit!!


    I just killed some random Genins and that caused a huge bu??erfly effect.


    I almost killed one of the important characters in canon without even realising it was my fault.


    Usually, I don''t care about messing up the canon, but Nagato is too much.


    He doesn''t have Rinnegan currently. Which means Madara still hasn''t given Rinnegan to him.


    I am suspecting Madara will give Rinnegan when Nagato and his family settled in Amegakure during the second great ninja war.


    I needed to save Nagato and help him escape here. Can''t have him drop dead here.


    "Hey, Gari. Let''s save the kid and let this family go. "


    Gari looked at me seriously.


    "What? Genji, you know what will happen when others find out we helped Uzumaki to escape. They will think we are betrayers"


    "I know, but Gari, could you just close your eye on this one for me.


    They are just civilians and what''s more only the wife is full Uzumaki."


    I was trying my best to persuade Gari. Seeing me trying to save them, Nagato parents also begged at Gari.


    "Gari, how about this. Will you help me save them if they pledge their loyalty to Iwa?"


    Gari looked troubled.


    "Fine, alright you win. I don''t know why you are so willing to save them, but I believe ya.


    I will help you and not tell superiors about this.


    But they gotta promise that they will not hold a grudge on Iwa for invading their village."


    Gary finally gave in.


    Nagato parents easily accepted the deal and pledged that they (include Nagato) will not hold anything against Iwa.


    They quickly asked us to save Nagato.


    After we saved Nagato, we escorted them to the escape route that leads Amegakure.


    I even gave them money so that they can settle in Amegakure easily.


    I just hoped Madara successfully give his eye to Nagato. But somehow I had a bad feeling.

 Chapter 17 - Invasion on Uzushiogakure final

    After saving Nagato and his family, we continued our retreat.


    While on the way, we saw several severely injured Iwa shinobi, fighting desperately against 60 Uzushiogakure Shinobi to escape.


    Since they are Iwa shinobi, we decided to save them.


    What''s more, from the looks of their unique uniform, those injured Iwa shinobi are just not ordinary shinobi.


    They were members of ROCK.


    Rock is the special unit who only takes special orders from Tsuchikage.


    All of special rare kekkei Genkai users except explosion release and highly talented shinobi would join this unit.


    Some of the outstanding members will personally get taught by Onoki himself.


    They are basically anbu version of Iwagakure, but much tougher and stronger.


    (A/N: to be honest, all Anbu members (except Kakashi, Yamato, Itachi) seemed too weak to me.)


    I heard Kitsuchi and Kimiko have already joined this unit.


    I guess Onoki is planning to keep them around with him to protect them during the war.


    Since Rock members were here, I am sure they received the incredible mission and the fact that they are being pursued by an army of enemy shinobi, I am certain they stole something big.


    We had to save them but the problem was the sheer numbers of the enemy.


    Just fighting one jounin almost killed us, much less there were 60 enemy shinobi.


    ---------------------------------


    While on the other side, Uzushiokage and his Jounins were fighting to the death with 500 allied shinobi at Uzushiokage''s building.


    Relying on their huge chakra reserves, lifeforces, and fuinjutsu knowledge, Uzumaki shinobi and Uzushiokage were keeping up well against allied forces.


    But even if they are Uzumaki, they still had a limit. And one by one, Uzumaki jounins started to fall down.


    Seeing the situation, Uzushiokage gritted his teeth and shouted to his Jounins.


    "Everyone, prepare for plan B now."


    Every Uzushiogakure shinobi was shocked when they heard their kage''s order.


    "But, Lord Uzushiokage-same. Plan B is a suicidal plan for all of us here.


    We don''t care about our lives but you must survive.


    All of us will cover for your retreat and please run away, lord"


    Uzushiokage just shook his head after hearing his Jounins.


    "No, it is too late to wait for Konoha rescue.


    And you are telling me, the Kage to run away while my shinobi are fighting to the death?


    I would rather kill more enemies here.


    But I won''t stop you guys if you want to escape."


    "Then We will follow Lord to death!!!"


    Uzushiokage was very touched by his Jounins words and actually shed tears.


    Goro, seven great ninja swordsmen, storm corps leader and all of the allied shinobi just narrowed their eyes.


    ''Oh please No, we didn''t come here to see some soap opera here'' was what they were thinking.


    Uzushiokage and all of it''s jounins took out their last resort pills and swallowed.


    Then, they started to scream really loud.


    They started to perform same hand signs and shouted out the name of jutsu they were doing.


    "Uzumaki hidden jutsu: Reaper Adamantine Death Sealing Chains!!!!!"


    Suddenly one giant white Shinigami, almost the same size as the tailed beast with its'' body warped with chains started to form around Uzushiokage and its Jounins.


    (A/N: this jutsu is combined jutsu of Adamantine sealing chains and Reaper Death Seal.


    This jutsu need several Uzumaki elites to perform together as it''s power level is greater than a tailed beast.


    Just touch the tip of its chains would be instant death.


    But users must stay in the same position when using this jutsu.


    Of course, I made up this jutsu hehe, can''t have allied force achieve easy victory ?? )


    Goro and allied shinobi were frightened by the appearance of Giant Shinigami.


    Uzushiokage smiled at this and said.


    "Don''t you dare think you can make it alive after invading our village.


    We will show you the might of our village!!!"


    Giant Shinigami raised its hand and hundreds of chain started to come out and attack allied force.


    Of course, allied Iwa, Kiri and Kumo shinobi force couldn''t do anything to it but to dodge for their life.


    But no matter how nimble they were, they couldn''t escape from hundreds of chains.


    ----------- 5 minutes later ---------------


    Most of the allied shinobi were massacred by Uzumaki Giant Shinigami jutsu.


    Goro, 2 Iwa Jounins, 3 out of 7 Great ninja swordsmen and 3 storm corps shinobi.


    All of the survivors were terrified of Giant Shinigami''s power.


    Goro lost his arm, and several others have similar injuries as Goro.


    Not even storm corps leader and 4 great ninja swordsmen survived its attack.


    Fortunately for survivors, all of Uzumaki jounins and its kage ran out charka to sustain the hidden jutsu and collapsed.


    Goro and others didn''t waste a second immediately attacked and killed them.


    Allied shinobi finally killed Uzushiokage, but the price for it was huge. Almost 500 shinobi were dead.


    "Tch, these damn Uzumaki sure are powerful alright. If they had hold on for another half minute, we will be in the afterlife."


    One of Kiri''s great ninja swordsmen commented.


    "Yea, Uzumaki was powerful as they were rumoured to. We should have been more cautious.


    We underestimated them too much due to the size of our army. Such a blunder."


    Gori also said his words.


    Storm corps members didn''t say anything and just left with the corpse of their commander.


    ----------------------------------------------------------------------


    While I was thinking of a plan to rescue ROCK members, we heard the loud noise of chains from the direction of Uzushiogakure building.


    Then we saw giant shinigami appearing.


    It reminded me of Susanoo, but its head exactly looked like Shinigami from reaper death seal.


    Other Uzushiogakure shinobi also shocked to see this.


    "Isn''t that our clan''s hidden jutsu: Reaper Adamantine Death Sealing Chains?!!


    To think Uzushiokage-sama is even using that jutsu.


    Listen, we will split into 2 groups. 40 shinobi will follow me to rescue Uzushiokage sama while rest will finish off these filthy invaders."


    The leader among Uzushiogakure shinobi ordered.


    Since ROCK members weere pretty beaten up, 20 shinobi were plenty enough to finish them off.


    Soon, 40 shinobi left the place and headed off to Uzushiokage''s building.


    Gari and I just watched them leave. Their decision made our job to rescue ROCK member easier.


    But Gari was worried.


    "Hey, Genji. I heard Goro-san and other top-ranking shinobi of allied force would be attacking Uzushiokage''s building.


    If we let those 40 enemies go, wouldn''t Goro-san and our shinobi would be surrounded by enemy ??"


    "Gari, think about it carefully. Just like you and I are worried, Other Iwa shinobi and explosion corps members would also get worried about Goro-san and others.


    I am sure some of our Iwa shinobi and fellow explosion corps members will also go to Uzushiokage''s building to support Goro-san and others."


    After hearing my explanation, Gari calmed down and focused on saving ROCK members.


    20 Uzumaki shinobi glared at ROCK members and was about to attack.


    I quickly performed hand signs for Earth Style: Dark Swamp jutsu.


    I created swamp underneath the 20 enemy''s feet and they were surprised by the sudden attack.


    They tried to get out of the swamp immediately, but they were met with failure.


    While I trapped enemies with my Dark Swamp jutsu to stall the time, Gari threw a smoke bomb at ROCK members and helped them escape


    Once I saw Gari''s signal, I created 3 earth clones and exploded them right in front of 20 Uzumaki shinobi and escaped. This would at least stall them for at least 5 minutes.


    I wasn''t planning to fight them to death. My charka hasn''t even recovered 1/6 (half of the original chakra reserve before eating pill).


    I need to save some of my charka in case emergency.


    ROCK members were grateful to us for rescuing them.


    "I can''t believe we were saved by our village''s greatest genius. Hahaha"


    We shared simple greetings.


    Just as I was about to ask them about Kitsuchi and Kimiko, Gari interrupted me.


    "Hey, guys! Those 20 enemies are catching up to us fast!!!"


    I was shocked by Gari''s statement.


    "What, that can''t be. How did they get out of my Dark Swamp quickly??"


    I thought for a moment.


    ''Oh, fu?k. Please don''t tell me, all 20 of them ate their last resort pill and powered up to get out of my Dark Swamp?''


    ROCK members looked at us for a moment and said.


    "We, ROCK members are already tired and only be dragging you guys'' speed.


    Therefore we will stay and block them while you guys run.


    Here, take these scrolls. No matter what, you must deliver these scrolls to Tsuchikage-sama"


    Gari and I felt guilty since they would be left behind to save us.


    We were about to decline his request, but ROCK members gestured to stop.


    "Don''t feel sad about it. We already decided that we would stay behind. There is no way you can stop us. Just deliver the scrolls properly. "


    After saying those words, ROCK members didn''t move and prepared to face 20 powered up Uzumaki shinobi.


    Gari and I thanked them for their great determination and sacrifice. We hurriedly continued to our base camp which Iwa shinobi force built before invading Uzushiogakure.


    I was curious about the scrolls that ROCK members stole.


    I looked at them and they were fuinjutsu seal scrolls. But they didn''t seem to be ordinary fuinjutsu seals.


    I asked the system what these seals were.


    System: "Host, they are fuinjutsu scrolls which can seal Tailed beast inside human without any side effect."


    Wait, so these are seals for Jinchuriki!!!


    No wonder why, ROCK members were sent to here.


    Seals for Jinchuriki are very important as they need to be powerful and stable enough to keep off Tailed beast influence to the user.


    Garra was the example of having the bad seal as he was pretty messed up during his childhood.


    Iwagakurd doesn''t have sealing expert, therefore two Jinchuriki of our village is a bit unstable. I am certain Onoki probably wanted these seals for a long time by now.


    I asked the system to copy the seals to the database.


    Soon, we heard the battle sounds from behind. We knew ROCK members were fighting with 20 enemy shinobi.


    After running full speed for 10 minutes, we saw our Iwa base camp.


    They stopped us to verify if we are real ones.


    They also asked the code which we replied easily.


    We went to the man in charge of the base camp to submit the scrolls and books we stole (including seals ROCK members gave us) and asked to send reinforcement to check if there are any ROCK members survived.


    The man in charge agreed to our request and sent 100 Iwa shinobi to rescue ROCK members.


    Unfortunately, ROCK members were all dead when they arrived at the scene.


    --------------------------------------------------------------------


    The invasion continued until every Uzumaki shinobi were surrendered. Right after Uzushiokage died, the remaining Uzushiogakure shinobi lost morale and quickly surrendered.


    I was shocked when I saw Goro-san lost his arm.


    Damn, just how hard was the battle for Goro-san to lose his arm?!!!


    By the time of sunset, Uzushiogakure has been conquered and became complete ruins.


    But allied Iwa, Kiri and Kumo shinobi force also received the huge loss.


    Out of 2700 shinobi, only 1200 are alive.


    Iwa sides lost around 400 shinobi, Kiri sides lost around 500 shinobi and last but not least Kumo lost around 600 shinobi out of 700 shinobi they sent.


    The main reason Kumo suffered the most was that they mostly targeted high ranking Uzumaki shinobi and most of them were killed by Uzushiokage''s Reaper Adamantine Death Sealing Chains.


    Their storm corps are almost wiped out.


    Kiri also suffered badly. Losing more than half of their 7 great ninja swordsmen was heavy to them.


    Out of three sides, I can say Iwa suffered the least.


    I am guessing these are the reason why Kumo and Kiri didn''t participate in the second great ninja war. They lost too many numbers od shinobi and qualified shinobi.


    We ended our allied force and went back to our own respective villages.


    Gari and I was part of escorting surrendered Uzumaki shinobi and civilians while returning to Iwa.


    While escorting, I saw someone familiar among Uzumaki civilians.


    I looked carefully and finally, remember her.


    Her face is exactly like Karin''s face.


    Since Karin is in Naruto''s generation, I am guessing she is the mother of Karin.


    I only know she took refuge to Kusagakure with her daughter Karin. I had absolutely no idea what she was doing during childhood.


    System, did Karin''s mom escaped from invasion on Uzushiogakure?


    System: "Yes, Karin''s mom was supposed to escape with her future husband. But due to host, the bu??erfly effect happened. She got separated from her future husband and got caught."


    *sigh* first is Nagato and next is Karin''s mom?


    Fu*k it. I had enough. I am not gonna help her escape.


    I am just gonna leave her alone. She is not as important as Nagato anyway.


    I wish we speed up to Iwagakure, go to my room, lie down to the bed and chill out as soon as I can.

 Chapter 18 - Konoha emergency Conference

    When the third Hokage, Hiruzen heard the news of Uzushiokage was being invaded by Iwa, Kumo and Kiri allied force.


    He knew something was fishy when the report says Iwa and Kiri suddenly are fighting each other at Kumo borders and Kumo was trying to stop those two forces.


    But he didn''t expect those three great villages would form an alliance and attack Uzushiogakure.


    He immediately called Orochimaru and Tsunade.


    -----------5 minutes later------------


    Orochimaru and Tsunade entered to Hokage office and looked annoyed that their teacher called them at late night.


    But once Orochimaru saw the grim face of Hokage, he knew something bad happened.


    "Why did you call us, old man. I couldn''t have sake because you called me. You better have a good reason for calling us this late"


    Tsunade angrily said to Hiruzen.


    "Tsunade, Uzushiogakure is currently being invaded by three great villages allied force. They requested for our help.


    I want you two to lead 1000 men and go to reinforce Uzushiogakure immediately."


    Both Tsunade and Orochimaru was surprised by the news but still nodded to Hiruzen''s order.


    Orochimaru knew that they won''t make it in time to help Uzushiogakure considering the distance between Konoha and Uzushiogakure.


    Even if they run full speed, they will probably reach Uzushiogakure tomorrow late at night.


    But he didn''t question Hiruzen and obeyed his order.


    (A/N: Orochimaru now is still loyal to Konoha and didn''t have an obsession of becoming immortality yet)


    "Understood, Sensei."


    "Dont worry, old man. I will definitely save my grandmother''s home"


    After Orochimaru and Tsunade left, he quickly summoned anbu to prepare for an emergency conference.


    He also summoned another anbu to call Jiraiya back from his journey.


    He already gave plenty of independence time to Jiraiya and its time for him to return and protect Konoha.


    ---------------------------------------------------------------------


    The third Hokage called all clan heads, Jounin commander, Anbu commander and elders for an emergency conference.


    All of them were curious about why their kage would gather them late at night.


    As soon as everyone sat in the conference room, the Third Hokage passed out the aid report with a grim face.


    "Uzushiogakure is currently being invaded by Iwa, Kiri and Kumo allied forces. Just now they requested help from us"


    Uzushiogakure is the number one ally of Konoha. Attacking them is literally declaring war against Konoha.


    They didn''t expect Kiri, Kumo and Iwa to be so bold.


    "How can it be? Our spies reported that Iwa and Kiri battling each other at Kumo land and Kumo was trying to stop them."


    Anbu commander questioned if the report was real.


    "You don''t get it? You idiot.


    It was set up by those three villages to fool us and Uzushiogakure.


    They already knew our anbu spies and gave them false information. Our spies are really pathetic. We need to plant new spies right now."


    Danzo as jounin commander in the conference replied to Anbu commander''s question.


    (A/N: Currently, Danzo is an active shinobi right now. Danzo doesn''t have root.  Also, he doesn''t have any evil thoughts as he is just jealous of Hiruzen.


    As for his position as Jounin commander, is not surprising as he is powerful and was trusted greatly by Hiruzen and other influential people)


    Although Anbu commander was wearing a mask, everyone could guess that his face is frowning at Danzo.


    "Danzo, stop being rude. This is not the time to fight among us.


    For now, I already sent Orochimaru and Tsunade with 1000 shinobi as reinforcement to Uzushiogakure."


    "What? Hiruzen!!


    You already sent troops to Uzushiogakure?


    We know by the time they arrive, Uzushiogakure would be completely destroyed by Three great ninja shinobi forces. There was no point of sending our troops."


    Danzo immediately stood up and disapproved Hiruzen''s order.


    "Well even if Uzushiogakure already been ruined, it is necessary to send our troops to there.


    Destruction of Uzushiogakure is the same as declaring war on us.


    If we dont even send any troops to Uzushiogakure, our other allied villages will start to mistrust us which would give us bad effect during upcoming war."


    Nara clan head commented on Danzo''s argument.


    Danzo looked annoyed that Nara clan head rebutted him, but didn''t say anything.


    Everyone also just nodded to Nara clan head''s reason.


    Arguing with the Nara clan would just downright bring shame since no one is smart enough to debate with them.


    Hiruzen sighed that war was inevitable since they can not just ignore Uzushiogakure'' destruction.


    "All clans, Special units, Jounins, Chunins and Genins are to prepare for war.


    We will divide our force into 3 division and send each division to borders of Iwa, Kiri and Kumo to repel them in case they invade us.


    Danzo will be the leader of the first division and deploy at Kiri''s border.


    Homura will be the leader of the second division and deploy at Kumo''s border.


    Finally, my student Orochimaru will lead last division and deploy at Iwa''s border.


    Any questions?"


    Everyone stayed quiet.


    Nara clan head seemed to think for a moment and raised his hand.


    "Hokage-sama,


    Currently, Suna is the only great village which didn''t suffer any casualties from Uzushiogakure destruction.


    They will definitely try to invade us when our shinobi force spread out to other great ninja villages'' border.


    I think we should allocate our shinobi to create small division and deploy them secretly at Suna''s border.


    If Suna invades us, this small division is tasked to hold them until our reinforces arrives."


    "Umm, not a bad idea. But who will be the leader of this small division? He or she must be strong and level headed to hold entire Suna force."


    Hiruzen asked to Nara clan head.


    "I recommend Hatake clan head, Sakumo Hatake to be the leader. He is strong, calm and has great leadership. I am sure he can do a great job."


    Sakumo was surprised he got recommended and nodded at Nara clan head to thanks for the support.


    Hiruzen also thought Sakumo was a good choice for the small division leader.


    "Anyone who disagrees Sakumo being leader raise hand please."


    Nobody raised their hands. Danzo didn''t see eye to eye with Sakumo since their idealogy was different but he still recognised Sakumo''s strength.


    "Alright since no one has a problem, Sakumo will be the leader of small division and deployed at Suna''s border.


    We will now end the conference. Everyone, dismiss."


    ---------------while on Tsuchikage office---------------


    "So we lost exactly 347 shinobi at Uzushiogakure.


    Explosion Corps First Division''s members are now halved and Third division members are almost wiped out.


    And even you lost your hand there.


    That''s more than I expected. "


    Onoki looked at Goro while holding the report.


    "Sorry, Tsuchikage-sama. I underestimated them a bit too much. I didn''t expect Uzumaki clan had so many deadly hidden jutsu."


    "It seems I also underestimated power Uzumaki possed. But all of that is past now.


    You accomplished the mission. Uzushiogakure is gone completely. You did well. Stop blaming yourself for the loses of our force."


    "Thank you, Tsuchikage sama"


    "Umm, you lost your arm which significantly dropped your strength. I know you will resign the head position of the explosion corps.


    So who will replace your position ?"


    "I recommend Explosion corps Fifth Division Captain Ishika. He stayed at explosion corps longer than anyone and have enough strength and reputation to lead explosion corps."


    "Okay, then since you are recommending him, I will appoint Ishika as the new head of Explosion corps."


    "Thank you Tsuchikage -sama"


    "By the way, ROCK members I sent to steal Jinchuriki seals hasn''t returned yet. Do you know anything about it?"


    "If I remember correctly, I saw a report that all ROCK members Tsuchikage-sama sent were all found dead.


    But fortunately, before their death, they encountered with Genji and his friend and passed the seals to them.


    Genji and his friend successfully delivered Jinchuriki seal to base camp."


    "Genji? I see that brat is still kicking alive even in explosion corps.


    Well, I am glad he did a good job during the invasion."


    "You are right, Tsuchikage-sama. Genji is very talented. I am sure in 10 years later, he will be powerful S-rank Iwa shinobi"


    "Hmph, he better be, or he would bring shame to my village"


    Goro just laughed at Onoki''s antics.


    "By the way, what should we do with captured Uzumakis?"


    "Honestly, I don''t trust them.


    Pick all of the kids (A/N: Karin''s mom included here, hehe) and send them to our academy. But make sure they are treated normal and brainwash them slowly.


    Send ?du?t Uzumaki civilians to an isolated place and give them a peaceful life. I will send ROCK members to monitor them and if they have the slightest thinking of harming Iwa, then, of course, kill them.


    As for Uzumaki Ninjas, send them to prison for now. I will decide their fate after the war."


    "Understood Tsuchikage sama"


    After Goro left, Tsuchikage called Ishika to promote him the new head of Explosion corps.


    Although Ishika was shocked, he still accepted the position happily.


    Onoki also called Roshi, the four tailed beast jinchuriki and ordered him to lead 4000 shinobi to station at borders between Iwa and Konoha.


    Onoki was not gonna start war with Konoha now. But he was planning to start a war with Konoha soon.

 Chapter 19 - Sunas sudden invasion

    Its been 3 months after invading Uzushiogakure.


    Konoha has responded by dividing their forces into 3 and deploy each division to borders fo Kiri, Iwa, and Kumo.


    Onoki promoted Roshi (4 tailed-beast Jinchuriki) as captain and sent 4000 shinobi to Konoha border and other great villages also sent their forces to borders.


    Tensions between Villages are rising as each day passed.


    I knew war will come soon after participating in Uzushiogakure invasion. Temporarily, Onoki banned C, B, and A-rank mission.


    There are only D-rank and S-rank missions available.


    Goro-san (the previous head of Explosion corps) now became adviser to Onoki.


    Gari and I were super shocked when Captain Ishika promoted to Explosion corps head.


    His first order as Head was to increase the training regiment.


    I rarely practiced Ninjutsu for 3 months, and kept taijutsu training.


    I realized that in the fierce battlefield, using strong offensive Ninjutsu is often forbidden since your allies might also get injured by your jutsu, especially for us, the explosion corps who just blow off everything.


    I have fully comprehended high-level hand-to-hand Wing Chun style and now onto Wing Chun double blades (butterfly swords) style.


    Since Shuji (academy''s best friend)''s mother owned a weapon factory and I am Shuji''s father''s disciple, I got the bu??erfly swords easily just by asking.


    I also trying to learn Lighting jutsu. Since the explosion release is a mixture of earth and lighting attributes, I obviously had lighting affinity.


    I am trying to raise my speed using lighting styles, got that idea from Kumo shinobi during invasion.


    Gari also training hard ever since he came back from Invasion. He also started to learn the knowledge of all forbidden jutsu.


    --------------------------------------------------------------


    All of us ?ssumed that Captain Ishika got a girl and busy trying to get a chocolate from her.


    Anyway, we got a break in a long time, so we decided to enjoy it as much as we can.


    Gari and I went to Shuji''s place to invite him to have lunch together.


    I only met Shuji on a few occasions ever since I joined the explosion corps.


    The main reason was because I was super busy training during the first two years.


    And second was Shuji became a Genin and joined the Rookie Genin team.


    But recently I frequently visited Uncle Masashi to have taijutsu spar to increase my taijutsu skill.


    Luckily when we arrived at Shuji''s place, Shuji just got home from his Genin team meeting.


    It seems his Jounin sensei told Shuji and his team to rest today and went off hurriedly too.


    So three of us went to a famous restaurant to celebrate our break.


    Along the way, Gari and Shuji got to know each other well.


    "Hey Shuji, how is Genin''s life treating you?"


    "Well, It''s terrible. We kept getting only D-rank missions.


    And when we are finally qualified to take the C-rank mission, Third Tsuchikage-sama suddenly banned all missions except D-rank and S-rank.


    So now I am stuck with the D-rank mission again. How are you guys doing? "


    "Well, we just kept doing our intense training. Nothing unusual.


    bla bla bla bla bla..."


    "bla bla bla bla..."


    "Wow, I forgot today was Valentine day. Look at Kitsuchi dating his girlfriend." Shuji commented.


    "What is wrong with this world? How come we don''t get a girlfriend while that muscle headed Kitsuchi was able to score a beautiful girl like Kimiko?? This is an absolute disaster." I complained loudly.


    Gari didn''t say anything, just kept looking at the couple.


    Kitsuchi and Kimiko somehow heard my loud voice and looked over at us.


    "Hey there Genji. It''s really you. It''s getting hard to see you nowadays.


    How is the world treating you?" Kitsuchi greeted us while smiling.


    It seems like Kitsuchi got his rude attitude fixed by constant Onoki''s teachings.


    If it were the old days, he would call me an ?sshole and look down on us for not even having a girlfriend on valentine''s day and tell us to piss off or something like that.


    We politely greeted Kitsuchi and Kimiko. They sat at our table and joined the conversation.


    "So, Genji. I heard you participated in the Uzushiogakure invasion and helped ROCK members to finish their mission. Tell us about it? How was the battlefield?"


    "Kitsuchi, I tell you that DO not to look down on anyone on the battlefield. Gari and I almost died there. If it weren''t for my special defense jutsu, we wouldn''t be here alive." I warned Kitsuchi like a experience senior.


    Gari and I started to tell the about Uzushiogakure invasion such as plans on invasion, destroying weapon warehouse, fighting crazy high ranking jounin, stealing seals, etc.


    "Oh yea Kitsuchi, I heard that you guys joined ROCK special division. I thought they don''t have a holiday. How come you guys able to stroll around freely?" Gari asked them curiously.


    "Well strangely, My dad ordered all low ranking ROCK members a break only today and went off to a meeting," Kitsuchi replied to Gari''s question.


    ''first is Captain Ishika, Shuji''s jounin sensei, and now Onoki too? Uncle Masashi was also not at his house. Something tells me that big incident happened.''


    --------------------------------------------------------------


    Inside the Tsuchikage building conference hall, there were almost hundreds of high ranking Jounins present.


    Ishika, Shuji''s Jounin sensei, and Masashi were all there.


    Onoki and his advisers entered a hall with a super serious face.


    "Listen everyone. I have called everyone as it is an emergency.


    Today midnight, Suna has launched a surprise attack on our border checkpoints and declared war on us.


    Not only us, but they also attacked Konoha at the same time.


    They underestimated us too much.


    Since they are the ones who attacked us, we will not just stand down.


    I will divide our remaining force into 3.


    The first division is tasked to defend the Suna invaders and the second division is to invade Suna from a different direction.


    The final remaining division is to standby and to reinforce.


    Masashi as veteran shinobi, I am trusting you to lead the first division.


    Kento, as you are Jounin commander, I want you to lead the second division.


    Goro, I want you to form 2 delegations and head to Kumo and Kiri to have a peace treaty with them. I am sure they are not planning to involve in this war, but just to be sure.


    Also since Konoha is attacked by Suna, their focus will be on Suna solely. This is also our chance to crush Konoha.


    I am sure Konoha will split their force and transit them to defend.


    Tell Roshi to attack Konoha tomorrow night immediately with the full force of 4000.


    That''s it for now. I want all of you to enter the war period.


    At this moment, I am declaring war on Suna and Konoha!!!!"


    The second great ninja war finally began!

 Chapter 20 - Kento (jounin commander)

    I had expected the second great ninja war soon, but I never expected that Suna would be the one to start it.


    Even more, they attacked both Iwa and Konoha at the same time!!


    Talk about daringness!!


    It seems like Suna thought the destruction of Uzushiogakure affected Konoha and Iwa greatly. How naive they were.


    -----------


    All explosion corps members were sent out to war except suicide squad. Even rookie members were deployed to the reinforcement division.


    I was sent to the second war battle division which was tasked to invade Suna back, along with Gari.


    Captain Ishika personally recommend us to that war division.


    Also since I have the ''greatest Genius'' title, I was obliged to go to the frontline.


    I cursed for having such a title.


    Shinobi in charge of our division was someone called Kento.


    Apparently, he just got promoted to Jounin commander a few months ago.


    Our second division has a total of around 3000 shinobi.


    After receiving Onoki''s war announcement, we prepared ourselves for war and departed the next day.


    -----------------------


    We arrived at our first target, Suna''s border checkpoint in 3 days.


    This checkpoint was furthest from the battlefield where our first war division is currently fighting with Suna''s invasion force.


    At least, more than 2000 shinobi were defending this checkpoint.


    It seemed like Suna already knew our invasion beforehand and prepared for it.


    This checkpoint was going to be our first battlefield between us and Suna shinobi force.


    Kento as a leader of division quickly summoned a war meeting to discuss the plan.


    Somehow I was invited to join in this meeting as one of explosion corp representatives despite my age (12).


    Most of the elite members of the explosion corp who should normally be in this kind of meeting died at Uzushiogakure and the fact that I was well known in Iwagakure for being the greatest genius, reinforced their decision to send me as one of representative of explosion corp.


    I arrived at the meeting place early and waited for every meeting members to arrive.


    It would be very rude for the youngest to come late and make elders wait. I didn''t want them to have a bad impression on me.


    One by one people arrived at the meeting and I greeted all of them politely. There were exactly ten, including me.


    My first impression of him was ''big''. He was freaking BIG, GIANT, and muscular. He looked way more intimidating than Goro-san.


    Kento: "Now that, everyone is here, Let''s discuss the plan.


    As we know, enemies already knew our incomings and prepared for us fully. Anyone has a good idea what should we do?"


    Everyone was silent. I just kept myself quiet.


    Even though I was invited, I knew my position was only supposed to listen, not comment.


    "We don''t have any info about enemies currently. So I suggest we sent small troops to battle first to test the water." One of Jounin suggested.


    "We just started our invasion and already being cautious?? That''s not our Iwa style."


    Kento immediately rejected.


    "how about we raid them at night?" another Jounin proposed his idea.


    "Rejected. We don''t need such a surprise tactic to defeat Suna weaklings."


    Kento rejected it again.


    Few other Jounins gave their ideas out but immediately rejected by Kento.


    Soon, the room fell into silence again.


    "Kento-san, you kept rejecting our ideas, then do you have any idea?" Jounin who suggested raiding plan asked Kento.


    "My idea is very simple. We don''t need any tactic.


    I believe in our Iwa shinobi power and will of stone inside us.


    We will just charge at them with full force and siege the checkpoint."


    Everyone became speechless after hearing Kento''s absurd plan.


    We don''t know anything about the enemies'' force.


    We don''t know if they have a superior number than us or not.


    We are fighting at Suna''s land, therefore, have a geographical disadvantage.


    They are also prepared for us while we didn''t.


    Considering all these points, it was obvious to even 5 years olds that full front out battle is bad for us, but yet our commander suggested that idea.


    At that moment, I realized our division commander is hypocritical and delusional, muscle headed idiot who completely got brainwashed by the will of stone crap.


    How the heck such an idiot guy managed to become Jounin commander of powerful Iwagakure shinobi force??


    What was Onoki thinking?


    Did he get a screw loose in the head when promoting this guy? Or Did Onoki moved to tears by his will of stone theory and promoted him?


    Now I am so worried about this division and my future during the war.


    Everyone was so shocked at Kento''s idea that their voice couldn''t say anything.


    "It seems like everyone is wowed by my idea and can''t say a thing.


    Hahaha alright then, tomorrow we will launch a full-force attack at them."


    Everyone now was beyond shock after hearing Kento.


    ''Wowed by your idea, my ?ss!! Yours is the shittiest one here!!'' was what everyone thought.


    Few Jounins were brave enough to oppose Kento''s idea loudly.


    Unexpectedly Kento kindly stood up after hearing them.


    "It has been 50 years since Will of stone teaching was created by our first Tsuchikage. Even though we can find stones everywhere, each stone has its uniqueness and appearance.


    Try the heat, freeze, electrify, or blow the stone. They will not break and stay the same.


    Will of stone represents our Iwa shinobi immense power.


    Now, do you think 3000 of our combined wills of stone can''t overcome some petty Suna weaklings?


    Blah blah blah...."


    (A/N: He started to give a presentation of the will of stone to everyone for 1 hour. )


    Everyone listened attentively including me.


    The more he spoke, the more we listened carefully.


    Suddenly I heard system sudden alert on my brain.


    System: "Alert!! Host is showing signs of being hypnotised or brainwashedl. Please wake up host!!!"


    Ehh?!!!!


    I got shocked by the system''s alert and quickly slapped myself to prevent from being hypnotized.


    After slap awaking, I look around everyone and their face looked like they have attained enlightenment.


    After Kento finished his speech, everyone was on tears for some reason, and wholeheartedly agreed on Kento''s aggressive and ridiculous full out battle plan.


    Some of them even asked for the signature of Kento.


    I was beyond horrified by this.


    ''His will of stone speech was so great and persuasive that it actually hypnotized and brainwashed everyone to agree with him.


    Not to mention, everyone here is top-notch shinobi that are well known but got easily brainwashed by his will of stone speech.


    Such a powerful skill!!! It''s too OP.


    If it wasn''t the system, I would also have been brainwashed by him just like them.


    How terrifying!!!


    Wait a minute, Don''t tell me, is this legendary Talk no jutsu???


    Did he master that legendary jutsu in the form of the will of stone??


    Oh shit, I see, no wonder he became Jounin commander!!!!


    Onoki probably also saw his talk no jutsu power and promoted him instantly.


    If this guy speaks about the will of stone crap speech, no Iwa shinobi will betray their village!!!


    Now that I thought about it, our explosion corps fourth division aka suicide division recently expanded its'' number rapidly.


    So this guy was the reason behind it.


    OMG!!!! This guy is too terrifying, I must stay away from him.''


    (A/N: let''s say his talk no jutsu is less powerful than Naruto''s since naruto can actually turn enemy to friend, while Kento''s can only affect allies.)


    Anyway since everyone agreed or rather hypnotized to agree on the full-force attack, I just went along with the flow and agreed to full force attack too.


    Soon we ended the meeting and went off separate ways to prepare for battle.


    When I returned to my camp, Gari looked excited to see me.


    "Hey, Genji. So how was the battle plan meeting? Did you guys discuss some super cool strategies?" He asked me with great interest.


    "..."


    "eh Yea, I guess. We talked about a lot of cool strategies. Indeed I learned a lot about strategies and battle planning from that meeting." I just lied to Gari, afraid of breaking his interest


    "Oh, then what kind of strategies did you discuss? Tell me quick"


    "eh... That''s secret. You should worry about the upcoming battle tomorrow. After we sieged this checkpoint, I will tell you all about it"


    I couldn''t say we only discussed the strategies for about 5 mins while rest of it, we listened to Kento''s talk no jutsu to Gari and decided the just simple full-out battle plan.


    "Also, Gari, as your longest friend, let me give you a warning.


    Don''t ever try to oppose or talk back to our division commander Kento.


    He has a terrifying unique power that only chosen ones can use."


    Gari looked at me with a weird look but still thanked me for my warning.

 Chapter 21 - Battle Quest

    There were no trees or huge boulders to obstruct the view, just a plain and desert field, where Iwa and Suna forces faced each other at the end.


    The distance between us was less than 1 km.


    I was deployed to the very first frontline squad. This meant that my squad will be the first to contact Suna shinobi.


    I was separated from Gari. Gari was deployed to the very backline with other explosion corps members and ordered to station there.


    It was the unspoken rule for explosion corps to stay back during full out battle.


    Even Muscle idiot Kento knew this, that''s why he didn''t order explosion corps to go frontline.


    We can not send them all to the frontline to die as they are a valuable ?sset to Iwagakure.


    Also, they can act as powerful reserves to reinforce the weak areas if something happens.


    This will give Iwa shinobi physiological thinking that even if they mess up in battle, almighty powerful famous explosion corps are behind them and would cover their mistakes thus allowing them to have less pressure and confidence.


    It seems my ''greatest genius'' title and the fact that I created my own powerful taijutsu, outweighed explosion corps benefit of staying in the backline.


    Although I have the confidence to win a fight with a jounin, I am not sure I can handle several of them coming at me.


    Just how bad is my luck!


    Soon Kento (division commander) appeared and took attention of every Iwa shinobi.


    Kento has a scary face and very big.


    These kinds of feature gave out intimidating aura which granted Iwa shinobi a confident boost.


    Kento then started to give out his talk no jutsu speech to every Iwa shinobi.


    As expected, as soon as he ended, All Iwa shinobi got brainwashed, roared valiantly with excitement, and kept shouting ''Iwa'' repeatedly.


    I used itchy ears as an excuse and covered my ears to prevent myself to get brainwashed. I almost got caught by his talk no jutsu, I am not falling for it again.


    "Everyone CHARGE!!!!!!!!! Clear out those Suna weaklings!!!"


    Every Iwa shinobi charged at Suna force.


    I was also charged, but I slowed down my speed a little bit. Nobody paid attention to my speed as all of them solely focused on reaching Suna force.


    I wasn''t slowing my speed because my fear got me.


    I knew since Suna was prepared for our invasion force, I was 100% sure they got here to the battleground beforehand and already planted traps and mines (explosion tags)


    .


    I can not magically avoid those as I am not a sensor and I am definitely not betting on my luck to avoid those traps and mines.


    Suddenly I heard the system''s voice in my head.


    -----


    System: "*Alert*


    *Battle Quest: Host officially has joined second great ninja war.


    As it ks host''s first battle, it is very important to win.


    Please win the battle and kill at least 10 opposition shinobi


    Reward: lighting release armour jutsu scroll(S-rank)


    Failure: Your reputation and other''s trust in you will fall greatly*"


    ------


    ''Wow, Its been a long time since System issued the quest. Let me see the reward.


    Wait, Holy shit. A reward is Lighting release armour. That is third and fourth Raikage''s special secret jutsu!! It''s OP as shit. ''


    Suddenly, I got an inspiration.


    I was planning to learn Earth Hardening jutsu later. This jutsu allows the user to encases their body in surrounding rock creating an armour. It has a good defence. But it''s problem was it slows the user down.


    If I combine lighting release armour''s speed and earth hardening jutsu''s defence and also with mighty wing Chun style, I might be really invincible in close combat.


    I will use my explosion release and few useful lighting jutsu for offensive long-range.


    Now I have a clear line of how should I become strong.


    I will definitely finish this quest to get lighting release armour scroll!!!''


    (A/N: Just to clear future misunderstanding, mc will not automatically able to use lighting release armour if he completes the quest.


    He will only get scroll containing method to master the jutsu. So he has to practice to use lightning release chakra. )


    As expected, Suna did plant traps and mines beforehand as some of the shinobi speeding ahead of me stepped on explosion tag and got blasted off.


    But all Iwa shinobi kept charging without a fear.


    I kept following the exact path of very lucky ones that didn''t set off any traps.


    Suna force didn''t move and kept battle stance.


    Suna commander suddenly shouted. "Get into Formation 1"


    Suna force started to move quickly and we were able to see groups of shinobi holding Giant folding fans appeared.


    (A/N: Let''s just call them giant fan division)


    Giant fan division shinobi started to swing their fans and threw powerful wind styles at us.


    Since we were fighting on the sand, these wind styles quickly formed a fierce sandstorm and obstructed our view.


    This caused Iwa shinobi to slow down.


    "Get on to formation 2 and 3, Hurry!!"


    I heard Suna commander shouting.


    Soon I b?r?ly saw few Shuriken passing through the place where I was before.


    I quickly realized that Suna is throwing weapons at us as Iwa force are can not see and block them due to sandstorms.


    I shouted loudly so that every Iwa shinobi caught in sandstorms can hear.


    "Suna is throwing weapons at us. Quickly form mud wall to protect yourselves"


    Every Iwa shinobi who heard me immediately formed a giant mud wall.


    Iwa shinobi also started to counter-attack by offensive ninjutsu and throwing weapons back and advanced carefully.


    We quickly got out of sandstorms and continued our charge.


    Suna changed their formation again and this time it was a puppet users turn.


    They quickly controlled their puppets to go near to us and threw the poison smoke bomb.


    Although I could sense poison was powerful, but Iwa shinobi still didn''t mind about poison and kept charging.


    I was also still fine since I received intense poison training from captain Ishika.


    I quickly performed a few hand signs.


    "Earth style: Earth Dargon jutsu"


    Earth dragon I created, flew to Suna puppet users.


    They couldn''t see my earth dragon because of poison smoke until it came out of the poison smoke.


    They didn''t panic and jumped away to dodge my earth dragon jutsu.


    But it was same for me whether they dodge or not. Instantly I created an explosion as powerful as I could using my earth dragon jutsu.


    Boom!!!!!!


    I was sure my explosion at least killed several puppet users.


    Suna was shocked that there was explosion corps among Iwa frontline force and panicked since my explosion created a gap in their formation.


    Iwa shinobi force used this chance to use offensive Ninjutsu to other puppet users and advanced.


    Seeing formation was breaking, Suna commander got angry.


    Iwa force already got close them, the distance between them was even less than 50m.


    "All Suna shinobi, we shall defend our land from Iwa blockheads. Charge!!!"


    Suna commander gave all out the order and charged towards incoming Iwa shinobi force.


    Soon, Suna and Iwa forces finally clashed and a lot of violent metal sounds could be heard.


    Seeing Suna force finally attacked, Kento also couldn''t suppress his urge to join the battle. He wanted to join frontline to lead the Iwa force.


    But his advisers and other jounins persuaded him from leading the very first frontline.


    They said he was the commander and if he gets injured, Iwa''s morale will drop significantly, therefore he should be in a safe place.


    But that was obviously not Kento''s style.


    When he saw Suna force going all out, he finally couldn''t hold on.


    He immediately ordered every shinobi that are in the backline, including explosion corps to follow him and join the battle.


    His advisers wanted to stop him but knew it was impossible already.


    Explosion corps and other few remaining Iwa shinobi followed their commander''s order and with Kento, they joined the chaotic battlefield.

 Chapter 22 - First Battle Scar

    Iwa and Suna forces clashed and the battlefield became even more fierce when Kento and explosion corps joined in.


    It was literally chaos.


    The first enemy I faced was a Chunin puppet user.


    He was controlling two puppets, one looked like a horse while another had three eyes.


    "It seems like Iwa lacks proper shinobi as they even send a little child to the frontline. How pathetic. Now Die!! "


    I didn''t react to his taunt and draw out my twin blades.


    Although I wasn''t proficient at Wing Chun twin bu??erfly swords yet, I wanted to know if I can handle this puppet user using only my swords.


    Puppet user tried his three-eyed puppet to attack me.


    Three-eyed puppet''s hands switched to blades and tried to slice me, but I blocked them with ease.


    While I was blocking puppet''s blades, I saw several senbons and Shurikens flying at me from horse-faced puppet''s mouth.


    But soon three-eyed puppet came to me quickly and continued to attack me while horse-faced puppet kept shooting senbons and shurikens at me.


    I soon got annoyed and decided that it was impossible for me to finish this puppet user with only using my blades.


    That horse-faced puppet kept throwing needles and senbons which annoyed me and decided to destroy it first.


    I performed hand signs for Earth style: Stone pistol jutsu and spitted out only one rock at puppet user.


    I didn''t shoot several stone pistols since there were many Iwa shinobi around us, fighting their own battle.


    Puppet user thought it was just a regular stone pistol and controlled horse-faced puppet to block it.


    I immediately used an explosion release and blow off horse-faced puppet.


    Puppet user shocked by a sudden explosion. Although he was safe, his horse-faced puppet completely blown by pieces and became useless.


    "Explosion?!! So it was you who break our formation. Now I will use my everything to avenge my fallen comrades."


    This puppet had horns and looked like a demon. What surprised me the most about this puppet was it''s 8 arms.


    Demon puppet has 8 arms and was taller than me.


    "Now go die"


    Puppet user immediately used both demon puppet and three-eyed puppet to attack relentlessly, giving me no time to use any jutsu.


    I tried to counterattack puppets, but blocking 10 blades at the same time (including three-eyed puppet''s blades) was all I could b?r?ly manage since I was still halfway mastering Wing Chun bu??erfly sword style.


    I finally managed to create a distance between puppets and me. I quickly performed hand signs.


    "Earth style: earth wall"


    I created an earth wall to block puppets incoming attacks and also to hide myself from the puppet user''s view.


    While I am hiding behind an earth wall, I created 3 clones, 2 to hold off puppets while remaining one clone will charge to puppet user.


    But the real plan is the real me use earth travel jutsu and slowly appear puppet user''s behind and finished him off. All of my clones are baits.


    Puppet user saw two of my clone holding off his puppets while one clone coming at him.


    "Fool, You don''t know I am also good at wind style, do you?"


    Puppet user quickly cut off chakra string and performed hand seals.


    "Wind style: air current dance"


    His jutsu hit my clone and shocked that it was earth clone who charged at him.


    Then he thought one of the clones holding off puppets was the real me. He quickly reattached his chakra string and attacked the remaining clones.


    Now he got more shocked and confused when all of my clones proved to just clones.


    Right that time, I slowly came out of the ground behind. He didn''t notice me at all.


    Some of Suna shinobi saw me standing behind puppet user, shouted to warn puppet user while fighting with other Iwa shinobi.


    Puppet user was about to turn his head until he heard my voice from behind.


    "Suprise!! motherfu*ker!!!" and I sliced his head off.


    -----------------------------------


    Before I get to have a breath from my fight with the puppet user, a sudden barrage of kunai were aimed at me.


    Luckily I didn''t let my guard down the whole time and dodged them swiftly.


    "How dare you kill my cousin, I will avenge my cousin!!!"


    I felt a strong blast of d¨¦j¨¤ vu as if I have experienced a similar situation.


    That strong Uzumaku jounin chased us immediately to revenge his son during the invasion and now I killed random Suna shinobi and his cousin immediately came for revenge.


    ''Hmm, now that I look closer, this guy was one of shinobi who tried to warn puppet user.


    I am sure this guy is at least Jounin level''


    Since I knew my opponent is Jounin, I decided to change our battlefield.


    The current place is too crowded with Iwa and Sun shinobi and I won''t able to go all out to finish him.


    I am sure this guy will chase if I run away.


    I slowly lead him to a quiet place to fight.


    After running for 10 minutes, I found a peaceful quiet place to battle with that Suna jounin.


    "It seems like you stopped running. Decided to give up on your life?"


    Suna jounin mocked me after seeing me stop moving.


    "Oh no, I was just being nice and searched for your future burial place. I decided this place would be it."


    Suna jounin looked pissed and replied.


    "I will admit you are a genius to able to kill my cousin (chunin) with your age.


    But you are too arrogant to even think about facing a jounin. You are the one who is going to drop dead here, brat!!!!"


    Suna jounin dashed at me with incredible speed.


    Suna Jounin used Kunai to direct slash, but I blocked with my right blade and counterattacked using my left blade.


    Then Suna jounin lowered his body and performed sweep kick.


    I immediately jumped to dodge his sweep kick and swing both my blades fully at Suna jounin.


    Suna jounin quickly backflipped to dodge and threw shurikens at me. I used my blades to block all thrown shuriken and waited for his offense again.


    Like this, he and I kept doing intense taijutsu bout for 10 minutes.


    Although Suna jounin was much more experienced, he had never seen such unique taijutsu before and was not having an easy time.


    We stepped up a little bit and started to use ninjutsu.


    "Wind Style: Air bullets" He shot multiple bullets of air at me with intense speed.


    "Earth Style: Earth Wall" I formed the wall to block air bullets


    "Earth style: Earth dragon" This time I did the offense.


    Suna shinobi already knew about my explosion release and dodge it as further as he could.


    Then he started to perform more powerful jutsu.


    "Wind Style: Vacuum bullets"


    I knew this jutsu is powerful since Danzo kept using this jutsu during his fight with Sasuke.


    "Earth style: Stone Pistol" I shot stone pistols to each vacuum bullets.


    I knew vacuum bullets can easily pierce through stone pistols so I used exploded stone pistol at the right time to fend off vacuum bullets.


    We kept using offensive and defensive ninjutsu at each other for 10 minutes straight.


    Suna jounin was shocked that I knew so many ninjutsu and have a huge charka reserve despite my age.


    "It seems I have underestimated you a bit kid. But this ends now.


    Wind style: sandstorm jutsu"


    Suna jounin used the last blast of wind and created a massive cloud of dust which was thick enough that it is capable of blocking my vision.


    Although I could b?r?ly see, I calmed myself to tried to think of what was Suna Jounin''s next move.


    -----------


    A few minutes later, I sensed air pressure whip coming at me. I ?ssumed it was a vacuum blast and quickly jumped high to dodge.


    As expected vacuum blast passed the place where I was before.


    Then I saw Suna jounin jumped with kunai in his hand striking at me.


    I quickly draw out my blades and put on a defensive stance to block his Kunai.


    But I saw the smirk on Suna jounin''s face.


    Suddenly Suna jounin''s kunai started to glow with intense blue chakra.


    (A/N: just like asuma wind blade)


    Suna jounin coated his kunai with his wind nature and slashed at me.


    At this moment..., I knew I fu?k?d up.


    Suna jounin''s kunai penetrated my two blades and slashed my ?h?st.


    After slashing my ?h?st, Suna jounin kicked me at the belly and I flew away.


    I coughed my blood. There was a long scar on my ?h?st.


    ''SHITT!!!


    I got careless, He forced to make me jump and struck me while in mid-air.


    Since I was in mid-air, I couldn''t dodge, but to only block with my blades.


    I thought his Kunai was just normal but didn''t expect it was special kunai that can absorb chakra.


    My blades were just normal metal so they got easily broken by wind nature coated Kunai.


    It was truly unexpected, but I still can win this.''


    I somehow managed to avoid serious deep cut on ?h?st since I was prepared at last moment, but I pretended to have life and death situation, looked tired to deceive Suna jounin.


    "What did I tell you, even though you are genius, you are not ready to face me head-on, brat. Now time to die."


    Suna Jounin mocked me and slowly walked towards me, thinking the battle ended.


    It seems my acting deceived him pretty well.


    I acted to breathe heavily and quickly performed hand seals.


    "Earth style: Dark Swamp."


    The ground beneath Suna jounin changed into the mud and trapped Suna jounin completely.


    Suna jounin got shocked that I was able even to perform A-rank jutsu after getting slashed by him.


    He tried to escape by no avail.


    I smirked at him.


    "You stupid jounin. You fell for my acting damn good. I think it''s you will die, not me."


    I snapped my fingers and suddenly 10 of my earth clones appeared out of dust and clutched Suna Jounin.


    "What?? How?? When did you make your earth clones?? I never saw you make them!!!"


    Suna jounin got surprised that my earth clones appeared suddenly.


    ''This idiot. I knew you were going to pull something, so I quickly created earth clones the moment I got into the cloud of dust.


    When I felt a vacuum blast coming, I ordered my clones to lie down and wait for my signal before jumping to dodge vacuum blast.


    Although I didn''t expect his charka kunai blade, I managed to react fast.


    But if he used longer weapon, I might have died.


    Of course, I am not going to tell this idiot my plan, He can go drop dead while thinking forever how I did it''


    "Because of you, I managed to get the first scar on the ?h?st. Thank you and goodbye bastard!!! KATSU!!!!!"


    "NOOOOO!!"


    Boom!!!!


    10 of my earth clones exploded with him, but I wasn''t sure about his death, so I created earth dragon and exploded it right at the place he got trapped.


    After checking his messed up corpse, I finally relaxed a bit.


    I still didn''t let my guard down since I knew I was still on the battlefield.


    I quickly took out an emergency bandage and wrapped around my injury to stop the bleed.


    10 young Suna genins abruptly appeared in front of me.


    "How dare you kill our jounin sensei!!!! We will avenge our sensei!!!


    Surround him, guys. He is injured, we can finish him off to pay respect to our fallen sensei."


    "..."


    I keep sensing D¨¦j¨¤ vu a lot today.


    ''Just what is wrong with this Suna shinobi?? Are they all related??


    I killed, puppet user, then Suna jounin attacked, so I killed him.


    Now his students are coming for me.


    Is this what we call domino effect?''


    There are 10 genins. If I kill them all, I can complete half of my battle quest (win the battle and kill at least 10 opposition shinobi).


    10 Suna genins surrounded me and I waited for them to attack.

 Chapter 23 - Plan to win the battle

    I was surrounded by 10 Suna genins.


    Their age seems to be around the same as me.


    I was 70% sure that these guys don''t know any high-level ninjutsu and more likely to attack me using taijutsu.


    I spent a lot of charka during the previous fight with Suna jounin. I didn''t want to waste any more chakra on them if I had to.


    Although I didn''t let my guard down, I wasn''t so worried.


    If it was 10 Chunins or above, I would run away with full speed, but I don''t mind fight 10 genins with only taijutsu.


    I slowly raised my two arms to the Wing Chun stance and waited for them to attack.


    I will show them the mightiness of Wing Chun.


    Finally, the genin behind me commenced to attack me with his kunai.


    Soon all 10 of them jumped at me.


    I blocked the front genin''s attack while kicking side genin.


    (A/N: just imagine that the fight scene is similar to Ipman destroying 10 black belts.)


    They did use a few low-rank wind style ninjutsu, but I simply used Shunshin to evade and continued to bully them.


    5 minutes later, all 10 genins got beaten to pulps.


    To be honest, I didn''t expect them to fall this quickly. I guessing that these guys just got out from the academy and first time joining the battle.


    They sure had guts to even fight me.


    Although I wasn''t injured by them, my ?h?st scar wound reopened due to all those fighting movements. I quickly rebandaged my ?h?st scar again.


    I looked around the surroundings to see if there was anyone.


    After checking no one was around, I created one clone to cover for me.


    I performed a few hand seals.


    A dome of the earth around 10 genins rose up, trapping them inside.


    I quickly touched the dome and absorbed the remaining chakra of those genins, to fill up my chakra.


    After fully absorbing their chakra, I blow off the dome to make sure there are no survivors.


    I gotta say, absorbing others'' chakra is really addictive.


    (A/N: What a vampire!!)


    I didn''t go back to the battlefield immediately.


    I need to win this battle to complete the quest.


    But it was obvious that the current battle situation is serious for Iwa due to idiot Kento does absolutely no commanding.


    I thought for a few minutes and finally had an idea.


    I will do a surprise attack on Suna''s base, ration, and weapon storage to cause chaos in their base.


    Distance between the battlefield and Suna''s base is not far away.


    I am sure as soon as Suna forces realize their base has been attacked, they will retreat immediately. Thus giving Iwa victory to this battle.


    I knew I can''t do this alone, so I hastily went back to the battlefield to recruit Gari and other explosion corps members to my plan.


    -----------------------


    I saw Gari was fighting hard with two Suna Chunins.


    They were in a stalemate.


    I quickly created an earth wall to defend Gari from two Chunins.


    They were surprised by the sudden emergence of an earth wall. They looked back to see who disturbed their fight.


    Their face was blown and died instantly.


    "Thanks for your help, Genji."


    "Gari, I need your help to turn the battle side."


    "Alright, what''s your plan?"


    "Let''s save other explosion corps members first, then I will tell you my plan."


    "Sure, while ago I saw few explosion corps members fighting Giant Folding Fan division members."


    "Let''s go help them then."


    After helping other 9 explosion corps members, we slowly disappeared from the battlefield.


    "So Genji, what''s your plan?"


    I am sure Suna force will retreat when they see their base being attacked."


    "But Genji, your idea is feasible, but don''t you think it''s a bit suicidal to attack Suna base with only us?


    I am sure Suna base has a lot of shinobi defending it." one of explosion corps member asked me.


    "That''s why I only recruited explosion corps members. The thing that we are super good at is blowing things off.


    Also, Suna base defence shinobi shouldn''t be hard since their focus would be on the current battlefield.


    We just need to cause enough chaos in their base to make Suna force retreat from the battlefield."


    "What if Suna also sent other force to attack our base too? Then your plan''s effect on the battlefield would be diminished."


    "Worry not. I am sure Suna force doesn''t know our base camp since we just arrived yesterday.


    Additionally, even if Suna knows our basecamp, their main job is to defend, not attack. So they would not sneak attack our base"


    --------------------------------------------------------------


    We transformed into Suna shinobi and tried to enter Suna base.


    Suna base guard all focused on the battlefield but did their job seriously.


    But as expected we were stopped and asked for code.


    Since we didn''t know any code whatsoever, we revealed ourselves and quickly finished off base security shinobi, but left one alive.


    Although it was tough, after torturing him for a while, we got the location of ration and weapon storage.


    Each of us created 10 earth clones and let them divert Suna guard shinobi while real ones went to destroy base, ration, and weapon storage.


    It took a lot more time than we thought to accomplish our plan, mainly due to fighting with Ration and Weapon storage guards was tough.


    After blowing off our targets and causing chaos in Suna base, we transformed into Suna shinobi and quickly retreated, not to get caught.


    But we still let our clones run around Suna base.


    All of these took at most 30 minutes.


    ---------------------------------------------------------------


    Yudai was fighting with Kento (Iwa division commander) seriously.


    Yudai knew Kento was Iwa invasion division commander.


    Before Yudai was the head of Giant Folding Fan and now he became division commander, tasked to defend this border checkpoint from the Iwa invasion force.


    Yudai had to admit, his scary-looking opponent is strong and tough.


    No matter how he attacks with his fan, Kento''s earth armour won''t go down.


    Just as he was about to attack once more, he saw several black clouds of smoke in the direction of the Suna base.


    He got a bad feeling about it.


    Soon a messenger shinobi appeared in front of Yudai.


    "Yudai-sama, Our base has been attacked by Iwa''s several explosion corps."


    "What?? What were you and shinobi who are guarding the base, doing?"


    Yudai didn''t expect Iwa to sneaky attack them on their first battle.


    Iwa didn''t even know anything about Suna force but still decided to pull off side sneak attack.


    This needed a lot of guts and courage to come out with this strategy.


    Yudai looked at scary dumb-looking Kento and couldn''t believe Kento came up with this plan.


    ''Looks can be deceiving'' is what Yudai thought.


    Yudai decided to retreat to save their base.


    He couldn''t afford to lose ration and weapon storage in the base.


    But what Yudai didn''t know is that ration and weapon storage were already got destroyed completely by Genji and his little force.


    Yudai: "I gotta say, I didn''t expect you would sneak attack on us. Even making yourself as bait, I completely got fooled."


    Kento: "????"


    Kento had no idea what Yudai was saying.


    Did this guy have brain problems while fighting?


    Yudai: "We will retreat for now. But don''t you think you have won yet. Next time I won''t lose."


    Kento: "????"


    Kento had completely no idea what Yudai was saying.


    ''This guy suddenly started to speak some bullshit about bait and fooled, then he is saying he would retreat?


    What the heck?


    Did my fight with him cause him to lose mind?'' Kento thought.


    Kento really thought Yudai lost his mind.


    But seeing Suna force retreating, Kento couldn''t stand idly.


    "Proud and valiant Iwa shinobi!!


    We have won the battle and Suna is retreating due to our mighty power.


    Don''t let them give time to breathe, Chase them and annihilate them!!!"


    Seeing Suna force is retreating, Iwa force''s morale boosted and chased off Suna force.


    When Yudai and Suna main force arrived at their base, Yudai was surprised to see that ration and weapon storage completely blew off.


    Yudai wanted to curse base guards but knew now wasn''t time to do as Iwa force is chasing them like mad dogs.


    Yudai knew he couldn''t'' defend Iwa force here without any ration or weapon. Therefore he decided to give up this checkpoint and back off.


    After Kento and Iwa force successfully won over Suna checkpoint, Kento wanted to chase retreating Suan force again.


    But he soon dropped the idea after seeing Iwa force are tired from battle.


    --------------------------------------------------


    After causing chaos in Suna base, me and my little force joined in Iwa force chasing off Suna force on halfway.


    Although I knew Suna force would retreat, I didn''t expect Iwa force would chase them.


    ''Isn''t it normal to stop chasing when enemies suddenly retreat?


    But I guess this is also not bad''


    Later Iwa force occupied Suna checkpoint and I heard system.


    System: "Congratulation on host for completing a battle quest.


    *Battle Quest: Host officially has joined second great ninja war.


    As it is the host''s first battle, it is very important to win.


    Please win the battle and kill at least 10 opposition shinobi


    Reward: lighting release armour jutsu scroll(S-rank)


    Failure: Your reputation and other''s trust in you will fall greatly*


    Lighting release armour jutsu scroll has been recorded to the system''s database. Host can learn this jutsu anytime from now on."


    When I heard I completed the quest, I finally relaxed and knew we won the battle successfully .

 Chapter 24 - War report

    ---------Iwa Tsuchikage office---------------


    Currently, in the Tsuchikage office, Onoki was discussing with ROCK captain.


    "So, how is your investigation, tell me the current war situation of all other great villages," Onoki ordered.


    "Well, It is clear now that Kiri and Kumo have absolutely no intention of joining the war.


    But they still deployed their force in the border just in case.


    As for Konoha, they rearranged their force.


    It seems they have predicted Suna''s invasion and predeployed Sakumo Hatake to stop the Suna invasion force.


    Now Sakumo Hatake is the first division commander of Konoha force and tasked to stop Suna invasion force.


    Third Hokage''s three students are co-leaders of Konoha''s second division and they are now facing off our Iwa invasion force to Konoha which is led by Roushi.


    Currently, they are fighting with the land of Rain as both sides don''t want to fight in their land.


    Konoha''s last third division is led by their jounin commander Danzo and now they act as reinforcements."


    "Damn, Konoha tree huggers. Hiruzen sure looks down on us, sending his students to face our mighty force. Damn shit ?ss!!!!


    "As for Suna, they also mainly divided into three sides, but it is estimated that they have another reinforcements force besides those three divisions.


    One of Suna''s powerful shinobi, Chiyo led their first force and invaded Konoha but as previously mentioned, they got blocked by Konoha''s Sakumo Hatake.


    Suna''s second division led by Chiyo''s bother Ebisu, also one of Suna''s powerful shinobi invaded our land, but got intercepted by our defense division led by Masashi.


    Suna''s last division led by their Giant Folding Fan division commander Yudai was tasked to block our invasion force to Suna led by Kento but lost in the first battle and retreated."


    "Hmph, That''s more like it. Stupid Suna idiots think they can stop us?


    So what''re our casualties so far?"


    "Roushi and Masashi''s sides don''t have high casualties but Kento''s side more than 300 Iwa shinobi died. That''s around 10% of Kento''s division."


    "Umm, that''s troublesome. But it''s too soon to send out reinforcement. Okay, I understand. Dismiss."


    ROCK captain nodded to Onoki and Shunshined away.


    Konoha:


    Hatake Sakumo division (fighting Chiyo division)


    Legendary Sannin division (fighting Roushi division)


    Danzo division (reinforcements)


    Suna:


    Chiyo division (fighting Sakumo division)


    Ebizo division (fighting Masashi division)


    Yudai divison (fought with Kento division)


    Reinforcements


    Masashi division (fighting Ebizo division)


    Kento division (fought with Yudai division)


    Roushi division (fighting Sannin trio division)


    Reinforcements


    )


    --------------Suna council--------------


    Third Kazekage was very angry after receiving a report from Yudai.


    He didn''t expect Yudai to fail so quickly.


    What an incompetence fellow!


    "As you all know, Yudai failed to defend our first border checkpoint and retreated.


    This is truly unexpected from our plan. SO what should we do with Yudai?"


    "Yudai that idiot, He couldn''t even hold them for one day.


    Kazekage-sama, I suggest we demote him and send a new commander." one of the members in the council said.


    "No, even though Yudai lost, it''s only the first week of the war.


    Let''s give him chances to redeem." elder rebutted.


    "But it''s the fact that he lost the battle.


    We can''t just close our eyes and not punish him!


    This would think as favoritism and create a leeway in our shinobi law. "


    "Blah blah blah blah... "


    They kept arguing for 30 minutes on how to punish Yudai.


    Kazekage couldn''t take it any more rants and shouted.


    "Be quiet!!!, Yudai punishment is too s?ns?t?v? for us right now after losing a battle.


    We will delay his punishment after the war. For now, he is to remain as a division commander."


    Members of the council became quiet after hearing Kazekage order.


    "Now, I want to discuss how to drive away those Iwa invaders. It''s obvious that Yudai alone can''t drive them away."


    "Kazekage-sama, an army without a general is just garbage. I suggest we ?ssassinate Iwa force commander by sending several elites."


    "Commander Assassination attempt is normal during the war. I am sure Iwa force already prepared for our ?ssassination squad."


    We can use this point to lead Iwa commander to ambush point and kill him during battle."


    "Umm... That plan has a chance of failure.


    Is there any other plans?"


    "We can isolate and entrap them in Suna, cut off their supply line, and slowly kills them."


    "How?"


    "Currently Ebisu-sama is leading our invasion force in Iwa but is having a hard time trying breakthrough Iwa defense division.


    Therefore I suggest, Kazekage-sama personally lead troops to break through the Iwa defense division and replace Ebisu-sama''s division.


    While we let Ebizo-sama''s division to retreat and cut off the Iwa invasion force supply line and isolate Iwa invasion force from Iwa completely.


    Then Ebizo-sama division and Yudai division attack both front and rear sides of the Iwa invasion force at the same time. Thus this would destroy the Iwa invasion force.


    As long as Kazekage-sama breakthrough Iwa''s defense division or even give a bit of pressure to them, Iwa would focus more on defending. "


    "Not a bad plan, but can Yudai hold off Iwa invasion force until Ebizo''s division cut off Iwa invasion force and surround them from the rear side?"


    "That''s why we will give more troops and elites to Yudai to hold Iwa invasion force until Ebizo-sama division surround their rear side."


    After hearing members'' strategies, Kazekage stood up and thought for minutes.


    "Alright, I have decided.


    We will go with both the entrapment plan together with the ?ssassination plan.


    I will send an additional 1000 shinobi to Yudai division to hold off the Iwa invasion force.


    By the end of this month, I want the Iwa invasion force in Suna to completely destroyed. Understand?"


    """Understood, Kazekae-sama"""


    "Kazekage-sama, what should we do about Chiyo-sama side? Should we send reinforcement?"


    "No, I am sure that crazy woman doesn''t need our help.


    She took all her deadly poisons and her son and daughter-in-law with her. Besides she has 10 white Chikamatsu puppets with her. I don''t worry about her too much.


    Let''s dismiss the meeting."


    Everyone slowly went out of the meeting room.


    ---------------------------------------------------


    After successfully occupying the first Suna checkpoint, we rested for 3 days and continued our invasion.


    Iwa force casualties were around 300 shinobi which is way more than we estimated.


    As for Suna, we are estimating it was around 200.


    First battle and we already lost 10% of our troops.


    It wasn''t for my sneak base attack plan, we would have lost shinobi way more than that.


    I really think we should change our division commander or else we might even be wiped out before first two month.


    Of course I didn''t voice up my complaints. Here, I was just simple member of division.


    After marching 2 days straight, we saw Suna force waiting and preparing for our coming.


    This time I could see that Suna force has increased in number than the previous fight.


    But the commander was the same.


    I think Suna send reinforcement after seeing that we occupied border checkpoint in one day.


    I really had a bad feeling after seeing Suna force.

 Chapter 25 - Rasa and Pakura

    --------Iwa invasion force battle meeting---------


    "Although I already sent a victory report to Tsuchikage-sama out of excitement, now that I think carefully, it''s weird. Does anyone here know why Suna retreat last battle?" Kento asked out of curiosity.


    Everyone in the meeting all became quiet and looked at each other.


    I coughed a little bit to get attention.


    "Ahem Ahem, Ehh... Sir, I think it''s because of me. I took 9 other explosion corps with me and did a surprise attack on their base to destroy their ration and weapon storage while our force was fighting with Suna force. "


    I could see everyone''s eye on me. I felt a bit embarrassing to praise myself.


    "Hahaha, as expected of our greatest genius. Although we could easily win even without your plan, what you did there sped up our victory.


    Alright, I would like to reward you now but as you can see, we don''t have money or jutsu scroll currently. Instead, I will give you a full authority on those explosion corps members you led.


    From now on, you will be their leader and can do whatever you want with them."


    "Thanks, division leader"


    I knew having my own private squad is better than having money or jutsu scroll during the war.


    They can follow me and save my ?ss in a critical time while money can''t do shit.


    I already have a shit ton of jutsu scrolls in the system''s database so I don''t need them.


    As expected, in our battle plan meeting, Kento again decided to go full-out strategy.


    And again he used his talk no jutsu to convince other members in the meeting.


    I wanted to speak out to change the plan but decided not to.


    I felt like I would get bullied if I speak out here.


    After the meeting, I went out to the weapon storage.


    My swords got broken into pieces after fighting with Suna jounin. So I wanted to see if there are any nice swords in our division weapon storage.


    I saw a few nice weapons in storage but unfortunately, none of them were swords.


    "Hey old man, Is there any nice bu??erfly or twin swords in here? Mine got broken from the previous battle." I asked the shinobi in charge of weapon storage.


    "Who are you calling old, brat!! I am still under 50, damn it.


    After hearing there were no bu??erfly swords, I lost my hope and was about to go out.


    But I quickly stopped, thinking about the previous fight.


    Come to think of it, after killing that Jounin and ten genins, I didn''t loot them. Shit!! That was so careless of me.


    I could have gotten Chakra Kunai for free too from Suna jounin.


    Fuck!!


    That chakra kunai was powerful and left a deep impression on me.


    "Hey old man. Do you have any chakra blades or Kunai that can be infused with elemental chakra?"


    "As I said I am not old!!! Just because you are genius, doesn''t mean that you should be rude to elders, brat!!


    As for your request, we do have a charka kunai. What size do you want?"


    He quickly handed out black, sharp long kunai to me. I felt comfortable using it.


    "This kunai''s apppearance is so cool. I didn''t expect this shabby weapon storage has such a beautiful Kunai."


    "hmph, What do you mean shabby, brat?


    Here is the very special chakra Kunai. That would be 50,000 ryo."


    5000 ryo??? That''s ridiculous as fu?k.


    Pure bullshit!!!


    You can buy 100 normal Kuani with that money.


    You can buy 5000 dirty magazines with that.


    You can have a freaking maid for months with that.


    "What?? Do you charge for the weapon? Aren''t weapons in public weapon storage for the free, old man?"


    "For the fu?k?n? last time, I am not an old man!!


    Also, I need to eat and survive.


    All of these weapons here are collected from battlefields by me alone. I risked my life to get all these, and you want it for free???


    hehehe I am not your normal kind man who gives for free, So you better pay up!!!"


    "So basically, you are a weapon thief. And you are charging for it? Unbelievable!!!"


    "Shut it, brat. So you are paying or not?"


    "Why is it so expensive?"


    "It''s because this kunai is very tough, sharp, and easy to use.


    Also, it is very sharp and able to infuse chaka."


    "How about 30% off?


    In the future, when I become famous Iwa shinobi, I can help you rich, old man."


    "Shut it and pay up brat. "


    I tried to cut the price down, but this old man was stubborn as hell.


    I gave up and purchased the kunai without any discount.


    "Thanks for the business. Come again!!"


    "Listen up, old man. When I become strong and famous, I will definitely make you regret not cutting down the price!!!!"


    After saying this, I quickly went out.


    Just like before, I was sent to the very frontline. If I keep going up to the frontline, I am afraid I really might die someday.


    Fortunately, I have my squad with me on the frontline this time.


    With Kento''s roar, all Iwa force charged to Suna force.


    We encountered some traps but not as harsh as the previous battlefield.


    I guess we arrived too quickly from the previous battle checkpoint and they didn''t have enough time to set up more traps.


    I also saw not all Suna forces rushed to clash Iwa force. It seems Suna learned their lesson and left troops to tighten their base defense.


    ----------------------------------------------------


    I killed 4 Genins and 1 Chunin so far. They were not as tough as previous Suna jounin who gave me a scar.


    Luckily, I haven''t encountered with Jounin yet. I also helped Gari and my squad in their fighting and they helped mine vice versa.


    Suddenly I heard a scream coming from behind me. I quickly turned around to see who screamed.


    It was our Iwa force shinobi.


    But what took me the attention was the gold dust wrapped around Iwa shinobi and slowly crushing him.


    That gold dust!!!


    My eyes slowly went to the boy controlling the gold dust who looked around the same age as me.


    It was definitely Rasa, Garaa''s dad.


    I didn''t need to ask System to confirm this.


    I also saw a beautiful little girl who stood next to Rasa and supported him.


    She had green hair that she tied in a bun on top of her head with a hair needle running through it and one short and long strands of hair with orange tips framing each side of her face.


    At first, I thought she was Rasa''s future wife but I was wrong after seeing her using Scorch release.


    She was Pakura. I double-checked with the system and she was indeed Pakura.


    Now Rasa and Pakura were on a killing spree.


    Most of our force jounins are fighting with Suna jounins and Chunins are just prey in those two eyes.


    I decided to step up and face them.


    "Gari, follow me. Let''s stop those Suna boy and girl pair."


    Of course, I wasn''t stupid to challenge them two on one.


    One of them was a future Kazekage while another would become a hero of Suna in the future.


    Gari obediently followed my orders and blocked Rasa and Pakura''s way.


    Seeing we intercepted their way, Rasa spoke to us with dead fish-eyes expression.


    "Get out of my way. We are not interested in dealing weaklings"


    Gari and I got pissed a bit by Rasa''s words.


    "Hey, you seem to be full of yourself, fish-eye. How about I kick your ?ss now?" I replied to him.


    Rasa didn''t say anything and controlled his gold dust to attack me.


    I quickly pulled out my new 50,000 ryo Kunai from my pocket and cut off gold dust.


    "This is 50,000 ryo Kunai. Taste my power!!"


    (A/N: Lee cut of Garaa''s sand with regular kunai so I think Rasa''s gold dust also can be cut)


    Pakura who was standing behind Rasa quietly, promptly performed hand seals.


    "Scorch style: Phoenix scorch jutsu"


    She spits a volley of small scorch-balls into the air at me.


    (A/N: This is scorch version of fire style: phoenix fire jutsu, one of Sasuke''s fire jutsu.)


    Gari quickly created an earth wall to protect me and him from wildly moving scorch balls.


    Seeing we block Pakura''s jutsu with ease, Rasa quickly formed gold dust to several spears and shot at us in a different direction.


    Gari dodged them, while I blocked them using my Kunai.


    "Hehehe, my Kunai is a sharp 50,000 ryo Kunai. Let''s see which one is tougher, your spears, or my Kunai. Hahahaha"


    *Snap*


    As soon as I said, I heard the sound of metal breaking from my Kunai.


    I looked at my Kuani and it was broken into 10 pieces.


    Me:"???"


    Gari: "..."


    Pakura: "..."


    Rasa: "..."


    ....


    Complete silence enveloped between us.


    Just right after I bragged about my Kunai, it was broken.


    Very embarrassing!!!


    But why my 50,000 ryo Kunai destroyed so easily???


    Wtf!!!


    And looking at Rasa''s confusion face, I knew that even he also didn''t expect his spear to break my Kunai.


    "Ahh, excuse me. but could you please form one more spear to attack me. I want to know if I am scammed or not" I requested Rasa humbly.


    "eh, sure" Rasa mindlessly agreed to my request and created one spear form to attack me.


    I used normal Kunai this time and blocked the spear gold dust easily.


    Normal Kunai didn''t break and as sharp as it was.


    In other words, I got scammed.


    ''AHHHHHHHHHH! THAT KUSO JIJI (shitty old man)!!!!


    How dare he trick me!!!! Ahhh!!!


    My 50,000 ryo!!!!! My money!!!!


    I will find you and I will kill you !!!!


    You better pray that you don''t run into me.''


    "It seems you got scammed. How stupid!!!" Rasa composed himself and started to ridicule me.


    Pakura just looked me like I am an idiot.


    "Yea, Genji. It''s not like you to get scammed" Gari also commented.


    ''Whose team are you?'' I looked at Gari with an annoying face.


    "Ahem, That was very careless of me. But just because my Kuani destroyed, it doesn''t change the fact that we will stop you two.


    Get prepared since I pretty pissed right now."


    Rasa and Pakura got into their stance while Gari and I started to get serious.


    "Gari, leave the boy to me. You take care of the girl. I will come to aid you as fast as I can after I beat him."


    "No worries, I am not weak enough to lose to a girl."


    Gari jumped at the girl and started to attack her.


    I also looked at Rasa and charged at him.


    Battle between Iwa geniuses and Suna geniuses began.

 Chapter 26 - Genji vs Rasa

    While staring at Rasa, I heard a sudden system''s voice.


    System: "Host has triggered a special side quest, caused by the host''s emotion.


    *Side Quest: Defeat Rasa!!


    Request: Chakra Butterfly Swords (able to infuse any elemental chakra)


    Failure: lose of 10 Kunai set*"


    ''Side quest? My emotion caused it? What the heck?


    But right now, I don''t care since the reward is what I need the most now.


    Nice job, system.


    After this battle, I will definitely catch that fu?ker who scammed me and give him a hell''


    Rasa gathered his gold dust and attacked me. I dodged them while throwing large stones at him.


    I wanted to see whether Rasa has the same control ability as Gaara during the Chunin exam.


    Also, Gaara had a shield of sand that protects Gaara against a great variety of threats by itself.


    I am not letting my guard down, thinking Rasa doesn''t have his version of a shield of sand.


    I saw Rasa, rather than blocking the stones with his gold dust, he jumped to dodge them. This action proved that Rasa doesn''t have his version of Shield of Sand.


    But as Rasa kept attacking, Rasa saw that his ?ssaults were also affecting Suna shinobi nearby.


    Rasa promptly stopped his gold dust and started to talk to me.


    "It seems like you have some skill in dodging and running away. Why don''t we continue our battle in a quiet place?"


    "Alright, but I will decide the place."


    There was no way I am going to let Rasa choose our battlefield.


    If he chooses a battlefield full of sands or gold dust, it would be tough to defeat him.


    "Whatever," Rasa answered cooly, thinking that he will win anyway.


    ''hehehe, I will bring you to a place where it has the least gold dust.''


    Before leaving, I signalled to inform my squad that I will leave to have a battle with Rasa.


    I tried to find the forest to choose it as our battlefield since it would be hard to find gold dust in the forest, but as expected, I couldn''t find any in Suna land.


    Eventually, I gave up finding and just picked a quiet place to battle with Rasa.


    As soon as we stopped, Rasa pulled out a small gourd where he contained most of his gold dust and attacked me.


    ''What? he has a gourd to keep his gold dust with him, like Gaara? Then what was the point of me bring you all the way here, damn it!!''


    I immediately dashed at him while dodging waves of his gold dust ?ssaults.


    Once I got closer to him, We engaged in taijutsu.


    Since Rasa doesn''t have automatic protection, unlike Gaara, he was forced to block my taijutsu while calling back his gold dust.


    Unexpectedly, Rasa was pretty good at Taijutsu, unlike child Gaara, who didn''t know anything about taijutsu.


    But My taijutsu was still superior, and Rasa received a few kicks from me.


    "I gotta say you are good at taijutsu, but that''s all there is to it. I will get serious!!."


    Rasa quickly made the distance between us after realizing his taijutsu was weaker than me.


    He was furious and continued to attack fiercer than before. He left some of his gold dust to protect himself while forming other gold dust to various shapes such as spear, hammer to strike me in several directions.


    "Earth style: Earth wall."


    I created an earth wall to block Rasa''s ?ssaults temporarily.


    ''Shit, this guy got serious for real, keeps throwing gold dust at me repeatedly. I can''t get close to him at all.


    It seems like I also have to rely on ninjutsu on this battle.''


    I started to throw stone pistols and earth dragon at him while he blocks and attacks at me with using gold dust.


    -----5 minutes later------


    Wait a minute!! never end?


    God!!! I focused too much on comparing Rasa and Gaara, but I ignored something very important.


    Gaara had almost infinite chakra due to being Jinchuriki, while current Rasa has limited chakra.


    I have a Jounin level chakra reserve. Even if Rasa has the same chakra reserves as me, Rasa has to continually use his chakra to control his gold dust.


    In conclusion, *confident laugh* I just have to drag the battle until he runs out of chakra and easy victory for me. EHehehe.''


    I kept dodging, threw shurikens, etc to make Rasa use his chakra extra.


    After 30 minutes of fighting, Rasa finally realized my plan to exhaust his chakra. He started to use less gold dust and use shurikens more.


    Seeing this, I knew Rasa was trying to conserve his chakra.


    Therefore I decided to force Rasa to spend his chakra.


    Rasa obviously had to use his gold dust to form a barrier in order to protect from paper bombs.


    Soon, I ordered 5 clones to coordinate-attack on Rasa.


    Although Rasa is pretty good at taijutsu, there was no way he could beat my 5 earth clones in taijutsu. Therefore he was forced to use his gold dust again.


    Rasa was about to spread his gold dust to catch me, but then he saw my clones started to explode for no reason.


    He got confused at this. I took this opportunity and used head hunter jutsu.


    "Earth style: Head Hunter jutsu"


    I successfully grabbed his leg and pulled him to the ground.


    But turns out it was Rasa''s gold dust clone.


    "You are not the only one who can use clone jutsu." Real Rasa appeared and attacked me.


    Paper bombs exploded and blew off Rasa''s gold dust.


    Using this chance, I approached to Rasa in close distance.


    Next, I quickly performed "Earth style Barrier:


    Earth Some Prison" on him and started to absorb his chakra.


    If he keeps staying in the dome, I will suck him dry. If he wants to break out, he has to use a considerable amount of chakra.


    Either way, it was a win situation for me.


    Soon, I heard cracking sound and got away from the dome prison.


    Rasa destroyed the dome prison but was panting. I could see that Rasa''s chakra has almost run out.


    "You really got me there.


    I had to admit you have a good brain to think of plan about exhausting my chakra.


    However, I am not done yet, I will end this now."


    Rasa pulled out a red pill from his kunai pocket and ate it.


    Then he raised both hands to the sky and yelled.


    "HAAAAAAAA~~~~!!!!"


    I thought Rasa got retarded.


    "bruh, stop yelling. It''s not gonna make you powerful and save your ?ss from being kick by me."


    Suddenly the ground started to shake slightly. Then large piles of gold dust coming at Rasa in every direction.


    "HYAAAAAAA!!!" The more Rasa screamed the more gold dust came at him.


    "..." I was speechless.


    "Bro, I take my words back. It seems yelling does make people stronger."


    Gold dust started to form into a massive fist in the air when Rasa clenched his fist.


    But it seems Rasa was in pain to perform this massive jutsu.


    ''Hey, system. Do you know what pill Rasa ate just now? It seems that is the cause of this unexpected phenomenon.''


    System: "Answering host, the pill that Rasa ate, is called Magnetic pill.


    It can increase control over Magnetic release to a greater level momentarily. It also increases the chakra reserve by a little margin.


    Only shinobi who possesses Magnetic release are acknowledged to consume it."


    ''Special pill again? Man, there sure are a lot of special pills in this world, alright.''


    Seeing me dazed at a huge amount of gold dust in the air, Rasa started to explain the jutsu randomly.


    "By concentrating every gold dust I have, to form a massive and heavy fist.


    This jutsu would dry out my chakra insanely and damage my physics. But this jutsu''s power is worth it, not even elite jounin can survive this jutsu.


    Now have a taste of my strongest jutsu.


    Ninja art: 100kg Gold Dust Fist Smash!!!"


    I saw a giant fist made of gold dust, crashing down at me.


    "You are not the only one who has ultimate jutsu, though mine is for defense."


    I pulled out a chakra increasing pill from my pocket and ate it to replenish my chakra.


    "HIIIIIYAAAA~~~~~


    Earth style: Earth Super Dome!!!!!"


    I also screamed to see if it can give me more power.


    If there is even a tiny chance of increasing my power, then I sure damn will yell out in every battle in the future.


    Rasa''s Gold Dust Fist crashed at my Earth Super Dome.


    BAAAM!!!!!!!!!!!!


    Sound of crashing can be heard even from miles away and created an exceeding dust storm around us.


    ------------------------------------------


    I was perfectly fine inside the dome, but my charka almost ran out. But I was still stunned by the mighty power of screaming.


    If it was with my previous chakra, I was able to maintain the Earth Super Dome for only 2 seconds.


    But by adding the power of screaming, I was able to extend it to 3 seconds.


    Since I already to confirm the Screaming power theory, I have decided to scream every time I am in pinch.


    I ate a chakra pill to restore a bit of my chakra and started to look for Rasa in a dust storm. I was sure he collapsed somewhere due to charka exhaustion.


    After some time, I finally found Rasa.


    Surprisingly he still had consciousness but lied down helplessly. (Just like Gaara after Naruto beat him up in his rampage mode.)


    "*pant* HOW?? How are you still alive?? *pant*" Rasa was shocked.


    "Umm, let''s just say I have a stroke of great luck. Also, the power of screaming helped me." I answered him.


    Rasa gave me a ''Don''t bullshit me'' look.


    I slowly walked towards to Rasa while holding Kunai in my hand.


    ''Should I kill him or not? If I kill him, there would be no Gaara. That''s too sad, no?


    But this guy is just jackass in future, trying to kill his own son. He also did no shit in the Naruto show. Just ended up dead by snake pedophile.''


    While I was thinking, suddenly I heard the voice.


    "Scorch Style: flamming orbs."


    I saw Pakura creating Scorch orbs and throwing at me.


    (A/N: I don''t know the name of Pakura''s res orb things. So I just named it)


    ''What the fu?k is Pakura doing here?


    Did Gari fail and die?


    No, that''s impossible. Gari is not that weak.


    But how am I gonna dodge this shits? My chakra is too low that I can''t dodge them all.


    Run, me, RUN!!!!''


    "EEEYYYYAAAAHHH!!!! I yelled out to borrow the power of screaming.


    I somehow managed to dodge two orbs but I knew I couldn''t dodge the last orb.


    "Shit!!!"


    BOOM!!!!


    -----------------------------------


    I opened my eyes and saw that I wasn''t hurt. My body was still intact with my head.


    How???


    "*sigh* Its good thing we arrived just in time. Or otherwise, you would be dead by now, captain."


    I heard the voice from my behind. I turned around and saw my private squad members.


    I immediately knew they saved me from that scorch orb.


    "God, thank you guys for saving me. I almost died just now.


    But how did you guys come here?"


    "We saw massive fist up in the sky at your direction, so we headed to you immediately to ?ssist or save you."


    Suddenly, Gari appeared using Shunshin with a bit of messed up clothes.


    "Woah, are you alright, Genji?"


    "Alright, my ?ss!! Because of you, I almost went to heaven. How can you let that girl come and interrupt my fighting?"


    "I am really sorry, Genji.


    When she saw the gigantic fist crashing down, she got pissed and started to head here.


    I tried to stop her but I didn''t expect she would directly ignore me."


    We saw Pakura picking up Rasa while she was wary of us.


    "Should we attack them, Genji? We have our whole squad here." Gari suggested.


    "No, I am sure Pakura sent emergency back up the signal before she came here. Suna shinobi will arrive soon and I b?r?ly have chakra. We will retreat here."


    """Alright!"""


    "But wait, first I need to do something."


    ''Although I won the battle between Rasa, I never gave him any good punch.


    I went through all that and still couldn''t give a good punch. That kinda ticks me off. ''


    I stood up and shouted loudly, so Rasa can hear.


    "Hey, Rasa!!


    Is it so fun, being carried by a woman???


    What a true gentleman to be protected by a lady. Hahaha!!


    What ultimate jutsu???


    In the end, your jutsu gave me no damage at all, Hahaha"


    Everyone in my squad laughed.


    Rasa got pissed after hearing me.


    "You d??kshit, you better fu?k?n? wait for me in the next battle. I will definitely kill you!!!"


    ---------------------------------------------------


    After making Rasa pissed off, I felt better.


    System: "Congratulation host for completing the side quest.


    *Side Quest: Defeat Rasa!!


    Request: Chakra Butterfly Swords (able to infuse any elemental chakra)


    Failure: lose of 10 Kunai set*


    In three seconds, Host can find the rewards in the bush, 5 meters in front of the host."


    I quickly went and grabbed bu??erfly swords.


    Although Iwa and Suna force battle hasn''t ended yet, I was very low on chakra to go back fighting.


    I ordered my squad to retreat and cover me until I recover my charka.

 Chapter 27 - Chunin rank and Signature jutsu

    After recovering my chakra, Me and my squad joined the battlefield again.


    Iwa and Suna force battle lasted until late night.


    We have been fighting for 10 hours straight already.


    Both sides are exhausted as they could.


    Fortunately, Kento has ordered a retreat.


    -----------


    After coming back from the battlefield, I went to my camp straightforward and slept until the next day.


    I was never exhausted like this before. I still can''t believe we had 10 hours battling.


    After a good sleep, I didn''t feel exhausted anymore and was in the top condition.


    I felt like I forgot something, but soon, I remembered what it was after seeing my new bu??erfly swords.


    ''Ah yeah, That Scammer!! I will teach him what happens when he messes with me. I will steal every his weapons and money, hehehehehe!!!''


    After having breakfast, I quickly went to the weapon warehouse to find that scammer.


    When I arrived, I tried looking for him, but no avail.


    Shinobi in charge of Weapon warehouse was not him, but a different person.


    I asked him where was the shinobi who was in charge of Weapon warehouse for yesterday go?


    "Fat and bald? Ahh, you mean Tonton-san? If you are looking for him, then you are too late.


    He is not here anymore.


    Yesterday night, he went back to Iwagakure with few others as messengers to submit weekly reports to Tsuchikage-sama."


    I was speechless. He escaped?? And his name is Tonton? What a weird name.


    "Why didn''t we use messenger-bird? That way would be way quicker, no?"


    "Of course it''s faster if we use messenger-bird. But we use them only for emergencies.


    Tonton-San and others are just taking weekly reports, there is no need to use birds."


    "I understand but how can he be sent as a messenger?


    Messengers should have fast-speed, but that guy is fat, must be slow as pig!!


    "Oh, you are mistaken there, kid.


    You know, even if he fat, he is quite nimble and fast.


    Or else how can he survive every battle, collecting weapons in that chaos if he is slow as a pig?


    Besides, he begged to division commander until yesterday night to send him as a messenger and finally got the role at last moment."


    ''AHH!! That bastard knew I would come for him, so he ran away.


    Smart choice!!


    If you still stayed here, I would have killed you.


    But me, Genji is a person who is very petty if he is angry. I will definitely catch you and torture you, just you wait!!!!!''


    "Okay thanks for informing, buddy."


    ---------------In the battle meeting------------


    Kento and others were discussing casualties from the last battle. I sat in the corner and quietly listened to the report.


    Casualties were heavier than last time as we lost close to 450 shinobi and 50 heavily injured this time.


    In total, we lost around 750 shinobi out of 3000 shinobi. That was 25% of our force.


    In one week, we lost 25%... No matter how you look at it, this was bad, very bad for us.


    "Tsuchikage-sama has sent the information to us about our enemy force.


    Currently, Suna divided their force into 3.


    2 divisions are invading Iwa and Konoha respectively, while we are facing Suna''s last third division.


    Suna third division commander is Yudai, who was head of Suna''s Giant Folding Fan division before the war.


    All of us got worried when we heard the enemy force''s number.


    If it was true, that meant their force is greater and powerful than our force.


    Looking at everyone''s depressed look, Kento decided to change their subjects.


    He looked around and saw me sitting in the corner.


    "By the way, Genji. I heard you and Suna''s genius Rasa had one on one battle and you came up victorious.


    Haha, good job. You have shown Suna trashes how powerful Iwa shinobi are.


    Iwa''s future generation are way better than Suna''s. Hahaha!!"


    Everybody looked towards me and congratulated me.


    If you are wondering how did they know so well, I told my squad to spread my victory during the battlefield in order to lower the morale of Suna force.


    Therefore, I was sure the news of his defeat to fellow Iwa genius kid would bring bad effects to Suna force.


    Also, I beat future Kazekage, I thought I deserved some praise. Hehehe.


    "So Genji, since you have successfully boosted our force morale, I want to reward you.


    Tell me what do you want as a reward but don''t ask for something impossible." Kento asked me.


    I looked at Kento with surprise.


    I received my squad as my reward last time, just a few days ago. And he is telling me to ask for more??


    Besides unlike last time where I played an important role in Iwa''s victory, this time I just won a battle against Suna''s genius.


    I never expected to receive this time.


    But since he asked for it, I didn''t hesitate it.


    We already lost 25% of our force. It was highly unlikely, rather impossible for them to increase my squad.


    I thought for a moment and replied to Kento.


    "Division commander, I wish to attain Chunin rank!!"


    Its been almost 4 years since I became Genin. I thought it''s time to move on to the next rank.


    Hey, Don''t look down on Iwa Chunin privileges.


    Their salaries are 10x better than Genins.


    Most importantly, if Chunin ranks make great achievements in war, they can ask for a break during war.


    Also, They can get a 30% discount (during war, 50% discount) in everything they purchase, including foods, weapons, tools, ero magazines, ero books... (Ahem) *cough*.


    Anyway, Chunin''s privileges are great.


    "Alright, I think your request is reasonable. I will submit a petition for your promotion in the next weekly reports to Tsuchikage-sama. I am sure he will agree easily."


    "Thank you, division commander."


    Everyone in the meeting congratulated me ahead.


    "Attention, everyone. We will launch an attack after 1 week. Make sure have a good rest until then. Also, increase patrol teams during that time." Kento ordered.


    Everyone in the meeting was relieved that they have a one week''s rest.


    I was surprised that Kento actually made a decent order. Maybe losing 25% of our force made him see the reality a bit.


    "That''s the end of today''s meeting. Dismiss!!"


    ----------*Boom* One week has passed---------


    During one week, I obviously trained hard to survive.


    I learned one Earth-style jutsu. It was Earth Style: Rock Pillar Spears.


    This jutsu lets the user create a few rock pillars that will protrude from the ground to skewer the target. The rock pillars will even pass through obstacles to reach their target.


    This jutsu also doesn''t need hand signs to perform. Just need good charka control, which was perfect for me.


    I was finally able to get hang of lighting chakra.


    I can now increase my speed, 20% by charging lighting chakra to my feet.


    After the fight with Rasa, I realized something.


    Although I have an Ultimate defense jutsu, I don''t have ultimate offense jutsu.


    That crazy Uzumaki jounin and Rasa both were close to kill me because they precisely had their own ultimate jutsu.


    It was time to research to create my own signature jutsu.


    ''Most of Earth-style jutsu are for defense. Should I learn lighting offense jutsu?


    Hey system, do you have any good suggestions?''


    System: "System recommends ultimate jutsu similar to Kimimaro''s final dance move: Dance of the Seedling Fern.


    While underground, Kimimaro produces as many as ten thousand blades of bone that sprout from the earth.


    Because of how quickly the bones appear from the ground, how wide an area they cover, and how high into the air they extend, this technique can do extensive amounts of damage, killing indiscriminately.


    If any of his targets should somehow avoid this technique, Kimimaro is able to merge with the bone blades.


    He can then appear from any of them, ideally, one at the target''s blind spot so that he can launch a finishing attack."


    ''Umm....?


    I remember this jutsu.


    While on the verge of dying, Kimimaro used this jutsu, almost succeeded to kill Gaara and Lee, but at the last moment, he died to illness. It''s quite a powerful jutsu.


    Not a bad suggestion, system.


    Now that I think carefully, it is doable to replicate this jutsu with Earth-style jutsu.


    Create tens of thousands of long and thick earth spikes from the ground and use Earth style: Earth travel jutsu to merge with earth spikes to attack enemies from a blind spot.


    Finally, I will blow thousands of earth spikes off using my explosion release.


    Alright, I have decided to make an Earth-style version of Kimimaro''s fifth dance move as my signature jutsu. Hahaha!''


    System: "Host has decided to make his first signature jutsu!!!


    *Quest: Please invent the host''s first signature jutsu in 5 years.


    Reward: Chakra Increasing Pill which increases chakra by 3 times.


    Failure: lose of Host''s weapon (butterfly swords)*"


    ''Long-time Quest, huh?


    The reward is great as usual. My current reserves are about Jounin. If I complete this quest, then my chakra reserve would be around Kage or even more.


    As for Failure, I can buy another bu??erfly swords in the future, so no worry. hehe''


    ---------------------------------------------------------


    Onoki and other council members, including Goro, sat around to discuss war weekly reports.


    "We have received weekly reports from Roshi and Kento''s division, but Masashi hasn''t sent his reports yet?" Onoki asked.


    "Maybe his messengers are running late.


    Anyway, Let''s have look at Kento''s weekly report first." Goro suggested.


    Onoki and councilmen nodded and started to review Kento''s weekly report.


    After reading, they frowned a bit.


    "Lost 25% of force already? That''s way too soon than we expected. What should we do next, Tsuchikage-sama?" One of the elders asked.


    "Let''s send them a bit of reinforcement. We will change the division commander if Kento keeps losing our force at a rapid rate." Onoki ordered.


    Next, everyone''s eye was on a certain promotion petition sent by Kento.


    After reading the petition, Onoki laughed a little while Goro smirked.


    "So that stinky brat, not only alive but doing a good job, huh.


    He even defeated Suna''s top genius kid Rasa. Hahaha, this is the best news I heard today.


    As expected, I was never wrong to appoint him as our greatest genius.


    What do you guys say? Should we promote him?"


    "In the report, he was the reason why our Iwa invasion force first won the Suna defense force.


    He has a strength of the Jounin level and also has been Genin for 4 years.


    I agree to promote him to Chunin." Goro answered.


    Soon everyone agreed and Onoki announced Genji as Iwa Chunin!!!!


    Suddenly Rock member barged in hurriedly.


    "How dare you barge in so rudely during the meeting? Do you have a death wish?" Onoki angrily said.


    "My deepest apologies, Tsuchikage-sama, and esteem elders.


    But it is an emergency.


    An emergency bird messenger came from Masashi''s division."


    "What''s the content?"


    "Sir, in the report, Suna''s Kazekage personally arrived to ?ssist Suna''s invasion force and Masashi-san is asking for emergency reinforcement."


    """WHAT???"""


    Everyone in the room was shocked to hear the news.

 Chapter 28 - Sudden Catastrophe

    It''s has been almost 4 weeks since we, Iwa invasion force invaded Suna.


    But we have made no invasion progress continuously and completely stuck.


    We had a total of 5 battles with Suna defense force led by Yudai until now. Each battle was more chaotic and worse than previous battles. I have lost precious 4 members of my squad.


    During the battles, Rasa always looked for me and chased me like a mad stalker dog.


    After our first fight, which ended with my win, Rasa became very conservative in his chakra. He never used any big-ass jutsu like his giant gold dust fist, etc and our duels always ended as a draw.


    I was literally sick of fighting with him. Gari also got sick of fighting with Pakura.


    Since Gari and Pakura always with Me and Rasa, they also ended fighting each other whenever Me and Rasa fought.


    "Genji, let me fight that boy. I am sick of fighting with that girl all the time." This is what Gari says whenever Rasa chases us.


    But I knew Gari didn''t have any great defense jutsu in his arsenal and will easily be defeated by Rasa, therefore always rejected him.


    "No my friend. I can not allow it. It''s because I heard that Rasa kid is a super dirty homo d??k Gay.


    I heard that once he catches his enemy with his gold dust, not only torture but he would also do this and that kind of thing.


    I am very nimble and fast, so I can avoid his dirty attacks, but you? I am afraid you will get violated cruelly by him during battle."


    I didn''t want to tell him that he is too weak to face Rasa as that might cause the opposite effect and he would challenge Rasa out of frustration and drop dead


    .


    Gari looked at me in a weird way for a minute straight. He finally scratched his head.


    "Enough about this talk. Hey Genji, Can you tell me the overall situation about the war now? You''re a member of the battle plan meeting, so you must know something right?"


    "I see, also don''t you think something was wrong in yesterday''s battle?


    When Iwa and Suna force clash, we always fought each other until midnight, at least for 8 hours.


    But yesterday battle, for some reason Suna, immediately retreated after battling for only 3 hours."


    "Yea, you are right. It''s definitely weird for them to retreat so quickly. I might get an answer to that from the next battle plan meeting in 10 minutes."


    ----------------battle plan meeting---------------


    I arrived first like always. Soon everyone come one by one except Kento.


    For some odd reason, one member (Jounin Senku) had a gloomy face and shaking.


    "It seems like everyone has arrived. Let''s start the battle plan meeting," Jounin Senku announced.


    "Wait a minute. We are clearly missing our commander, Kento-san." one of member told Jounin Senku.


    "Everyone, I have an important announcement to make.


    During yesterday''s battle, our division commander Kento was led to ambush point by Suna commander Yudai and surrounded by 100 Suna Anbu.


    Kento-san fought bravely until the end and passed away in action!!!"


    Everyone in the room, including me got shocked by the news of Kento''s death.


    No matter how stupid Kento was, he was still one of the strongest and influential Iwa shinobi. How hard would it be to kill Jounin commander??


    Losing Kento was really severe for Iwagakure.


    "Impossible, how can Kento-san die so easily? What proof do you have that Kento-san is dead, Senku??"


    "We found his corps, 5km from west of the battlefield. No matter how much you guys deny, reality won''t change. Kento-san is dead."


    Jounin Senko then took out a scroll and summoned the corpse of Kento.


    ''I can''t believe Kento died just like that.


    No wonder Suna ended yesterday''s fight early. Their main target was Kento, not Iwa force.


    Now what will happen to our Iwa force is obvious.


    It''s just a matter of time before everyone in the Iwa force knows about Kento''s death.


    We lost our commander which will lower our morale greatly.''


    "Everyone, although we lost Kento-san, we haven''t lost the war yet.


    Don''t lose hope!!


    I already sent a report of Kento-san''s death to Tsuchikage-sama by emergency bird.


    For now, we need to nominate a temporary replacement commander division and wait until Tsuchikage-sama sends a new commander or reinforcement."


    "Senko is right, we should also hide about Kento-san''s death and drag it as long as we can.


    Also, I suggest Jounin Senko as a temporary commander. He is the first one to find Kento''s death and able to respond well. " Someone supported Senko.


    Everybody followed and voted Jounin Senko as a temporary commander.


    Even if some of us have problems, they knew it was not the time for an internal fight.


    "Report!!! Report!!! Emergency report!!!" A messenger came in while saying out loud.


    All of us looked at messenger while Senko quickly sealed Kento''s corpse back to scroll.


    "What is this emergency report?"


    "Sirs, Another Suna force appeared to our rear side and completely cut off our supply lines. We have been completely surrounded by Suna force!!!"


    This news was like making mincemeat out of our brains.


    "What?? How can the Suna force suddenly appear behind us and surround us? Who is the leader of this force?"


    "It seems like one of Suna''s invasion force''s shinobi Ebizo."


    Everybody made ''Are you fu?k?n? kidding me'' face.


    ''How the hell Ebizo appeared behind us? I thought, with aid of Kazekage, he was fighting with Uncle Masashi''s defense division.


    Wait a minute. Kazekage... Ebizo.....


    SHIT!!! SHIT!!! SHIT!!! SHIT!!!


    I knew something was wrong when Kazekage entered the war so soon, but all of it was just a scheme to trap our Iwa invasion force like a rat and destroy us.


    We are so screwed!!!''


    --------------------------------------------------------------------


    Onoki was angry when he heard the news of Kento''s death. He couldn''t believe just in one month, jounin commander of Iwagakure would die.


    When he heard Ebizo took the rest of his division to cut off the Iwa invasion force, he was beyond angry and crushed table into pieces.


    "These Suna ?ssholes sure are brave, acting wild in Iwa land while killing my jounin commander!!!"


    Onoki knew Suna''s scheme''s target was the Iwa invasion force in Suna. He had to do something about it before the Iwa invasion force gets wiped out.


    Onoki snapped his finger. ROCK member abruptly appeared in front of Onoki to receive order.


    "Call explosion corps leader, Ishika to me right now!"


    ------ 5 minutes later -------


    "Ishika, do you know the current situation now?" Onoki asked.


    "Yes, Ebizo took his invasion force and cut off our Iwa invasion force supply line and surround them. The situation is dire right now." Ishika answered.


    "Not only that, but they also managed to ?ssassinate Kento. Now our Invasion force lost their commander while surrounded by Yudai and Ebizo''s Suna force."


    Ishika showed shocked expression when he heard Kento''s death.


    "Now Ishika, You know if we lose our Invasion force, we will be at a huge disadvantage and might even lose the war. Therefore we must save our Invasion force in Suna.


    I am promoting you as a new Invasion commander to replace Kento.


    I will give you 1000 shinobi to reinforce our Invasion force.


    Strike Ebizo''s force to break their encirclement and save our Invasion force.


    I know this would be hard, so you can take every member of the Explosion Corps 4th division (Suicide Division).


    I don''t mind how you use them, just complete the task I gave you.


    There is no time. Depart as soon as you can."


    "Understood, Tsuchikage-sama. I will definitely save our Invasion force." Ishika took off right away.

 Chapter 29 - Suggesting Idea

    After Kento''s death, there was no way the Suna force would be quiet. Suna launched an all-out attack on us one day later.


    Fortunately, unlike Kento, Jounin Senko (temporary commander) was quite a smart guy.


    He just got brainwashed by Kento''s will of stone speech and agreed to Kento''s reckless plans before like others.


    He predicted Suna''s all-out attacks and immediately announced to form defense formation in our force.


    Earth-styles are known for defense, therefore obviously Iwa shinobi were great at defending.


    So far we have successfully repelled Suna''s full-out attacks for 3 days.


    But I knew if this keeps up, Ebizo''s Suna force would eventually arrive and strike us from behind. Iwa invasion force would slowly destroyed.


    Also since Ebizo''s Suna force cut off all of our supply lines, grim conditions such as short on rations and weapons, started to rise.


    ----------


    Top-managements shared Ebizo''s Suna force report to our force but we had kept secret of Kento''s death to our Invasion force.


    Only idiots would announce therir commander''s death news to troops while having difficult battle.


    Suna''s spies started to spread rumors of Kento''s death to our camp, but top-managements never admitted such a news.


    However, some of our forces started to believe Kento''s death rumors and hugely dropped morale.


    Gari also asked me about Kentpo''s rumors.


    Even if Gari didn''t believe rumors, constant hearing the revelations about Kento''s death, it surely doubted him a little.


    "Hey, Genji. Suna forces were shouting about Kento commander''s death and there are rumors about his death in our camp too. Is it true?"


    Gari was pretty straightforward with me, he asked me casually in public.


    "Gari, I never thought you would believe what enemies nonsense. It''s just an enemies'' scheme to confuse us.


    Of course, Kento commander is alive. I met him last battle plan meeting and even saw him talking a walk at yesterday night.


    How can he die?


    Don''t just blindly believe the rumors, buddy."


    "Of course I don''t believe rumors. But it''s just that I haven''t seen him for a week now. I thought something happened to him."


    "Don''t worry. I am sure he is safe."


    I didn''t tell truth to Gari even if he was my best friend.


    I trust him, but I was afraid someone would hear our conversation. There are too many prying ears around us.


    "Also Genji, Why are we always in defense for 3 days? Isn''t it suppose to be us who should attack?"


    ''Gari, you correct.


    We should be attacking them, but somehow our position was swapped and now we are forced to defend.


    But with Kento as our commander, I should have seen this coming.


    Tch!!


    If I knew this soon, I should have begged to Captain Ishika to transfer me to Uncle Masashi''s division, no matter what.


    Shit, at this rate, our force would be destroyed completely.''


    "It''s part of the strategy we planned. You don''t have to worry."


    I could only lie to Gari helplessly.


    ---------------------------------------------------------------------


    "We have bad news, everyone.


    Ebizo''s Suna force is closing into us and they have already reached to border checkpoint where we fought Suna defense force month ago."


    This news instantly dropped members'' morale and turned it into a panic.


    "We also have good news. Tsuchikage-sama sent 1000 reinforcement led by Ishika-san to aid our Invasion force.


    We still have hope and can turn the situation around to our favor." Jounin Senko happily announced the report delivered by messenger-birds from Onoki.


    Everyone seemed to relieved a little by the news. This was probably the best news we received after Kento''s death.


    We all hoped for Captain Ishika to break off Ebizo''s Suna force''s encirclement and aid us in this desperate situation.


    "Now I have brought you all not to just share this news. let''s discuss the problems arising in our force.


    Firstly about Kento''s death rumor. What should we do?" Senko quickly got into the main discussion.


    I raised my hands to give a suggestion. Everyone''s eye on me, made me feel uncomfortable.


    "Genji, you don''t need to be uncomfortable. Just tell us what''s your suggestion." Senko kindly asked.


    "I think we should have someone to transform into Kento-san and walk around the camp while encouraging our force every night.


    This can deny Kento-san''s rumor and also raise our force morale."


    ''Hehe, I got this idea from Konohamaru transformed to Naruto during his Hokage ascension ceremony.''


    Everyone seemed to thought about it for a while.


    "Not a bad idea, Genji.


    Transforming into Kento-san is easy but the problem is to find someone who can act like Kento-san." Senko said.


    "Also, Kento-san''s death is secret which means we have to find that person among us." one of the members also replied.


    "But I think Genji''s idea is the only way for us to calm down rumor."


    "blah, you *$#, blah bla, meslahsdufhasdf"


    "ksjfadf...."


    Debate for 10 minutes and finally everyone agreed to follow my plans.


    -------------


    "Now that we agreed to Genji''s idea, who should be the transformer?"


    Everyone seemed to avoid contact with others.


    Of course, they didn''t want the do it.


    If they acted somehow wrong as Kento-san and our force would discover the plan, then it''s would be like suicide to our force and end of the Iwa invasion force.


    ''What??? Hey, don''t drag me.


    I already contributed by suggesting, so shouldn''t be one of you guys to do the job??


    Don''t just pick on weakest!!!"


    "I think Genji should be the one since he is the one suggested," Senko said.


    ''I knew it, you dare to pick on me!! You are the one replaced Kento, so shouldn''t you be the one do the job!!!!''


    "Yea, also except you, all of us are pretty well known.


    If one of us transforms to Kento-san, our force would quickly realize one of us is missing whenever Kento is around and would raise suspicion." random member nominated me too.


    ''You famous, bitch?


    I don''t even know your damn name even now and you call yourself well known??


    While 70% of the Iwagakure population knows me and considered as Iwa greatest genius.


    And you say I am not famous??


    What bullshit!!!


    Why don''t you make some more sensible reason, damn you!''


    "Um, I also agreed that Genji is perfect for the job.


    I heard he was very great at Transforming jutsu since academy that he even fooled guards and sneaked into Iwagakure Public Ninja section library using transformation."


    ''Asshole, don''t talk like I am the only one good at transformation jutsu.


    You all fu?k?n? grown-ups should be better than me in transformation.''


    "Indeed. I almost forgot, but Genji, didn''t you learned will of stone personally by Tsuchikage-sama with his son, Kitsuchi?


    What a fortune you have, haha!


    If Tsuchikage-sama taught you personally, then I am sure your will of stone is great as Kento-san''s."


    ''Fortune my ?ss!! That old man Onoki didn''t teach me shit.


    I was just a cleaner there!!!!


    That was hell itself!! How about you idiot go and learn from him?''


    "Genji, what do you say?" Senko finally asked for my opinion.


    "Ehh, I think this job is too challenging for me.


    Besides I personally don''t know Kento-san''s well. How can I act like him?


    I think someone else should do it."


    "Don''t worry. Sometimes we have to go through difficult challenges to be stronger.


    All of us grown-ups here already went through that phase, but you still haven''t. Consider this as training and do it." Senko requested or rather ordered me to do it.


    ''How the fu?k does that make me strong? You bullies!!''


    "... Okay, I will do it, Senko-san."


    ''What was the point of asking me if you already decided to force this shit on me??''


    I could only helplessly agree.


    "Okay, now we have decided that Genji will do the job. Anyone has a problem?"


    """""No!! We all agree."""""


    ''You all ungrateful d??kshi*ts. I helped you by giving an idea and is this how you pay me?


    You better remember this!! I will return this favor to you all someday.


    From now on, I will never suggest idea, you all should just drop dead.''


    Like this, I was forced to become Kento every night.


    ----------------While on Ishika side-----------------


    Ishika and his reinforcements ran at full speed for 3 days straight and finally saw Ebizo''s Suna force settled into border checkpoint.


    Ebizo was not an idiot and prepared for Ishika''s reinforcement. That was why he settled in border checkpoint, where it was easy to defend.


    "What should we do? Ishika-san?" vice-commander of Ishika''s force asked to Ishika.


    "Ebizo''s force has come a long way.


    I am sure their ration would run out soon. How about we use Exhaustion strategy and wait until they retreat themselves."


    one of Jounin accompanying Ishika said.


    Ishika looked at the jounin disappointingly.


    "Ebizo''s force intercepted our monthly supplies including ration to our Invasion force.


    Therefore they should have enough ration to hold us while our invasion force will soon run out of their ration.


    If we use your strategy, not only we fail our mission, the whole Iwa Invasion force will be annihilated.


    You should first look carefully before making a strategy." Ishika disapproved the Jounin''s idea.


    "I am sorry, commander. I was too rash and haven''t thought it thoroughly." Jounin apologized.


    "Listen to all of you.


    Send spies first. I wanna know how many shinobi are there in Ebizo''s force and who are the top-managements of this force, etc. I want to know all the information you can get.


    Also, don''t let our force to sleep tonight.


    Divide force to 2, one for patrol and defense while other is to set up an ambush in our camp in case the enemy suddenly do a surprise attack on us tonight." Ishika ordered.


    "Sir, set up an ambush? Do you really think Ebizo would come attack us tonight?" vice-commander asked to Ishika.


    "You guys might don''t know, but Ebizo is a very crafty guy.


    I am sure he already knows we are already here and our camp location.


    Most of Ebizo''s strategies rely on the element of surprise.


    He will probably come to attack us tonight or tomorrow night.


    So be prepared."


    """Yes, Sir!!"""

 Chapter 30 - Will of Stone (Speech)

    (A/N: This chapter will be solely about mc pretending to be Kento and tell will of stone.


    If you are not interested, then you can just look away.


    You can say this chapter is like an interlude.)


    After a tough defensive battle against Suna''s force, the sun has fallen down and the moon rose up, shining brightly. It was time for me to act as Kento.


    I felt like I was getting close to doom.


    Members of the battle plan meeting will be sidewalk me to protect me against Suna''s spies sudden attacks.


    No matter what, we had to make this successful.


    Senko took out Kento''s body, his outfit, accessories, and his full uniformed picture to me to use as a reference.


    After the 5th attempt, they finally approved my transformation.


    "Listen, Genji. If Kento-san appears, a lot of people would be glad and ask a lot of questions to you. So you need to be quick-witted and think fast for answers.


    Here is the scenario. Kento-san battled with Yudai and other elite Suna forces alone and heavily injured, not dead.


    Therefore he has to rest a while to recover his strength back." Jounin Senko told me.


    "But I lied to my friend (Gari) that Kento-san was safe and healthy. Won''t it be contradicting?" I questioned Senko.


    "It''s okay. We can''t just make another fake scenario just for your one friend.


    This time, more and more people are believing Kento-san''s death. We can''t let this happen, no matter what." Senko replied to my question.


    -------------------------


    We walked around the camp as I greeted some of our injured shinobi as Kento.


    "Kento-san, I knew you were alive. There is no way our commander will die that easily!!!"


    "Who is the one said our division commander dead, huh?"


    "Yes, Our Kento-san will never die, leaving us alone. Haha"


    "I am sorry, division commander for believing your death rumor."


    "blah blah...."


    Looking at Iwa shinobi happy and excited to see their commander, me and other top-commands just sighed.


    ''I am sorry to you all but your dear lovely Kento is dead and left you all alone in the middle of enemy land.


    Because of that, I have to do this farce every night.''


    Top-commands all stood around me to protect me from any harm.


    "Well, last week, I had a fierce battle with Suna division commander and its elite Jounins alone.


    Although I managed to survive, I was heavily injured. So I had to take a week to recover." I answered them just like what was in the script.


    I answered several questions from some of the Iwa shinobi.


    Suddenly, I heard someone jumped into crowds excitedly and got close to me while crying.


    "Kento-san, I knew you were alive!!! Do you remember me?


    You drew a dragon tattoo for my birthday present 2 weeks ago but didn''t finish in time. Can you finish it now ?" He came over and asked me.


    ''...''


    ''How the hell would I know you? I am not Kento!!!


    Also, I have to draw a tattoo? No shit!''


    "Kento-san, What are you talking about?


    You didn''t draw it on me, you drew it on my shirt." He looked at me suspiciously.


    ''Oh shit!! Why didn''t you say he drew it in your shirt first!!


    Normally they drew tattoo in your body, no?


    But I am in trouble now.''


    I looked at Senko to save me from the pinch.


    "Ahem, Division commander still hasn''t recovered and his memory sometimes can be fuzzy. So please don''t mind him too much." Senko stepped in and quickly gave an explanation.


    "Ohh, I see. I understand." Iwa shinobi answered Senko.


    After that, he kept asking me several questions. But I manged to swiftly answer or dodge the questions.


    But other battle plan meeting members quickly stood in front of me and stopped him.


    Everything happened so fast and all of it took within 2 seconds.


    Turns out he was a Suna spy and tried to expose me. When he failed, he tried to f?r??b?? undo my transformation.


    ''Holy shit!!! I almost undo transformation out of shock.


    That was close, too close. I thought I was done.''


    After the incident, We quickly moved around the camps for 30 minutes.


    We also caught several Suna spies, trying to expose or harm me.


    Just as I thought we finally finished, Senko came up to me.


    "You are doing a great job, Genji. Your accent and way of talk is just like Kento-san so far.


    "Thank you Senko-san.


    Wait, hold up... What??


    Give the will of stone speech?


    I never heard of this. This was not even the script we created. Why do I have to give a speech in front of our force?" I asked Senko angrily.


    "Well, you see. It''s because every time Kento-san goes out to the public, he always tells will of stone speech and increases our force morale. It became more like habit.


    If you don''t give, our force will certainly get suspicious of it."


    "But, I never gave out Will of stone speech before!! How am I suppose to do it?"


    "Just tell what Kento-san told us at first battle plan meeting. I believe in you."


    ''I can''t tell him that I covered my ears and didn''t listen to it, can I?''


    "Oh god, This is so tiring!!" I couldn''t swear or disobey in front of my superior.


    We went to a place where I would give out the will of stone speech.


    There were already hundreds of Iwa shinobi waiting for me.


    I slowly stepped to the platform.


    *sigh* ''If I knew this happens, I should listen to Onoki''s boring lesson more carefully. I am so screwed.


    Wait a minute, All these fighting made me forget that I have an ultimate know-everything system with me.


    Hey system, do you know what is the will of stone?''


    System: "Don''t worry, host. System has an explanation on the will of stone."


    ''As expected of System, you have every information. I love you, buddy!!''


    For 3 minutes, System has told me what''s the will of stone directly to my brain.


    However, I still didn''t get what is the will of stone crap.


    (A/N: First Tsuchikage told Onoki what''s the will of stone, so I am just gonna copy that shit.)


    I decided to copy exactly what the System said to me.


    I cleared my voice and proudly went off to give a speech.


    (A/N: Okay, from now on is the lesson about the will of stone. You can just skip until the end if you don''t want to know about this bullcrap. hahaha)


    "Hello, my fellow powerful Iwa shinobi!!!


    Right now I am standing here, not as your division commander, but as your teacher of will of stone.


    Lately, a lot of you are showing signs of weakness and gives up. This means you carry the weak will of stone.


    To the person who mastered will of stone to a great level, he can tell the worth of any stone he sees just by taking a good look at it for a moment.


    There is a rock in the center of the Iwagakure stone monument. But even if you replace it with regular stone, no one would ever know, except the cleaner.


    What''s really important is the will of stone inside you. Key hidden within will of stone you guys possess is the power to change the entire world.


    (A/N: But I am sure Iwa never changed the world before.)


    But if you aren''t careful, I worry that precious will of yours may disappear just like the current situation where lot you believing what enemies saying and losing hope."


    I don''t know what the fu?k I am talking about, but it seems effects are showing as audiences are all listening to me attentively.


    I became quiet for a while to build suspense.


    "Hurdles, Obstacles, Restrictions!!


    As you guys keep running into them, you may abandon your will. Make excuses or perhaps even replace it with hatred.


    Yes, Hatred which could destroy so much, never failed to destroy the man who hated, and this was an immutable law.


    Listen well!!


    You will never abandon it and always stride with pride!!"


    I loudly shouted.


    That was the end of what system said, however, I didn''t hear the sound of clapping that I was expecting.


    I guess they are too awed by my speech that they forgot to clap.


    But no matter how long I waited, they never clapped. I started to get panic.


    "So what I am saying is that, eh eh,


    (*thinking & panicking*) Will of stone about never gives up on your ninja way!! Yea that''s it.


    Alright, that''s for today''s speech, you can clap for me if you don''t mind."


    I got panicked in the end and just said out Naruto''s catchphrase.


    Audiences, realizing speech was finished, all started to clapping.


    Some of them were even crying and started to apologize out of nowhere for believing enemies'' rumor.


    (A/N: Okay, that''s it for the will of the stone lesson. I can''t think of any more bullshit to write about will of stone.)


    Senko and others escorted me back while praising me for giving a wonderful speech.


    "Haha, As expected of our greatest genius. Your philosophy about the will of stone is just perfect." Senko congratulated.


    "We can say today''s operation was a huge success.


    We halted Kento-san''s death rumor, increased our force''s morale, and even captured a few Suna spies.


    Let''s do our best tomorrow evening, too."


    I was happy to listen to Senko''s words until I heard the last part.


    ''What a pain in the ?ss, I have to do it every night. I ain''t even getting paid for this shit.''

 Chapter 31 - Suicide Divisons power

    * In Ebizo''s Suna force *


    Ebizo received a report from spies that Iwa reinforcement, led by Iwa explosion corps head Ishika, has reached near them.


    Ebizo quickly ordered a meeting.


    After a few minutes later, 3 tough-looking Suna shinobi came to Ebizo''s camp.


    "Alright, I have news that Iwa''s reinforcements are right in front of us. Any ideas, what should we do?" Ebizo first spoke.


    "I recommend we defend." One of them suggested.


    "Yea, we don''t have to rush things, they should be the one. Let''s wait for them, first."


    One by one Jounins agreed to the first guy''s idea.


    Ebizo was silent for a while.


    We should use this opportunity to do a surprise attack. They will never think we would strike them first." Ebizo told to other Jounins.


    Jounins didn''t even need a second to agree with Ebizo.


    "What a great idea, sir. That''s like the best idea I ever heard in my entire life."


    "As expected of great Ebizo-sama. Nobody can come close to Ebizo-sama in tactics. Those Iwa reinforcements are finished now."


    "No wonder, people are calling Ebizo-sama, the great genius."


    (A/N: What a great bootlickers)


    "When should we strike them? Ebizo-sama?"


    "We should attack them while they are still tired. Tonight will be perfect.


    Is there anyone who disagrees with me or has a better idea?" Ebizo replied.


    "Ebizo-sama, you are the brain of Suna.


    No one here can bring better ideas than you."


    "I am sure no one can match Ebizo-sama''s strategy. It''s the best strategy I received in my life."


    "blah blah blah. .."?


    After 10 minutes of continuously bootlicking, Ebizo got sick of them and shouted them.


    "enough , you idiots. There is a limit of how you praise someone, you d??kshits.


    Don''t make it too obvious if you are going to praise me!!


    Alright, now who is going to lead night raid?"


    "Me, sir!"


    "These two are jackass and noobs, Ebizo-sama. While I am perfect for the job."


    Three jounins started to fight themselves to get the role of night raid leader.


    They eventually started to curse at each other.


    "ENOUGH, YOU PIECE OF FUCKTARDS!!! How dare you swear in front of me, the superior. How disgraceful!!


    Instead of you fighting each other like a dog, why don''t three of you co-charge the night raid together?"


    "As expected of Ebizo-sama, giving out a solution so quickly!!!


    We really respect you Ebizo-sama.


    Don''t worry, Ebizo-sama. 3 fo us together, we will destroy Iwa reinforcement in 3 hours, sir!!"


    (*Next Morning*)


    The end of bootlickers'' story


    -------------------------------------------


    Ishika and others are in the room to discuss Suna''s failed night raid.


    "Hahaha, those Suna idiots acted exactly what Ishika-san predicted. We even killed that 3 Suna idiots who were in charge of Suna raid force."


    Everyone was awed by Ishika''s prediction for Suna''s night raid.


    If it wasn''t Ishika''s order, they would have been huge losses during Suna night raid.


    "Enough with cheering, there are still enemies. So tell me what information our spies got?" Ishika asked.


    "According to our spies, there were approximately 3000 shinobi in Ebizo''s force.


    But due to yesterday''s failed night raid, we are expecting them to have 2500 shinobi left.


    Also, Ebizo has absolute authority in the force and nobody can argue with him." Vice commander reported the information.


    "They still have 2500 shinobi. While we have only 1000 shinobi with us. It would nevertheless be a tough fight." he added.


    After hearing vice-commander, everyone''s face turned from excitement to gloomy.


    Ishika suddenly stood up.


    "As everyone thinks, it could be impossible to defeat them with only 1000 shinobi.


    Although it is sooner than I expected, I decided to deploy the explosion corps 4th division aka, Suicide division.


    Now it is our turn to do night raid. We will open our way for suicide division to charge at their main camp and supply buildings tonight.


    Everybody be prepared!!!" Ishika ordered.


    ""Yes sir!!""


    Ebizo was shocked that his plan was seen through by Iwa. He also lost 3 Suna Jounins vice-commanders.


    Even though they were annoying and bootlickers, their strength still was valuable to his force.


    He truly didn''t expect there is someone among Iwa who actually uses the brain.


    "It seems that I have underestimated Iwa. Time to reorganize the strategy."


    Ebizo decided to use an attrition tactic, drag this battle as much as he can until the Iwa invasion force would be wiped out either due to Yudai''s force or starvation.


    He wasn''t going to fight Ishika'' force directly now as his force''s morale has already dropped significantly due to failing night raid.


    He ordered a complete defense formation.


    Ebizo was expecting Iwa reinforcements to rush attack them madly in the afternoon, but Iwa force never appeared.


    ''What? They didn''t attack us?


    Although we suffered the loss, it doesn''t change the fact that Iwa reinforcements are desperate to charge in and save their Invasion force.


    But why didn''t they attack us? They must be plotting something big.''


    No matter how long Ebizo and his force waited for Iwa''s offense, they never came.


    Ebizo-couldn''t wait any longer and ordered a retreat to the camp.


    But he still worried that Iwa would come, so he increased defense of camp to the highest level.


    5 hours later, the sun rose down and it became dark.


    Ebizo was resting in his camp suddenly he heard the loud noise.


    BOOM!!!


    Then several Suna guards came to him shaking and say, "Ebizo-sama, we are under surprise attack by Iwa''s force!"


    But Ebizo was calm despite hearing the news.


    "Calm down, we already anticipated that they might attack us at night. That''s why I increased the defense of camp to the max.


    Wake everyone up and drive them away, simply as that."


    -----------------------------------


    Ishika ordered to attack Suna base camp in the middle of late night.


    700 Iwa shinobi charged at Suna base with full speed.


    Ishika left 300 as reserves if something unexpected happens.


    Suna force seemed to well prepared for Iwa''s sudden raid and was doing a good job defending their base camp.


    Ishika already predicted this and he didn''t care about it.


    His main force would be suicide division.


    He just had to draw out Suna''s main fighting force during the battle and it would be his victory.


    As expected, after 10 minutes, all of Suna''s force appeared to drive away Iwa''s force from their base.


    Ishika stood up and immediately signaled.


    "It''s time now. Tell our forces to retreat while dispatching 100 Suicide division members to enemies.


    We will show them the mighty power of Suicide division."


    On the signals of Ishika, Iwa forces started to retreat while the Suicide division QUIETLY and LEISURELY approached to Suna forces.


    Suna forces haven''t noticed that a small unit of 100 was closing at them as most of them were focused on Iwa force''s retreat. Also, it was dark and hard to see.


    (A/N: As for sensors, they can''t even separate allies and foes in dark. Don''t even rely on them during all-out battle. Joking haha.)


    Ebizo was worried that they might get ambushed if they chase too far, so he ordered forces to stop chasing.


    Suicide division members just transformed into random Suna shinobi and proudly and comfortably joined Suna forces.


    Some of them even whistled on the way.


    After reaching main Suna force, Suicide division members all grinned. They ate, slept, read, trained, pooped, peed, literally lived a life just for this moment.


    ""FOR THE VICTORY OF IWA!!!!!""


    They all boomed themselves up in the middle of Suna force.


    BBBBOOOOOOOOMMMMMM!!!


    (A/N: Let''s say the explosion was as big and powerful as Deidara''s mighty self suicide bomb in his fight with Sasuke.


    I mean, 100 people just bombed themselves up, they have been waiting for just this moment.)


    The explosion took shape of Iwagakure''s symbol and went off.


    Ebizo and Suna forces are panicked by great explosions, but it was too late to even act.


    Luckily Ebizo stood at the edge of Suna force and took the least damage from the explosion. But Explosion still took away hundreds of Suna shinobi.


    Seeing an explosion, Ishika shouted.


    "To all Iwa shinobi, the time has come. It''s time to annihilate Suna force and save our invasion force.


    ALL IWA SHINOBI, CHARGE!!!!!!"


    With Ishika''s shouting, 1000 Iwa shinobi charged at already disarrayed Suna force.


    Of course, Ebizo wasn''t stupid to order, already traumatized Suna shinobi to stop the Iwa force who are charging like mentally-challenged demented dogs.


    He ordered to abandon to camp and fully retreat by 10 km.


    Iwa force chased Suna force until the sunrise.


    "Let''s see. I am sure suicide division members cut down half of Suna''s force.


    Our force chases them, probably took out 200~300 Suna shinobi.


    By calculating, I am sure the current Ebizo''s force would be left with around 1000 shinobi." Ishika spoke to himself.


    The Vice commander came to Ishika to report the aftermath of the battle.


    "Sir, We have successfully claimed the Suna border checkpoint and Ebizo''s Suna forces retreated all the way.


    By estimation, their force is around 1000 shinobi, just like our force number.


    Our losses are only 20 dead Iwa shinobi."


    "Just as I expected.


    Alright, It''s time for us to completely annihilate Ebizo''s force and unite with our Invasion force.


    Send a messenger bird to our Invasion force to retreat and surround Ebizo''s retreat line.


    Now it''s our turn to encircle them and strangle it to death." Ishika announced his plan.


    "But sir, we don''t have a messenger bird which goes to our Invasion force currently. Only in Iwagakure have them." Vice-commander told to Ishika.


    "Don''t worry. I have an emergency bird that goes exclusively to any explosion corps members. We can use that.


    Let''s end Ebizo''s whole career! hahaha!!!" Ishika told to Vice-commander.

 Chapter 32 - Garis bribery

    Currently, every day was a literal hell for me. If other Iwa shinobi was having a hard time, then I was having an extra hard time than them.


    In the daytime, I have to be prepared to risk my life to defend for Suna''s offenses.


    In the night time, I had to transform and pretend to be Kento to encourage Iwa shinobi. This was taking a toll on me.


    Also, our food storages are almost empty, at most we have only 3 days worth. If we quickly don''t do something, we are so screwed.


    "Bro, I found tons of mushrooms 100m away from here. Come hurry!!" Gari told us.


    Currently, Gari and my squad (only 2 left now) were searching for the food to eat ourselves. When we saw the fruits and mushrooms, my squad members got angry and started to kick Gari.


    "You idiot, these are poisonous mushrooms. Are you trying to kill us or what? Didn''t you learn about poison mushrooms during when you are in explosion corps 5th division?"


    "I know they are poison, damn it. But all of us are trained to endure poison mushroom, so it''s okay for us to eat them!" Gari started to fight back.


    "Are you fu?k?n? dumb? We learned about poison mushrooms so we can avoid eating them, not to gulp them down to your dirty mouth!!!"


    "I was told that we could eat them in case of an emergency!!"


    Just as Gari and squad members were fighting, we saw a bird coming at us.


    "Oh, please, like hell we can not find any animals here. See!! We already found a bird.


    Now we just have capture it. Just let you know Gari, we not gonna share it with you if you keep being a stubborn ?ss." Saying these words, my squad members started to shoot kunai and shuriken to kill the bird.


    "And if I capture it, you guys are getting nothing!"


    Gari also joined, in hunting the bird shamelessly.


    However bird was very quick and nimbly dodged the Kunai and shurikens.


    For some odd reason, the bird kept coming at us despite we were trying to kill it. I thought the bird definitely had mental problems.


    Finally, Gari used his explosion to speed up his kunai and killed the bird. Squad members all had a frustrating face.


    "Shit, how come that bird is so nimble and fast??"


    Saying the words, Gari started to ran to get the bird.


    The rest of us also followed Gari, went to the place where the bird fell.


    But all of us stopped moving when we had a clear look at the bird.


    "Shit, that bird..." one of the squad members couldn''t even finish his sentence.


    "Yea, that bird IS our explosion corps MESSENGER BIRD!!!!" I finished his sentence.


    In explosion corps, there is a certain rule: We must not kill explosion corps'' messenger birds.


    If you go against this rule, punishment is 50 million yen fine and have to finish 20 A-rank missions without any payment.


    This rule obviously indicates that the explosion corps'' messenger bird is very valuable.


    Explosion corps'' messenger bird is very special compared to regular messenger-bird.


    They can explode themselves up if they are caught by enemies, to protect the information.


    Also, they are very super damn hard to breed. I guess this is the main reason why punishment is so harsh.


    All of us looked at Gari. Gari''s jaw was still wide opened and we could see that he was very terrified.


    "Dude, how can you kill our explosion corps'' messenger bird? You really have a gut, I tell you that."


    "Yea, I think you should get glasses in the future to see better. Honestly, we tried to stop you, but you never listened to us."


    "Even if you are hungry, you shouldn''t break the rule, bro."


    Seeing all of us were sprouting bullcraps and blaming him, Gari snapped back and started to curse back.


    "What? You guys also threw shurikens to kill the bird. Actually, you guys first started to hunt the bird. How dare you pretend to be a nice guy!!"


    "Hey, but it''s you who killed it. Good luck paying 50 million yen and 20 A-rank mission. Hahahaha!!" Squad members made fun of Gari.


    "Wait, besides 4 of us here, no one saw this, right? Then as long as I shut you guys'' mouth, nobody knows this. hehehehe, hahahahaha!" Gari laughed like a villain found an ultimate way to destroy the world.


    He looked at me first, I knew he was trying to shut my mouth. But I was planning to let this slide as he saved my ?ss countless times during the battles and also he closed his eye when I save Nagato too.


    "Don''t worry, bro. I owed you a lot. I will close my eyes and pretend this didn''t happen." I replied to Gari.


    Gari was touched and gave me ''You are the best friend'' look.


    "Thanks very much, Genji."


    "Hey, you are still not safe yet. I am not sure about those two over there." I told Gari.


    Gari quickly looked at our 2 squad members.


    "Hey, I saved you two ?sses, last battle. So you better shut your mouths about this."


    "Please, Gari. We also saved your ?ss last, last battle. So I think we didn''t owe you anything.


    Gari suddenly walked towards them and while his hand was in Kunai pocket. His eyes looked intimidating and deadly.


    "I didn''t want to use this method, but you guys left with no choice," Gari said after getting close to them, enough distance to stab them.


    He stood in front of them and pulled out his... book.


    Book''s cover had several women''s pictures with Iwa shinobi uniform.


    "What is this, Gari?" Squad members asked him.


    "This is a beauty ranking book of Iwa woman shinobi. Here contains every Iwa girl shinobi''s pictures, their three sizes, and their types.


    I will give you this book if you promise to forget this incident." Gari said it while shaking his hand.


    As soon as Gari said those words, Squad members quickly grabbed Gari''s hand.


    "Isn''t that super-premium top 3rd ranking ''hard to get'' ero information book??? ????????


    I looked at this situation with shock.


    ''That''s super-premium top 3rd ranking ero information book!!! Shit, I shouldn''t have helped him so quickly.


    Besides, how the hell these guys know about this stuff? I am an exception, but aren''t they literally 12?


    How the hell did Gari get that book? And he didn''t tell me about this? How dare he!!!!''


    After bribing squad members, We all examined the bird to find the information paper.


    After 30 minutes of observation, we find the paper in its ?ss and quickly wiped the shit.


    ''How did this dirty bird hide the paper inside his ?ss? Wtf, creepy...''


    Following seeing the information, all 4 of our faces turned into relief and hope.


    -------------------------------------------------


    (* In battle plan meeting *)


    Previously, including Kento and me, there were a total of 11 people in this meeting.


    But now, only 5 people are left.


    If you ask me, I am very happy that these bullying non-responsible fu?kers died. That''s what they get for pushing all hard-works at me.


    "Ishika-San delivered extremely good news to us. He also gave us the first order as our superior. Genji, tell others about the news." Senk happily told to members of the meeting.


    I stood up and started to tell members about good news.


    "Ishika-san''s reinforcement has defeated Ebizo''s Suna force and successfully broke Suna''s encirclement on us.


    We now no longer surrounded by enemies and our supply line has brought back again."


    Everyone was very happy and cheered. Soon, they asked to confirm if is it reliable news.


    "This news was delivered by explosion corps'' messenger Bird. Please don''t question its validity.


    Also, he gave us an order to retreat from here and block Ebizo''s force retreat lines and any Suna''s reinforcement, coming to aid Ebizo''s force.


    We will surround them with Ishika-san''s reinforcement to completely annihilate Ebizo''s force.


    According to information, they should be southeast 2 days away from us. Their current force is estimated to around 1000."


    I finished my report and sat down.


    "By the way, how many of us are there now?" Senko asked.


    "1436 Iwa shinobi, but if we only count those able to fight, then 1188 Shinobi, sir.


    Although we tried to minimize our loss, we still lost half of our shinobi force."


    "Umm, it''s still okay, let''s follow Ishika-san''s order. We will retreat tonight.


    Create a small unit, they are tasked to make traps and stall or misguided Enemies'' pursuit.


    If it is necessary, then they can act as a decoy.


    I want Kanka (random dude in the meeting) to be in charge of this small unit.


    I am counting on you, Kanka." Senko ordered.


    Kanka stood up and told that he will do his best to do the job.


    "Alright, Everyone, prepare for a retreat immediately!


    Make sure Suna bastards won''t know!"


    ----------------*Next Day Morning*--------------------------


    Yudai received a report that Iwa Invasion force suddenly retreated yesterday night.


    But he wasn''t worried. According to his thought, Iwa Invasion force retreating was obvious.


    They don''t have their commander or food and they can''t keep defending. Which leaves only retreat option for them.


    "We will pursue them slowly. I am sure Ebizo-san''s force will block them if they retreat too far. Anyway, they are trapped like a rat, so they will be destroyed no matter what they do, hahaha!"


    Yudai didn''t know Ebizo lost badly to Ishika''s force. He is still thinking that Ebizo''s force is behind and pressuring the Iwa Invasion force.

 Chapter 33 - Sacrificing

    Yudai has received a letter of help from Ebizo, one day after the Iwa invasion force''s retreat.


    He couldn''t believe Ebizo lost to Iwa reinforcement.


    He thought the Iwa invasion force would be stopped by Ebizo force, but what actually happening was that the Iwa invasion force retreated, to finish off Ebizo''s remaining force.


    "How the fu?k in the world did this happen? How could Ebizo lose so easily??


    He had around 2500 shinobi under his command and now he b?r?ly has 1000 shinobi!!


    Is Iwa reinforcements that strong??" He angrily asked to shinobi who delivered the letter.


    Suna messenger lowered his head and explained to Yudai what happened during Iwa reinforcement''s night raid on Ebizo''s force.


    "Nani the fu?k? Hundreds of Iwa shinobi suicide bombed themselves in the middle of Suna''s force?! Those Iwa bastards sure are crazy as hell.


    Shit anyway now is not the time to sit and watch!!"


    He quickly ordered to speed up the movement of all of his forces to rescue Ebizo''s force. He couldn''t just sit and do nothing.


    Although Ebizo may have failed this time, but he still was one of the best jounin in Suna and Suna can''t afford to abandon around 1000 shinobi easily.


    ---------------------------------------------------


    Our force has successfully retreated safely from Yudai''s Suna force and kept marching to a pincer attack on Ebizo''s force with Ishika-san''s reinforcement.


    Yudai''s force chased us slowly and our small division was currently stalling them as much as they could.


    After 2 days of marching, we have arrived at Ebizo''s force''s rear side.


    Now, We have to inform Ishika-san that we have already surrounded Ebizo force''s behind and ready for pincer attacks, but we don''t have any way to inform him.


    We were supposed to send back Explosion bird to inform him, however since Gari killed it off, we are very troubled.


    Senko quickly opened the meeting to solve this trouble as soon as we can.


    "Guys, as everyone has realized, we have no method to inform Ishika-san that we arrived at Ebizo''s rear. Any ideas ?" Senko asked everyone.


    "What happened to Explosion bird that delivered Ishika''s instructions to us?" A random member of the meeting asked me.


    "Well, it died right after delivering a letter to me. It seems it has received enemies'' random attacks during the journey." I lied to them.


    "Can we just attack Ebizo''s force on our own accord. Then Ishika-san would know that we are here." Another brainless idiot in the meeting suggested.


    "No, although Ebizo''s force is weakened, they still have around 1000 shinobi with them.


    Currently, Ebizo deployed most of his shinobi in front side to defend from Ishika-san''s reinforcement.


    If we attack them rear side on our accord, they may suffer a bit but that won''t completely destroy Ebizo''s force.


    Then it will be way harder to destroy Ebizo''s force even if we have twice as many shinobi as them. We don''t have time, everyone.


    Yudai probably received Ebizo''s retreat by now and presumably rush here as soon as they could. We have at most 2 or 3 days to eliminate Ebizo''s force before Yudai''s massive force arrives


    That''s why we need to do a pincer attack on Ebizo''s force with Ishika-san''s reinforcements at the same time to thoroughly crush them." Senko explained step by step to members.


    Everyone was quiet after hearing Senko''s explanation.


    I personally didn''t realize the situation was that bad.


    Seeing everyone was quiet, Senko started to talk again.


    "We have to send messengers to inform Ishika-san. Currently, there are two ways to reach him from here.


    One: go and infiltrate through Ebizo force''s camp straight and reach Ishika-san. Very dangerous, but it is the quickest route.


    Two: go round away to avoid Ebizo''s force and reach Ishika-san. But it will take at least 3 days. It will be a disaster if Yudai''s force arrives before our messenger even reach Ishika-san.


    Obviously, I am for option one. Option 2 takes way too long time for us. Raise your hands if you are for option one." Senko asked everyone to vote.


    Everyone knew, Senko was clearly indicating us to choose option one here. Therefore including me, everyone chose option 1.


    I don''t even understand why he even said about option 2.


    "It seems everyone is having the same mind as me. Good.


    Now we need to choose who to send as a messenger. We must not let Ebizo knew we are behind him.


    So we will send only one elite shinobi to a lower chance of getting caught by Ebizo''s force.


    The question is, who do we send?" Senko asked while thinking about the candidate.


    I suddenly got a bad feeling about this, and somehow everyone''s eyes were on me.


    ''Oh fu?k you all, not me again?''


    Senko realized that everyone''s eyes were on me.


    "Ahem, I guess we have to rely on Genji again, right guys?" Senko asked everyone.


    Everyone once again agreed to Senko while me alone was shaking head.


    ''Do you ?ssholes really planning to send a helpless child to such a dangerous and important mission? Just how shameless are you idiots?''


    After round of arguing or rather threatening me, I was forced to take the job.


    But they also agreed my request to send another explosion corps shinobi to send as a messenger in case.


    They wanted Gari or one of my squad members to go with me, but I aggressively disagreed with it.


    As for why they sending explosion corps shinobi as a messenger is simple.


    It''s because they can explode themselves up easily if they get caught and also Ishika-san was head of the explosion corps. He would probably confirm if they are Suna spies replaces or not easily.


    ''I am definitely gonna remember this when I return, you ?ssholes.


    Also, Gari, if you didn''t kill that stupid bird, we won''t have this problem in the first place. Better prepare to get punched by me''


    -----------------------------------------------------------


    At night, me and other explosion corps member departed.


    Although, our destination was the same, both us are going separate way,


    Before, we depart, I approached to other guy and patted his back, while greeting.


    "Hello, it seems you are the unlucky one, just like me.


    let''s do our best to complete this mission together."


    But this guy glared at me for a second, and just ignored me.


    He didn''t even greet and just departed his way.


    ''I guess he was also forced to do this, like me. Thus having a bad mood.


    But still, blatant ignoring me is kinda leave a bad taste.


    Well, no matter, since I am SURE I will never see him again...'' While thinking, I also departed.


    --------------------------------------


    I used Earth Style: Earth travel jutsu to pass through Suna base guards. They never expecting to get attacked from behind, hence guards were pretty lax.


    I have successfully passed through the guard''s post easily. I was sure other explosion corps guy also passed easily.


    Maybe I am well known in Yudai''s Suna force, but in Ebizo''s Suna force, I didn''t even have to use transformation jutsu.


    I just put on Suna shinobi outfit and walked through casually as I could. But I still didn''t feel safe.


    Sometimes, I used earth travel jutsu to avoid patrols while other times, I transformed to one of the patrols to advance through.


    Finally, I reached the Suna force''s front side guard gate without getting any suspicion.


    But unlike the rear side, there were tons of shinobi guarding the front side.


    Even just by looking, there was no way I could pass them through.


    If I use earth travel jutsu, I am sure sensors will sense me and hunt me down.


    If I transformed to Suna shinobi, they will surely ask me something like code and check for my identity.


    There was no way I could pass them through with my current ability. Heck, I bet even Kento or Ishika can pass them through without leaving any trace.


    But I already predicted this outcome and have prepared the plan.


    In order to pass this guard post, I need to create a diversion.


    How to create diversion? I just have to make a big explosion somewhere far away from me, at least in Suna camp and lead guards'' attention to there.


    I couldn''t put explosion tags to buildings in Sun camp as they are heavily guarded.


    I couldn''t stick explosion tags to passing Suna shinobi either as they were literally hundreds of shinobi were constantly watching each other.


    But I have put an explosion tag to moving victim.


    Yes, I have attached an explosion tag to my other explosion corps member who is on the same mission as me when I greeted him.


    Basically, I am using him as a sacrifice bait to complete this mission.


    I knew it would be impossible to get pass through Ebizo''s force camp alone. I needed someone to act as bait.


    This is the reason why I requested another shinobi apart from Gari and my squad members. I can''t bear to kill off my friends, I am not that cruel.


    As for my alibi, no one will know that I exploded him as Senko and others would think he got caught by Suna and self-exploded.


    I breathed deeply and performed a hand sign to blow off the explosion tag in him.


    BOOOMMMM!!!!!


    The explosion was loud and big. I used especially a powerful explosion tag as I wanted to make Suna force think he was one of Iwa suicide division members, sent by Ishika to confuse them.


    ''I know this is dark and against shinobi rule, but hey, I gotta survive.


    I felt a bit bad and wanted to look after your family after your sacrifice, but you never gave me a chance and your name.


    So don''t blame me for killing you. If you want to blame, then blame Senko and others as they picked you.''


    As I expected, front side Suna base guards are focused on a huge explosion and ran to the site quickly.


    Soon there was no one in guard''s post as they all left to the explosion site.


    I quickly used earth travel jutsu to pass through the front side post and went straight to Ishika''s basecamp.


    ----------------------------------------


    I have successfully reached Ishika''s base camp in the early morning.


    They quickly restricted me to check if I am real or spy.


    After checking I am real, Ishika personally came to greet me.


    When I was in the 5th explosion corps division, Ishika personally taught me while other kids got taught by random teachers.


    I could say he was my personal Jounin sensei for 2 years.


    Ishika smiled at me and asked.


    "How come you didn''t send explosion corps messenger-bird?


    But since you arrived, that means our invasion force has reached Ebizo force''s rear side, right?"


    "Yes, we have stationed at Ebizo Suna force''s behind and waiting for Ishika-san''s instructions. Our messenger bird died by Suna''s random attacks thus I was sent as a messenger."


    "Alright, you must be tired to sneak through Suna force''s camp. Have a rest now." Ishika dismissed me.

 Chapter 34 - Pincer Attack

    The next morning, after my arrival, Ishika immediately opened the battle-meeting.


    "Just now, one of my explosion corps members from our invasion force reached our camp.


    He reported that our invasion force has arrived at Ebizo forces behind and currently waiting for my order.


    Also, it seems like Yudai''s 2000 shinobi army is currently rushing here, to save Ebizo''s force. They will likely to arrive here within 1 or 2 days later.


    We need to act quickly.


    Therefore, in the afternoon, we will prepare for battle soundlessly and tonight we will pincer attack on Ebizo''s force with our Invasion force.


    We will attack first, to draw the attention of enemies and our Invasion force will attack them behind afterward.


    I have already sent my orders to our invasion force through another explosion corps messenger-birds.


    One thing to add, tonight I won''t order for retreat. We must finish off Ebizo''s force tonight.


    Including our invasion force, we have around 2000 shinobi or more in total while Ebizo force has around 1000 or below. We have full capacities to finish them off.


    I don''t want to see Ebizo force still standing in the tomorrow morning!!!" Ishika ordered them while showing his most serious and intimidating expression to everyone in the meeting.


    "Please rest ?ssured. We shall annihilate them within Sunrise tomorrow. sir" Vice-commander vowed to Ishika.


    Everyone also swore to Ishika to complete his order.


    -----------------------* Night *-------------------------------


    Ishika and other Jounins inspected the army to see if they were ready. I was deployed to the frontline again even though I wasn''t part of this force.


    ''Obviously, Ishika ordered me to be in the frontline. He has a very high expectation of me since we have a sort of master-student relationship even though we hadn''t had verbal agreement.


    And this troubles me very much as he continued sending me to bloody place, full of dangers to toughen me.


    He keeps saying the fastest way to become strong is to be in life and death situations. But I don''t want to be in that situation!


    I don''t want to die in early age, damn it.


    *Sigh* Let''s just hope I don''t get serious injury.''


    After Ishika and his followers checked on everything, he decided it was time to attack.


    "To every Iwa shinobi! Time has come to give death to Suna force.


    All Units attack!!!" Ishika loudly shouted.


    Under the command of Ishika, all Iwa reinforcements charged at Ebizo''s force.


    Ishika shot a fire signal to inform the Iwa invasion force that battle has started.


    ---------------------------------------------------


    Ebizo was impatiently waiting for Yudai''s reinforcement. He sent the news about his crushing defeat to Yudai, even suppressing his humiliation.


    But there was not a single letter or report from Yudai so far.


    It was getting increasingly hard to defend Iwa reinforcement''s offenses each day.


    Suddenly the guard came to his tent.


    "Ebizo-sama, messenger-bird from Yudai-sama''s force arrived.


    Yudai-sama and his force are currently rushing here to support us.


    Also, the Iwa invasion force retreated to our camp direction. He warned us to beware of the possibility of pincer attack."


    "Iwa invasion force retreated to our camp direction?!!


    Tch!, This is getting more..." *Interrupt*


    Just as Ebizo was about to say more, another guard madly came kneeling at Ebizo.


    "Sir, Iwa reinforcement has launched offense on us. Please give us an order!"


    "First, no need to panic. How many of them are attacking us?"


    "Sir well... It seems like Iwa reinforcement did all-out attack on us." Guard answered Ebizo.


    Ebizo was shocked after hearing the guard.


    "What? they all-out attack on us?


    Why are they being impatient while I should be impatient?


    Damn it, for now, deploy all of our force to the front side to resist Iwa reinforcement."


    "Understood!" Guards said and stood up to go out.


    Ebizo felt something was bugging him, just then he reminded what first guard said to him. He has realized Ishika''s plan and got panicked.


    He quickly stopped the guards to give further instruction.


    "Wait, you two. Forget about my previous order.


    Bring 30% of our force and set up an ambush to our rear side while 70% will go out and counter Iwa''s reinforcement."


    Guards got confused by Ebizo''s sudden change of plan.


    "But, sir. Why put ambush to our rear side? Don''t tell me Iwa invasion force is already behind our force??" Guard asked.


    "Exactly, but now is not the time to thinking and explaining. Hurry up and pass my order, now!!" Ebizo shouted at them.


    ------------------------------------------------


    Senko saw the signal Ishika sent and commenced the raid on Ebizo force from behind.


    Although Senko believed in Ishika''s plan, he still was cautious about the explosion in the middle of Suna camp last night.


    Therefore he created a small unit, consists of 5 shinobi, to scout out Suna force first.


    The small unit silently rushed to Suna force''s rear and started to scout out.


    For some reason, Gari was part of this small unit.


    He wore Suna uniform and just randomly looked around.


    "Tch! There is not even single ant here, Senko-san is worried too much. What a worrywart."


    He strolled around, suddenly he heard the voice from his behind.


    "Hey, what are you doing over there?"


    Gari got startled. This was not the voice of members of the scout unit.


    "Ehh, I.. Ehhh .. you ..Ummm, hahaha" Gari got panicked and couldn''t answer him.


    Gari''s mind was a mess now and he was sure that he would get caught.


    "Don''t just stand there like an idiot. If you get spotted by Iwa shinobi, then our ambush plan will just turn into dust. Hurry and hide." Suna shinobi ordered.


    Gari: "??? Eh, yea! Yes. But sir, I was trying to find a toilet before we fight."


    "What? Toilet? Just hold it for a few minutes. After Iwa shinobi comes and shocked by our ambush, then you may go to the toilet." Suna shinobi said.


    At this moment, Gari knew he met an idiot.


    "But sir, I hold it for a long time now. If I don''t go now, I might pee in my pants!!" Gari replied back.


    "Then pee in your pants. We don''t know when would Iwa shinobi come. What if they see you peeing and realize there is an ambush waiting for them!!" Suna shinobi again argued.


    "How the hell do they know there is ambush when they see me pee?


    Also not only pee, I need to poop. If I poop in my pants, it will be way more lethal than poison gas.


    This will reduce our fighting force and enemies won''t come to ambush place due to being too smelly here!!" Gari just replied to him with nonsense.


    He believed in the stupidity of Suna shinobi.


    "Ok, I can accept your reason. Then go do your business. But don''t let Iwa shinobi see you." Suna shinobi said.


    Gari smiled and said "Also, sir. I would like to be in privacy when I poop so can you not tell others about me?"


    "Sure but make sure to come back soon."


    "Don''t worry sir," Gari said while running.


    After getting out of Suna force camp, Gari went to gathering location for the scout unit.


    "Haha, what an idiot. To share intel to his enemies, no wonder why this Suna force was crushed so easily by Ishika-san."


    There was nobody in gathering location when Gari arrived and even if he waited for 5 minutes more, they still didn''t come.


    Gari concluded that all of his unit members got caught or something.


    "Well, It seems like only I was the one not getting caught. It''s a miracle that I met an idiot or else I would also get caught. I feel a bit sorry for my unit members.


    I need to inform Kento and Senko-san now. Since I am the only one who comes back to bring intel, would they reward me with something? hehehe"


    Gari rushed back to the Iwa invasion force.


    After receiving Gari''s report, Senko knew there was an ambush waiting for them.


    He quickly thought of a plan to counter Suna''s ambush and commenced an attack on Suna force from behind.


    (A/N: Okay I feel lazy to think of a counter-ambush plan and write it down.


    Let''s just say Senko sends 100 earth clones attached with explosion tags and boom them when Suna ambushed earth clones. Done!)


    -------------------------------------------------------------


    Battle between Ishika Iwa force ( including invasion force) and Ebizo Suna force continued for 6 hours straight.


    Suna shinobi were desperate and gave their everything to fight back while Iwa shinobi doing their best to eliminate every Suna shinobi as fast as they could.


    I now am able to conduct lightning chakra to my bu??erfly swords which made my sword movements way faster than before.


    With my elevated speed, sharp swords, and with my explosion, I could easily kill Chunins now.


    So far, I have killed 5 Jounins, 17 Chunins, and countless Genins.


    Although 70% of my kills are from my sneak attacks, I had to admit that I improved tremendously compared to my first big battle where I got my big ?ss scar on my ?h?st and almost drop dead.


    I was proud of myself, but I also got small injuries all over my body.


    Before I had Gari and other squad members to cover my back and even save me from crossfire. However this time, I was all alone without Gari and my squad members, facing a bunch of Suna shinobi.


    If I have to guess, this would be one of the toughest battles I ever faced.


    ''Ahh, god. I really wish this battle ends soon.


    Why the fu?k this stupid Suna shinobi doesn''t retreat?


    Can''t they see they are losing badly?''


    I am running out of both stamina and chakra and I knew at this rate, I would really die by chakra exhaustion. I decided to retreat myself for a while to recover and come back to the battlefield again.


    ''Ishika will kick my ?ss if he knew what I was planning, but since it''s still dark, no one will see it''s me retreating from the battlefield. hehehehe.''

 Chapter 35 - Punishment

    I retreated from the battlefield alone while searching for a safe place to recover my stamina and Chakra.


    I sometimes looked back to see whether someone was following me.


    After 10 minutes of searching, I found a nice dark, deserted-looking cave and subsequently checked the cave carefully to see if someone was already there before. I also checked whether there were traps set up.


    Fortunately, there were no traps nor people in the cave, beside me.


    ''Ha! Jackpot! There is no one here. I will rest here to recover my chakra.''


    I sat down and ate some food pills to fill my stomach and chakra. I felt totally comfortable but didn''t fall asleep.


    ''Ahh, this is so comfortable. No battle noises or the annoying sound of metal clashing, just in peace. Maybe I should just stay here until the battle ends.


    But if I do that, Ishika would definitely kill me. Is there any way I can return without being seen by others? Hmm....''


    I was thinking about what excuses to make, in case Ishika caught me. Suddenly I heard the sound of several footsteps.


    I hide immediately and grabbed my bu??erfly swords to be readied for battle.


    ''Who could possibly come to this deserted cave far away from the battlefield?


    Are they Iwa shinobi? No, we are the winning side. There is no way they would retreat here.


    Then Suna shinobi? Highly likely. Should I attack them first?


    But they also could be civilians migrating or one of injured Iwa spies from Suna force.


    What should I do???''


    While I was thinking carefully, footsteps came closer. I prepared to jump out, then I heard unexpected familiar voices.


    "Hey Gari, is it really okay for us to just ditch from the battlefield?"


    "Yea, what if someone saw us and tell Kento-san Senko-san about it?"


    "Don''t worry guys. I made a huge contribution to this battle by getting enemy ambush intel.


    Besides, all of us ran out chakra after fighting for almost 7 hours. I am sure they will forgive us."


    When I saw the intruders'' faces, I was surprised but I relaxed my sword. Intruders were Gari and my two squad members.


    ''What are they doing here? Did Gari and others also retreat from the battlefield? Is this what we say ''Great minds think alike''? hehehehe''


    I stopped hiding and appeared in front of Gari and others.


    Gari and others got scared that there was someone else in this cave, but relaxed after seeing who it was.


    "You scared the shit out of us. What are you doing here, Genji?" Gari asked me.


    "I am here for the same reason as you guys," I answered Gari.


    "What? We were chasing several Suna shinobi running away and accidentally arrived here. Were you also chasing Suna shinobi? " Gari shamelessly lied through his teeth.


    "Shut up, I eavesdropped you guys about ditching the battlefield." I denied him.


    ''To think that I meet these guys here. With these guys, I don''t worry about my back during the battlefield. It seems like my luck is still good.''


    Four of us chatted and rested for 45 minutes and returned to the battlefield right away.


    -------------------------------------------------


    Sun started to rise as the battle between Iwa and Suna force is about to end.


    When Ebizo received news about the number of Suna shinobi survived currently, he couldn''t help but frown his face and curse.


    "Shiiittttt!!! Out of 958 shinobi, only 133 survived? Our remaining soldiers are not even 150?


    Fuck, How the hell did Iwa invasion force struck us from behind? Didn''t I order to set an ambush to our rear side?


    If it wasn''t them, we wouldn''t have this much loss."


    "Ebizo-sama, please calm down. It seems like the Iwa invasion force already predicted our ambush and countered us using explosive clones." Guard reported to Ebizo in the middle of the battlefield.


    ''What the fu?k? Did they predict my ambush? When did Iwa have so many talented strategies?'' Ebizo wondered.


    Ebizo immediately ordered a retreat. He couldn''t just stay and let Iwa force kill every last of his force.


    He and his remaining his force ran away to the direction of Yudai''s force. He just hoped that Yudai''s force is near.


    Ishika didn''t let off Ebizo and his force easily and ordered to chase them.


    Me and my squad members just arrived at the scene when Iwa shinobi started to chase off running Suna shinobi.


    We joined chasing as naturally as we could. After all, we didn''t want others to think we came back at the most convenient timing.


    We chased Ebizo and his force until almost it was midday.


    Iwa reinforcement and its Invasion force''s pincer attack on the Ebizo Suna force was a huge success.


    ---------------------------------------


    "So far, we have confirmed around 200 Iwa shinobi losses in this battle. Our current total combined force is around 1700 shinobi.


    While Ebizo''s Suna force remaining was estimated to be not even 100, sir." Vice-commander of Ishika''s reinforcement reported to Ishika in the meeting.


    "Unfortunately, Ebizo''s remaining shinobi met Yudai''s 2000 shinobi force and integrated with it. Now, Yudai and Ebizo are being careful and set up camp 10 km away from us." he finished his report.


    In the meeting, there were Senko and several Iwa invasion force leaders.


    "Our force is very exhausted from today''s battle. But Yudai''s force is also tired from rushing all the way here to rescue Ebizo''s force.


    I am sure Yudai will not provoke us at least this week. Ebizo''s loss was too great this time and I am sure they need time to settle things down.


    For now, we won''t do anything, just increase the patrols.


    Also, I heard about the situation regarding Kento''s death. We will just tell Kento died during this battle and I succeed in his place.


    Okay, dismiss!" Ishika ordered everyone in the meeting.


    Just as everyone started to leave, Ishika grabbed Senko.


    "Senko, can you bring Gari, Genji, and his two squad members here?"


    "Sure, no problem, Ishika-san."


    --------------------------------------


    Me and Gari, along with my two squad members were called to Ishika''s tent.


    We had a very bad feeling. But it was Ishika''s order, there was no way we could disobey.


    "Captain Ishika, 4 of us has come under your order," I reported to Ishika.


    Ishika looked at us impassively and suddenly punched us.


    "You piece of shits. How dare you shits ditch from the battlefield!!


    I won''t care if you are just regular shinobi, but all of you shits are from explosion corps and are considered geniuses.


    What''s more, you ?ssholes rested for 1 hour. You d??kshits sure are weak as fu?k."


    All of us were shocked that Ishika knew about our ditching in detail.


    ''What the fu?k? How in the naruto''s world fu?k?n? god did he know?


    Did he stalk us instead of fighting with Suna force or what?


    How scary!!!''


    Ishika continued to punish us for several minutes.


    "It seems like you shits need some training. Alright, from now on, all 4 of you will go through week Special Hell training. I will personally guide this training. You shits better get ready, starting tomorrow." Ishika kicked us out after saying.


    Although Ishika''s punches are painful, his last words gave much more damage to us. His normal training is already considered Hell and we won''t dare to imagine his special hell training.


    ''Fuck, we so screwed!!''


    (A/N: For those of you are curious about how Ishika knew.


    Ishika was worried about Genji, the Greatest Genius in Iwa, if you haven''t forgotten, haha.


    He called the explosion corps messenger-bird to follow Genji and save him when his life is in great danger. Genji couldn''t detect that bird as it was night and small.


    And that bird reported everything it saw to Ishika after the battle.)

 Chapter 36 - Transferring

    It has been almost 3 months since we had annihilated Ebizo''s force with pincer attacks.


    Since then, we didn''t have any big fights with Yudai''s Suna force. The only conflicts we had were between just patrols and spies.


    Basically, it has turned into the Cold war between the Iwa invasion force and the Suna defense force.


    "Hey, Genji. It''s been a while since we had any big fights with Suna force. Aren''t we Invasion force, so why don''t we invade Suna further?"


    Gari got curious about why was the cold war happening and asked me.


    ''Lately, Gari is asking me a lot. Whenever he had a thing in his mind, he just come straight ask me.


    Does he think I am his Wikipedia or what?


    Well, I appreciate that he thinks I know everything, but he should keep it down a little.''


    "Just because we are invasion force, we don''t necessarily attack Suna all the time.


    Currently, there is Yudai''s 2000 force obstructing our 1600 force. It will be very challenging to defeat them with our shorter force.


    Even if we defeat them with little losses, there are still 4000 Suna reserves in Sunagakure, we have to deal with. If they come for us, it is definitely doom for us.


    That''s why Ishika-san is being very careful." I explained to Gari in detail.


    If I didn''t explain clearly, he will bother me until I answer him better.


    "If there are still 4000 reserves Suna shinobi, then why is Yudai''s force being so timid and don''t strike us? What are they afraid?" Gari got another question.


    ''Why does Gari sound like he wants Yudai force to attack us? Does this guy want to battle that much?'' I narrowed my eyes to Gari.


    "It is because Suna is having a war with Konoha besides us. They can''t just focus on us solely.


    There is a 50-50 chance that we crush Yudai force or they crush us. Let''s say we defeat Yudai''s force, and those Suna reserves come for us.


    But what will happen when Konoha suddenly invades Suna when those 4000 shinobi reserves leave to deal with us?


    Suna and us will receive heavy casualties while only Konoha would gain advantages and benefits.


    That is why Yudai isn''t rush to push us. They rather maintain this cold war than fighting death with our force." I answered Gari.


    I saw Gari was about to question me again and quickly changed the subject.


    "Dude, you should think about how to save ourselves from Ishika-san''s crazy training regiment, rather than thinking about others."


    Gari''s face went to black as he heard me.


    For other shinobi in our force, temporary peach has come for them as there were no big battles.


    But for me, Gari and the other 2 squad members, every day was literally death, itself.


    Ishika planned to train us for about a week but since the cold war happened, he kept supervising special hell training for us until now for 3 months.


    We learned tons of shit such as Earth mobile core jutsu, more about poison, how to remove poison, chakra control, chakra increment, etc.


    We sometimes had to run freaking the whole day on the water while eating poison mushrooms, to increase our stamina, poison resistance, and chakra reserves. These regiments might be par or worse than Guy and Lee''s.


    While Gari and I were chatting, two of my squad members, Gin and Kan came to us.


    (A/N: I keep mentioning those two as ''two fo squad members'', and felt bad for not giving names.)


    "Gari, Genji, Ishika-san is calling us. Let''s go hurry. He will kill us if we are late." Gin notified us.


    We quickly got up and dashed to Ishika''s tent.


    -------------------------------------------------------


    When we entered Ishika''s tent, we saw Ishika was looking at a report while showing serious expression.


    Ishika put down the report and looked at us proudly.


    "All 4 of you have done well to endure through my hell training until now. I am very proud of it. Now each of you can at least take down Chunin within 3 minutes.


    But I think things here are way too peaceful for you guys to become stronger. And I believe it''s time for me to send you guys to another battlefield.


    Recently, third Kazekage brought their one-tailed Jinchuriki to our defense force battlefield. This broke balance between our defense force and Kazekage''s force.


    Tsuchikage-sama sent our 5-tailed beast Jinchuriki in response and also ordered our division force to send aids to Masashi and our defense force.


    That''s why I have decided to send you guys along with additional 100 shinobi to aid our defense force.


    Genji, you will be vice-head of the aid unit. I believe in your quick-thinking and strength.


    Our 100 aid unit will leave tomorrow early morning, so be prepared.


    Alright, I hope you guys spread mightiness of Iwa explosion corps at there too." Ishika gave us one heck of long-ass order.


    All of us wanted to screamed when we heard Ishika''s order.


    ''Before you sent us to the fiercest battlefield, now that things are going easy, you are sending us to the battlefront where we face Kazekage and Jinchuriki???


    Ok, I don''t care what others say, but I am fully convinced that Ishika is trying to kill all of us.''


    All of us fake-smiled and accepted Ishika''s order while weeping inside.

 Chapter 37 - Meeting with Shuji again

    I had a great time as vice-head of 100 aid unit. I didn''t have to set up my own tent or prepare for meals. In fact, I didn''t have to go to dine with everyone as they would bring my food to my tent.


    No wonder everyone was jealous of me. You do nothing but eat and sleep comfortably while there are no enemies to worry about. You basically get to have a peaceful and relaxed life. Hehehe I hope this trip goes forever.


    However, my peaceful days didn''t last long as our 100 unit arrived at Iwa defense division basecamp after 10 days.


    Iwa defense division was led by Uncle Masashi before, but now since Kazekage appeared, it is co-managed by Uncle Masashi and ROCK division head.


    Uncle Masashi personally came to greet our aiding unit with several shinobi. I could visibly see several new scars on his face. I guess battlefield here is also crazy since even he got the scars.


    Gari and I was surprised to see that there was also Shuji (academy best friend) next to Uncle Masashi. It seems like Uncle Masashi pulled some strings to get Shuji near him.


    ''What a lucky bastard to be protected by strong father'' Gari and I looked at him with jealous.


    Uncle and Shuji also were surprised to see me and Gari. Then, they were more shocked about I was the vice-head of the unit.


    "Genji, Gari. I am happy to see you two as part of aiding unit. Genji, I am very surprised to see you as vice-head of aiding unit.


    Haha, as expected of our Iwa''s greatest genius." Uncle Masashi commented.


    We all greeted each other suddenly, we all heard a loud noise bell.


    "Oh, shit. This is the sound when enemies are incoming. Why did Suna attack us now? Okay, I am going out to the battlefield.


    Genji, although you guys just arrived here with no rest, I want you guys to also go participate. We need every power we have.


    Shuji, you go around alert, everyone. Just stay at base and tend the injured ones." Uncle Masashi ordered.


    ''What the fu?k, we just got here!! Now we go straight to the battlefield?? Just how shit is my luck??''


    But suddenly, Shuji just shouted at Uncle Masashi.


    "No, Dad!! I don''t want to stay in the camp anymore. I want to go out in frontline and fight with Genji and others!!"


    ''What?? Do you want to go to the frontline?


    Me, Gari, Gin, and Kan are forced to come here, but you have every option. And you choose that suicide option?


    You must have screwed your damn head to ask that stupid question!!


    Shuji, you clearly hasn''t experienced how scary the battlefield is.''


    Uncle Masashi stopped moving and looked back at Shuji with an angry face.


    ''Ahhh, shit. We just got caught in the family father-son selfish fight.


    Well, this is way better as no one here will leave. I hope they just stay here fight all day until Suna ends their offense. ''


    "Alright, I guess I can''t treat you as a kid forever. Try not to die on your first battlefield.


    Genji, I hope you stay with Shuji to take care of him, please."


    ''Huh?? You guys just looked at each other for 3 minutes and uncle Masashi admit defeat??? How??


    And why the fu?k are you involving me too! You should protect him yourself!!!''


    "Don''t worry uncle. As long as me and Gari here, we won''t let Shuji die, not even injure. Leave him to us." I answered with a fake smile.


    "Then I will leave him to me. Shuji, you must obey every Genji''s order." after saying Uncle Masashi left.


    Soon our aid unit and Shuji also entered to battlefield.


    -------------------------------------


    Me, Gari, Gin, Kan, and Shuji, 5 of us always stick together and fought off enemies.


    Suna shinobi were a bit stronger than other Suna shinobi I faced before. I guess shinobi accompanying Kazekage''s division is a lot tough.


    Unexpectedly Shuji was stronger than I anticipated. Although he was not as strong as four of us, he could at least beat Chunin by himself.


    I guess he got taught a lot from Uncle Masashi.


    "Shuji is doing pretty well for his first time on the battlefield. Though for my first time, I didn''t even break my sweat." Gari talked like a profound senior judging his junior or something.


    I narrowed my eyes to Gari.


    ''This guy was scared as shit, fighting with two Suna chunins on his first time. Now he got so used to the battlefield that he even dares to talk while fighting.


    Wait, is this how they develop talking syndrome during battle? They get used to battle that they even talk to enemies? Hmm, Interesting theory!''


    Suddenly Gin shouted at us with panic voice.


    "Guys wake up! Help Shuji hurry! He got cornered by three jounins!"


    Gari and I instantly looked for Shuji and saw him getting kicked by three Suna shinobi like a rag in the middle of the battlefield.


    ''How the heck did he get so far away from us in a short time? Also three jounins?''


    I quickly performed several hand signs while Gari rushed at them.


    "Earth style: Swamp of Underworld"


    I created swamp below them to restrict their movement. Three Jounins''s attentions were on me.


    Gari pulled out several kunai from his pocket and pointed at three Suna Jounins.


    "Ninja arts: Rocket Kunai"


    Gari used an explosion on his hands to fly off his kunai to three Jounins. However, Jounins were experienced and successfully blocked Kunai despite having their feet restricted.


    While three Suna Jounins were busy blocking Gari''s Kunai, Gin, Kan, and me performed hand signs.


    """Earth style: Stone Pistol"""


    We each shot several lumps of boulders at Jounins''s behind. Seeing they were disadvantages, they used powerful wind jutsu on their legs to free themselves from the swamp and quickly dodged our stone pistol boulders.


    ''We lost you for just a minute, and somehow you provoked three Jounins and ended up getting ?ss kicked. What a troublesome guy you are, Shuji.''


    "Gin, you take Shuji to a safe place. Gari, Kan, and I will deal with these three Suna jounins and catch up with you guys." I ordered.


    "Hey Genji, I am alright. I can still fight." Shuji replied to me.


    "Shuji, just rest and leave these guys to us. To be honest, you are a bit weak to handle these guys. Don''t worry, you will have another chance to fight with Jounin." I tried to persuade Shuji.


    If he still didn''t listen to my order, I was about order Gin to f?r??b?? knock him out. It was best to knock out these type of shinobi who just won''t obey the order. But luckily he managed to understand and followed my order.


    "Okay, be careful guys," Shuji said and escaped with Gin.


    I pulled out my bu??erfly swords and charged with lighting chakra. My swords instantly became bright white as electricity could be visibly seen.


    "Be careful, these kids are not regular kids. Don''t look down on them just because of their age." one of Suna Jounins commented.


    "Alright, Gari you take right Jounin. Kan, you take left''s while I take mid one. Try to finish as much as you can. Now, charge!" I commanded.


    It took us almost half an hour to finish those 3 Jounins. After a few taijutsu exchanges, I cornered my opponent with numerous Earth style jutsu and trapped him using Earth Prison Dome.


    When he broke out, I used Earth style: Earth travel jutus to sneaked him from behind and simply cut off his head with my lighting bu??erfly swords.


    I quickly went to Gari and Kan to help and we eventually killed off the remaining 2 Jounins. After seeing their shinobi being executed, other Suna shinobi tried to attack us.


    But we used a smoke bomb and clones to misdirect them. We hurried as Gin and Shuji were probably waiting for us.


    We followed the trails that Gin left for us and managed to reach at their location.


    Gin was wrapping bandages around Shuji''s head.


    "Hey guys, did you guys finish off those Suna shinobi?" Shuji asked us.


    "Yea, we swiftly killed them, no worry. No one followed us. I must say, Gin you did a good job founding a quiet place like this." I praised Gin while taking out a chakra pill from my pocket.


    "Haha, did you forget, I am super great at finding hiding spot." Gin replied.


    Just as Gin spoke, we all heard loud BOOOMMM and sounds of jutsu clashing each other.


    "You just had to jinx it, Genji" Gari looked at me annoyingly.


    "Shut up Gari, let''s all take a look first."


    We all went to the direction of loud battle noise. Soon we saw 3 figures fighting.


    There were Uncle Masahi, masked man, and Third Kazekage!!


    ''Holy shit, this is a actually battleground for the Kage-level shinobi.


    That masked man is wearing Iwa ROCK uniform, must be head of ROCK. It seems like Uncle Masashi and ROCK head are fighting against Kazekage.''


    I looked at Gin with hateful looks.


    ''Great at finding hiding a spot, my ?ss! You just took us to the hellfire of abyss! If you get caught in a Kage-level fight, you will definitely die.''


    Shuji saw his father and quickly tried to rush at him to help.


    Luckily, Gari swiftly grabbed Shuji and stopped him.


    "You idiot, that''s freaking Kage they are facing. Even if you go down there, you will only cause hindrance for Masashi-san." Shuji got told off by Gari.


    Gari was right and just as I was about to order for a retreat, I heard the sound of the system.


    System: " Host has triggered Non-obligatory Quest. Host may choose not to do the quest.


    *Quest: This is the first time Host has encountered in Kage-level fight. Please observe until the end to gain battle insights.


    Reward: A pill to erase the host''s presence for 5 minutes. ( Not even sensors or Kage-level shinobi can''t detect.)


    Failure: There is none. This is Non-obligatory Quest.*"


    System''s quest stopped me from saying the word ''retreat''.


    ''Reward is what? Erase my presence for 10 seconds, not even freaking Kages can detect!! With that shit, I can literally run away from any Kages.


    Now the question is should I accept this quest or not. Hmmm...


    Ah, screw it. It''s not like I have to face with Kage or anything, just observe. Let''s hope Kazekage thinks of us flies and don''t deal with us.


    I am sure Uncle Masashi will cover us even if Kazekage attack us since Shuji is with us.''


    I ordered gangs to move to a far place but where we can still observe the fight.

 Chapter 38 - Kage-level Battle

    Masashi and Head of ROCK were currently fighting against Kazekage.


    Although Masashi and Head of ROCK were considered two of the most powerful shinobi in Iwa, they were still fighting with the rumored strongest Kazekage.


    "Iron sand: Scattered Showers!"


    Iron sands hardened into minuscule grains and attacked simultaneously at Masashi and head of ROCK in insane speed.


    "Dodge quickly!!" Head of ROCK () alerted to Masashi.


    Masashi tried to hide behind the giant tree but as the iron sand bullets were so fast, he got scratched by several Iron sand bullets.


    "Are you okay?" head of ROCK asked Masashi.


    "This is nothing compared to what I faced before. Don''t worry," Masashi said while wiping off the bleeds on his face.


    Kazekage slowly walked up and told them.


    "I must commend you two for holding me off 6 months now.


    But this is getting annoying. It''s time to end our fight. Today I will make sure to kill both of you. As long as I kill you two here, Iwa''s defense force will crumble."


    "Please, it will take you at least 50 years to kill me. Instead, we will kill you first. Let''s get serious," Masashi talked back to Kazekage and clapped his hands to focus.


    "Earth style: Stone Golem jutsu!"


    (A/N: This is the same jutsu Akatsuchi used to protect Onoki. The size of the golem differs depending on use, but it always possesses an ample amount of brute strength. Onoki used this jutsu during battle with Madara.


    Let''s say Masashi created the same size as Onoki''s Stone Golem.)


    Massive Golem rose from Masashi''s below.


    "Impressive, but do you really think that huge lump of earth can help you defeat me?" Kazekage said.


    "I am also here. Earth style: Rock Armor jutsu." Head of ROCK shouted.


    (A/N: this jutsu allows the user to flow earth-chakra through their body, absorbing the properties of earth around them to form an Earth armor. The armor can defend from all forms of blunt-force trauma. At the same time, it enhances the user''s strength while their speed is also greatly increased.)


    Mask''s body now is covered by earth, looked intimidating.


    "I will crush you! Mask, support me" Masashi shouted at Head of ROCK while charging at Kazekage with his golem.


    (A/N: Head of ROCK, Masashi calls him by ''Mask'' as Masashi doesn''t know his name.


    I will state him ''Mask'' too from now.)


    "Got it!" Mask replied to Masashi.


    Giant Golem threw his fist to Kazekage. Kazekage formed several barriers using his iron sand to block Golem''s punch.


    BAMM!!


    Although Golem''s punch was powerful, Kazekage successfully blocked its punch.


    "Not bad," Kazekage commented.


    "I told you I was also here!" Mask charged at Kazekage with tremendous speed, landed a kick.


    Kazekage knew he can''t dodge, therefore he quickly wrapped himself with iron sand to take less damage, but he still got flown away a few meters.


    "Tch! It seems like I have underestimated you two by a lot. But that''s enough. I will get serious too." Kazekage stood up.


    "HYAAA!"


    Iron sands started to spread out and ultimately covered the whole battleground to iron sand.


    "This jutsu is called Iron sand Domain. I can control anything in this domain by forming any structure I want in a matter of seconds using iron sand. Like this."


    Kazekage flicked his fingers and suddenly massive iron sand spikes came out and stabbed Masashi''s Golem.


    Although Golem didn''t break, it still left cracks. Masashi and Mask were surprised.


    "You got to do better than that do destroy my Golem" Masashi angrily said.


    Mask again charged at Kazekage with insane speed. But with Kazekage''s single hand gesture, iron sand wall rose and blocked Mask.


    Then, iron sand from ground clutched Mask''s leg, started to slam and knock him to ground repeatedly for 1 minute and threw him away.


    Mask quickly got up angrily. What was surprising is that he only had slight bruises even after all that beat up. The toughness of Rock Armor was indeed on another level.


    "Is that all you got! Not enough to break my rock armor!" Mask said to Kazekage.


    Kazekage was a bit surprised at the toughness of rock armor, but still maintained calmness.


    "Doesn''t matter how tough your Golem or armor is. Eventually, they will be broken by my iron sands." Saying the words, Kazekage started to form giant spears from the ground and threw at Masashi and Mask


    They kept fighting for 10 minutes until they all felt terrifying and malicious chakra at the same time.


    They quickly stopped fighting and looked the direction.


    ---------------------------------------------------------


    (MC POV)


    After setting up traps around, me and gangs were quietly watching the battle between Uncle Masashi, Mask (Head of ROCK), and Kazekage.


    Uncle Masashi created giant Golem, while Mask''s body changed to earth and dashed at Kazekage.


    They seem to be winning for a moment. But soon Kazekage used the power of screaming and iron sand started to cover the whole ground.


    Luckily it hasn''t reached our hiding place, or else it would have been a disaster.


    After Kazekage used his technique, he started to dominate the battle. Uncle Masashi and Mask only could defend from iron sand while Kazekage kept attacking relentlessly.


    Kazekage kept control of any iron sand which spread out to battleground and attacked Uncle Masashi and Mask''s blind spots.


    I could only say, as expected of Kage. It''s strength very terrifying.


    No wonder Sasori had to sneak attack to kill him. I am sure young Sasori wouldn''t stand chance against Third Kazekage if it was a direct confrontation.


    I was also shocked by the toughness of Golem and Mask''s armor. Truly worthy of Iwa shinobi, they are tough as stone.


    Then as fight as was becoming intense, they suddenly stopped and looked at a certain direction.


    ''What? why did they stop? Sudden screw loose?''


    Just as we got confused, we heard loud terrifying roars. I felt like I hear this roar before. We all got scared and wanted to run away.


    ''System, do you know where this roar came from? Why is it so terrifying?''


    System: "Host, this is the mighty roar of a five-tailed beast. Apparently, one-tailed Jinchuriki and five-tailed beast fought each other and lost control.


    Now two jinchuriki are going rampaging killing both Suna and Iwa shinobi mindlessly."


    ''Oh fu?k, no wonder those 3 ceased fighting. Freaking 2 Jinchuriki lost control. This is my first battle here.


    I almost let Shuji die, entered Kage-level shinobi battleground and now Jinchurikis are losing control!!!!! Today''s luck is really worse than shit.''


    "Today, an unexpected problem occurred, so I will spare you two. But next time will be your death" Kazekage spoke to Uncle Masashi and Shunshined away to control One-tailed jinchuriki.


    "We should also go to stop Kan (Five-tailed jinchuriki)" Uncle Masashi spoke to Mask.


    "Alright."


    After Uncle Masashi and Masked vanished, a few seconds later I heard system.


    System: " Host has successfully observed Kage-level battle until the end and completed the quest.


    *Quest: This is the first time Host has encountered in Kage-level fight. Please observe until the end to gain battle insights.


    Reward: A pill to erase the host''s presence for 5 minutes. ( Not even sensors or Kage-level shinobi can''t detect.)


    Failure: There is none. This is Non-obligatory Quest.*


    The reward is now in Host''s Kunai pocket."


    ''Great. Now I can escape here. I don''t want to stay on this battlefield any longer. Who knows we will get hit by random beast bomb shot by crazy Jinchurikis''


    Just as I wanted to leave, System''s voice came up to me again.


    System: "Host has fully observed Kage-level battle, but it''s not the highest level battle. Let''s step up.


    *Quest: witness the battle between the Kage-Jinchuriki battle until the end.


    Reward: 10 million yen and a book that teaches about all kinds of Fuinjutsu.


    Failure: There is none. This is Non-obligatory Quest.*"


    As soon as the System said, I was quiet for a moment and then...


    ''SYSTEM, DO YOU THINK I AM AN IDIOT? I am not stupid to do every impossible quest just because the rewards are great.


    Jinchuriki attacks mindlessly and there is like 90% chance me getting hit by crossfire.


    I know my limit. At least current me is just weak to even spectate that kind battle.


    I am sure I will die if I accept the quest and I don''t fu?k?n? want to die.


    What''s the use of 10 million if I die. I will damn recline the quest.''


    After rejecting the system, I quickly ordered a retreat to base camp.


    But Shuji wh?n?d about staying and helping his father. I was already annoyed by System''s impossible quest. Adding the whining voice of Shuji, I was pissed as hell.


    I just knocked Shuji out and dragged him with others to basecamp.

 Chapter 39 - One year timeskip

    After observing Kage-level battle, we ran to the basecamp as fast as we could. As we were retreating, we could hear the sounds of Jinchuriki screaming and feel terrifying chakra,


    Jinchurikis hasn''t transformed into the beast fully, but I could feel that they are on the verge of it.


    When we arrived basecamp, we were suddenly stopped by guards of basecamp. They asked for the password, but since we joined the battlefield right after we arrived, we obviously didn''t know the password.


    We tried to wake Shuji up, but it seems like I knocked him out pretty hard. No matter how we shook him, he didn''t wake up.


    Guards started to run out patience as they kept on battle stance. In the end, Gari abruptly kicked Shuji''s p?n?s to wake him up.


    ''Wow, What a brutal bastard you have become!!! Gari.''


    Shuji waked up screaming due to intense pain in his little area. I kinda felt bad for Shuji.


    After rounds of more screaming, Shuji answered the password and verified us to enter basecamp.


    ----------------------------------------------------


    Some times later, we saw Uncle Masashi, tattered clothes came up to us to pick up Shuji.


    It seems like it took a toll on Uncle Masashi to calm down 5 tailed jinchuriki.


    "Hey, kids. Glad you guys are okay. How is Shuji, did he do good?" Uncle Masashi asked us.


    "haha... Yes Uncle. Shuji did wonderful today. He is just tired of all that fighting and sleeping now." I replied to him with a smile.


    I can''t tell him that Shuji almost got killed by three Jounins, knocked out by his friend, and got his p?n?s busted by another friend of his.


    In fact, after we entered to basecamp, Shuji still cried for pain. So we knocked him out again to shut him and not to bother other people. That''s why he still hasn''t waked up.


    "Well, I am sure you guys are also tired of babysitting him during battle. I am grateful that you protect him." Uncle Masashi kindly patted our heads.


    His words kinda made us guilty.


    "So Uncle, what happen this afternoon?" Gari asked for detail.


    "Well, our 5-tailed beast Jinchuriki clashed with Suna Jinchuriki. But those two idiots both lost control at the same time and were on the verge of releasing tailed-beasts.


    All Iwa shinobi ?ssisted to subdue died. Luckily, Me and Mask somehow managed to subdue our Jinchuriki, but he died by Kazekage''s sudden sneak attack. So we lost our Jinchuriki and 5-tailed beast." Uncle Masashi told us while sighing.


    ''Oh shit, all Iwa shinobi ?ssisted died?! I am so glad that I decline the System''s quest!!!''


    "Wait, then what happened to Suna Jinchuriki?" Ken asked this time.


    "Well, Kazekage accidentally killed him during his own fight. That''s why he came to kill our Jinchuriki as well. He didn''t want to be one to lose Jinchuriki." Uncle Masashi told us.


    "Then what will happen in the future?"


    "I am sure, Suna will be quiet sometimes. They lost their only one Jinchuriki. That''s a huge loss for them. But we also lost ours. I am sure that short man Onoki will be very pissed. *Sigh*" Uncle Masashi predicted.


    I didn''t expect the battle to ends with the loss of both Jinchuriki. I guess after this, Han will be the next 5-tailed beast Jinchuriki.


    -----------------------------------------------------------


    (1 year passed. Boom!)


    It''s been one year since we arrived at the Iwa defense division. We are all grown up and stronger. Shuji is no longer a battle-excited kid anymore. He is super good at water style and make good combos with our lighting style.


    Gari''s explosion became more deadly as even without touching, he could kill someone with his explosion power. I once asked him to if he can walk on the air using his explosion release, just like One piece''s ''Geppo'' or air walk.


    Surprisingly he could do it and soon later even Kan and Gin started to do it. This increased their speed and their battle power.


    As for me, I finally have a perfect understanding of Wing Chun bu??erfly sword arts. I could even go toe to toe with Uncle Masashi in taijutsu now.


    I realized my raw strength is greatly weak compared to the average Adult even though I trained madly.


    That''s why I learned Earth style: Earth fist jutsu.


    This jutsu allows user encasing their arm in rock, the user can deal with a powerful hardened punch against an opponent while being protected from direct contact with their target. If necessary, the weight of the rock can be increased to further increase the punch''s destructive power.


    With this jutsu, I can easily overcome the raw strength difference between me and ?du?ts. I also learned several other earth jutsu to increase the diversity of my explosion release.


    I mastered lighting manipulation, but couldn''t master Raikiri (Lighting blade) even now. Sasuke learned Chidori in one month while here I am stuck with Raikiri for one year and still mastered. I once more deeply recognized Sharingan as an Op cheat.


    After losing their Jinchuriki, I thought Kazekage would back down for a while. But my prediction approved to be off and Kazekage started to attack us more relentlessly until last week.


    Sakumo''s Konoha force finally drove out Chiyo''s force. Chiyo''s force suffered a crushing defeat as she even lost her son and daughter-in-law.


    There was no way, Danzo would just stand, do nothing while letting Sakumo get all glory. He used the momentum and invaded Suna back.


    With this, Suna is currently being pincered attacked by two Great ninja villages, while their Kazekage is not present to defend Sunagakure.


    They also lost their Jinchuriki too. It was inevitable that Suna will lose the war even if they drag the war.


    Being smartass, Kazekage decided to pull out from the war. Even if they drag the war, they still have to worry about small villages attacking them to steal the position of Great Ninja Village.


    This meant, Iwa defense division is spending peace life currently without worrying about life & death battles.


    I knew soon, we would be sent to battle with Konoha. So my squad and I are enjoying the rare peace as much as we can.


    Kazekage quickly retreated to Sunagakure and sent representatives to sign a peace treaty and return their land to Iwa and Konoha.


    ''Although Iwa and Konoha still haven''t responded to Suna, knowing Third Hokage Hiruze, I am sure he will agree it with small compensations.


    For our Kage, Onoki... I am 100% sure that prideful, and stingy short man would ask for ridiculous compensations while not even giving Suna land back. And this is why I prefer, Onoki. He knows how to extort others well, hehehe.''


    ------------------------------------------------


    (in Onoki''s office)


    "Hell no, we are giving their land to Suna!! Our Invasion force ventured their lives to take that land. I am definitely not giving the land back, we took from Suna!!!" (Onoki)


    "What? Suna is just giving us only 100 million yen for compensation?? Fuck that, I want 1 billion yen for compensation, damn it." (Onoki)


    "I also want 10 tons of Iron sand with 3 tons of Medical herbs and poison herbs. And Suna shinobi will never step into Iwa''s territory for 10 years." (Onoki)


    "Also, I want every our Iwa shinobi imprisoned in Suna to be released. If they don''t give us, they can forget about the peace treaty." (Onoki)


    (A/N: No wonder, Suna became the poorest village besides, Kiri.)


    "Now, I want everyone to focus on Konoha. Iwa invasion force will reinforce Roshi''s force to engage Konoha.


    Iwa defense force will spread out to Suna border and defend in case Suna suddenly invade again." (Onoki)

 Chapter 40 - Mission from Tsuchikage

    Two weeks have passed after Suna decided to pull out from the second Great Ninja war. Now it is just between Konoha and Iwa.


    As I predicted, Onoki shifted all of the remaining Iwa forces to Konoha except the Iwa invasion force in Suna land. They are now defending our newly-obtained land from Suna force.


    While every Iwa shinobi is marching to Iwa-Konoha battlefield, for some reason, my squad and I were called back to Iwagakure under the order of Onoki.


    At first, I thought it was Uncle Masashi''s work to pull us out from this bloody hell war. But Shuji''s name was not mentioned in the order, which proves Uncle Masashi has nothing to do with it.


    Although it was puzzling as to why Onoki called us, we still packed our stuff and said goodbye to everyone, including Shuji and Uncle Masashi, and left right away.


    We didn''t rush or slow our speed and steadily went to Iwagakure. In one week, we have arrived at Iwagakure.


    It has been almost two years since we left Iwagakure to fierce war battlefields, but it was like decade years for us. We all got a bit emotional seeing Iwagakure. Who wouldn''t after coming back home from life & death battles.


    Iwagakure didn''t change much instead, there were lots of patrols and shinobi guarding Iwagakure gate.


    I knew the defense of Iwagakure has to be strengthened since we are in the war, but still, it was too much.


    We encounter patrols in every 5 minutes and have to verify that we are the real Iwa shinobi.


    We finally arrived at the Tsuchikage building after being checked eight times by patrols. We waited a few minutes to have an audience with Onoki.


    -----------


    "Greetings, Tsuchikage-sama" we all kneeled one leg to greet Onoki.


    "Oh, Genji. It''s been a long time since I saw you. You brats finally arrived."


    Onoki smiled and told us to stand up. He was awfully kind that I got goosebump all over my body.


    "It seems like you brats performed very well during battles. I am very proud of you guys, as expected of Iwagakure''s Geniuses!! Anyway since you brats just arrived Iwagakure, you must be tired.


    Go rest for now and come back to me in the evening."


    ''Onoki is praising us and even giving rest time to us? Something must be wrong with his head.''


    We accepted Onoki''s words and started to leave the office. But just as I was about to leave, I heard Onoki''s voice.


    "Genji, you stay and have a chat with me for a bit."


    I quickly nodded my head to others to go first and re-entered to Onoki''s office. It seems like Onoki wants to speak with me privately. Though I could hardly imagine what would Tsuchikage speak to 14-years old boy privately.


    "So, what do you want to say to me, Tsuchikage-sama?" I asked Onoki.


    Onoki stared at me for a few seconds and started talking while sighing.


    "Genji, you have experienced the war for almost two years now. I am sure you know full well how dangerous war is.


    Until now, I have kept Kitsuchi my side to keep him safe from on-going war. but ever since Suna''s retreat from war, my boy Kitsuchi has been restless, asking me to send him to the war."


    I frowned while listening to Onoki.


    ''God, another spoiled kid that wants to go to the bloody battlefield!''


    "And now even his girlfriend Kimiko is asking me to send them to the war together. Although I want to keep them safe from war, som part of me also want them to experience war and become stronger." Onoki continued.


    ''Oh, I got it now. Onoki decided to send Kitsuchi and Kimiko to the battlefield but too worried. So he called me and my squad to babysit them. No wonder he was being very kind to us. But why us? What a pain in the ?ss.''


    "Why not send them to Ishika-san''s place? Since Suna retreated, that place is the safest battlefield." I suggested to Onoki.


    "I tried that, but Kitsuchi refused, saying he wants to go to the real battlefield. By now you must have realized why I called you and your squad." Onoki replied.


    "I get that Tsuchikage-sama wants us to accompany and protect him. But why did you pick us, Tsuchikage-sama? I am sure there are many shinobi better or stronger than us for this job." I questioned Onoki.


    "Well, it''s because you are close to Kitsuchi. Others wouldn''t dare to order around Kitsuchi due to his position as my son, but I know you won''t care about that kind of stuff.


    Most importantly I chose you because Kitsuchi considers you as a rival. Seeing his rival became stronger, Kitsuchi will definitely train hard to catch up to you."


    I sighed deeply while listening to Onoki''s reason. I couldn''t argue Onoki as what he said were all true.


    "Alright, I will accept your order. But I have a condition, sir." I spoke to Onoki,


    "Ohh, you even dare to ask for the condition to me? Genji, you have grown too overconfident."


    "I am not asking the impossible one. I just want a sensor and medical shinobi in my squad."


    "Well, Kimiko is a sensor, so don''t worry about it. As for medical shinobi, I am afraid I have to decline it. Don''t ask why. It''s secret." Onoki said.


    ''What? we are protecting your damn son and future daughter-in-law and you don''t even want to give medical shinobi to us!! You damn stingy old man.''


    "Alright, then. You can go now, Genji. Come back to me in the evening to receive the mission."


    "Yes sir" I went out of the office, saying the words.


    (At night)


    I arrived at the Onoki office again with my 3 squad members, Gari, Gin, and Kan. Kitsuchi and Kimiko were already in Onoki''s office and surprised to see us.


    "Hey, Genji and Gari. I heard you guys were on the battlefield. When did you guys come back?" Kitsuchi asked us.


    "We just came back this morning," Gari replied.


    "Say, how is the battlefield? Did you guys kill a lot of shinobi?" Kitsuchi asked us again.


    Just as we were about to answer, Onoki coughed, telling us to pay attention.


    "Ahem, I called Genji and his squad to ?ssign a mission to them. And Kitsuchi and Kimiko will join their squad to finish the mission."


    Kitsuchi suddenly got excited and asked Onoki.


    "Wait, does that mean you finally going let me and Kimiko join the war, dad?"


    "Well, depending on your performance in this mission. If you do good in the mission, then I will send you to the battlefield.


    Now about the mission. One of our spy in Konoha got exposed and currently on the run. Your mission is to infiltrate to Konoha land and bring him back to Iwagakure.


    Since he is just a low ranking spy, I am sure Konoha won''t send any Jounins to pursue him. It''s just a B-rank mission, so consider this as a test for you Kitsuchi.


    Genji will be the leader of this mission. So he will be one to judge your performance. Listen to him well, Kitsuchi."


    Kitsuchi looked at me with a bright smile and puppy eyes. I was shocked to hear Onoki.


    ''Wait, I thought we will go to the battlefield straight. I never heard we will do mission and judge Kitsuchi and Kimiko. Did I misunderstand him? What is this old man thinking?'' I thought.


    "Understood, Tsuchikage-sama." Nevertheless, I replied to Onoki and went out of his office.


    Soon, Kitsuchi, Kimiko, Gari, Gin, and Kan followed me out.


    ----------------------------------------------------------


    (In Konoha, Hokage''s office)


    Suddenly the door opened and the short light-brown haired boy came in while shouting.


    "Old man, I can''t wait any longer. Why are you not sending me to the war?" the brown-haired kid shouted.


    Hiruzen sighed and breath out the smoke he was holding in. He was very tired of dealing with this kid.


    "Nawaki, you know very well why I am not sending you to war. You are the youngest Senju member in Konoha.


    I am afraid something might happen to you. Your sister especially asked me not to send you to war, no matter what."


    "Exactly, I am Senju. How can I stay and do nothing while Konoha is in the war? How can I become Hokage and protect Konoha if I back down here!! Come on, send me to the war now!"


    As Nawaki and Hiruzen were fighting, suddenly Anbu appeared in front of Hiruzen.


    "Greetings Hokage-sama, Senju-sama." Anbu greeted them.


    Seeing Anbu is not talking because Nawaki, Hiruzen ?ssured Anbu,


    "Don''t worry about Nawaki. Just tell me your report."


    "Sir, the spy we have been tailing, run away yesterday night secretly. We request your permission to pursue and capture him" Anbu reported.


    Just as Hiruzen was about to agree, Nawaki who was listening quietly, cut him off.


    "Wait, can I go instead and capture this spy? Come on, old man. Please? You didn''t send me to war and now are you going to stop me again? Just this once, please??" Nawaki literally begged at Hiruzen.


    Hiruzen thought for a while. He knew the spy they were tailing is just low-ranking one. He deemed it might be a good idea to send Nawaki along with other Konoha geniuses to capture the spy as to let them gain experience.


    Hiruzen raised his hands and pretended to give up to Nawaki.


    "Okay, okay. You win. I can send you to capture the spy, but you need to go with other kids too. That''s my condition."


    "YES!! Thanks, old man. I owe you one, hahaha" Nawaki jumped high for celebration.


    ---------------------------


    (10 minutes later)


    In Hokage''s office, eight kids (12-14) years old gathered under the order of Hiruzen.


    Nawaki, Fugaku Uchiha, Hyuuga''s twin Hizashi and Hiashi, new Ino-Shika-Cho formation Inojin, Choza and Shikaku, and last but not least Minato were present in Hokage''s office.


    None of them were sent to war as all of them except Minato, are off-springs of their respective clan heads. Minato just got graduated from Academy, considered a natural prodigy as a ninja, the likes of which appears only once in a generation.


    Hiruzen considered these eight kids as future pillars of Konoha. Relationships between these kids are not bad, in fact very good except Fugaku and Nawaki. Even now they were bickering at each other.


    Hiruzen also wanted these two to get along after this mission.


    "Now, listen, all of you! Yesterday Iwa spy knew he was exposed by our Anbu and fled to Iwagakure. I want you eight to work together and capture him before he enters Iwa land. Bring him back alive if you can.


    Shikaku Nara and Fugaku Uchiha will be the co-leaders of the team.


    Also, DON''T YOU DARE CHASE HIM IF HE ALREADY ENTERED IWA''S LAND. COME BACK IMMEDIATELY!!!!" Hiruzen ordered them.


    ""''Understood!!"""


    COMMENT 42 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 42 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Translator: Editor:

 Chapter 41 - Incident in Iwagakure

    Me and my squad decided to leave Iwagakure shortly after receiving a mission from Onoki. Well, I actually planned to leave tomorrow night, but these patrols'' inspecting was killing me, thus changed the plan.


    Kitsuchi and Kimiko arrived at the gathering place 30 minutes earlier. We can see their excitement all over their face.


    I am guessing that even though, they are ROCK members, they never went out of Iwa before. Influential children sure are different.


    Honestly, ever since these two joined the ROCK division, I have never seen them separate each other. They come together and leave together. I have a theory that they may even share the room together.


    "What a lucky bastard to have a beautiful girl accompany you all the time." Gari saw them and blurted out with jealousy.


    We nodded, showing signs of agreement with Gari.


    "Alright, everyone is here. Let''s leave." I ordered to the squad.


    ------------------------------------


    It has been 1 hour since we left Iwagakure. Although it was a late-night, we didn''t feel tired as we rested plenty during the afternoon.


    I asked a few things to Kitsuchi and Kimiko to relieve my boredom during the journey.


    "Hey, Kitsuchi. Is it just me or patrols of Iwagakure has increased too much. Even if we are in the war, there are too many patrols.


    Did something happen in Iwagakure during the war?" I casually asked Kitsuchi.


    Kitsuchi suddenly looked pale and hesitated for a moment before speaking.


    "Well, just like you said, something big happened in Iwagakure recently. Ever since that incident, my dad ordered to increase the patrols of Iwagakure to max state."


    My squad and I all got a bit surprised to hear Kitsuchi.


    ''Woah!! Something big happened that made even Onoki got alerted fully?''


    "Then tell us what happen quickly," Gari hurried Kitsuchi to talk.


    "You see, it started probably six months ago.


    I am sure you guys remember Uzumaki kids that you guys captured in Uzushiogakure Invasion.


    They started to disappear randomly without leaving any clues or traces. At first, we didn''t care much and just left it. But one by one, Uzumaki clan kids disappeared without any traces.


    My dad then finally got alerted and ordered all the remaining ROCK members to investigate what was happening. Strangely, we couldn''t find any lead at all, and more and more Uzumaki clan kids disappeared.


    That is until two months ago, every Uzumaki kids in Iwagakure finally all disappeared!


    In the end, we couldn''t find anything about the whereabouts of missing kids. But we are suspecting someone infiltrated to Iwagakure and abducted them." Kitsuchi told us while making a grim face.


    All of us were beyond shocked by hearing Kitsuchi. If what he said was true, then those numbers of patrols are not an exaggeration at all.


    ''Someone powerful enough to avoid sensors and ROCK division, repeatedly sneak to Iwagakure to abduct only Uzumaki kids??


    Now that''s something very scary. I don''t know if there is anyone who can pull that shit in this Naruto timeline?


    I thought it was interesting to hear first, but somehow it turned out to be scary shit and horror.''


    But then I thought something didn''t add up and asked Kitsuchi.


    "Wait, you said by last, last month, all Uzumaki kids disappeared or kidnapped, right? If what you said true, then the culprit only targets Uzumaki kids.


    Since there are no longer Uzumaki kids in Iwagakure and nothing is happening for two months, why the heck Iwagakure still keeping uptight security now? Shouldn''t they at least lower down a bit?"


    By my question, Kitsuchi got hesitated to answer. It seems like he knows why and afraid to speak out. Seeing this made us curious more as Gari and Me kept bothered him to speak.


    Even Kimiko followed us and asked Kituschi to speak. It seems like Kitsuchi didn''t even tell his lover Kimiko about this.


    Kitsuchi couldn''t take it anymore. He asked Kimiko to use her sensor skill to see if there is anyone around us. After confirming there was no one, he suggested us to lend our ears. We stopped our advance.


    "What I am going to tell you is secret information of Iwagakure. I will tell you guys because I trust you guys more than anyone. Swear that you will never speak what you hear here." Kitsuchi told us to swear.


    All of us swore and urged Kitsuchi. Kitsuchi started to whisper us, b?r?ly enough for us to hear.


    "Okay, just now I said there are no Uzumaki kids in Iwagakure, but I was lying. There is actually one Uzumaki girl who didn''t get kidnapped. After discovering her special power, my dad hid her existence from others, including Iwagakure''s population. Only a few know about her.


    Apparently, she has the power to heal any dangerous injury or recover lost chakra just by letting them bite her. She seemed to have a massive chakra compared to her age and has a great aptitude for Iryo (medical) ninjutsu.


    My dad personally keeping an eye on her ever since the incident.


    I am sure we still have tight patrols because of her."


    We were silent for minutes until I coughed to break the heavy atmosphere and ordered to continue the advance.


    ''Judging from Kitsuchi''s explanation, that Uzumaki girl is definitely Karin''s mom. Unlike Kusagakure (Grass village), it seems like Onoki saw huge potential from her.


    Since my mom''s death, Iwa''s medical level hit rock bottom. I guess Onoki will brainwash her to be Iwa shinobi and use her to lead Iwa''s medical level. Truly great move from Onoki.


    I can''t still believe Kitsuchi got this info, it seems being Tsuchikage''s son is convenient to obtain intel.''


    We traveled for a while but none of us talked. It seems everyone is busy thinking on their own. I also kept thinking about that culprit.


    ''That culprit kinda bugs me. Why would he/she need Uzumaki kids? If I make a guess, Orochimaru comes first.


    If it''s not Oro pedophile, then who? System, do you know?''


    System: "Sorry host. System doesn''t have such knowledge in its database. This has never happened in Canon."


    ''What? Then who do you think has the highest chance to be the culprit? Can you calculate?''


    The system seemed to calculate for a while and answered me.


    System: "System has calculated and Zetsu has the highest chance to be the culprit."


    ''Zetsu?!!!!, oh yeah, I forgot that bastard or bastards? Now that system mentioned, I really think Zetsu is the culprit. Then Madara is behind this shit?


    Then why the fu?k would Madara need Uzumaki kids for? Did he think Uzumaki will be his biggest threat to his goal and decided to eliminate them?


    But then why would he only target children? Also, why didn''t he just kill them in a single day instead of kidnapping them one by one?''


    All these thinking made me lead to more questions after questions. I got tired of thinking and decided to analyze other times.


    ''For now, let''s focus on the mission first.''


    --------------------------------------------------


    (In Hokage office)


    "WHAT?? YOU FREAKING OLD MAN, YOU WANT TO DIE?!!!


    WHY DID YOU SEND MY BROTHER TO SUCH DANGEROUS MISSION!!!" currently Tsunade was arguing with Hiruzen.


    Originally, Tsunade was tasked to face off Roshi''s Iwa division along with her two teammates. But later she was sent to Suna battlefield to counter Chiyo''s poisons using her medical skill. After defeating Chiyo''s Suna force, she stayed at the border until now and came back to Konoha today under Hiruzen''s order.


    She immediately went to find her brother but after realizing that he went to a mission yesterday, she furiously went to quarrel with Hiruzen.


    Hiruzen sighed as Tsunade stomped to his office. He already predicted this would happen.


    "Listen, Tsunade. You know that someday Natsuki has to lead the Senju clan as he is the only male descendent alive. That''s why I sent him to do a mission to let him have experience. We can''t see him as a cute baby we always used to know. He has grown now. I am all doing this for his sake." Hiruzen kindly explained.


    "But it''s too soon for him to go out in the world with his skill. There is not even a single jounin in his squad. How can you be sure that they are safe??" Tsunade talked back.


    "It''s just a B-rank mission. They just went to pursue low-level spy. There won''t be any Jounin-level fight. Also, all of his mission mates are the geniuses of Konoha''s next generation. I am sure they can handle Chunins by themselves.


    Besides, I also sent 3 Anbu to protect them secretly. Don''t worry." Hiruzen spoke.


    "But what is this bad feeling that I am having. Why do I feel my brother is not safe?


    This can''t go on. I can''t take it anymore. I will personally go and protect my brother." Tsunade suddenly spoke and walked out.


    But she was immediately stopped by Hiruzen.


    "Stop, Tsunade. I didn''t call you back from Suna border just to be your brother''s guardian. I know how you feel now, but sometimes you mustn''t be too overprotective or he won''t be the great leader he aspired to be.


    Currently, the situation in the Iwa battlefield is truly bad for us. Not only Iwa force, but we also somehow provoked Ame force and their Kage.


    Orochimaru and Jiraiya are truly desperate for your help.


    Tonight, I want you to go to help your teammates.


    Just leave your brother to those 3 Anbu." Hiruzen tried to persuade Tsunade.


    Tsunade hesitated for a moment and agreed to Hiruzen.


    "Okay, I will listen to you this time, but make sure he is safe when he returned from the mission," Tsunade shouted and walked out of the Hokage office.


    Seeing Tsunade go out, Hiruzen gave out a breath of relief. It seems like he avoided death this time.


    ''*Sigh* Hokage scared of his female student. How low I have become'' Hirzuen thought.


    --


    After walking out of the Hokage office, Tsunade still couldn''t let go of her bad feeling. Somehow, she definitely felt Nawaki is in great danger.


    ''I am sure that the old man will put several Anbu to monitor me. It seems I can''t go out secretly.


    Guess I have to ask a favor to that person then.''


    COMMENT 10 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 10 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Translator: Editor:

 Chapter 42 - Face off with Konoha Geniuses

    "How is it? Do you guys see him" Nawaki asked to Hyuga twins who were using Byakugan to search through?


    "No, I don''t see any sign of a person yet. Hizashi, how about you?" Elder of twin asked his little brother.


    "I also don''t see anyone here too, brother," Hiashi answered.


    "Damn, that spy sure knows how to run. It''s been 3 days and we haven''t seen a glimpse of him. Just where the hell is he? We should have brought Inuzuka or Aburame clan kids too. They are the experts in tracking." Nawaki angrily complained.


    "It''s useless to say now. How disgraceful that shinobi is complaining because the mission is not going in his way." Fugaku said to Nawaki.


    "What did you say?" Nawaki got angry.


    Soon those two started to bickering each other. Seeing dispute is getting worse, Minato and others stepped out and relieved the fight.


    "*Sigh* Why do I have to be with these troublesome guys. They literally fight every hour." Shikaku commented.


    "haha, well they are Senju and Uchiha. So that is expected." Minato said while showing his bright smile.


    Like this, a group of Konoha geniuses spent another 2 days searching and finally found several traces of a spy.


    --------------------------------------------


    Three days of constant running, we finally got out of Iwa land and entered Konoha land for the first time in our life. Since we are no longer in Iwa land, I ordered the squad to proceed with caution.


    I commanded Kimiko to use her sensor abilities every 5 minutes. Since this was our first time as Konoha''s land, I didn''t know well about Konoha''s border patrol schedules. Therefore, slowing down our speed was definitely necessary.


    Kitsuchi was quite impatient as we have slowed down our speed ever since we entered Konoha land. He was afraid that the spy would get caught and the mission is failed. He kept requesting me to speed up.


    "Come on, Genji. With this our current speed, I am sure our spy will get caught by Konoha even before we reach him. Let''s speed up!" Kitsuchi asked me over and over again.


    "Hey, when I say no, that means no. Hehehe, how dare mere Genin challenge Chunin and his team leader''s authority!


    -10 points from your performance.


    If you gonna keep asking that stupid request again, I will deem you fail in your performance." I said to Kitsuchi.


    ----


    After 2 days of more running, we found the place with sign of battle. We immediately stopped and inspected the place.


    "It seems like the battle happened not long ago. This tree is burned but it still warm." Gari told me after inspecting.


    "Was it our spy that fought Konoha shinobi here? I hope it''s not the case." Kitsuchi asked with a worrying face.


    "It''s been five days. We are taking the route our spy is using to escape to Iwagakure. By now we should be meeting with our spy.


    But since that is not the case, I am afraid our spy has been caught up by Konoha pursuers and probably fought here.


    Currently, either they already captured our spy or our spy is running like a dog from them." I explained to others.


    "Kimiko, I want you to use your sensing ability to the max. Since the battle is still fresh, I am sure they haven''t gone too far. We can''t just go back after wasting 5 days to come here, right." I ordered Kimiko.


    Kimiko closed her eyes and used her sensing power as furthest she could.


    "I found them 5km south from us. 8 people are chasing one person," Kimiko told us.


    "Check if they have Jounin level chakra reserve or not," I asked to Kimiko again.


    "No, all chasers have only Chunin or Genin level chakra reserves," Kimiko reported.


    I was worried that there were eight enemies but after hearing that they were just Chunins and Genin, I just smirked. It seems like I was worried for nothing.


    Since they are just weaklings, I ordered everyone to save our spy asap.


    ------------


    (Nawaki and Konoha geniuses team)


    After finding the trace of the spy, relying on twin''s Byakugan, they managed to find him easily.


    Although they wanted to catch him with surprise, their plan failed thanks to Nawaki who triggered a bell alarm set up by the spy.


    Fugaku immediately used Uchiha''s most used jutsu, Fire Style: Fire Ball jutsu at spy. But spy used Earth Style: Earth Wall jutsu and blocked fireball.


    Konoha 8 geniuses chased spy by following the blood trails. Hyuga twin didn''t use their Byakugan as it is extremely consuming to use. They already over-used their Byakugan to search the spy. They wanted to save their chakra as much as they could.


    No matter how fast the spy was, he was running injured and eventually couldn''t run anymore due to blood loss.


    Fugaku smirked seeing spy gave up himself. He threw a few shuriken at spy''s legs to make sure he can''t run.


    But out of nowhere, anther set of Kunai came out and blocked the shurikens to protect the spy. This shocked both Konoha geniuses and the spy.


    A few seconds later, Genji and his squad appeared in front of Konoha geniuses.


    -----------------------


    (MC POV)


    Me and my squad showed ourselves to Konoha pursuers with full of confidence.


    Gari, Gin, Kan, and Kitsuchi showed smug faces seeing Konoha pursuers were a bunch of kids just like them, while Kimiko went up to the spy to bandage him.


    System: "Host is not wrong. They are Nawaki Senju, Fugaku Uchiha, Hyuga Haishi, Hyuga Hizashi, Shikaku Nara, Inoichi Yamanaka, Choza Akimichi and Minato Namikaze."


    As expected, they were fathers of Naruto generation kids. I was most shocked to see Minato among them.


    ''What the fu?k are they doing here? Aren''t they basically pillars of the next Konoha generation? Are they on their own?''


    While I was on my thought, Nawaki questioned us.


    "Who are you guys? Why are you stopping us?"


    "You idiot, Isn''t it obvious. They are Iwa shinobi sent to escort their spy safely." Fugaku said.


    "What? So you are our enemies?!! Then we have to beat the crap out of you too." Nawaki confidently said.


    We just looked at Nawaki as he was clown.


    ''Wait, did this Senju kid say, he will beat us? He is just Chunin level and saying he will beat elite Jounin level like me??''


    The more I thought about it, the more laughable it was. Soon all of us couldn''t contain ourselves and laughed at Nawaki. Nawaki got angry and tried to dash to us, but soon stopped by Shikaku.


    "Don''t be impulsive, we don''t know their strength yet. They plan to make you lose your cool." Shikaku tried to calm down Nawaki.


    Meanwhile, I used hand language to Kimiko to check if they were other shinobi around us, but Kimiko replying there was really no one except us.


    ''There is really no one around to protect them? What the fu?k? Hiruzen, were you this dumb? Or is this an opportunity given by heaven to me?


    hehehehehehe, since heaven blessed me with this chance, I will not waste this valuable opportunity. I will capture all of them and bring them to Iwa as war prisoners and get profit from compensation. I will leave their fates to Onoki after bringing them to Iwagakure.


    Since there is Senju kid, I am sure Konoha will compensate whatever it takes to bring back these kids.


    I won''t kill them. The reason is simple, I don''t get any benefit. How can I get rewarded if I kill them here?


    Onoki doesn''t know the future strength of these kids, so he will just think we killed some nameless Chunins and Genins.


    Onoki will probably just praise us for a bit and leave at that.


    But as for Minato, he has to die. He will be the most formidable one among them. I don''t care if he is Naruto dad or not. I value my life more. Also since I am an Iwa shinobi, I can''t let future danger go, can I?''


    After planning my next step, I started to give out orders.


    "Guys, they are the so-called geniuses of Konoha. If we capture and bring them to Iwa, I am sure Tsuchikage-sama will reward us heavily.


    Listen up. Do not kill that Brown-haired and shot Dark-haired kid if you can. They both Senju and Uchiha kids.


    Also, kill that blonde hair kid no matter what." I ordered.


    "Eh? Why are you so insist on killing that blondie?" Kitsuchi asked me.


    "Don''t question your superior.


    Gari, you take down those Hyuga twins.


    Kan and Kitsuchi will take on that three lazy-tall stick-fat trio.


    Gin and Kimiko, you two take our spy to somewhere safe and protect him.


    I will deal with Senju, Uchiha, and blond kid myself."


    """Okay!""" My squad answered.


    "Bring it on! I will beat you up for looking down on us." Nawaki shouted.


    Thus the battle between Strong Geniuses vs Weak Geniuses began.


    (A/N: I hope you guys don''t complain about Minato and Konoha kids'' power level is low compared to Genji and his squad. They only trained inside their clan buildings until now while Genji and others trained, experiencing the war.)


    COMMENT 31 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY


    ¡ª New chapter is coming soon ¡ªWrite a review Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download Weekly Power Status See Who Voted -- Power Ranking -- Power Stone Vote 31 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Translator: Editor:

 Chapter 43 - Beating up Senju and Uchiha

    Me and Genji used Earth Style: Mobile Core jutsu and lowered the ground surrounding us to separate Konoha kids. Gin and Kimiko took the spy and escaped from battlegrounds.


    As my order, Gari lowered the ground where there were only Hyuga twin and him while Kan and Kitsuchi matched with Ino-Shiika-Cho formation kids. I matched with Uchiha Fugaku, Nawaki Senju, and Minato.


    I didn''t worry about Gari''s, as his explosion ability is quite dangerous for Taijutsu users such as Byakugan. He would just blow up his opponent with just simple contact. Those twins could use Hyuga''s ''Rotation'' jutsu to protect from Gari''s explosions, but I wonder how long can they keep up using Rotation. I could see visible tiredness from those Hyuga twins from overusing their eyes.


    As for Kitsuchi''s side, I am a bit worried. Kitsuchi kept boasting that he could beat Jounin throughout the journey, but I would be an idiot to believe everything he says. Also, he is facing off against Shikaku, possibly the smartest kid in the world! That''s why I ordered Kan to stick with him.


    According to the Kitsuchi, Even though Kimiko improved her fighting strength since the Academy battle event, she mainly focused on learning Sensing and Treating injuries skills. Which also meant she is a support type. I just don''t understand why she chose to develop the medical and sensing field while she has super op Kekkei Genkai(Lava). Anyway, I am sure Gin will protect her and Spy safe just in case something happens.


    Now I am left with an annoying kid, proud-arrogant kid, and the actual genius. I feel like they are the past-version of Naruto, Sasuke, and Kakashi.


    "You think you can face all three of us together? You are just around the same age as us. I will punch you hard for looking down on me." Nawaki loudly shouted and dashed at me without even thinking.


    "Wait, stop. We shouldn''t rush to him," Minato warned Nawaki. But Nawaki didn''t listen any crap of Minato


    "I will go easy on ya and not use my sword, come on."


    Nawaki pulled out his fist to punch me, but was blocked easily and counter-punched be me instead. I continued to block and recounter him. Basically, I was playing around with him while he was doing his best to defeat me.


    ''Wow, Nawaki''s Taijutsu is amazingly shit. I expected at least good movements from him since he is a Senju, but it seems I overestimated Konoha''s royals training. Well, Konohamaru also would have turned out weak if it wasn''t Naruto. I should have expected this.''


    After 3 minutes of playing around, I got tired of Nawaki''s ranting and weak-ass Taijutsu and started to beat the crap our of Nawaki like there is no tomorrow.


    Minato was carefully studying my taijutsu as he never saw Wing Chun style, but seeing Nawaki getting his ?ss whooped by me, he immediately dashed out to save Nawaki.


    "Fugaku, cooperate with me to save Nawaki. We can''t win against this guy one on one" Minato requested to Fugaku. But knowing he is Uchiha, Fugaku just ignored.


    Minato without any choice, rushed to me alone. He created smoke around him using a smoke bomb and threw Kunai at me to stop my beating to Nawaki.


    I was about to use Nawaki as a shield but realised I was supposed to keep him alive, so instead, I kicked away the kunai away.


    Minato stabbed me but was shocked that he stabbed a log instead. I used Substitution jutsu and easily avoided Minato''s attack.


    I gotta say, Minato''s Shunshin is very accurate and fast. But I fought tons of speedy shinobi like him during the war and came out alive. I had wealthy experiences while he didn''t.


    I generated lighting chakra on my legs to further speed up my Shunshin jutsu and appeared in front of Minato. Minato surprised but still raised his arms to guard.


    "Not bad, but you are still too weak," I said Minato.


    ''Yess, I wanted to say that shit once in my lifetime. Hehe.''


    Then I side kicked his stomach as his guard didn''t even matter with my full raw strength. Minato went flying while spitting out the blood.


    Seeing Minato went flying, Nawaki got angry and shouted.


    "Minato!! Are you okay?


    Damn you bastard, you hurt my friend. How dare you!! I will never forg..."


    "Enough about your friends bullshit. You can say that shit in front of old man Onoki later. For now, just stay put." I said to him.


    Nawaki got knocked out and Minato could b?r?ly move from my kick. The only one left is Fugaku. But this guy seems to smirk at me.


    "Hmph, finally you finished off those weaklings. I was waiting for you to clear them out. They just get in my way. Now I can use my full power." Fugaku announced to me.


    "..."


    ''Didn''t this idiot see how I beat the crap of Nawaki or how fast I was to kick Minato?? And he still thinks he can handle me?


    Everyone look, there is an idiot here!!!


    Sasuke got his gene from his dad, I see. I must teach this a lesson.''


    Fugaku closed his eyes for second and reopened them as Sharingans. They were not fully developed, but the second stage of sharing an''s (two Tomoes).


    "Now come at me." He arrogantly declared while showing his hand gestures to come.


    ''Okay, I am pissed. If I don''t humiliate you today, I will quit being shinobi, damn it.''


    I dashed at him. At first, Fugaku was able to dodge my attacks using his Sharingans. But even with his Sharingans, he realised he couldn''t hurt me.


    Therefore, he started to copy my Taijutsu slowly. This further pissed me off.


    ''I practised so hard to master Wing Chun style and he is planning to copy it by simply watching my movement!! You fu?k?n? copycat.''


    I augmented lightning chakra on my leg to the max and darted at Fugaku. Although Fugaku could see me, his body couldn''t react.


    I punched him in front, dashed to his behind and delivered a sidekick, jumped and gave the axe kick.


    (A/N: it''s like how Lee beat up Garra at the first half during Chunin exam.)


    Seeing he couldn''t beat me in taijutsu, Fugaku immediately retreated and decided to use Ninjutsu.


    He performed several hand signs, then his stomach suddenly gotten bloated. He was preparing to spit out firs ball.


    But before he could spit the fireball, I shunshined to him and kicked his bloated stomach as hard as I could and interrupted his jutsu.


    "Hey, don''t you know illegal to interrupt when someone is performing jutsu!!"


    "Bitch please, we are Shinobi. We were raised to do illegals."


    Fugaku couldn''t say anything back to my reason. I used this chance and appeared behind him.


    "Now taste your village''s Secret jutsu.


    Konoha secret finger jutsu: Thousand years of death!!!!"


    I thrust my four fingers between Fugaku''s bu????ks with all my strength. Fugaku while screaming, went flying like Naruto.


    I was sure this jutsu would humiliate proud-ass Uchiha.


    "Haha, how did you feel? Oh my, your bu?? stinks like hell. Haha, Uchiha getting his ?ss poked."


    I made fun of him loudly to humiliate him more. Fugaku''s face became red like monkey''s bu??.


    Fugaku couldn''t take humiliation any longer, he stood up and rushed at me with killing intent.


    After having fun, I knew I shouldn''t waste my time anymore, so I grabbed my sword.


    I dashed at Fugaku, kicked his lower legs and slashed at his right eye.


    This happened so quick that Minato didn''t see anything, but as for Fugaku, in the shock of losing his eye, he couldn''t even scream.


    After 2 seconds, intense pain came out to Fugaku and he sobbed and screamed as loud as he can.


    "My eye, my eye!!!!"


    10 more seconds later, Fugaku passed out from the intense pain and shock of losing his right eye.


    I didn''t kill him as Onoki would sure give reward me handsomely. Onoki hates Uchiha more than anyone in Iwagakure and I am sure he would be delighted to have Uchiha clan head heir.


    As for cutting his eye, it was a bit of punishment for pissing me off when he doesn''t even have the power to defend himself.


    Now the only one still conscious is Minato who could b?r?ly move due to my kick.


    "Any last word?"


    "Let''s Go Die Together!!!"


    Minato pulled out threw explosion tags around us to suicide bomb and was about to form the tiger hand seal to activate them.


    *Slash*


    "Ahhhhhhh!!!"


    I already predicted he might suicide bomb with me, and instantly cut off his right mercilessly to make him couldn''t activate explosion tags. Then I cut off all the explosion tags to make things safe just in case.


    Minato cried out as he failed his plan and lost his right arm.


    "Nice try. Others might have died with you, but unfortunately for you, you met me, Minato. I kinda feel sad for ya. Now say goodbye to your life."


    Just as I was about to slash Minato, my instincts sensed danger coming at me from above as if I stay longer in this spot, I would die.


    I immediately shunshined away from the place. Soon after Anbu appeared at the spot I was standing before.


    "That''s further as you go. You now under arrest for infiltrating to Konoha'' land. Why would Iwa send jounin level shinobi like you on this low-level mission?" Anbu questioned to me.


    I was a bit shocked to see Anbu. Regrettably, I couldn''t kill Minato as this Anbu interrupted me.


    ''Tsch, I knew it. Hokage wouldn''t just send their future kids alone without protection.


    I don''t how many of Anbu are there but I am sure they are helping other Konoha kids too. Luckily, I made a good choice to ?ssigned Gin and Kan to Kitsuchi and Kimiko.


    But these guys sure are late. If I wasn''t playing around from the start, they would be all dead.


    What''s this? Minato is also surprised by this Anbu appearance. Does that mean they didn''t know about Anbu following them?


    Hmmm... Oh, I get it. I am sure Hiruzen ordered them to follow Konoha kids without being discovered. But since there were Hyuga Twins, Anbu had to follow them outside of Twins'' Byakugan range.


    No wonder they took quite long to come here and Kimiko couldn''t sense them. They were just too far away from us.''


    I ignored Anbu''s question to me and grabbed the other sword in my back and readied in battle stance.


    I am sure this Anbu already sent an emergency help request to Konoha, I need to kill him and Minato quickly and run away bringing Nawaki and Fugaku as hostages.

 Chapter 44 - Another interference

    In front of me was an Anbu, protecting Minato from me, while behind me, there were two idiots knocked out.


    Even though Anbu''s appearance was unexpected, I didn''t panic. At first, I decided to gauge the strength of this Anbu. If he is weaker than me, I will finish him and Minato quickly as I can.


    But if his strength is on par or even stronger than me, I will pull out immediately while dragging these two with me. I am quite confident in my running away skills.


    I am sure this Anbu or his friends already sent for help to Konohagakure. We have to get out of Konoha''s land before they completely lock down the border we are escaping to.


    Without hesitating, I coated lighting charka to my twin bu??erfly swords, which resulted in the bright lighting and dashed at Anbu.


    Anbu in response pulled out another blade from his back and went for defense position. He directly received my full-out aggressive sword attacks.


    I am surprised a bit that his blades could withstand my lighting swords. I observed, just to found out that Anbu coated his blades in a very thin wind chakra.


    ''No wonder, since wind affinity is stronger than lighting affinity, those blades could withstand my lighting swords. He also used his wind charka as a minimum as he can, to conserve his chakra.


    And he doesn''t sweat a bit to block my aggressive sword strikes. He is definitely a Jounin-level shinobi. But I feel like he is not stronger than me. That''s enough for testing.''


    I dashed at him again at a faster speed. I swing both my swords at his head. Anbu blocked my swords with his blades. But I encased my right feet in rock and kicked at him to put more strength.


    (A/N: this jutsu is like Earth style: Rock fist, but instead of hardening your fist, you enclose your feet in rock)


    I started to use advanced Wing Chun sword arts with a little bit of feet attacks. After attacking with swords, I used my feet to attack him to connect him, next sword attacks again. I just didn''t give time to breathe in Anbu.


    After fighting for 5 minutes, Anbu started to slow his movement. And in 10 minutes, he couldn''t keep up with my attacks anymore and chose to keep a distance and use Ninjutsu.


    ''So he is using Ninjutsu, huh? Damn, it would take a bit longer to kill him in a fair fight. But there is no way I am going to fight in fair and square.''


    "Fire Style: Fire Dragon Flame Jutsu."


    Anbu performed a few hand signs and spitted out the flame from his mouth which, traveled in quick speed at me.


    I quickly created the Earth Wall just in time to block fire dragon flame jutsu. I then created one Earth clone.


    I next, did several hand signs to prepare Earth Style: Stone Pistol jutsu. I spitted out 5 stone pistols from my mouth which grew into giant boulders.


    But stone pistols didn''t fly to Anbu, instead, they were aimed at Nawaki Senju. I was using Nawaki as a bait. I was sure Anbu will no matter what, come and save Nawaki SENJU from those giant boulders since that is his mission.


    As expected Anbu appeared in front of lying-down Nawaki and cut off giant boulders to save him. I ordered my earth clone to attack him while I used Earth Travel jutsu to sneakily move behind him.


    Anbu used one hand to cut off boulders while the other hand to block my clone attack.


    "You made the wrong choice, bitch!!"


    Although I intended to cut off his head, Anbu was experienced enough to detect me in the last second and managed to avoid his death b?r?ly. But he was still injured heavily in his back. My plan to use Nawaki as initial bait and earth clone to finishing bait was successful.


    "Let''s finish this," I said to Anbu.


    "Earth style: Swamp of Underworld!" I created swamp below him, so he can''t escape. He couldn''t dodge it as he could b?r?ly move from my strike.


    I shot 3 Earth Stone pistols and Earth Dragon jutsu at him. Lastly, I created the Earth Style Barrier: Prison Dome around him and blow all of them off at the same time.


    I checked to see if Anbu was alive, but as expected, he died with only a few fleshes remaining.


    After killing Anbu, my attention went to Minato once again.


    "We had disturbance while ago. But since I finished him off, let''s continue where we left off." While saying this, I dashed to Minato.


    "Damn it!!" Minato pinned his hope to the Anbu, but seeing him blowing up to pieces, Minato lost his hope and screamed loudly.


    *Clank*~~~~~


    -----


    ''What the fu?k!! I am starting to think that Minato fu?k?n? has some kind of plot armor or something. First, it was Anbu and now this long blue-haired Konoha Shinobi blocked my swords to protect Minato.


    Not only that, but this also paled long-haired shinobi is not your damn average Jounin. He is DAN!!! Freaking next Hokage candidate appeared!!''


    After realizing it was Dan, my face turned from neutral to disaster. Now, before I had this confidence to kill Anbu, but Dan is another shit level.


    Since Dan was here, I knew I had less than 5 percent chance to kill Minato. Heck instead, I might even get captured if I am not careful.


    I instantly created earth clone to pick up Fugaku while I pick up Nawaki and throw several smoke bombs to escape. I also send a fire signal in the sky to order everyone in my squad to retreat immediately.


    While running, I asked System to explain all Dan''s known abilities in detail.


    ---


    Dan wasn''t hurried to chase Genji, but instead, he sat to Minato and gave him emergency treatment.


    "I heard it was a simple B-rank mission, but I am glad that Tsunade asked me to check up on you guys. If it wasn''t me, then you guys might..." Dan didn''t continue.


    After treating and bring Minato to a safe place, Dan started chasing Genji.


    "Be careful, That Iwa Ninja kid is strong. He even took down Anbu with no injury." Minato warned Dan before he leaves.


    Dan just smiled at Minato and told him to wait for him.


    ----------


    System:" Host has successfully triggered a special quest.


    *Quest: Host is currently chasing by Next Hokage candidate, Dan.


    Please shake him off and meet Host''s squad without being tailed.


    Reward: Barrier Jutsu: Four Violet Flames Formation scroll (Known for trapping Dan) and Spirit Pill (Blocking Dan''s spirit from possessing your body)


    Failure: There won''t be any failure. If Host doesn''t shake him off, the Host will be captured by him. So please complete the quest if Host wants to live.*"


    ''So this is like even if the system gives failure, I won''t be alive to receive the punishment, huh. That''s scary.''


    I was quiet for a few minutes to think of a plan to escape Dan.


    ---------------


    Dan hurried at tremendous speed to search for Genji as he was specifically asked to protect Nawaki from Tsunade.


    After 20 minutes of searching, he found Genji carrying Nawaki and Uchiha kid. He quickly threw Kunai to stop them and struck Genji. But unfortunately for him, they were earth clones. With a disappointed look, he continued searching.


    Following, with no choice, Dan used his signature jutsu: Ghost Transformation Jutsu. He will become a living ghost and travel or fly at incredibly high speed and possess the target''s body or even kill them.


    Using this jutsu, he was able to discover and kill fake Genji clones in exceedingly fast. He was traveling at the edge of the waterfall and he saw Genji carrying Fugaku.


    But at last moment, Genji knew he sensed that he would be attacked by Dan and awake Fugaku up and threw him to waterfall.


    Dan attacked Genji, only to find out he was clone too. But then, he realized Fugaku, Genji''s clone threw was real, not a clone. Fugaku was screaming, crying for help in the water.


    Soon, Fugaku fell off from waterfall, and Dan also went down and possessed Fugaku''s body to save him.


    Luckily, Fugaku managed to survive to fall from the waterfall, thanks to Dan''s help. But his body was in a literal mess and he could b?r?ly breathe.


    As much as Dan wanted to continue searching for Genji and Nawaki, his kindness didn''t allow him to leave Fugaku alone here in the deep forest.


    He made a clone told him to escort Fugaku while real him became Ghost mode and continue searching.


    But as soon as he left, several Genji clones attacked Dan''s clone and Fugaku. Some of Genji''s clones suicide bombed with Dan''s clone.


    After getting his clone memory back, Dan came back shortly and destroyed all of Genji''s clones. But this action made Dan unsure if he should leave Fugaku with his clone again.


    In the end, Dan decided to escort him back personally, abandoning his search for Genji and Nawaki.


    Also, his ghost mode had a time limit and spends huge charka. He didn''t want to waste all of them by the time he actually finds Genji.


    (A/N: the time limit is a weakness that I created to nerf Dan a bit. His ghost mode seems to be very op and I honestly have no idea how to defeat it. I am thinking he might even kill the first homage with that op jutsu)


    I used Earth Barrier: Prison Some jutsu on Fugaku to absorb all of his charka empty. So he doesn''t have enough chakra to stand up on the water.


    I was sure, by now Dan should be wasting his time saving and escorting Fugaku to a safe place. Using Fugaku as a deadweight drag to Dan, I was sure knowing Dan''s kindness, this plan would work.


    I didn''t kill Fugaku as I was afraid that Dan won''t even bother saving the dead corpse.


    Although I had to give up on Fugaku, I still have Nawaki with me. Also, I plugged out Fugaku''s last remaining Sharingan. So even if Dan saves him, he is useless in the future.


    After 1 hour of speed, I arrived at the place where I told my squad to gather in case an emergency we got separated.


    Gari, Gin, Kimiko, and the spy were there waiting for me, Kan and Kitsuchi. I was a bit surprised that Gari is here before me.


    System:" Host has successfully completed a special quest.


    *Quest: Host is currently chasing by Next Hokage candidate, Dan.


    Please shake him off and meet Host''s squad without being tailed.


    Reward: Barrier Jutsu: Four Violet Flames Formation scroll (Known for trapping Dan) and Spirit Pill (Blocking Dan''s spirit from possessing your body)


    Failure: There won''t be any failure. If Host doesn''t shake him off, the Host will be captured by him. So please complete the quest if Host wants to live.*


    Rewards are now in the Host''s Kunai pocket."


    It seems Anbu didn''t attack Gin, Kimiko, and the spy.


    But one Anbu came interfering Gari''s fight with Hyuga twins just like mine. I was beyond happy to hear that Gari captured and brought one of the twins with him.


    Gari told me he couldn''t capture the other twin as Anbu took him and ran away after realizing Gari was powerful than him.


    I saw it was the younger twin Hizashi whom Gari captured. I should have known since Hizashi will be a branch family member in the future. So Anbu took Hiashi with him.


    Now we just have to wait for Kan and Kitsuchi. I took out Four Violet Flames Formation scroll from my Kunai pocket and studied until they come back.


    For some reason, I got a bad feeling.


    _______________________________


    2 hours later, our anxiety was growing bigger and bigger. I didn''t want to imagine something bad happens Kitsuchi. Then we would be fu?k?d up by Onoki for sure.


    Finally, we saw Kan coming, got relieved.


    But as soon as Kan came close to us, he suddenly kneeled down and asked for forgiveness.


    "Sorry, Genji. Kitsuchi''s got captured by them!! I didn''t manage to protect Kitsuchi from them. I am so sorry."


    I fell like my life ended when I heard Kan. Instant Anger came over me. I quickly grabbed Kan''s collar and questioned him.


    "What? You idiot let him get captured?? Why do you think I let you go with him? He is 100 times much worth than you!! Why aren''t you the one who got captured, you idiot!!!"


    I was even about to punch him, but Gari stop me and told me to calm down. Gari also asked Kan to explain what happened.


    "Kitsuchi and I were fighting against three trio kids. Although three kids'' jutsu were weird and tricky, we were gaining the upper hand.


    But suddenly Anbu came and joined the fight. This put us into disadvantages and we were no longer winning side.


    That''s why I suggested Kitsuchi hold these three kids trio busy until I finish off Anbu alone one on one.


    He agreed and we managed to separate An u and those three kids trio.


    While fighting Anbu, I saw the signal Genji sent and rushed to kill him. He was a sensor and good at combat. So I was able to kill him after a long battle.


    When I returned to bring Kitsuchi to retreat, I saw he got captured by blue long-haired Jounin of Konoha. He was powerful too. I was no match for him at all.


    But he didn''t capture me, instead, he told me to go tell Genji to exchange our prisoner tomorrow morning at the waterfall.


    Of course, I checked if I was being tailed or not before coming here. I used Earth Travel jutsu to reach here. I even created clones to act as baits."


    Kan told us what happened to him and Kitsuchi. It seems like Dan''s arrival screwed most of my plans to capture Konoha kids.


    I got calmed down after listening to Kan and went into thinking.


    I don''t know why Dan is here or who sent him here, but I gotta think of a plan to rescue Kitsuchi tomorrow morning.


    -------------------------------


    *Explanation*


    (A/N: Now, I see a lot of you guys wanted Minato to die. But I still plan to let Minato live.


    As for the first reason, because I''m super lazy to create OC replacement for Naruto as Ashura''s reincarnation.


    I personally feel weird seeing there won''t be Naruto in a fanfiction of a show called "Naruto"!!!


    Also, I would like to picture Minato vs Genji during the third ninja war.


    If you guys are worried about Minato becoming so strong that he could possibly kill mc or mc''s friends and beloved, then don''t worry. I won''t make him too op like that.


    Hope you guys are convinced, hahaha!


    Next chapter will be brain battle between mc vs Shikaku)

 Chapter 45 - Exchange between Kitsuchi and Nawaki

    After listening to Kan''s story, we all sat around to discuss what''s our next move. Spy suggested we should abandon Kitsuchi and escape to Iwagakure.


    All of us glared at the spy as he was crazy. Kimiko looked at the Spy like she was going to kill him. Going to Iwagakure after losing Onoki''s son to Konoha, is not something I wouldn''t even want to imagine. We would be skinned alive.


    It seems like Spy didn''t know Kitsuchi''s status, so I told him who was Kitsuchi''s dad. After hearing Kitsuchi was the son of Onoki, spy just froze up and started to tear up.


    "Oh my god!! In order to save me, Tsuchikage-sama even sent his son. I didn''t know I was such an important person to his eye. Okay, even if I sacrifice my body, I would definitely save Kitsuchi-sama." spy claimed.


    ''You idiot, he was sent here as a test, not because of you. This guy is just low-level spy but this motherfucker is chased by Konoha genius, Anbu, and even next Hokage candidate.'' I thought.


    "Hey what''s your name and your special skill? I need to know everyone''s power to plan out strategy" I asked to spy.


    "I am called Tonju. I was sent to Konoha to spread false rumors and create an uproar inside them. But I got discovered and fled. My specialty is barrier jutsu, and I am bad at combat." Tonju introduced himself to us.


    After greeting ourselves to Tonju, I asked Kan.


    "Kan, they said tomorrow morning, right?"


    "Yes, they said, tomorrow morning at the Waterfall located east from here," Kan answered me.


    ''It''s a good thing that they arranged tomorrow. Konoha helpers will at least take 2 or 3 days to reach here, so I don''t have to worry about them.'' I thought.


    I ordered Kimiko to use the ROCK messenger bird to send for help to Onoki. I am sure she has one since every ROCK division member had one in their summoning scroll. The situation turned unexpected and we are fronting the Hokage candidate, Onoki will surely send strong reinforcements or personally come.


    ''Now about rescuing Kituschi, I am sure that Shikaku would plan something. Even if we take back Kitsuchi from them, as long as there is Dan, we won''t be safe at all. We also can''t wait until Onoki''s reinforcements to come save us.


    So the only choice we can stay alive tomorrow is to kill Dan! But how? Even if we all attack together, I am afraid we would be defeated by Dan.''


    I kept thinking about how to kill Dan, suddenly an idea came to me when I saw Hizashi tied up. It was not a bad idea and also seems to be the only way to kill Dan.


    After planning how to kill Dan, I immediately told my plans to everyone. Then I gave them Four Violet Flames Formation scroll to them which I got from recent quest reward.


    "Kan, Gin, Kimiko, and Tonju, I want you four to learn this barrier jutsu until next morning. I don''t need you guys to master it, just enough to maintain barrier for 5 minutes.


    Tonju, since you are good at barrier jutsu, I want you to lead everyone to teach them this formation. And don''t ask how I got this.


    Gari, come here. I have another mission for you."


    I explained my plan carefully so they don''t misunderstand.


    ---------------------


    (at Dan and Konoha kids)


    Choza was treating Fugaku, Minato, and Hiashi while Dan, Shikaku, and Anbu sat around to plan out a strategy. Inojin was trying to get info from Kitsuchi.


    "I already asked for help this afternoon. They would probably take 3 days until they reach here." Anbu reported.


    "Can you tell me our casualties from the battle between Iwa shinobi?" Dan asked.


    "Two of my Anbu team died, leaving me alone while Nawaki Senju and Hizashi Hyuga have been captured.


    Uchiha Fugaku lost both his eyes, Minato Namikaze lost his right arm and Hiashi Hyuga is in the unconscious." Anbu answered.


    Dan and Shikaku showed a grim face.


    "Their leader is someone very smart and strong. He knew he couldn''t take me down, so he ran away immediately and used Fugaku as a bait. According to Minato, he seems to be from explosion corps." Dan told everyone.


    "Dan-sama, I have a question. Why did you arrange the gathering for tomorrow morning? We could have waited until our reinforce to come and ambush them." Anbu questioned.


    "Iwa shinobi are not idiots. They probably know our reinforce are coming now. Dan-san was afraid they would even abandon their friend and escape if we arrange to later day." Shikaku answered him instead of Dan.


    "hahaha, as expected of Nara. For tomorrow morning plan, I leave all to you, little boy. My brain isn''t just good as Nara." Dan smiled and patted Shikaku''s back.


    "How troublesome" Shikaku said to nobody. But Dan and Anbu could see Shikaku was already planning in his mind.


    -----------------------------------------------------


    (One day later)


    Dan, Anbu, and Ino-Shika-Cho kids were at the river, dragging Kitsuchi.


    They waited for hours but Iwa shinobi didn''t show up.


    "Are they going to show up or not? Damn it." Inojin said.


    "Just be patient. If they don''t come for another 30 minutes, then we retreat." Shikaku told Inojin.


    After 20 minutes, Genji and Iwa shinobi appeared, dragging Nawaki with them.


    They appeared opposite bank of the river, Dan and Konoha kids are standing.


    ----------------------------------


    I saw Dan and Konoha kids all came except Minato, Fugaku, and Hiashi.


    I thought Hiashi would come for sure since he is only their Sensor as Kan already killed Anbu sensor. Maybe they thought he would only drag them during battle or he is hiding somewhere else.


    "Alright, let''s start exchanging hostage," I shouted at them.


    "Wait, where is Hizashi? We won''t trade until you guys swap Hizashi and Nawaki." Shikaku first spoke to negotiate to gain upper hand.


    "Don''t be ridiculous. You guys are exchange one while we exchange two people? We are not idiots." Gari answered Shikaku.


    "If you don''t exchange Hizashi, then I am afraid we have to cancel the exchange." Responding to Gari, Shikaku threatened us to cancel the exchange.


    Gari and others suddenly showed a grim face and looked at me for help. I sighed at how easily these guys believed Shikaku''s words.


    "Alright, if you insist on the exchange including Hiashi, I am afraid we can''t do that. Guys let''s go. This exchange is canceled." I answered to Shikaku''s threats. I signaled everyone to retreat. Everyone looked shocked seeing we retreat but still followed my order.


    I knew Shikaku was bluffing, if they didn''t get Nawaki, they would get way more ?ss kicked by Tsunade than me by Onoki.


    Just as I predicted, Shikaku called out to us resume exchange without Hizashi.


    "Ok, ok. You win. Let''s only exchange Nawaki and your friend."


    "You should have said it earlier." I stopped our movement and smiled at Shikaku.


    I signaled Gin to release Nawaki to go, at the same time, Shikaku also released Kitsuchi.


    They both slowly walked across the river from opposite banks.


    Just as Kitsuchi and Nawaki walked passed each other, I shouted at Kitsuchi.


    "Run to Kitsuchi, commence the plan!!" I grabbed shurikens and threw them at Nawaki.


    But seeing these situations, Shikaku just smirked.


    "I knew you Iwa shinobi would do that. That''s why I planted Anbu inside the river whole this time. Now come out." Shikaku said.


    Following Shikaku''s word, Anbu abruptly came out of the water and deflected all the shurikens at Nawaki.


    I just laughed seeing Anbu protecting Nawaki.


    "Well, sorry for you. I already knew you would plant Anbu underwater, that''s why I attached the explosion tag at Senju''s cloth, just in case. Now die!!" I motioned the ''Snake'' hand seal and blew off the explosion tag.


    But Shikaku didn''t look worried at all and told me.


    "I already predicted there would be an explosion tag. That''s why I ordered Anbu to take off all Nawaki''s cloth beforehand." Shikaku narrated.


    Then we saw burned pieces of Nawaki clothes falling while Anbu and n?k?d Nawaki appeared at Konoha''s side.


    "Now it''s time for a counterattack. Inojin, do it!!" Shikaku added.


    "On it" Inojin answered. Soon he fell down to the ground and at the same time, Kitsuchi stopped his movement. After a few seconds, Kitsuchi started to run back to Konoha''s side.


    I immediately realized Inojin used mind transfer jutsu on Kitsuchi.


    "Damn it!!" While swearing I throw another Kunai at Kitsuchi.


    Kitsuchi (Inojin) dodged Kunai easily and laughed at how poor my marksmanship was.


    Instead of getting angry at Inojin''s insult, I just grinned at Kitsuchi (Inojin).


    "Please, you Konoha shits think I didn''t predict that? It is in all my plan, Kan now!!" I shouted.


    Right after my words, Kunai I threw transformed back to Kan. Kan caught Kitsuchi and choked him to remove mind transfer jutsu on Kitsuchi.


    Inojin''s body spitted out blood and his soul returned from Kitsuchi''s body after getting choked by Kan.


    After removing Inojin''s soul, Kan brought Kituschi to our side.


    Then Shikaku suddenly shouted.


    "Sorry, but I knew all along that you Iwa would do this. That''s why I ordered Choza to transform into the pedal on the river, this entire time. It''s time for your appearance, Choza!!" Shikaku narrated. Choza who was standing to Shikaku turned into smoke and the real Choza appeared out of the water just like Anbu previously. He used expansion jutsu to become a 5m tall giant and blocked Kan and Kitsuchi''s way.


    "Please, I knew that you knew all along, Kimiko your turn. Melt that huge chunk of the pig!" I ordered to Kimiko.


    Kimiko performed several hand signs and spit out several lava-balls at giant Choza.


    (A/N: In case you forgot, she has lava kekkei Genkai)


    Seeing numerous hot lava balls coming at him, Choza had no choice but to shrink to his normal size to avoid lava balls. Kan and Kitsuchi easily passed Choza and reached our side safely.


    "Alright, we have Kitsuchi back. Retreat!" I ordered. Seeing we retreat, Nawaki panicked and shouted at us.


    "NO!! Don''t you dare run! Return my necklace back. It is a gift from my sister!!"


    I just smiled at Nawaki while holding first Hokage''s necklace in my hands to show off.


    "You can dream on, Senju loser. From now on, it''s mine" I shouted while running away with others.


    Nawaki got angry and tried to chase us but was stopped by Shikaku.


    "Don''t worry Nawaki. We will eventually get back your necklace soon. I bet you that we will have it within 10 minutes. So you can calm down." Shikaku told Nawaki.


    Nawaki got confused by Shikaku''s words and showed his dumbass face.


    ---------------


    We were running away after exchanging Nawaki with Kitsuchi.


    "Okay guys, listen. Although we managed to get Kitsuchi back successfully, we are not safe yet. Long-haired blue Konoha Jounin will come chasing us, so we will split up ourselves and each group goes on their own.


    Kan and Gin will be group 1. Gari, Tonju, and Kimiko will be group 2. Lastly, me and Kitsuchi will be in the same group.


    Let''s meet at the border of Iwa and Konoha. Now scatter!" I ordered and everyone except Kitsuchi, shunshined immediately.


    I was prepared to run but Kitsuchi''s question stopped me.


    "Hey, what happened to that Hyuga that we caught him? Are we going to bring him with us?"


    I looked at Kituschi for a second and answered him with a smile.


    "Well, he is at the cave 5km northwest from here. I was going to kill him yesterday, but just in case I left him alive until now.


    Gin and Kan are going there to finish him off. He will only drag us down if we bring him." I told to Kitsuchi.


    Kitsuchi nodded to my words and suddenly showed his grins. He grabbed his Kunai and attacked me after hearing my words.


    Although I managed to dodge, I was slightly injured on my face.


    "WHAT ARE YOU DOING, KITSUCHI?!! WHY ARE YOU ATTACKING ME!!


    WAIT, DON''T TELL ME YOU ARE...." I was pissed but after careful thinking, I realized Kitsuchi was not actually Kitsuchi, but Dan.


    Shikaku knew we would never exchange Hizashi. So Dan possessed Kitsuchi from the very beginning of exchange to get info about Hyuga Hizashi''s whereabouts and his condition.


    After realizing I fu?k?d up, I threw the first Hokage necklace far away to attract Kitsuchi (Dan)''s attention to it. Then I throw a smoke bomb around me and used Earth travel jutsu to escape.


    Kituschi (Dan) didn''t chase me instead, he went to pick up the necklace. Dan''s soul swiftly went out of Kituschi''s body.


    "Oh, I hit my time limit. But doesn''t matter, I already got intel." Dan picked Unconcious Kitsuchi up and went to the cave where Hizashi was held in.


    Dan took 10 minutes to the cave. Cave was dar and larger than he thought. He dropped Kitsuchi to ground and went inside the cave to save Hizashi.


    But as soon as he entered the cave, he heard the sound of a familiar voice while the cave collapsed.


    ----


    When I saw Dan entering the cave, I shouted to everyone to act and destroyed the cave.


    "Now!!!"


    Then Kimiko, Gin, Kan, and Tonju appeared out of the ground and performed Four Violet Flames Formation on Dan. At the same time, I took lied down Kitsuchi to a safe place.


    Dan knew he fell into the trap and tried to use his ghost jutsu but since his cooldown hasn''t up yet and got trapped into Four Violet Flames Formation easily.


    "Hahaha, look at him. He fell into Genji''s plan just like that! haha!" Gin and Kan all laughed at Dan for being such dumbass.


    Seeing he couldn''t use his ghost jutsu inside, Dan showed a bit of panic face.


    "But how? When did you set up a trap here?" Dan asked me.


    "You idiot, I already knew you possessed Kitsuchi from the very beginning. I also knew you would definitely try to rescue that Hyuga boy first then chase us.


    So I just pretended I fell for your little Nara''s plan all along to lure you to the trap." I explained to Dan.


    "Also, don''t hope that those Anbu and three trios will come to help you. I sent my most reliable friend to deal with them."


    -------------------------


    (Shikaku and Konoha kids'' place)


    Shikaku and others were waiting for Dan at the river. They were sure Dan would rescue Hizashi and kill all Iwa shinobi.


    But no matter how long they waited, Dan didn''t come. Shikaku got worried that something might happen to Dan, so he asked Anbu to search for him.


    Just as Anbu was to leave, he got stopped by a sudden explosion.


    "Hehe, where the hell do you shits think you can go? Why don''t you stay and entertain me for a bit?


    Hehe, none of you are passing here." Gari slowly appeared out from the ground and blocked Anbu and Konoha kids.


    --------------------


    "Since there is not much time, I have to kill you now," I said to trapped Dan.


    "This barrier formation is created just to counter your dam ghost jutsu. You can''t jutsu inside here, but I can use jutsu at you.


    Like this."


    I created a few earth spikes below Dan''s ground. Dan swiftly dodged them with his surprising flexibility.


    "Oh wow, You are so good at dodging, but I want to remind you that I am from explosion corps," I said to Dan and blew off the earth spikes.


    Although it was a small explosion, they were enough to give damage to his organs and internal bleeding.


    I didn''t stop and kept creating earth spikes at Dan and blew them off.


    This process continued until four of our barrier casters couldn''t hold up. They only hold up for 4 minutes, but it was enough for me.


    It was their first time performing barrier jutsu and 4 minutes is rather a good result if I have to comment.


    Directly receiving the explosions for 4 minutes, Dan was in no shape of fighting back. He was coughing blood repeatedly, had burn marks all over his place. I could also see a sign of internal bleeding from him.


    Despite all these heavy injuries, Dan still tried to get up to fight us. I walked up to him and simply took back the first Hokage necklace from him.


    Then I just shook my head to him and nodded to Kimiko. Kimiko used all of her remaining charka to spit out a large lava ball at Dan.


    Dan instantly died.


    ''There goes another strong Konoha jounin. Man, I hope Tsunade won''t chase me until the end of the earth.''


    "Alright, we accomplished our object. Four of you must be tired after maintaining the barrier. Take Kitsuchi and go back to base. I will go and help Gari to catch Senju." I ordered to team.


    (A/N: Outsmarting Shikaku is one of my biggest fantasy. I see in some of the fanfiction, Shikaku is really smart and acting like ancient sage who knows every dark mc''s intention but still doesn''t do shit to stop dark mc. And tbh I kinda didn''t like that.


    So this chapter is dedicated to my fantasy of beating Shikaku in mind battle.)

 Chapter 46 - Escaping Plan

    After killing Dan, I ordered the rest of my squad to rest. They were all tired for holding the Four Violet Flames Formation 4 minutes and b?r?ly had a chakra. I also needed them to go back and keep an eye on Hizashi too.


    After sending off my squad, I rushed to help Gari in catching Nawaki and Ino-Shika-Cho trio if possible.


    When I arrived at the scene, Gari was in the battle against Anbu and three trios along with Nawaki. Gari is the strongest one in the fight, but fighting five people together, was a tough job even for him.


    Gari looked back when he heard the noise his behind. He breathed out a sigh of relief after seeing it was me. He probably thought a new enemy came behind to sneak on him.


    While unlike Gari who was relieved and happy to see me, Anbu and Konoha trios'' face was filled with disbelief. Nawaki just got angry to see me again and shouted to give his necklace back.


    I simply ignored Nawaki and walked up to Gari while showing a victory smile to Shikaku. Shikaku frowned his eye and stared my eyes back.


    I waited for Shikaku to ask me what happen to Dan, so I could show off to him I am smarter than him, but he still didn''t ask me anything. Eventually, I got tired of waiting and told them.


    "Okay, if you are wondering about where is Dan who possessed Kitscuhi, then I am afraid he is already dead!!!!


    He trusted your plan too much and easily fell into my excellent plan.


    I expected more from you, but I guess I overestimated Nara too much. I guess not all Nara is intelligent. Hehehe" I told Shikaku while showing my superiority.


    Shikaku didn''t say anything instead, Nawaki is the one who replied to me.


    "Bullshit!!! I know personally how strong brother Dan is. He is a renowned jounin, and there are not many people who can defeat him in Konoha. There is no way you can defeat him!!!"


    I threw leftover blue hairs of Dan to prove that he is no longer in this world.


    "Here you go, hairs of Dan. He is dead!!! You need to accept the fact. Alright, enough chitchat. You are next."


    Gari and I dashed to Nawaki but intercepted by Anbu while Gari was stopped by trios.


    "Senju-sama, I will stay and hold them off. So please escape meanwhile." Anbu said to Nawaki.


    "There is no way I will let you guys die while I escape alone. I will stay here and fight to the death." Nawaki immediately denied Anbu''s request.


    "Their main target is you. We can''t afford to lose you too. Don''t worry about us. We will also escape once you are gone too." Shikaku told Nawaki.


    Nawaki hesitated after hearing Shikaku. After several persuasions going on, he finally agreed to run away first.


    I tried to taunt him to fight us, but Nawaki surprisingly ignored me and continued running away.


    ''I thought he would act just like Naruto who couldn''t hold any insult or taunt.


    But I was wrong. I guess he received a good education as part of Senju and knew what I was aiming for.


    Doesn''t matter, we can capture him after dealing with these four.''


    -------


    Gari and I started fighting. I told Gari to take care of trios while I handle Anbu at somewhere else.


    Anbu was prepared to die there and fought madly at me. He used everything he got and even a suicide bomb at death.


    Although his suicide bomb didn''t kill me, I wasted around 30 minutes battling him.


    I went to see Gari''s place and saw that he was almost done with trios too. Choza''s arm was disabled while Inoichi had a burned mark on his ?h?st.


    Gari could use air walk using his explosion on his feet, to escape Shikaku''s shadow or Inoichi''s mind possession jutsu. And those trios didn''t have any elemental jutsu to harm the flying object or person.


    They could only throw Kunai and Shuriken by Gari easily returned them back using explosions. Simply, Gari was a bad match for them.


    Shikaku saw me coming which he instantly knew Anbu was dead.


    I was deciding whether to kill or capture them when I saw Shikaku suddenly pulled out Signal Shooter from his pocket and fired it.


    The bright red fire signal shot on the sky which made Gari and I alerted and stopped our movement.


    ''What''s that signal? Don''t tell me there are reinforcements? Then why would he send it now?


    If it''s not for reinforce, then who?''


    While Gari and I were focused on the signal, Shikaku used this chance to fall off a deep waterfall nearby the river along with his two teammates.


    We tried to stop them but were too late and the trios manage to jump off the waterfall.


    We couldn''t do anything but to watch them fall with frustrations.


    "Hey, Genji. Should we chase them?" Gari asked me.


    "You go down to see if you can capture them while I chase Senju.


    They might be carried off by currents so I highly doubt you can get them.


    Don''t go too far or waste too much time finding them. Just come back within 10 minutes." I gave an order to Gari and run off to chase Nawaki.


    I used lighting chakra to speed up to search for Nawaki. I soon found the trails and after 15 minutes, I finally saw the Nawaki.


    Nawaki was shocked when he saw I was right behind, chasing him madly. He quickly created three shadow clones to confuse me.


    Since I was not a sensor, I didn''t know which one was real. But I killed all the clones quickly and continue the pursuit.


    I was a bit worried as Nawaki was not running in the direction of Konoha, instead, he was going another direction. I also heard him loudly saying "just bit more" several times.


    ''Ambush? Is this related to Signal, Shikaku sent?''


    I didn''t lower my guard and just then I saw what''s ahead of us.


    It was a large and deep abyss. It looked a bit similar to the one Naruto fell down to summon Gamabunta (the toad of Jiraiya and Minato) for the first time, but a different one.


    I instantly realized Nawaki was planning to suicide by jumping off to the abyss.


    (A/N: he couldn''t suicide using Kunai as he didn''t have one. Genji robbed everything when he got captured.)


    ''Ah fu?k not again. Those trios escape but I can not let you!!''


    I tried my best to stop Nawaki. But I was late just like last time. Although I managed to grab his clothes, Nawaki simply took off and jumped while sticking his tongue out.


    I looked down the abyss. It was so deep that I couldn''t see the bottom.


    I don''t know if Nawaki can survive that as Senju vitality and toughness are the same levels as Uzumaki''s. But I was sure he will die due to blood loss or starvation even if he survived the fall.


    And there was no way I would go down to capture him. I don''t how deep this shit is, and was afraid to fall by mistake and die. I also have to worry about Konoha reinforcements coming.


    ''I have never seen such a happy person when they suicide before in my entire two lives.


    Now that I indirectly or directly killed Dan and Nawaki, Konoha won''t forgive me. Especially Tsunade, I don''t want to imagine what would that butcher do when I get captured.''


    ------


    I went back to see how Gari was doing. As I expected, Gari couldn''t find any of the trios.


    ''I didn''t know those trios also had plot armors''


    "Shall we bring Kimiko to sense where those trios are?" Gari suggested.


    "Forget it, she is out of chakra and we don''t have time now, Gari.


    Remember, we are still in deep inside Konoha. It will take us at least 3 to 4 days to reach the border. We already have Konoha pursuers coming for us, that''s why we can afford to waste any more time.


    Also I sure Konoha already sent a message to contact the patrols in the vicinity of the border." I said.


    "Well, we can ambush the Konoha pursuers and pretend to be them to pass the patrols," Gari suggested.


    "Dude, we took last male Senju, Uchiha''s eye, Hyuga alive and cut off their Genius'' arm before.


    And here is the question. Do you think that Konoha and those top clans will only send few weaklings to capture us??


    Heck, I won''t be surprised if their Hokage and jounin commander chase us." I told Gari what kind of shit we are into.


    Gari finally understood where we are and showed his worrying face.


    "Then what should we do, Genji? If the likes of Kage level shinobi chase us, we will get captured before even reaching the border.


    Also, we move in a group, so we will be easily spotted." Gari asked me.


    I looked at Gari for a few seconds before answering him.


    "As you said, we won''t even reach the border before Konoha pursuers track us down.


    That''s why we need to misdirect them! They all think that we would cross the Iwa-Konoha border but we won''t actually.


    I have decided to go through Amegakure (Land of Rain) instead. There is a war happening in the middle and border security is in turmoil." I told Gari of my plan.


    "But wouldn''t Konoha pursuers follow our trails? I heard they use ninken (ninja dog) or bugs to track down criminals." Gari questioned my plan.


    "And that''s why we need to use someone as bait to misdirect those ninkens or bugs too.


    Konoha doesn''t know anything about us, except Tonja (the spy). I am pretty sure they will trail us by following Tonja''s scent.


    That''s why I am planning to deceive Tonja to go to Iwa border alone with Dan and Konoha kids'' blood on him while the rest of us sneak through the land of Rain to Iwa!!


    Also since reinforcements sent by Onoki are coming to the border, I am sure this will also convince Konoha to believe that we would head to the Iwa-Konoha border."


    Gari closed his eye for a few minutes to think.


    "Isn''t saving Tonja our mission? We will abandon the mission. Won''t we break Shinobi law?" Gari asked with seriousness.


    "Hey, I value my life than law. Also, remember that our priority mission is to protect Kitscuhi and Kimiko.


    If you want to blame for Tonja, then blame on that Old man Tsuchikage. He couldn''t even differentiate between S-rank and B-rank missions.


    I am sure he will forgive us since we protected Kitsuchi, killed Dan, and took alive Hyuga and Sharingan.


    So what''s your choice, Gari? Do you against it or not?" I questioned Gari.


    Gari just sighed and agreed to my plan. He didn''t like the idea of deceiving fellow Iwa shinobi, but he knew the sacrifice was needed for the safety of the rest of the squad.


    --------------------------------------


    (Somewhere in the abyss)


    Bloody Nawaki was lying down. Although he survived the fall, the pain was too much to handle and he lost his consciousness, but not dead yet.


    Suddenly an unknown figure slowly rose up from the ground.


    "Hehehe, I didn''t expect that Senju would be lying around here. Madara still hasn''t found a puppet for his eye among Uzumaki, and I guess meeting you here is part of fate. I wonder if he takes liking to you or not. hehe"


    With this, Zetsu took Nawaki with him and disappeared.

 Chapter 47 - Honesty and Hiruzens shock

    Gari and I were going back to our camp after failing to capture our targets.


    "So how are you going to deceive Tonja from going alone to death while we go to Land of Rain without letting him discover?


    You know he is not a 10 years old kid who believes in everything they hear." Gari asked me.


    "Well, I haven''t thought about it either. Maybe you could transform to a messenger bird and create this whole fake act about receiving a new mission to go to Land of Rain from Onoki, in front of him. How does that sound?" I asked Gari.


    Gari just shooked his head and disagreed with me.


    "He is not an idiot. We don''t have Tsuchikage''s stamp to make the whole thing believable. Also, creating faking Tsuchikage''s order is equal to 20 years of jail. Too risky."


    Gari made very reasonable denial. Therefore I didn''t try to disagree with him.


    "So then what do you think we should do?" this time I asked him as I run out of the idea.


    "I suggest we confront him directly and ask to be a bait for us while we escape." Gari made some damn bold suggestions.


    "What?? Your idea is more ridiculous than mine!! Who would be a bait to die?"


    "Listen to me for the second, Genji. Even if we manage to deceive him, I am sure he will realize we abandoned him later shortly and might even backstab us.


    That''s why we should be honest and ask for his cooperation. I am sure he too knows about Konoha pursuers, and we might not make it.


    Kitsuchi is the son of Tsuchikage-sama. As Iwa shinobi, we must protect him no matter what. Since out of loyalty and kindness, he would agree to be a bait as long as we accept his last requests.


    Genji, I know you are still not agreeable, but trust me on this one. I have a feeling that it would work out" Gari reasoned his plan.


    I looked up at the sky, thinking about Gari''s reason. I couldn''t think of an idea, and Gari''s direct approach seems doable. I raised my hand and agreed to Gari. I guess I should trust Gari once this time and let him do the job.


    ---------------------


    We returned to our camp safely. The rest of our squad were still replenishing their chakra. Hizashi Hyuga stilled alive and was tied at the corner.


    Since he didn''t have a bird seal yet, we took out his Hyuga eyes safely without killing him. As for why I didn''t kill him was because of his bloodline. He can easily become a top tier s*x slave in Iwa.


    Gari and I asked out Tonja privately to tell him our plan. I just let Gari talk while I stand behind and be ready to move out, in case Tonja get over s?ns?t?v? and attack.


    Gari spoke to Tonja for roughly 10 minutes. I could see Tonja''s face was getting darker and darker.


    Tonja became quiet and lowered his face after finished listening to Gari. I mean, anyone would be emotional after being told off to be a bait and possibly die.


    After another 10 minutes of silence, Tonja got up suddenly. Surprisingly, Tonja just showed his smile and just laughed.


    "Hahaha, alright. I will be a bait for Konoha pursuers while you guys escape. Don''t worry about it. This all happened all because of me from the start. I should be responsible for this." Tonja spoke.


    I gotta applaud for his loyalty and decision for sacrificing himself. I am starting to see why Onoki and Hiruzen are prioritizing the will of their respective villages.


    "I have a request for you guys. If I die, I want you guys to take care of my little boy. He would be turning into 7 this year. His mother died giving birth to him, and he has only me.


    I asked the orphanage to take care of him temporarily when I left for this mission." Tonja said.


    "Alright, what''s your boy''s name?" I asked.


    "His name is Han. Just only Han. Take care of him for me if I die."


    ''What?? Han? Isn''t that five tailed Jinchuiriki''s name? Holy fu?k! He is Han''s dad. But isn''t Han suppose to be an orphan? System, explain now.''


    System: "He is indeed five tailed Jinchuriki''s dad. He died by Nawaki and Konoha kid geniuses during the pursuit. But the host and host''s squad''s appearance interrupted his death."


    ''Well, it seems like he is destined to die here anyway.''


    "Okay, we will take care of Han for you," Gari accepted Tonja''s request.


    After agreeing with Tonja, we gave Dan''s hair and blood, a mask coated with Hizashi''s blood, and bits of our clothing.


    Tonja didn''t hesitate and parted immediately there without saying a word to our squad.


    We went back to our squad and told them Tonja had another mission and left ahead. Obviously, Kimiko, Kan, and Gin didn''t believe us, but dumb Kitsuchi did.


    "If he is gone, then what about our mission? Did I fail or pass?" Kituschi asked.


    "Yes, you passed. You can now go join the war. In fact, we are going to the frontline straight now. Don''t ask any more questions." I ordered.


    ''Hey, system. Do you have earth style jutsu that can erase our smell or scent from dogs or bugs in the database? I think I saw one other day.''


    System: "Yes, Host is mentioning "Earth style: Earth cover jutsu." This is C-rank jutsu which covers the user''s whole body with the earth. This jutsu was made especially to prevent users from being scented by dogs or bugs. However, this jutsu slows down the speed of the user greatly and easy to learn."


    ''Well, ok. Give me the scroll. I will learn now.''


    It took me like 20 minutes to learn the jutsu. I am really grateful for my talent for chakra-control. I performed this jutsu to everyone, including Hizashi.


    Now, this will prevent Konoha pursuers from detecting us and focus on Tonja or confirm Dan and Nawaki''s death or finding the missing heirs instead.


    --------------------------------------


    (2 days later)


    Sixty Konoha pursuers consist of 30 Anbu and 30 clan members from Uchiha, Nara, Yamanaka, Akimichi, Inuzuka, Hyuga, and Aburame clan found the group of Konoha kids.


    One-armed Minato, blind Fugaku, and tired Hiashi never been this relieved to see a large group of Konoha shinobi before. They now know how scary the war is. One lost his proud eyes, one lost a dominant arm, and one lost his sibling.


    They ran away instantly from their temporary camp when they saw a signal sent by Shikaku and have been wandering around the forest until now.


    60 Konoha reinforcements got intel from them and started searching for Shikaku trios and Nawaki. After 2 hours of searching with dogs, they found Shikaku and his team inside the deep cave.


    They also found last Anbu''s corpse and the abyss where Nawaki fall. They concluded that Nawaki Senju is dead and 20 shinobi to retrieve his corpse.


    They were shocked that just a group of Iwa kids could kill 3 Anbu and heavily damage Konoha''s geniuses.


    But the surprise didn''t end there when they found Dan''s corpse. Dan was considered one of the elite Jounins in Konoha and strong enough to be a candidate for Hokage.


    And boom! Here, they never imagined Dan would die by a group of Iwa kids, no less than 15 years old.


    A few hours later, they finished their searching. They calculated the loss and it was just beyond horrifying. Especially Dan and Nawaki''s deaths and abduction of Hizashi.


    This was a huge loss to Konoha and big, big, and big news. They instantly sent reports using top tier message bird to Hokage, asking for more reinforcements and border lockdown.


    They didn''t dare to underestimate Genji and others as they freaking killed Dan!


    ---------------------------------


    (Hokage Office)


    Hiruzen was piping his smoke while worrying about Nawaki and other Genin''s safety. He didn''t expect such a low-rank mission would turn out to be dangerous. What did Onoki send such high-level shinobi for a low-level spy? Did that spy get some incredible intel or something?


    He promised Tsunade that Nawaki will be absolutely safe, and the next thing he got was Nawaki got captured. To make sure Nawaki is safe, he arranged 60 elite ninjas all above the Chunin level.


    Suddenly the secretary just stomped into the office without even knocking. Hiruzen didn''t get angry at the secretary for such rude behavior as he knew only at emergency his secretary would come stomping.


    "Hokage-sama, Emergency top tier messenger bird from the rescue team arrived. It says that... it says that...." Secretary couldn''t finish his sentence.


    This got Hiruzen impatient and hurried secretary to say.


    "Hokage-sama, according to our rescue team, Konoha Geniuses have been all severely injured while 3 of Anbu are dead.


    Minato Namikaze lost his arm, Uchiha Fugaku lost both of his eyes, Inoichi Yamanaka has been severely burned, Choza Akimichi''s arms have been disabled, Shikaku Nara has bruises from falling high place, and Hiashi Hyuga is the only one fine.


    As for Hizashi Hyuga, he has been abducted alive.


    Also, we suspect that Nawaki Senju has fallen to a deep abyss and died. Still finding his corpse.


    Lastly....lastly, Dan-sama found dead. His upper body has been melted by lava while there were signs of the explosion all over his body.


    Furthermore, we have found that Iwa shinobi are all just 6 teenagers along with the spy. None of them are found dead and they are currently on the run.


    The rescue team request the complete lockdown of the border and ask for more reinforcements to capture Iwa shinobi." Secretary finished his report while looking at Hokage.


    Hiruzen dropped his smoke pipe from his mouth out of shock.


    Hiruzen felt like he was listening to a pile of bullshits.


    Most of Konoha''s young geniuses have been disabled. Hyuga got kidnapped! Nawaki is dead!!! Dan is also dead?!!!!! And shit all of these were done by just 6 Iwa shinobi kids and spy??? Just what kind of monsters are Iwa raising??


    Hiruzen couldn''t just believe Dan died that easily. He was planning to pass him his hat after this war.


    "Pass the order to every border patrols in Konoha-Iwa border to lock down the border completely. Tell them not even a single ant is allowed to leave!!!


    Also, order 100 Anbu to go support the rescue team, in searching for those Iwa shinobi. No matter what, you must find them." Hiruzen ordered Secretary.


    After sending out the secretary, Hiruzen called Anbu commander.


    "What is it that you called me, Hokage-sama?"


    "I wanted to pass down my will to you before I go confront death. In case I die, I recommend my student Orochimaru to be my successor. He is smart and genius, I am sure he will bring Konoha to victory."


    "What do you mean, Hokage-sama? How can you say those words? You are the strongest and we Anbu will protect you from any danger even if we risk our life." Anbu commander swore.


    Hiruzen just shook his head.


    "You won''t be able to protect me. Even if I deploy whole Konoha shinobi, you guys can''t stop those two. The two strongest women in the world!!!!


    Now I have to go confront them about the recent sad news.


    Remember my will!! If I die, Orochimaru is my vote."


    Saying the word, Hiruzen slowly walked towards Senju''s mansions.

 Chapter 48 - Meeting Nagato and his little friends

    Hiruzen was slowly walking to the Senju clan mansion. Senju clan is one of the founding clans along with the Uchiha clan to build Konohagakure. The current Senju clan is managed by Mito Uzumaki, who is also a Konoha Jinchuriki.


    But unlike its rival clan Uchiha, the Senju clan''s members kept decreasing since Second Hokage''s death and the end of the first great ninja war. Now they only have Nawaki and Tsunade Senju as descendants.


    This also shows just how valuable those two were, especially more than any people in the same age.


    But Hiruzen sent Nawaki to a very very dangerous mission without realizing it. Nawaki fell off to the abyss and might not even retrieve his corpse, and even Tsunade''s boyfriend Dan is dead.


    Two Jounin guards of the Senju clan mansion greeted the Hokage and opened the gate.


    "Don''t let anyone in while I am here. No matter what who!!" Hiruzen gave a strict order to them and entered the mansion.


    He walked around the mansion for a minute to prepare himself. He reached in front of Mito''s room and knocked the room, asking permission to enter.


    After getting permission, Mito''s servants opened the door for Hiruzen.


    Mito had long, bright red hair and large, pupilless eyes. She wore an elaborate, high-collared kimono with the Uzushiogakure symbol on the back of the obi which was tied around her waist. Her hair was arranged in buns with hairpins in them and three clips in the front.


    "Well, Hiruzen. You sure are coming here often even if we are in the war? You have already visited our mansion twice this week." Mito smiled and kindly said.


    "Madam, could I have a private chat with you?" Hiruzen requested Mito respectively.


    Mito granted Hiruzen''s request and ordered everyone to leave her room. Immediately maid and servants left the room. Also, two Anbu who was in the closet and under the bed came out and left the room too.


    "Well, where is Tsunade? I also need her here to discuss." Hiruzen asked.


    "My, my. Hiruzen you sure are getting old. Have you forgotten you sent her to the Land of Rain battlefield 4 days ago?"


    "Ohh, now I remember. Sorry, Madam. It seems I am getting old."


    Hiruzen was shocked so much at the report that he forgot he sent Tsunade to her team at Land of Rain battlefield.


    "Don''t worry about it. That happens to everyone. So why have you come here?"


    Mito waited for Hiruzen to say the topic, but she saw Hiruzen was hesitating to speak.


    "I heard that Nawaki got captured by Iwa shinobi. But I am not worried too much as Dan is there already. But I can''t believe you sent a group of inexperienced kids to such a dangerous mission."


    As Hiruzen didn''t say anything, Mito tried to continue the conversation casually. But Hiruzen started to sweat like hell after hearing Mito''s word.


    "Madam. Regarding that, I have brought sad news." Hiruzen swallowed a mouthful of saliva and started telling the report he received.


    Mito''s face changed into several expressions until it settled with death star at Hiruzen. Hiruzen finished explaining and didn''t even raise his head to see her. He didn''t have to see her face to know what she is going to do.


    "Hey, monkey! Just because I am old and you are Hokage for a few decades, doesn''t mean that you should joke on me? Is everything true?" Mito while angry asked Hiruzen.


    Hiruzen instantly knew he won''t get out here alive when he heard the word ''monkey'' from Mito.


    "You STUPID MONKEY! You sent Nawaki and other Genins to the mission where even Dan couldn''t handle and die?!!!


    Have you damn eyes rotten to shit after sitting on the desk and reading papers for so long that you can''t differentiate S and B-rank mission!!!!


    I shouldn''t have stopped Tsunade from punching you to death!!"


    Hiruzen just lowered his head and kept apologizing. Mito''s eyes were shit red and were ready to kill Hiruzen alive.


    "Hey Monkey! You wanna hear a joke?


    A long time ago, there was an idiot and blind monkey. And guess what smart old lady said to him?"


    "What did it say?" Hiruzen didn''t know where Mito was getting to.


    "She said ''OMAE WA MOU SHINDEIRU!!''" Mito rose up, showed her powerful adamantine sealing chains from her back.


    "Nani?? OH shit, I am screwed!!" Hiruzen knew Mito was lost her rationality since she is very old now.


    "DIE!!!! I will make you d??kless, shrimp monkey!!"


    ------------------------------------


    My squad and I kept running while carrying captured Hizashi, having breaks as little as possible.


    3 days later, we have passed the former border of Konoha-Ame land. Well, security was not hard to pass as it now belongs to Konoha and most of the shinobi are out to the battlefield.


    So far, there are no signs of Konoha pursuers coming at us. I guess Tonja is doing his bait job very well. I kinda felt bad for pushing the baiting job to him.


    Kimiko''s sensor jutsu helped us greatly to avoid some random shinobi in the land of Rain.


    While in the Land of Rain, we saw a lot of evidence pointing the harsh reality of war.


    Destroyed small villages, orphans begging food, stealing money, etc...


    "Hey, can we have a rest? I am super tired." Kimiko begged for a break. Kitsuchi without a question agreed to her since she is his girl.


    Gin and Kan are also tired of carrying unconscious Hizashi. I saw the huge cave roughly 300m in front of us. I ordered everyone to rest there. Kimiko was happiest when she heard me.


    But when we got close to the cave, Kimiko suddenly stopped us and told us that she sensed three chakra signatures. Kimiko didn''t use her sensing jutsu, but she could sense others if they are close.


    All of us were readied for battle and waited for enemies to show up. But instead of Konoha or Ame shinobi, three little kids around 10 years showed up.


    My squad relaxed after seeing it was just kids, but my mind just went poofffffff after seeing those three kids, mostly at the red-haired kid.


    ''Aren''t they Nagato, Konan, and the yellow dude who became the main puppet of Nagato?? What the fu?k are they doing here?''


    Nagato recognized me and Gari as we participated in his village destruction, but also left his parents and him alive.


    "Hey, isn''t that the kid Genji left alive at Uzushiogakure? Man, the world sure is small. What are you doing here, kid?" Gari asked.


    Konan and Yahiko looked at Nagato as to ask if he knew us. Nagato didn''t answer Gari but instead asked for food.


    After eating, Nagato finally couraged to speak to us. Since I saved his life and we gave him food, I guess he trusted us.


    Well, everything he said was all according to cannon. His family settled at Land of Rain(Ame) after the destruction of Uzushiogakure, but later his parents got killed by Konoha shinobi.


    ''Umm, I guess in the near future, they will meet Jiraiya and stay with him until the end of the war. But why do I have a feeling that I am missing something very important??"


    Then, I realized a huge problem with Nagato. He didn''t have RENNIGAN!!!!


    ''What the fu?k? Why Nagato doesn''t have Rennigan?? I even freaking spent extra effort to let him go, so he can meet Madara. But he didn''t??


    System, explain why in the god''s name Nagato doesn''t have Rennigan?''


    System: "Host, isn''t it obvious that it is because of the bu??erfly effect caused by the host?"


    ''Damn, the bu??erfly effect sure is scary! He just escaped only an hour late and didn''t get the strongest eyes. Wait, if Nagato didn''t receive Rennigan, then who got it??''


    System: "System has also no idea."


    ''Come to think of it, is this related to Uzumaki kids disappearance in Iwagakure? Oh shit, the more I think, the more it makes sense.


    Madara hasn''t found Nagato yet, so he is kidnapping every Uzumaki kids who are compatible with Rennigan.''


    While I was thinking, everyone already got to know each other with three kids quickly since it was just 4 or 5 age difference.


    After resting for 30 minutes, I ordered everyone to get ready to depart. Right after my order, Kimiko requested to bring Nagato and his two friends with us.


    Kan and Gin immediately refused. It is already a pain in the ?ss for them to drag Hizashi, but if we also bring the little kids who can''t even mold chakra properly, would just slow us down, is their reason.


    While Kimiko and Kitsuchi disagreed with Kan and Gin, couldn''t just let them leave there to die.


    ''Bring Nagato with us? Umm...I am sure Madara already found a replacement for Nagato. So basically he is now Free real estate!!!


    Well, I don''t know about Yahiko''s strength, but the blue girl next to him, Konan will become powerful S-rank shinobi.


    I am sure Nagato will be well received in Iwagakure as we lost all of Uzumaki except one.


    Yahiko was the leader of the Original Akatsuki and even had a gut to fight with Hanzo.


    Since they don''t have an Amegakure revolution mindset now, it is easy to make them Iwa shinobi instead. Like I said, Free Rela Estates!!!''


    There was no way I am gonna let them these geniuses die here by Hanzo as Ame shinobi. It will be a huge waste. I will make them Iwa shinobi and make Iwagakure greater again!!!


    They might slow us down, but I am sure Konoha pursuers won''t find out our trail at least the next 3 days.


    "Alright everyone, stop fighting! I have decided to bring these kids with us.


    Kimiko, Kitsuchi, and I will carry them each. Also, don''t question me, it is an order!!!" I quickly shut off Gin and Kan before they complain.


    I will tell these kids about wonderful things about Iwagakure and Will of Stone while showing dark sides about other villages during the journey, so they will become completely loyal to Iwagakure, hehehe.


    Kimiko''s impression on me seems to have risen high. She must have thought that I took pity on them and decided to bring them.


    But in reality, if they were just hopeless bums, then I could easily abandon them.


    I approached Gari and told him to make sure kids don''t see Hisashi. Hizashi''s whole body was covered by earth and wrapped by bandages, looking like a mummy.


    I was afraid they will see the Hizashi and think we are the baddies and run away. It will be a pain in the ?ss to bring them back or make them Iwa shinobi later.


    "Don''t worry, I knocked him out real hard. He won''t wake up another 2 days or so." Gari ?ssured me.


    And like this, my 6 squad members (including me), Nagato, Yahiko, and Konan headed to the Iwa land.


    -----------------------------


    (Konoha)


    "It is with great sadness that 23 stand in front here today delivering this eulogy for our dear Hokage, Sarutobi Hiruzen. Preparing this speech has been difficult, but also very rewarding. It allowed me to reflect on all of the time our Hokage and we spent together and how wonderful a person he was.


    We couldn''t have asked for a better mother. He taught us a lot about peace, love, and friendship. We all are impressed by his passion for the will of fire and how much she cared about Konoha''s people. Even though he spent a lot of time doing his job as Hokage, he always made his family his top priority.


    It is the greatest loss for Konoha to lose him. We all hope he will have a blessing in life in the afterlife.


    Final salutes to our kindest Hokage!!!"


    Danzo and all of Konoha citizens and shinobi in Konohagakure bowed their heads to Hiruzen who lies in the glass coffin. After bowing, they started to hand out flowers.


    While everyone gathered in Hokage''s funeral, there were two people inside Anbu''s headquarter, quietly discussing.


    "So, what do you think of my plan? Faking my death!! This way Tsunade won''t come and kill... *cough* *cough*


    I mean this way, Onoki might not believe first, but as time goes, I am sure he will fall into my trap." Hiruzen who got his ?ss whooped by Mito said to another guy, Nara clan head.


    "I think it''s bit too cruel to even hide from your children. But well, let us watch and see how will Onoki move." Nara clan head spoke.

 Chapter 49 - New Side Quest

    It has been 3 days since We decided to take Nagato and his little friends with us. They were quiet and afraid at first, but after spending time with us, they gradually opened up to us, especially to Kimiko.


    Kimiko was a very kind girl, so it didn''t take a long time for her to interact with them and become a big sister figure of theirs. Sometimes Kimiko communicates with them long enough to make Kitsuchi so jealousy and regret his decision to take them with us.


    Except for Kitscuhi, everyone else used to the three kids'' presence and became good terms with kids. I didn''t forget to propaganda Iwagakure to kids whenever we had a break, particularly to Yahiko.


    I believe that Yahiko has a similar personality as Nawaki or Naruto. I can feel that he gives out this kind of main character vibes. If he becomes Iwa shinobi, his talk no jutsu will become more fearsome than Kento(Ex Iwa Defence Division Head)''s the will of stone talk no jutsu.


    There were still no signs of Konoha pursuers chasing us, even until now. For this matter, I really am thankful to Tonja though, I am afraid he is already dead by now.


    While I was grateful to Tonja, Gin and Kan approached to me. They told me an unexpected problem occurred.


    "Genji, we are running out of food. Taking the Land of Rain route was unexpected, and with three new mouths to feed, our rations are almost empty.


    Also, since it''s raining all day, it is very difficult to find or even hunt wild animals." Gin reported to me.


    Food deficiency is a huge problem. It will take at least more than 1 week to traverse the Iwa border. And like Gin said, it was rare to spot a wild animal in Land of Rain.


    "So what''s your solution?" I asked Gin and Kan.


    "Well, according to the map, there is a mediums size village, 3km ahead of us. We go down there and steal food or money to secure our food." Kan suggested.


    "That sounds great at first, but since we are in the war, there won''t be much of rich people in the village. Even if there are, I am sure they hired several shinobi to protect themselves. You guys know well that I want to avoid a dispute with other Shinobi, especially in a crowded place like the village." I told them.


    "Then, what do you advise we should do?" Kan asked.


    I smiled and asked them with a happy tone.


    "I know we don''t have money now, but we can earn it. Do you have anything on you that can earn cash?"


    Gin and Kan straight said no. But they gave a wrong answer. I quickly dashed at them and put Kunai on their necks.


    "Fuckers, don''t lie!!! I remember very well that Gari gave you two, ''super-premium top 3rd ranking; ''hard to get'' ero Iwa female shinobi picture book'' when we were in the Iwa Defence force in Suna!!!


    Now either you guys hand over that book or I take your und?rw??r to sell!!!" I threatened them with a dangerous tone.


    Gin and Kan were shocked at the turn of the event. At first, they were willing to give up their undies to keep the ''precious'' book.


    "Fuck you, can''t you understand what I am implying? Who needs your smelly undies!! Give me your damn book now!!"


    In the end, I f?r??b?? took the book from them.


    "Alright, you idiots stay here and wait for my return. In case of emergency, retreat to Point A. We will regroup there if you guys are not here.


    Also, don''t let the kids see Hyuga, or I will kill you all." I ordered them and headed to the village to sell the ''super-premium'' book.


    When I was out of their sight, I stopped my movement and started admiring how beautiful Iwa female shinobi were.


    ----------------


    ''System, copy this ''Ultimate premium'' book to your database now. This is some serious shit. Iwa girls are so s?xy, I don''t have to worry about my future wife beauty, hehehe.''


    After telling the system to copy the book, I continued to the way to the village.


    It didn''t take long for me to reach. I transformed into some random dude and entered the village. There were no guards at the gate which made it easy for me to enter.


    I first went to a magazine store to see if they were willing to buy the ''ultimate-premium'' book.


    "Hello, Do you want to buy a book, full of s?xy Iwa female pictures?"


    I was instantly got kicked out of the shop, as the shop owner hates Iwa. Stupid idiot believes that we are the reason for this war. Bastard kicked me so hard that I almost break off my transformation.


    I didn''t give up and tried several shops.


    "Hello, I have this amazing s?xy girls'' pictures..."


    I got kicked out again. This time, the shop owner was female. Bad luck, try the next one.


    "Greetings, this book includes ultra-sexy female photos. Are you interested in buying..."


    This time, I was the one who went out of volunteering. This shop owner was gay!!! I didn''t give up and tried the next store.


    "Good afternoon, as fellow man, you must be interested in s?xy nice figure woman, aren''t ya?...."


    ''Motherfu*kers!! What''s wrong with these villagers!! How come none of them are interested in such a holy s?xy book!! This is a limited edition Book!!! Are they all out of mind or something?''


    While I was giving a series of cursing in my head, an unknown being slowly walked up to me.


    "Hello there, I am just a stranger who was in the magazine store and happened to hear the talks between you and the manager.


    Well, I am very interested in buying your book. Could you consider selling it to me?"


    I heard the voice behind me and looked back at who it is. Then literally my eyes popped out of its socket due to shock. It was freaking Jiraiya who approached me.


    ''What!!! It''s Jiraiya, it is really Jiraiya!!!! Holy fu?k, why is he here?


    Does that mean Tsunade is also here or what?


    Also did my eyes really popped out just now? What the fu?k?''


    "You don''t have to that grateful to me. I am just purely interested in your book, that''s all." Seeing my surprised face, Jiraiya thought I was very grateful to him for buying it.


    "Ok, since mister wants the book, I will give you a discount. Just hand out 300k ryo and the book is yours."


    "What? 300k ryo? Do I look like the person who has that much money? Come on, if you are this stingy, no one will buy from you."


    ''Please, I know you are filthy rich!! Your ero book which came out last year is becoming sensational. Just be grateful I am not asking much.''


    "Mister, this book contains every s?xy Iwa female shinobi pictures!! This is basically a s?xy female figure encyclopedia!! Now you think 300k ryo is too much?"


    "What? Every s?xy Iwa female?!!! Damn it. Okay, I will buy it."


    Just a few simple words and Jiraiya bought it. He summoned the money from the scroll and gave it to me.


    ''As expected of super pervert. He will buy anything that is s?xy. hehe.''


    Jiraiya was already in the world of his pervert imagination after looking at the first page of the book.


    "Thanks for doing business, mister. Then I will be going now." I shook hands with Jiraiya and walked away. I didn''t want to stay long with this guy. He may be a pervert, but he is smart and quick.


    But as I was about to go, I heard the system''s voice.


    System: "Host has triggered side quest by encountering Jiraiya.


    *Quest: From 2 days now, Jiraiya and his team will confront with Hanzo, the leader of Amegakure at north 30km away from here. Please observe the battle between Kage-level summonings until the end.


    Reward: Eagle Summoning contract (Has sage arts)


    Failure: lose 300k ryo*"


    Normally, I wouldn''t do the side quest while I am on the run. But the reward for this quest is perhaps the most useful reward, I ever saw.


    Freaking Eagle Summoning Contract, also has sage art!!!


    I can use them during combat, for transportation, for transmitting intel, for scouting, etc. There are literally 1000 benefits.


    The problem was escaping after the end of the battle. But a few seconds later, I remembered the pill, I got it as a reward from observing the battle between Uncle Masashi and Mask against Kazekage. That pill that can erase my whole presence for 5 minutes. ( Not even sensors or Kage-level shinobi can''t detect.)


    That pill just solved all of my problems for this side quest. Even if I fail somehow, I can always escape using the pill and Earth Travel jutsu!!


    ---------------------


    I bought rations at the village, enough for my squad and kids to hold for 5 days. I returned back to them safely. There wasn''t an emergency, so they were still in the same place, waiting for me.


    I gathered Gari and my squad and told them to go ahead without me.


    "Listen, guys. I am going out to get a bird summoning. If it is successful, we can instantly travel to Iwagakure by riding on a huge bird, without worrying about Konoha pursuers or Amegakure shinobi. I will be safe even if I fail to get the summoning, so don''t worry.


    Just go ahead without me first. I will at most out for 4 days and catch up with you guys."


    Of course, the squad didn''t agree to my proposal. But with several minutes of talking and persuasion, they finally agreed to me.


    After giving a short farewell with everyone, I headed to the soon-to-be the battlefield between Hanzo and three legendary Sanin.

 Chapter 50 - Hanzo vs Sannin

    I went full speed to the future-battlefield between Hanzo and Sannin. I already knew what time and place, so I just needed to find a place to hide and retreat route beforehand. I just hope that I won''t randomly encounter Sannin or Hanzo on the way as such would just backfire everything.


    After one day of non-stop running, I arrived at the site. Fortunately, there was no one. I took a quick look at the geography of the area. There was a large space, suitable for battle in the center, while small rocky mountains around the corners. Basically, this place was perfect for an ambush.


    I decided to hide at the rocky mountains at the corner during the battle. It was surrounded by several giant rocks, a bit far away from the battle scene. I could easily peak or sneak in and off from here, making it a perfect spot for me to hide.


    After finding the hiding place, I started running around to discover an escape route. Although I had an erasing-presence pill, I still wanted to be careful.


    It took me almost 5 hours, to find a safe and short escaping route from the battle scene field.


    After arranging everything, I retreated from the battle place. I didn''t plan to stay, and hide there until Hanzo and Sannins finish their battle.


    What if Hanzo arrives tomorrow first and spots me, before battling with Sannin or Sannin finds me vice versa? Then I would have no choice, but to flee without achieving anything.


    I have to sneak in and spectate the battle while they are in the middle of the fighting. Hanzo and Sannin would be too focused on each other and won''t locate me, or either they will just simply ignore me.


    I settled 7km away from the future battlefield of Hanzo and Sannin, just to make sure I don''t run into them.


    ----------------------


    (Next day)


    Jiraiya, Tsunade, and Orochimaru were running together while talking to each other.


    "So our mission is to ambush leader of Amegakure, Hanzo? I heard that Hanzo is on the par level with our Sensei. How can we beat him?" Tsunade asked.


    Sannins still have no idea about what happened to Nawaki, Dan, or even to the Third Hokage. They received a mission to stop Hanzo''s rampaging on Konoha forces a week ago and since then they didn''t have any contact with any Konoha shinobi or even news.


    "Don''t worry, Tsunade. We don''t have to kill him, just injuring him will do fine. I am sure three of us together can at least do that." Jiraiya ?ssured Tsunade.


    "Be quiet, you two. We are almost at the ambush point.


    I am going to explain the plan now. Jiraiya and I will hold Hanzo while Tsunade, you take care of all the lackeys around him and rejoin us as soon as you are done." Orochimaru explained his plan to his two teammates.


    ""Alright'''''' Jiraiya and Tsunade agreed to Orochimaru. Jiraiya and Tsunade fully trusted Orochimaru as he was their teammates and lifetime friend.


    -------------


    I walked towards the battle spot slowly while waiting for the sound of battles patiently. Then I heard the loud sound of explosions and could feel the earth-shaking.


    I immediately knew that the battle between Hanzo and Sannin started. I performed "Earth style: Earth Travel jutsu" and slowly advanced to the battlefield.


    I sneaked into my arranged hiding place without making any sound and peaked a bit at the battlefield.


    I could see dozens of Amegakure shinobi lying dead while Hanzo and Sannin were confronting in the middle. It seems all weaklings are dead and powerhouses have remained.


    "I didn''t expect Konoha shinobi to ambush me here. Not bad for a girl to handle all of my shinobi this quick. How did you know I would pass here?" Hanzo asked with a bit of surprising face.


    Sannins obviously didn''t answer Hanzo. Orochimaru threw Shurikens to Hanzo as an answer to his question. Jiraiya and Tsunade also started attacking.


    Hanzo bites off his thumb and performed several hand signs to summon his infamous partner, Ibuse the salamander.


    Ibuse roared to Hanzo which made him immediately look at my place. I guess Ibuse spotted me and reported to Hanzo.


    I got tensed high when Hanzo looked at my direction.


    But Hanzo just looked at me for second and focused on Sannin. I guess he thought I am just small fry and decide to deal with me after Sannin. I am very glad that he thought me that way, although it was annoying.


    Seeing Hanzo summoning, Sannins summoned their each summoning animal in response. Hanzo''s summon was bigger and stronger than 3 Sannin''s summoning combined.


    "Let''s go, Orochimaru, Tsunade!" Jiraiya shouted.


    An intense battle between Hanzo and Sannins started while I was spectating with the popcorn in my mouth. I didn''t worry much about Hanzo attacking me until he deals with Sannins.


    ---------------------


    Hanzo just dominated the battle. His jutsu with Explosion tags were extremely powerful and he easily evaded every Sannin''s offenses with Shunshin jutsu.


    The Battle was like this: Tsunade keeps falling to Hanzo''s trap, Jiraiya busy saving Tsuande''s ?ss and supporting Orochimaru while Orochimaru solely focused on attacking Hanzo. This cycle repeated until Hanzo gave real damn shit damage to Sannins.


    The Battle was so one-sided, and Orochimaru could only say ''Nani'' during the battlefield.


    "Our combo techniques are not working!" Orochimaru who was half giving up, said.


    Jiraiya who also saw no hope of winning thought he would perish here.


    Suddenly Hanzo opened his mouth and spoke to them.


    "I predict that Konoha shall emerge victorious from this battle, even if she lost Hokage and strong Jounins. Therefore I shall let you three live.


    I, Hanzo, hereby name you the ''Konoha Legendary Sannin''!!!"


    After hearing Hanzo, both Sannins and I was surprised.


    ''What did that Hanzo guy say just now? Hokage dead??? Nani???


    How the fu?k did Hiruzen drop dead? Is this plan of Konoha or legit news?''


    ''Wait a minute for now, If Hiruzen is dead, why would the fu?k Hanzo believe Konoha still be the winner of this war?? If he kills those three, I am sure Konoha would be completely fu?k?d up, no??''


    System: "Congratulations, host!! Host has successfully completed the side quest.


    *Quest: From 2 days now, Jiraiya and his team will confront with Hanzo, the leader of Amegakure at north 30km away from here. Please observe the battle between Kage-level summonings until the end.


    Reward: Eagle Summoning contract (Has sage arts)


    Failure: lose 300k ryo*


    The reward will be given to the Host after 10 minutes."


    The system''s voice interrupted my thinking. Since I completed the quest, it was time for me to leave.


    Although I was very confused about Hiruzen''s death, I put it aside for now and readied to retreat.


    "Where do you think you going, brat? I did allow those three to go, but for you, I didn''t.


    Although, I don''t know where you from for sure, I am guessing that you are from Iwa."


    ''How the fu?k did he know I am from Iwa? Is he a Psychic or what?''


    "Hey, you can''t tell me what to do. Those three might have no skills and need your permission to leave, but I have the capability to leave here by myself." I loudly shouted at him.


    Hanzo was very shocked that I challenged him to catch me.


    "Interesting, kid. Alright, I will be in your little game for a while."


    Since I was going to escape anyway, I decided to show off my braveness to him and ran. After telling him to fu?k off, I threw a smoke bomb around me.


    I ate the erasing-presence pill while at the same time creating 50 earth clones for distraction. Hanzo or his salamander can''t detect my real body, but they can detect my earth clones, thinking the real me is one of them. Using this chance, I used Earth Travel jutsu to ran away fast as I could.


    -----------


    Hanzo created water clones and hunted down every last of Genji earth clones, but out of his expectation, he couldn''t find the real Genji. He couldn''t even sense a bit Genji chakra.


    He tried asking Ibuse, but his salamander also had no answer to his question. Now Hanzo was really intrigued by Genji''s escape.


    "Interesting, he managed to completely hide his presence from me and Ibuse. Not an ordinary kid could do that.


    I don''t know what method you used to escape, but consider it lucky that I won''t chase you. I have more important things to do than chasing a little brat."


    After saying, Hanzo disappeared.

 Chapter 51 - Secret Meeting

    I madly run away from Hanzo for 30 minutes straight, without even looking back. There was no way Hanzo would let me live if he captures me.


    After confirming several times that I am not being chased, I finally calmed down and stopped running. Soon I got excited that I completed the quest and managed to run away from Hanzo unscathed.


    ''Hehehehe, I can''t believe I escaped from Hanzo while Sannin could only beg for his mercy!! If Onoki hears this, he might even promote me, hehe.


    Anyway, System, where is my summoning reward?''


    System: "It is already in Host''s Kunai pocket. Please check."


    ''It is in my Kunai pocket? Isn''t summoning scroll large enough to be carried on your back, no?''


    System: "That is for Toad summoning scroll. Eagle Summoning is small enough to fit in the host''s Kunai pocket. Please sign Host''s name with the blood to contact with Eagle summonings."


    I tried to bite off my thumb, but blood never came out. I tried another 10 times, biting my thumbs to bleed. However, it never came out.


    ''How the fu?k Naruto made it look so easy to bite off his thumb? It is painful as hell, and blood never comes out!!! Are their teeth made or razor or what?!


    I can''t accept this!! I can''t accept that my teeth are not as sharp as some 12 years old kid!!''


    In the end, I couldn''t bite my thumb to bleed. So I used Kunai to cut my thumb, and I wrote down my name in the scroll.


    System: "Now, the host must get approvals from Eagles to summon them. Please Summon the Eagle Boss and ask for permission to summon any Eagles under him."


    ''I didn''t know I had to ask for permission from Eagles to summon them. System, show me the hand signs for Summoning jutsu.''


    As for I didn''t how much chakra needed to summon Eagle Boss, I used as much as chakra I could safely. I pressed the hands'' five fingers to the ground and channel chakra to the hand.


    "Summoning Jutsu!!"


    With my shouting, the huge smoke came out right in front of me. Soon I could see a very large Eagle. It has brown color on its wings and body, with a bright white head and tail. It was a bald eagle.


    "Umm? It''s has been such a long time since a human summoned me. What''s more, it''s just a kid?" A large bald eagle spoke after seeing it was me who summoned.


    "Hello, my name is Genji. I am an Iwagakure Shinobi. The reason I summoned sir here is to get approval as Eagle summoner." I politely spoke to the Eagle.


    "So you want an approval as Eagle summoner? Well, since you were able to summon me, it means you have a good affinity with us and a huge charka reserve, despite your age. We eagles don''t care which village you from, so I don''t care about your backgrounds.


    As a test, I will ask you a series of questions. If you don''t manage to answer even one, I will deem you as a failure and null your contract with us."


    ''Not even one and I fail? Why is the eagle summoner requirement so harsh? Naruto or Jiraiya had it so easy, just riding on the head of the toad. Vert Unfair!!!''


    "Please, ask me the questions. I am ready." Although I panicked inside, I pretended I had no problems at all.


    "It seems you are confident, very good. Okay, here it comes.


    First question: There are 3 Eagles and 10 fish. It takes 3 eagles to finish eating 5 fish in 1 hour. Therefore tell me how old are Eagles and fish?"


    "..."


    I was speechless after hearing the Bald eagle''s question. I looked at eagle with ''Are you serious'' eye and Eagle looked back at me with ''Yes I am'' eye.


    ''Did you just hear question right or is this bald eagle questioning nonsense? He just told me there are eagles and fish and asking me about their age?


    System do you know the answer?''


    System: "After calculating, here is System''s answer. Eagles are 8 years old while fish are 2 years old."


    ''Wait, how the fu?k did you calculate this shit? Am I the only one who doesn''t get it? Are you sure about this is correct?''


    System: "Please have trust in System, host."


    ''No, the moment you have the answer to that nonsense, I already lost trust in you.''


    "What''s taking you so long? Don''t tell me you can''t even answer question 1?" Bald eagle asked me.


    "How can it be, sir. Here is my answer. Eagles are 8 years old while fish are 2 years old." Since I didn''t know the answer, I just gave the system''s answer.


    "Oh, not bad, kid. You got it correct. But there won''t be such an easy question from now."


    ''Correct?! And that supposed to be an easy question? Are you kiddin'' me? Who educated this bird?''


    "Second question: If I were to eat myself, would I become twice as big or disappear completely?"


    ''Oh god, he was being serious when he said the first question is the easiest. This is beyond nonsense. Why would you eat yourself, in the first place? System, tell me your answer."


    System: "Answer is Color Red, host."


    ''Question is bigger or disappear and why is an answer the color red?!! Are you sure you are a system? Where did you even get the color red from? You know what, I don''t care anymore. I will just answer it.''


    "It is color red." At this point, I didn''t answer him politely. No point of being polite to dumbass.


    "You got correct again. I guess you are not like other stupid Humans. You really are smart. Keep it up and you will soon be an Eagle Summoner"


    ''Okay, I am done with this shit. I will just leave it to System.''


    -------------------


    Bald eagle asked me a total of 7 questions, each being more nonsense than the previous question. Luckily or not, System got it all right.


    "Hahaha, congratulation kid. You answered every question correctly.


    Now you are officially our eagle summoner and can summon any eagles under my command anytime. You can call me Boss from now on. I will be your aid anytime from now on.


    You don''t have to sacrifice anything for us. We just want your loyalty. So just don''t make a summoning contract with other animals."


    "Thank you, Boss."


    I felt like I lost my entire brain cell during this time. Now I am questioning, having such a dumbass eagle fighting by my side is alright or not.


    "Boss, I need your help currently. Can you take me and my friends to Iwagakure?"


    "Sure, no problem. Hop on. By the way, here are your friends?"


    "I think they are in the East direction from here," I answered Boss while riding on his back.


    Boss spread his huge wings and flew at incredible speed. I gotta say riding on the bird, sure felt awesome and cool. No wonder Deidara and Sai kept riding their art bird.


    After 3 hours of flight, I found my squad quickly. They were resting at our meet-up location. They were all awed by the appearance of Boss and me. I just ignored their bombing of questions.


    Boss picked them up with his sharp pointy beak and flew to Iwagakure.


    -----------------------


    (Hanzo after letting Genji escape)


    "Alright, I spared your students'' lives. So pay up now. But I gotta say, you have taught them well, the third Hokage!" Hanzo spoke.


    "Well, they are still baby tigers who are growing. I wanted to teach them feelings of despair, and not to be conceited. Thanks for your cooperation, Hanzo. As promised, here is 100 million ryo." Hiruzen talked to Hanzo.


    "Don''t be. I am doing this because we are allies. So when do we start our plan?" Hanzo asked.


    Figure next to Hiruzen, Nara clan head answered to Hanzo.


    "Two weeks from now. Hanzo-sama has to pretend to attack our Konohagakure with an excuse of Amegakure taking the Great Ninja village spot from Konoha.


    Even if Onoki doesn''t trust the third Hokage''s fake death, he will surely move when he hears about Hanzo-sama''s invasion of Konoha. We will slowly lure Onoki to the trap and crush the Iwa force completely with Ame and Konoha allied shinobi.


    I am sure, Onoki will pull out from the war if this plan works, thus ending the war."


    "I got it. I hope you don''t forget about my condition for cooperation." Hanzo asked to Hiruzen.


    "Don''t worry, Konoha will always support you as leader of Amegakure and never meddle with problems in Amegakure no matter what," Hiruzen answered.


    "Also, Hanzo-san. We need your help this time. Could you please search for this kid in the photo? He is from Iwagakure and recently caused a lot of chaos in Konoha." Hiruzen handed out the photo of Genji to Hanzo.


    Hanzo looked at the photo of Genji and was surprised that Konoha was searching for him too.


    "Well, to be honest, I met him before. He was spectating my battle with your students. I tried to kill him after the battle, but he managed to run away from me without me realizing it. Even my summoning couldn''t detect him.


    But I will try to capture him." Hanzo told Hiruzen what happened.


    Hiruzen showed the grim face when he heard that Genji escaped Hanzo easily.


    "Thank you for your cooperation, Hanzo-san. Then we will be leaving now."


    Hiruzen and Nara clan head departed after saying farewell to Hanzo.

 Chapter 52 - Reporting to Onoki

    I gotta admit that birds are fast, especially giant eagles. It didn''t even take 2 days for us to arrive in front of Iwagakure''s gate. Talk about the speed!!


    Along the way, we didn''t meet any obstructions as we were very high up over the sky. Even if Konoha or Ame shinobi found us, what could they possibly do except lookup like a bunch of idiots? Heheheh.


    Nagato and his little friends became very close to my squad while I was gone to complete the quest. Luckily, they still haven''t found out a Hizashi''s body. My squad has done a pretty good job on that.


    Hiazhashi was knocked out by Gari instantly in an unconscious state every time he showed signs of waking up. Now, I am a bit astounded that Deidara managed to knock out Gaara for several days entirely.


    Everyone was excited to see Iwagakure. My squad was all looked happy that they survived while Nagato and his little friends were excited to see their new home. Gari looked a bit guilty though, I was sure it was because of Tonja''s sacrifice.


    While everyone is cheering on Boss''s back, I sat quietly at the tail and contemplated how to explain all the impossible odds we went through to Onoki. I needed to make some excuses to hide System''s existence.


    "Boss, just land here. We will walk to Iwagakure from now." I spoke to Boss Eagle.


    He listened to me and landed near Iwagakure.


    "Well, kid. I will be going now. I am sure other Eagles will be happy when they hear we got a very smart summoner, haha. If you have any trouble, then don''t hesitate to summon us. Bye!" Boss Eagle spoke.


    I farewelled Boss Eagle with a smile. I don''t know if Boss Eagle is dumb or smart but not educated. However, throughout the flight, he obediently listened to my request every time without complaining. He is fast, looks tough, and listen to me good. So for me, he is better than Toad or Snake summons.


    ----------------------------


    (Tsuchikage office)


    Onoki had a lot of things going on his head that he got a headache every day.


    Firstly, the casual mission he gave to Genji and his squad to test his son''s ability, turned out to be an S-rank mission. Onoki got a report that Konoha suffered heavy casualties by Genji''s squad.


    Secondly, the spy whose Genji and his squad suppose to protect has been found dead near the Iwa-Konoha border. The cause of death was a suicide bomb. But there was no news of Genji''s group''s whereabouts at all. This made Onoki worried about Kitsuchi''s safety.


    Thirdly, he got the report of Hiruzen is dead, presumed killed by Mito accidentally. Onoki didn''t believe this shit, not even a single second. But it is interesting why Mito attacked Hiruzen.


    Fourthly, Amegakure is showing signs of invading Konoha and soon expected to send someone to form an alliance with Iwagakure.


    Finally, the 5-tailed beast has resurrected and Onoki has to worry about sealing operation.


    Just as Onoki was thinking about these 5 main queries, a ROCK member appeared in front of Onoki.


    "Tsuchikage-sama! Genji and his squad have arrived in front of Iwagakure''s front gate just now, along with three little unknown kids and unconscious Hyuga."


    The news of Genji''s squad returned, made Onoki quickly turn his head to ROCK member, and ask him questions.


    "They finally appeared! But do you know how did they come here? How come I didn''t know they were in Iwa''s land until they appeared now?"


    "Apparently, Genji attained the Eagle summon by fortune during his mission and used it to fly all the way to here."


    "Eagle Summon? Are they real Genji''s squad, not fake ones?"


    "They are real, sir. We have thoroughly checked their identity. They are currently coming here to report. Also, Kitsuchi-sama is safe and sound." ROCK member answered Onoki diligently.


    "Alright, bring them to my office quickly!" Onoki ordered.


    ---------------


    My squad and me, who was carrying wrapped around Hyuga entered to Onoki''s office.


    We greeted Onoki who sat on the chair, looking imposing.


    "Greetings, Tsuchikage-sama. My squad and I have returned to Iwagakure."


    "Brats, you brats finally arrived. I thought you won''t make it.


    But I am very happy and proud that you guys managed to shake off Konoha''s chase and arrived here safely. Very good, very good! Hahaha."


    "Please don''t praise us, Tsuchikage-sama. We couldn''t even fulfill our mission. We are not worthy of your praising. By the way, does Tsuchikage-sama knows about Tonja''s situation?" Gari asked Onoki.


    "It turned out to be an S-rank mission. So I will forgive mission abandonment. Just making alive here deserve praise.


    Unfortunately, we found Tonja''s corpse near the Iwa-Konoha border route where you guys are supposed to take. It seems he suicide bombed himself.


    Don''t feel guilt too much, I am the main fault for this. I should have better ?ssessed the mission before giving you guys. So tell me everything happened now." Onoki ordered.


    "It all happened after we saw Tonja bla bla bla bla bla bla..."


    We talked about all the things that happened to us to Onoki. Onoki mostly looked impressed by us how we killed Dan and Nawaki (accidentally), taking Hyuga and bringing Sharingan and Byakugan.


    It took almost 2 hours to finish reporting to Onoki.


    "Alright, I am very impressed by the resources you brought. Genji, you did very well to manage your squad. Everyone also done well, It is pretty late now. I am sure you all are very tired, so go back home and rest well. You can write the report tomorrow." Onoki ordered us to dismiss.


    "But Genji, you stay." Just as we were leaving, Onoki called out to me. I knew he would ask me to stay alone definitely.


    After everyone left, Onoki didn''t beat around the bush and questioned me directly.


    "Genji, I still have some inquiries for you. So tell me honestly. I know full well about Dan''s ghost ability. It is a very terrifying jutsu and countless Iwa shinobi have been killed by him.


    But how do you have a four-violet flame barrier jutsu scroll and it can nullify Dan''s ghost jutsu?"


    "I copied a four-violet flame barrier jutsu scroll accidentally during Uzushiogakure-invasion.


    I didn''t know the four-violet flame barrier can nullify Dan''s ghost jutsu. It was Tonja who told me that can nullify Dan''s ghost transformation."


    Tonja is dead, and dead can''t talk. It was best to push the blame to Tonja.


    Although Onoki looked a bit suspicious, he seems to accept my reasoning.


    "Alright, then can you tell me how did you get the eagle summons?"


    "I was going down the random village to buy rations for the squad. Then I heard from villagers that the village chief has hired few shinobi to safeguard his family legacy, the Eagle Summon scroll.


    Since I needed transportation desperately, I stole the summon scroll from them and tried my luck.


    It is very difficult to be an Eagle summoner Eagles will ask several difficult questions and if we can''t answer them even one, then they will nullify our contract. No shinobi has ever completed their test.


    However with 100% pure luck, I managed to complete their test and became their first summoner."


    I didn''t tell Onoki that I went to see Hanzo and Sannin battle. No matter how senseless Onoki can be, he won''t believe a jackshit about me escaping from Hanzo, the Kage-level shinobi. I mean, even I will not believe it if I were him.


    "It seems you encountered huge luck during this journey. But don''t forget that you are Iwa shinobi, raised by Iwagakure. I hope you contribute to your home village by submitting the Eagle summon scroll." Onoki spoke, no ordered me.


    ''This greedy little shrimp old man. He definitely asked questions to get my eagle summoning scroll.


    Well, it doesn''t matter anyway, because I am very sure no sane Shinobi cant answer Eagle''s nonsense test unless they have a special system.''


    I gave Onoki, the Eagle summoning scroll obediently.


    "This is the last question, Genji. Tell me why did you decide to bring those three Ame orphans. You better answer this properly! You know full well that I hate and untrust outsiders the most!" Onoki talked to me with an intimidating voice.


    "I heard from Kitsuchi that all of Uzumaki kids in Iwagakure all disappeared. Since one of the orphans is rare Uzumaki, therefore I decided to bring him with us.


    I saw a powerful explosion corps potential from the girl orphan. As a member of the explosion corps, It is my responsibility to recruit talents for explosion corps.


    She was able to manipulate the papers, which can turn into massive powerful explosion tags if she trained well in the explosion corps division.


    The last kid, he has great leadership and his ability to make enemies to his allies. He is the smartest out of all three orphans and the most skilled. He has affinities of water, fire, and wind. I say he is simply a genius.


    With this all reasoning, I decided to bring them to Iwagakure to consolidate Iwa''s future power." I spoke my true reason to Onoki for this one.


    Onoki seems to think for a few seconds and told me.


    "If they are really what you mentioned, then I will consider them. But I will monitor them for 3 months. If they do some strange things, then I will expel them immediately and you will also be called for interrogation." Onoki threatened me, just to scare me.


    "Yes, sir."


    I wasn''t too worried as Nagato and his friends don''t have any intention to harm Iwagakure.


    "Enough of questioning. Genji, you did really well during this mission. You brought Sharingan, Byakugan, and even alive Hyuga. These are really valuable resources for Iwagakure.


    That''s why I am planning to promote you and your squad one rank up. So tell your squad to come to my office tomorrow afternoon to receive their promotion rank and rewards.


    That''s it, dismiss."


    I said farewell to Onoki and left his office while breathing out with ease.


    -----------------------


    (A/N: I don''t know how the hell Konan can control papers. Is it Kekkei Tota or some kind of forbidden jutsu or secret bloodline?


    Also, some of you guys want mc to battle with Hanzo, but that''s not gonna happen during the second ninja war. Genji still lacks a shit ton of powerful jutsu to become Kage-level shinobi. There is no way he can beat Hanzo now, maybe during the third ninja war.)

 Chapter 53 - Bingo Book

    I straight collapsed right after coming from Onoki''s office to my beloved dormitory room. All of these past few weeks'' stress and tensions I was holding up finally freed as soon as I touched my bed.


    The next day, I wake up very late, just like all of my squad members. It was almost lunchtime when I finally opened my eyes from the dreamland.


    I wanted to sleep more. But just then, I saw the messenger bird knocking my window from the balcony. It delivered the Onoki''s order to gather everyone for promotion and rewards for our huge resource contribution to Iwa.


    I immediately got up. Knowing that old man''s temper, if we late for our promotion, Onoki would be so pissed that we were late for his order and might even demote us instead.


    I first went to wake up the nearest person from me, Gari who was my neighbor. Gari was in the dreamland, just like I was expecting. I kicked him from his bed and wake him up f?r??b??.


    The same thing happened to both Kan and Gin, who were living upstairs. All of them looked annoyed and was even about to bite me for waking them up, but as soon as I mentioned about promotions, their attitude changed 180 degrees.


    We got ready and dashed to Tsuchikage building as fast as we could.


    -------------


    There were several old men in Onoki''s office when we are allowed to meet him. All of them were unknown faces to me. They are probably elders of Iwagakure.


    Onoki looked at us for seconds and started talking.


    "Ahem, I am sure you all know why you were called here. You all managed to kill Konoha''s elite Jounin, Dan, take Sharingan and Bygakugan and alive Hyuga. I have talked with elders here about how we should reward you all.


    Therefore, we have decided to promote you all to one rank above from your current Shinobi rank.


    Gin and Kan will be Chunin from now. As for Gari, we heard your achievements along with Genji throughout the war until now. We thought about promoting you to Jounin, but leaping two ranks is unheard of in Iwa before. This is why you will be promoted to Tokubetsu Jounin (Special Jounin) first.


    Genji, as the leader of the mission, you have done very well. You have successfully promoted to Jounin. Also, all four of you will receive each 10k ryo.


    I hope you all will continue to do great things and Iwa proud."


    """"Thank you vert much, Tsuchikage-sama!!!""""


    All of us thanked Onoki for promoting us. I could see the delighted faces of my squad. I was also happy to promote as Jounin.


    ''Oh, yea!! Jounin at the age of 14! Normally I have to take the Jounin test to be a Jounin. But since we are in the war, I don''t need to take that shit. Hehehe.''


    "Also, before you all leave, We have questions for you. It''s actually about Kitsuchi and Kimiko.


    I wanna know your honest evaluation of their performance during the mission. After hearing your voices, I will judge whether they can become Chunin and send them to war or not." Onoki spoke to us.


    I was a bit shocked to hear Onoki''s words. Considering he promoted Kitsuchi as Genin while all of us were just Academy students, I thought he would just promote Kitsuchi without our opinions.


    According to shinobi rule, most of the Chunin must be deployed at the frontline at least once during the war. Maybe the cruelty of war softened this old man''s heart for his son??


    We all answered as Kitscuhi and Kimiko are ready for Chunin and praised them well. I mean what kind of idiots who b?r?ly promoted just now, would criticize the son in front of his parents, especially when his father is Tsuchikage?


    Besides, I personally think Kitsuchi and Kimiko are at least ready for Chunin. Seeing we were just bootlicking, Onoki didn''t ask more and dismissed us immediately.


    "Alright, alright. I heard it enough. You all dismiss! Go get your newly promoted vest downstairs. Also, Genji and Gari. You two might wanna check on Konoha''s Bingo book." Onoki told us while smirking a bit.


    --------------


    All four of us got our respective rank vest from the first floor of Tsuchikage building. But I was more excited to see Bingo book.


    Hearing Onoki, I am sure Gari and I were on the Konoha''s Bingo book. I didn''t know what rank I was graded on, but I sure am I excited to see. We quickly bought Konoha''s Bingo book


    We didn''t even have to flip the book as me and Gari were on the freaking first page! What an honor!


    /*


    Name: Genji


    Gender: Male


    Age: around 13-15


    Criminal rank: A-rank Criminal


    Elements affinities: Earth, Lightning, Explosion release


    Weakness: Genjutsu (possibly)


    Title: Considered as the greatest genius in Iwagakure


    Achievement:


    Earned Greatest Genius in Iwagakure.


    Defeated Suan''s greatest genius Rasa.


    Killed Konoha''s elite Jounin Dan and Nawaki Senju.


    Currently active as an Iwa Explosion corps member.


    Description:


    Extremely cunning and quick thinking. He is able to trick anyone to underestimate him and finish off an opponent by surprise explosion attacks. He has his own powerful unique Taijutsu, called Wing Chun. Doesn''t recommend fighting him close.


    He is super extremely damn freaking good at running away, even from Kage-level shinobi. High chance of him escaping from any battle.


    Recommend only elite Jounin or higher level shinobi to battle him. For the rest, flee from sight. Do not chase him when he fled.


    Bounty: 20 Million ryo, if you get the necklace, he stole from Nawaki Senju, then 30 million ryo (wanted from Tsunade Senju).


    */


    ''Holy!!! An A-rank shinobi, I am 20 million ryo!! Hehehe, not bad, not bad. I look so handsome in the picture too


    They sure wrote so detail about me. But what do you mean, I good at running away? It''s just a strategic retreat! Also, how come that stupid necklace is worth almost half me?


    I didn''t know getting wanted by other villages would make me so happy. No wonder why even Zorro got happy when he got his wanted poster, hehehe.


    I don''t care about Tsunade any longer. I dare her to come to Iwagakure, hehe. She will get minced by Onoki. ''


    While I was happy about my bounty, Gari looked a little bit upset about his bounty. I got curious and looked at his bounty page which was right next to mine.


    Name: Gari


    Gender: Male


    Age: around 13-15


    Criminal rank: B-rank Criminal


    Power level: Jounin level


    Elements affinities: Earth, Lightning, Explosion release


    Weakness: Genjutsu and Ninjutsu (Possibly)


    Title: Genji''s lackey (A/N: Hehehehe)


    Achievement:


    Killed more than 50 Suna Jounin along with his squad.


    Assisted Genji (see the previous page) in killing Konoha''s elite Jounin Dan and Nawaki Senju.


    Currently active as an Iwa Explosion corps member.


    Description:


    He has a unique way of using his explosion release. He could walk on the air by creating a small explosion on his feet which increases his speed immensely. He has extreme control in his explosion release.


    Do not absolutely fight him in Taijutsu, which could result in defeat. Recommend Jounin or higher level shinobi to confront him.


    Bounty: 5 Million ryo


    */


    ''Oh, B-rank only? 5 million? No wonder he is not happy.


    Wait a minute, Gari''s title is my lackey? Damn! Konoha sure is full of cunning bastards. Even using the Bingo book, they are trying to sow discord between us.''


    Gin and Kan just laughed like maniacs when they saw Gari''s title. Well, it is true that compared to my bounty, Gari''s bounty was a bit too shit.


    After having good laugh, we all four went to celebrate our promotion.

 Chapter 54 - Goros plan

    Seven days later, news about my squad arriving at Iwagakure safely reached to the whole Konohagakure. This news shocked all the Konoha top management.


    They spent almost every Anbu available, most of Hyuga clan shinobi and sensors to find just a couple of Iwa shinobi kids. But conclusively, they couldn''t capture, let alone didn''t even see a glimpse shadow of Iwa kids.


    This just shamed Konoha too much, especially Anbu. This event created an excellent opportunity for Danzo to propose building another secret division, which is much stronger and capable than Anbu.


    Before, Danzo decided to let his dream of Hokage go and support Hiruzen to the fullest. But the more and more he works with Hiruzen, he disliked the way Hiruzen does.


    He hated how Hirzuen gave all remaining Uzushiogakure resources to their one descendent girl, instead of securing them as Konoha''s properties.


    He hated Hiruzen for making a Peace Treaty with Suna after just a few apology gifts.


    He hated how Hiruzen hiding like a little b*tch to lure for stupid old stone Onoki.


    He now hated Hiruzen for making Anbu this shit, as they couldn''t even capture a couple of kids.


    Slowly with his Konoha superior complex, Danzo thought he has to step up and save Konoha from Hiruzen''s foolish dream.


    As Jounin Commander, Danzo had a bit of authority to control Konoha Shinobi. But at the end of the day, all Konoha shinobi still will obey the Hokage Hiruzen more than him.


    That''s why he decided to create his own elite force like Anbu to Hiruzen.


    ------------


    (Konoha camp in Land of Rain)


    Sounds of angry roar could be heard from a thousand miles along with a giant earthquake. It was from Tsunade after hearing Dan and Nawaki''s death, and their killers escaped safely.


    Jiraiya and Orochimaru smartly left the camp before Tsuande starts her berserk mode.


    "HEYYYYAAAAAA! DAMN YOU!!!!! HIRUZEN, YOU OLD FOX, YOU DEAD WHEN I GO BACK.


    AND I WILL FIND YOU IWA BASTARDS AND TEAR INTO PIECES!!!"


    After her berserk mode, almost 90% of Konoha shinobi, who were in the camp, are heavily injured. From then on, nobody messed with Tsunade, and she was regarded as the strongest among legendary Sannin in the Konoha shinobi circle.


    ------------------


    (time skip)


    ------------------


    It has been roughly 3 months since that hellish mission at Konoha. Since then, I have been staying in Iwagakure, trying my best to make excuses to stay away from the battlefield.


    I have been training the lighting style constantly. I can electrify people, 5m around me with ease. My speed also paced up greatly.


    Of course, I haven''t forgotten about my signature jutsu(Earth-style version of Kimimaro''s fifth dance) quest. I still have about 3 years to finish this quest. Since I am Jounin now, it will be laughable that I don''t have signature jutsu on my own.


    I heard that in the frontline, there is one Konoha crazy bitch woman killing our shinobi like a mad dog and shouting my name to call me out every single day.


    Now I don''t even need to think to know who this is. It is an almighty Tsunade. Since she didn''t witness her lover''s death right in front of her like canon, in this timeline, she doesn''t have hemophobia.


    Although I can escape from her anytime since I have eagle summon, but I don''t want to face her with current me if possible. She might pull some crazy stunt or might do unforeseen shits on me.


    There is also money digger Kakuzu, whom I have to worry about too. He might kill me before I even know.


    Anyway, battlefields are still a scary place for me as always. I already used all of my Jounin privileges to take a break from the war until now. But now I have no more cards to use. I will definitely be ordered to join the frontline within the next week for sure.


    What a pain in the ?ss!


    ------------------


    (Onoki''s office)


    "Amegakure asked to be allied with us, as expected. So what should we do, Tsuchikage-sama?" Goro (the ex-explosion corps head) asked Onoki.


    "Well, we waited quietly for Konoha to make big moves for 3 months now. Konoha hasn''t done anything but strengthening their defense and voting for the next Hokage election. I didn''t believe Hiruzen''s death, but now I am starting to think otherwise.


    What if Hiruzen actually dead or heavily injured somehow, and we are just wasting our valuable opportunities to crush Konoha?" Onoki told his opinion to everyone.


    Everyone in the rooms showed their thoughtful expression. Konoha indeed showed signs of panicking when Hiruzen''s death news was circulating. They haven''t done anything, but only defend, defend, and defend. Now they are doing the election for the new Hokage.


    After 5 minutes of thought, Goro showed his suggestion.


    "How about this, we first agree to ally with Amegakure. Then we tell them to attack Konoha first, to see if Konoha really planted a big trap hole or not.


    We will just wait and see the result. If this is all Konoha''s scheme then, Amegakure will suffer in place of us.


    If Hiruzen really died and Konoha sure is without a leader, we will ?ssist Amegakure to crush Konoha. After that, we will backstab Amegakure and take their land along with Konoha."


    Goro''s plan was to use Amegakure as a bait to test Konoha and ultimately backstab Amegakure after dealing with Konoha, and occupy their land and resources.


    This ringed like music to Onoki''s ear, who loved backstabbing.


    "Alright. Not a bad one. If anyone has another idea? No?


    Okay, then we will use Goro''s strategy.


    Tell Amegakure that we will accept their proposal only if they attack Konoha first.


    For now, let''s dismiss the meeting here."


    After everyone has gone, Onoki stood up to the balcony to get fresh air. He seems to be thought and suddenly clenched his fist hard.


    "This time, I will crush Konoha and those damn Uchiha bastards."

 Chapter 55 - Onokis declaration

    Onoki has summoned every Jounin and Chunin in Iwagakure to the great hall. It is the first time he gathered the main force of Iwagakure all together after he gathered everyone to declare war two years ago.


    I am sure he would announce something big.


    As newly Jounin, I led my squad to the great hall. Gari, Gin, and Kan didn''t go to frontlines after the Konoha mission, like me. Since I am the leader of the squad, they have to stay Iwagakure with me.


    There weren''t as many shinobi in Hall as the last time due to most of them sent out to frontlines. But still, there were at least more than 500.


    We didn''t wait long for Onoki and elders to make an appearance. Onoki obviously came flying to show off. We all stopped whatever we were doing and greeted Onoki and elders.


    Onoki raised his hand to greet us back.


    "Hello, proud Iwagakure shinobi. Today, I have called you all here for no reason other than to end this great war.


    During the past 3 years, our mighty force has completely crushed Uzushiogakure and drove away Suna invaders successfully. Now the only one standing our way is Konoha. Konoha now has lost their Kage and mess inside. This is the perfect opportunity for us.


    I know everyone here is tired of all this war. But I ask all of you to gather your strength once more and attain the victory over Konoha.


    From here on, I will declare to commence a large scale invasion on Konoha. And I will personally lead this invasion!!" Onoki gave us a motivational speech.


    After one second of silence, everyone in the hall loudly roared and swearing loyalty to Iwagakure.


    ''2 years passed, and I know we are close to the end of the second great ninja war. Maybe this invasion will be the trigger to end the war?


    I mean, Onoki will personally lead this invasion. That old man who has been sticking his ?ss on the office chair for 2 years, finally started to move.


    Konoha practically won all the great ninja wars, so does that mean, Onoki will lose this campaign and be forced to end the war?


    Oh shit, should I convince Onoki to cancel this campaign? No, this stubborn old man will instead accuse me as a coward.


    God, I better prepare myself to run away.''


    --------------------------


    Onoki''s big campaign consisted of the remaining of Uncle Masashi and Roshi''s divisions and a half of the reinforcement division, a total of 6000 shinobi.


    There were 100 medical shinobi, 300 Sensors, 100 scouts, 5000 main shinobi force, and 400 elite shinobi force (ROCK, explosion corps, Kekkei Genkai, and clan members).


    My squad and I are deployed to elite shinobi force.


    Onoki left Captain Ishika in charge of protecting Iwagakure and Iwa land while we are gone. Onoki didn''t trust other Great villages nor small chained villages.


    I can''t believe we will lose this campaign despite having these mighty forces. It''s a bit frustrating that I can''t do anything while knowing we will lose for sure.


    I am just a newly promoted Jounin. It will take me everything to just save my ?ss during the battlefield. I won''t have the luxury time to think of how to change the outcome of the war.


    ------------------------------


    I got to meet up with Shuji and Uncle Masashi again as they were also part of the invasion force. We bragged Shuji about our bounty in the Konoha Bingo book, which made Shuji jealous and envy of us.


    Our 6000 force invaded Konoha after 2 weeks later of Onoki''s declaration. We have been advancing to Konoha''s land like mad lads.


    Finally, Konoha didn''t stand still and organized the ultimate defense force to drive us away.


    ''Onoki is using Ame force as a vanguard in the Konoha invasion. If this keeps up, Ame will suffer more than anyone and eventually be eliminated by other villages sooner or later.


    I clearly heard Hanzo predicting Konoha will win during his battle with Sannin. If he wanted a Great Ninja village spot, then wouldn''t it make more senes to attack the losing side?''


    While I was deep thought about the current situation, Gari tapped me from behind.


    "What is it, Gari?"


    "I was told by elite force division head that tomorrow, Ame force will come to ?ssist us in battle with Konoha''s defense force. So get ready for tomorrow''s battle. I already told others in our squad."


    "I see. So we finally fight tomorrow. I guess that old man tested Amegakure''s intention enough.


    Hey Gari. Let me give you a reminder. Since we are on the first page in the Bingo book, Konoha shinobi will likely remember us. So for tomorrow''s battle, you should bring the Smoke bomb as much as you can. They are the best tools when it comes to escaping."


    "Okay, got it. Don''t worry." Gari ?ssured me.


    After notifying me, Gari went to prepare himself. I looked up the sky and sighed.


    "I am having a bad feeling about tomorrow. System, you better help me."


    ----------------------------------


    (day of battle)


    Our 6000 force faced the Konoha defense force with 500m distance apart.


    Ame force arrived in the late morning and joined us to fight the Konoha defense force. Just by looking, I can estimate the Ame force are about 2000 shinobi.


    Onoki, along with ROCK bodyguards, met with Hanzo and his bodyguards.


    "Hello, Tsuchikage-sama. I hope you are well." Hanzo greeted Onoki. But instead of a greeting, Onoki just stared to diss Hanzo.


    "Well, you came at last. I thought you are scared and pulled your force out. Next time try not to be late.


    Alright, without further ado, let''s attack Konoha force."


    Hanzo glared Onoki for a moment, and the eye smiled instantly. Onoki just ignored Hanzo''s action and started to give a motivational speech to Iwa shinobi.


    "CHHAARGGEE!!!!"


    All of Iwa shinobi charged at Konoha''s defense force. But something unexpected happened to our back. Ame force was not attacking Konoha, but instead, they were backstabbing the Iwa force.


    This greatly angered and, at the same time, confused Onoki. He quickly eyed Hanzo with an angry expression and asked.


    "What is the meaning of this, Hanzo?"


    But it wasn''t Hanzo who answered Onoki. It was one of Hanzo''s bodyguard.


    "It is as you can see, you have fallen into our trap deep. Time has passed, but you are still foolish and arrogant as ever. Onoki."


    Saying the words, Hanzo''s bodyguard transformed to Hiruzen.


    "Hiruzen!! So rumor about your death was false. I knew you are alive, but I didn''t expect you would secret ally with Amegakure."


    "Well, Onoki. I will give you a choice. You can surrender here or fight all the way and drop-dead. What''s your choice?"


    "Like hell, I will surrender!!!


    To all Iwa shinobi, Kill all Ame and Konoha bastards!! Fight until the end.


    I will take on you both bastards, Hanzo, Hiruzen. Prepare to die!!!" Onoki shouted.


    "This will be your grave!" Hanzo responded while pulling his weapon from his back.


    "You haven''t changed, Onoki." Hirzuen spoke with disappointment.

 Chapter 56 - Trap

    I clashed with Konoha Chunin. He dared try to kill me with his pathetic taijutsu. I pulled my swords and stabbed him in the heart with ease.


    But before his death, Konoha Chunin loudly shouted to everyone near us.


    "Guys, this kid is the one who killed Dan-san!!!!"


    Soon, every Konoha shinobi''s eyes were on me. They all looked at me with killing intent.


    ''Fuck this shinobi! Now I have to deal with all of these shinobi to escape.''


    Right after Konoha Chunin''s dying scream, almost 10 Konoha shinobi near me started to attack me, ignoring the previous opponent they were fighting.


    "So you are the bastard who killed Dan-san! Die now!"


    "We will avenge Dan-sama, attack!"


    "How dare you kill Dan-san!"


    I was worried for seconds but soon discerned that they are all Chunin level.


    "Oh, you all just Chunin and dare to challenge me, the jounin? You fu?kers clearly didn''t read the bingo book carefully. Only elite Jounins are allowed to fight me! Taste my Wing Chun sword arts!!"


    I displayed my impressive Wing Chun sword style to block or dodge and counterattacked incoming attacks from Konoha Chunins. Quickly bodies of Konoha Chunins started to pile up. This caused a ripple effect, and more and more Konoha shinobi rushed at me.


    "Earth style: Stone Pistol!!"


    But I spitted tens of stone pistols at Konoha shinobi and exploded them right in front of Konoha shinobi. Since my explosion release was listed in Bingo''s book, it wasn''t that kind of secret anymore.


    A lot of Konoha shinobi were burned by my explosion. However, this didn''t reduce Konoha shinobi''s d?s?r? to kill me at all. Instead, they got angrier and burning with d?s?r? to kill me.


    Just as they were about to rush at me again, someone shunshined in front and stopped them.


    He had spiky, silver-colored hair that reached into the middle of his back tied in a ponytail and bangs that hung over his forehead protector.


    When I saw him, my face went from smirk to despair. It was Sakumo Hatake!


    "Don''t underestimate your opponent, just because he is a kid. You guys are no match for that kid. Go and help others. I will handle this one." Sakumo told Konoha shinobi.


    "But Sakumo-san, we are close in killing him. Please let us fight until the end." Several Konoha shinobi complained.


    "Don''t let the anger cloud your judgments. Look carefully! Can''t you guys see our shinobi corpses below that kid? That kid already took down 20 of our shinobi this fast. You are no match at him." Sakumo convinced others to stay away.


    ''NO! Don''t go! I can''t defeat him myself.


    Stay here and be my hostage!! Oh shit, I''m so dead, so dead.''


    Konoha shinobi respected Sakumo''s word and left us alone. I tried to look around to find fellow Iwa shinobi for help, but surprisingly or weirdly, there were none. It was just him and me alone.


    "I can''t believe you killed Dan. But I won''t underestimate you even a bit just because you are a kid. Let''s have a good fight, kid!" Sakumo spoke to me while pulling out his white light chakra saber, which emitted a streak of white chakra.


    Seeing Sakumo was my opponent, I just cursed my bad luck. It was like a Demon king appeared after defeating a few weak goblins.


    I helplessly coated my bu??erfly swords into the lightning chakra and prepared for battle.


    We clashed each other. I felt a powerful strike from Sakumo''s white saber. I instantly knew Sakumo was not joking around, and he was eager to kill me.


    He blocked my swords by kicking them and continue to pressure me with his saber. I didn''t back down and evaded his attacks while looking for counterattacks.


    My advantages over him were that I had two long swords on me while he has a short one. But Sakumo''s saber was faster and powerful than mine. I was glad that Wing Chun''s sword style was dual sword art, or else I would have been in pieces already.


    Kenjutsu battle (sword battle) between him and me went on for almost 10 minutes. I was slowly losing. Obviously, Sakumo was experienced and more powerful than me.


    Suddenly one of my swords couldn''t handle the striking pressure of Sakumo''s saber and broke. I got panicked but calmed down. However, Sakumo didn''t let this chance go. He faked his saber attack to draw my other sword away from me and kicked me into the gut with extraordinary strength.


    As soon as I received Sakumo''s kick, I flew away while throwing out a mouthful of saliva.


    ''Shit, I am in very pinch here. My sword got broken, and I got kicked into the gut while I haven''t done any damage.


    Fuck Kenjutsu. Why am I fighting with him in his specialty field?


    I will use Ninjutsu.''


    I got up and created several earth clones.


    "Earth Style: Earth Dragon Jutsu!"


    I charged Earth Dragon and Earth clones at Sakumo. I then used Earth Travel jutsu and went inside underground to hide from Sakumo.


    Sakumo''s saber started to give out more intense white lightning charka. He then just cut off my earth dragon and clones before they even reach him.


    Next, he started to slice ground below him to find me. I popped out from his behind and did a series of hand seals.


    "Lightning Style: Lighting Beam jutsu!"


    Several lighting beams from my hands shot out to Sakumo. Sakumo tried to dodge, but since he was in mid-air, he got hit by one of my lightning beams and electrocuted him for a second.


    I quickly dashed to cut him off while he was unable to move. But when I cut him down, it turned into a log.


    ''Shit, when did he use substitution jutsu? Where is he?''


    Soon Sakumo appeared from my side and side kicked me. Although I was able to block it using my instinct, I got fly away again.


    ''Fuck, ninjutsu is not working on him at all. He just cuts off all of them like bu??er. What should I do to escape from him?''


    "At that age, you were able to hold me until this long. You can be really considered as the greatest genius in your generation. Which is the more reason why I should finish you off here now!"


    Then Sakumo dashed at me, not giving any time to breathe. I quickly tried to block him with my remaining sword, but then, someone blocked Sakumo''s attack for me and kicked Sakumo away.


    I looked up to see who it was. It was Uncle Masashi!


    "Not bad, kid. Not bad at all. You managed to hold on Konoha''s white fang this long. As expected of my disciple. Now go!


    Leave him to me." Uncle Masashi told me.


    "Uncle Masashi! Thank god you are here! I thought I was done for. Oh, I love you so much." I grabbed Uncle Masashi''s leg and pretended to be weak.


    "Get off me. I know you still have plenty of strength. Go and help Shuji for me. I will follow you behind soon." Uncle Masashi spoke while kicking me away.


    "Alright, be careful, Uncle Masashi. His Kenjutsu is terrifying." I warned Uncle Masashi.


    "Yea, yea. Just take care of Shuji for me. Go now!"


    "Sorry, white fang. But I can''t let you kill that kid. I owe his father''s life and can''t let him die here."


    "Well, it will be a shame not to kill that kid. But let''s have a good fight, golem destroyer, Masashi-san."


    -------------------------------


    After escaping from Sakumo, I ran to the main battlefield to find my squad and Shuji. I need to get them together and escape from this hellish place.


    Even after searching for 20 minutes, I couldn''t find any of them. Instead, I had to fight random Ame and Konoha shinobi, coming to kill me.


    Just as I was about to search for them more, someone punched the ground, splitting the earth, which blocked my path.


    "I finally found you, you little sneaky bastard!! How dare you kill my brother and Dan! I will take you down and torture you until you die!!"


    I didn''t even have to look who it was. It was none other than crazy woman, Tsunade.


    ''Fuck, what''s up with my luck? I just met Sakumo, b?r?ly saved by Uncle Masashi. And now, I met another powerful crazy one who is thirsty for my blood more than anyone in this world.''


    "Hey, listen! I didn''t kill your brother. He jumped to the abyss himself. I tried to stop him, but he was so happy that he gets to die.


    As for Dan''s death, it was no choice. I wanted to eat and live like others. I told him not to follow me, but he did anyway. So he died." I shouted at Tsunade.


    "Oh, I don''t care what you have to say. You are dead! I will end your pitiful life and sacrifice your brain and heart to Dan and Nawaki''s tomb."


    "Hey, that is not something doctor should say, bitch. I should have killed you when Hanzo spared your life. I was kind enough to let you three go, and is this how you pay to your lifesaver?" I didn''t know why but I wanted to diss Tsunade.


    "Stop Bullshitting!" Tsunade dashed at me to punch me.


    "Okay, I will stop bullshit then. So don''t come to me."


    Tsunade didn''t even listen to me and dashed at me madly. I did a series of hand seals and slammed down to the ground.


    "Earth Style: Earth Golem Jutsu."


    Then 5m tall Earth Golem came out from my beneath. Seeing this, Tsunade didn''t even hesitate and tried to punch my golem.


    I predicted Tsunade''s simple thought and quickly controlled the golem to dodge Tsudane''s punch.


    "You missed it! Hahaha. Let me introduce you. This golem is my standoooo. And here is my ultimate jutsu. Taste this."


    Golem raised it''s both arms and started to punch at Tsunade repeatedly.


    "MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUDA MUD¡ª"


    "SHUT UP!!!"


    Tsunade didn''t give a shit about my ultimate jutsu and just punched my golem and flew it away. I was sent flying with my golem also.


    *Crash*


    ''Dio power didn''t work? Impossibe!! Fuck, this third time today that I was sent flying!!! It hurts so much.


    Now enough playing around. I gotta do something to deal with that crazy woman.''

 Chapter 57 - Battle with Tsunade

    In front of me was an awfully pissed woman, Tsunade, who glared at me like a hungry tiger aiming for prey. Well, I know the harm I caused indirectly at her was not so little, but she doesn''t have to look at me like she is about to eat me alive.


    "How dare you kill my two most beloved people!


    You at least could have let Nawaki alive! But instead, you killed both him and Dan!!! I really hate cruel bastard like you!!!!!"


    Hey, woman! I also had no other choice on my side either, except killing them. We are freaking Shinobi! She was supposed to be prepared for this event. To be honest, I even went as far as to stop that brainless Nawaki from suiciding! But this madwoman is not appreciating my effort at all!


    "Just calm down first. It seems you are misunderstanding something. For your record, I never killed Nawaki Senju. I even tried to save him from falling off the abyss, but he just refused and jumped on his own."


    "I don''t care your pathetic excuse. Now prepare to experience worse than hell!!"


    She charged at me with her fist holding high, intending to punch me in the face, packed up with her mighty infinite rage. I wasn''t just gonna let her hit me. I quickly used substitution jutsu to swap my place with a nearby stone, which I narrowly avoided her death punch.


    But I could felt the destructive power of her punch even though I dodged. The stone I substituted has been powdered into dust, leaving me speechless. Also, the trees behind me couldn''t handle her punch impact, met the same fate as the stone.


    ''Oh my god, I knew she was powerful. But seeing it aiming at me, it is way more terrifying. How the freak does she have such strength!! She does not have bald hair like Saitama!!!!!! That''s very illegal!!''


    "It seems like you only know how to running away, as Bingo Book suggested. Why don''t you face me head-on like a man!"


    "I am not an idiot. I am 100% sure there is no man here who can match your raw taijutsu strength. And I highly value my life unlike a certain idiot brother of crazy woman that I am battling."


    While I was saying, I looked around us. As I expected, I didn''t see any shinobi. Perhaps others all retreated, not wanting to caught in the crossfire.


    I have been dragging the time to confirm whether Jiraiya or Orochimaru was near Tsunade. But it seems it was unnecessary. Well, knowing this woman, I bet she straight up separated from her team as soon as the battle started to find me.


    If I have to honest, I am actually glad that I am fighting with Tsunade than Sakumo Hatake. In terms of raw strength, Tsunade might be superior to Sakumo and me. But that''s the only one of very few advantages she has from Sakumo.


    Sakumo is faster and more experienced than Tsunade. He also has more ninjutsu in his arsenal. In conclusion, Sakumo is stronger than Tsunade. And I am not battle manic who enjoy fighting a stronger opponent.


    In order to win against her, I need to rely on my speed using lightning style. Just Tsunade''s one punch can decide the outcome of the battle, but as long as she can''t hit me, her monstrous strength is useless. Also, she is currently blinded by her anger and rage, which could be a key to winning.


    I saw Tsunade again charging at me, but this time it seems she was going to give me some devastating dropkick from above. I quickly created the Earth Wall while at the same time, charging lightning charka on my leg.


    [A/N: Just let you guys know, Genji''s earth wall has the shape of corn. Turns out the form of earth wall jutsu are varied on each Shinobi.]


    "There is no way that weak looking chump of earth can block my dropkick. Now have a taste of my anger!"


    But as soon as her kick contacted with my earth wall, I instantly dashed out of it, successfully avoiding Tsunade''s dropkick. I had made her focus on the crushing earth wall than me to create an opportunity to escape from her kick.


    Seeing I dodged her attack again, Tsunade was pissed much more than before. She tried to catch me, but it was proved to be very hard as I kept running around her with quick speed.


    While running around Tsunade, I never got close to her. Instead, I threw shurikens and Kunai to annoy her more. Then annoyed Tsunade, suddenly punched the ground to create a bunch of obstacles to slow me down.


    But I didn''t panic and performed several hand seals to counterattack Tsunade.


    "Earth Style: Rubbles Shot Jutsu!"


    Then hundreds the rubbles around Tsunade, which were produced by Tsunade''s punch impact on the ground, shot towards at her with bullet speed. They were so fast that just even scratch caused bleeding. I could say they can be considered as small shurikens traveling at extreme speed.


    If it was ordinary Shinobi, they would be already downed. But Tsudane just simply started to heal the injuries as soon as she gets one and advanced at me. However, I was also not done yet.


    "Lighting style: Lightning Stream Arrow Jutsu!"


    Lighting arrows were shot from both of my hands, traveling towards Tsunade. Now, if she was calm minded and didn''t blind by anger, she could have easily avoided these arrows. But the current Tsunade just blinded to get close to me as quick as she could and punch me. She just took my lightning arrows, trusting her healing ability too much.


    As soon as my lightning arrows hit Tsunade, she suddenly found out that she couldn''t move her body at all.


    When someone was hit by Lightning Stream Arrow jutsu, it won''t do any physical harm. Instead, it will temporarily disrupt their nervous system, making them unable to control their own body while.


    I admit this is a powerful supporting jutsu, but the problem of this jutsu was its speed. It was just too slow to hit the target. That''s why I kept annoying Tsunade with small attacks to make her lose the sense of judgment.


    It might take others a bit of time to get rid of jutsu''s effect, but for a medical genius like Tsunade, it will only take around much less time to get rid of it. However, that''s enough time for me.


    "Earth Style: Rock Pillar Spears Jutsu!"


    "Earth style: Earth Clone Jutsu!"


    "Earth Style: Earth Dragon Jutsu!"


    "Earth style: Stone Pistol Jutsu!"


    "Lightning Style: Lighting Beam Jutsu!"


    I was sure I at least gave a devastating injury to her. I just smiled, thinking I defeated Tsunade. But suddenly, the light green color started to shine where Tsunade was standing previously.


    Then Tsunade slowly walked out of the smoke, while her burned body started to heal at incredible speed. I saw her face in which part of it was covered by thick dark lines, originating from her forehead.


    I instantly knew she activated her unique jutsu: Hundred Seal. I also knew I fu?k?d up real bad.


    ''God, no!!! I didn''t expect she already developed that seal in this timeline. I don''t even have to ask the system to how powerful that seal is. She freaking can heal herself from any kind of injuries of cut. Madara cut her into half, but she still survived that shit. Just this alone shows how powerful that seal of hers is. She is basically damn Zombie.


    Also, I was b?r?ly able to drive her to the corner until now due to her rashness and anger. But even if this continues, I will definitely lose. I also don''t want to waste chakra to fight immortal zombie. Time to run then.''


    "Well, it''s been a tough time battling with you, but I am afraid that we have to end here. I don''t want my skull to get broken after all. Bye-bye."


    After saying the word, I ran away from her. Tsunade didn''t expect that I will just run away after dealing with that much damage to her.


    "Where do you think you are running? Come back here now!"


    While saying the word, Tsunade started to chase me.


    ----------------


    It has been almost 1 hour since I started to run away from Tsunade, but that woman was still chasing me vigorously. We already far away from the battlefield. I really felt like she might chase me until the end of the world.


    But I was not running away mindlessly. After another 20 minutes of more running, I finally found the place, which can help me escape from Tsunade completely. It was the cliff, a very steep and high one at that.


    I stopped at the end of the cliff, pretending to be I was trapped. Tsunade, who chased me, finally showed a scary smile seeing I was trapped.


    "Hehehe, bastard! You are finally cornered. Now there is no way to run. Just be prepared to butchered alive!"


    "Okay, I didn''t expect you to chase me until this far. I gotta give you that nobody has chased me this long. But don''t expect I will just obediently captured by you. I still have a way to escape."


    "Oh, just what can you do in this desperate situation? Jump off the cliff?"


    "Oh, yes, I will jump off the cliff. Tsunade, let''s see if you have the gut to chase me until the end or not. Just to let you know, although this cliff is high, I have the confidence to survive from this height. Hahaha, bye!!!"


    After saying the word, I literally jumped off from the cliff. Tsunade was very shocked after seeing I really jumped. But soon, she also jumped off the cliff to chase me until the end.


    But as soon as she jumped off the cliff, she saw white smoke rising, and something soars above from the bottom at incredible speed. While falling down, she looked up to see what it was. It was a Giant majestic Bald Eagle.


    "Hahaha, Bitch! Did you actually jump off the cliff? With an idiot brain of yours, you will never catch me!!" I, who was standing on the top of the eagle, laughed at Tsunade for fallin'' off the cliff.


    "Fuck you!! Just you wait! I will skin you alive next time I see youuuuuuu!!!!!!!!!!!"


    I knew Tsunade was still blinded by anger and a sense of judgment. The fact that she chased me for more than an hour without any care proved it. I knew she would definitely jump off, following me.


    All I had to do was summon the Boss and fly away while she just falls to an unknown place. I didn''t summon the Boss to run away from the start because I still needed to find my squad and Shuji. I needed to lure Tsunade far away from the battlefield so that she won''t come back soon and start to chase me again.


    ''With Boss''s speed, I can get back to the battlefield in at most 15 minutes. As for Tsunade, I am not even sure if she can make it within today. Hahahahahah!


    Oh shit, now is not time to laugh. I have to get my squad and Shuji as fast as I can and get the hell out of here.''


    "Boss, please head to straight NorthEast fast!"


    "No problem. Be careful not to fall off during the flight, Genji boy!"


    Boss Eagle and I headed to the battlefield.


    -------------------------------


    [A/N: Okay, I am sorry that I didn''t upload the chapters for several days. I will be honest. I was engrossed in the light novel: Classroom of Elite. So I spent days reading it all while not writing any chapters for this fanfiction. Hahaha.]

 Chapter 58 - Meeting with Jiraiya

    It took around 10 minutes to return to the battlefield. I was once again impressed by Boss Eagle''s speed. He just covered the long distance that Tsunade and I ran for more than 1 hour in 10 minutes!


    Looking at the battle situation from above, I clearly saw the Iwa force was at an immense disadvantage. Konoha and Ame Shinobi were killing our shinobi from left to right and right to left. It was clear that Iwa lost this battlefield or maybe the whole war.


    "Hey, Boss. We are in the war and losing quite badly. They are killing my comrades. Can you do any airstrike to those Green and Black Uniformed shinobi? But don''t hurt browned uniformed shinobi."


    "Oh, so you are in the war? No wonder there were many shinobi clashing! But no worry, Genji boy. I shall show you help you clear out your enemies."


    Saying the word, Boss Eagle suddenly raised his wings high. Next, he flapped his wings widely, causing the loud noise. Then, I could see hundreds of sharp feathers shooting out from Boss Eagle''s wing.


    All of the feathers were coated with Lighting charka and struck Konoha and Ame shinobi from the top behind. I was a bit surprised that these feather blades were able to track down their targets, not hurting even single Iwa shinobi in the process.


    This caught the attention of all shinobi near around, whether they were allies or enemies. They saw a giant mighty eagle and a single Iwa shinobi on top of it. Well, Iwa shinobi''s moral increased a bit as they knew that the Eagle was on their side, while the opposite happened to Konoha and Ame force. giant


    Boss and I looked for my squad and Shuji while attacking random Konoha and Ame shinobi on the way. Suddenly, we saw an enormous toad appearing out of nowhere and jumped towards at us. I didn''t have to look who it was, as it was obviously Jiraiya. I''m guessing the Toad is Gamabunta.


    "Below us, Boss!! Giant Toad is jumping at us!" I warned the Boss Eagle.


    "No problem. I already know that!" Boss Eagle ?ssured me.


    Gamabunta thrust his blade at Boss Eagle but easily blocked by Boss Eagle''s claws.


    "Didn''t your mother teach not to pick on fight with Eagle in the air, you stupid frog?"


    Boss Eagle then swang his right wings fast and slapped Gamabunta''s face directly. Gamabunta''s hands were holding his blade, and also, since they were in the air, he couldn''t dodge Boss''s slap.


    Gamabunta got thrown off to the ground after getting a slap from Boss Eagle. But Gamabunta soon got up as nothing happened to him.


    "That hurt, you dumb eagle!! Why don''t you come down to the ground? I will beat your ?ss! Also, I am not a frog, it''s Toad."


    "What''s the difference? You all look the same to me, weaklings and preys for us, Eagles!"


    While our summoning was arguing, Jiraiya started to talk to me.


    "Wait, I think I remember you. Aren''t you the one Tsunade is searching frantically? Since you are still in one piece, I''m guessing she hasn''t found you yet?"


    Well, this was the second time I met Jiraiya. I sold him the super-premium book to him, but I was transformed at that time. So he still doesn''t know it was me who sold him that rare treasure.


    "If you are talking about the blondie bitch with huge racks on her ?h?st, I actually met her. But she gave a creepy smile when she saw me, so I clearly remember her."


    "What? Did you battle with Tsunade already? Then how are you still in one piece?" Jiraiya, with a confused look, asked me.


    "I don''t know if you are overestimating that girl or underestimating me, but I already took care of her.


    Strangely, She didn''t die, no matter how many I stabbed her. I even cut her arms, but she healed like it''s nothing. So I lured to the cliff and dropped her from thousands of meters high.


    I don''t know if she is dead or not, but I am sure she is badly injured and crying for help. You can go check if you want. hahahahahahaha!!"


    I kept bullshitting about how I destroyed Tsunade, although it was nothing like I spoke. Jiraiya, at first, didn''t believe me, but after confirming I really did had a fight with Tsunade, he started to worry.


    I definitely didn''t want to fight Jiraiya currently. My current object was to find my squad and Shuji, not fighting with every freaking Konoha S-rank shinobi.


    This tactic worked because Jiraiya''s kindness to care about his teammates, and Tsunade was his lover? But I knew these bullshits won''t ever work on Orochimaru. Luckily, Orochimaru was not here.


    -----------------------


    Boss and I kept searching and finally found Gari and Shuji together. They were fighting against 10 Ame shinobi. Boss Eagle roared and sent shockwaves at them, immobilizing them successfully.


    I jumped down from Boss and slashed all enemies with now my only bu??erfly sword.


    "Genji!! Thanks for helping us." Gari looked happy to see me. Gari''s uniform was tattered, and his hair was pretty messed up. It seems like Gari also went through a lot of fights and troubles.


    "Hey, Genji! You really save us there. Is that giant bird you summoning?" Shuji asked me. This was the first time he is seeing Boss Eagle, and he was a bit excited to see an actual summoning animal.


    "Yea, he is my summoning. You can call him Boss."


    "Woah! Can he speak? What abilities does he have?" Shuji asked a series of questions.


    "Look, Shuji. We don''t have time for that. You can ask that after this battle. For now, hop on the Boss. After finding Gin and Kan, we would get out of this place." I spoke to them.


    But unexpectedly, Shuji refused me.


    "Why are we running away? Tsuchikage-sama didn''t give us a retreat order. Genji, are you telling us to ditch the battlefield? There is no way I would do that. My dad is fighting hard, and I can''t shame him."


    "Shuji, do you even understand the current situation? We are losing!! At this rate, all of us won''t make it alive. A while ago, I met your dad. He asked me to take care of you, and I won''t let you die here. So hurry up and get on the Boss!!"


    I tried to persuade Shuji, but he just didn''t listen. Gari then started to refuse me too.


    "Genji. I know you are trying to save our squad and Shuji. But did you forget the consequences of ditching the battlefield? Last time we ditched, I was glad that it was Captain Ishika who forgave us. But do you think Tsuchikage-sama will forgive us?"


    Shuji couldn''t ditch because of their useless and high pride, while Gari was scared of consequences. But Gari''s reason made sense. After listening to Gari, my brain kind of agreed with Gari''s reason.


    I sat down and started to think carefully.


    If we exclude ditching, then the only way for Iwa shinobi to survive this battle was to make Onoki give retreat order.


    ''Why is Onoki not ordering for a retreat? No matter how stubborn he is, he is not someone who chooses his pride over Iwa shinobi. Onoki should be seeing the grim situation clearly more than any of us. Maybe he wants to retreat, but has no messenger to relay his order.''


    "Okay, Gari. Here are several Chakra pills. I want you and Shuji to go find Gin and Kan. They might be in danger and need you guys'' help. I will go to Tsuchikage-sama and persuade him to retreat."


    "Okay, good luck!" Gari agreed.


    I hopped on to Boss Eagle and went on to find Onoki.

 Chapter 59 - Onokis retreat plan

    I was going around the battlefield to find Onoki. But no matter how I search him, I couldn''t locate him on the battlefield. Just then, I saw something similar to Kamehameha, south far away from the battlefield. I immediately knew Onoki was battling there.


    There was no jutsu looked more similar to Kamehameha than Onoki''s particle style: Atomic jutsu. I led Boss to the place.


    Soon enough, I saw Onoki battling with Hiruzen and Hanzo. I honestly surprised that Onoki was able to handle those two. But then, Onoki was able to fly, which gave him a great advantage.


    Both Hiruzen and Hanzo already brought out their respective summonings while Onoki was using his particle style at them from high above.


    Battle was hectic and full of chaos. Three of them were all freaking top Kage-levels, no wonder why they are far away from the battlefield. They might literally kill everyone, including both allies and enemies there.


    I wanted to spectate their battle but knew now was not the time to do that. Boss entered their fighting zone, causing three''s attention on us.


    Onoki was about to attack a new intruder but stop when he saw it was me. He also kind of showed a bit of relief?


    "Isn''t that the kid who sneaked away from me? If I remember well, Konoha wanted to capture that kid, right?" Hanzo asked.


    "Yes, that is the kid who killed one of our elite shinobi and Senju clan successor. Konoha already issued Bingo Book for him. I didn''t expect he has Eagle summon with him. It seems like I still underestimated that kid."


    Onoki just ignored Hiruzen and Hanzo''s conversation and ordered me without even asking me why I was here.


    "Listen, Genji. I am glad that you came here. I am sure you came here to ask for retreat permission, right? Lend me your ear. I will explain my plan."


    I am a bit shocked that Onoki knew the reason I came to found him. It seems he didn''t have any messengers to relay his plan for a retreat as messengers would get killed immediately by Hiruzen and Hanzo. Onoki and I went flying high to not let Hiruzen and Hanzo eavesdrop us.


    Then Onoki explained the retreat plan to me.


    "Genji, blah blah blah....."


    I am quite surprised that Onoki''s strategy was pretty good. Only Onoki would be able to come up with this ridiculous and good escape plan. Also, this plan might save most of us from this hellish place.


    "Got it, Tsuchikage-sama. I will execute the plan."


    After receiving the order, Boss and I went away. Hiruzen and Hanzo tried to intercept me, but as Boss flew away too fast, they couldn''t capture me. Also, Onoki helped me escape and continued to battle with two of them.


    Boss and I went back to the battlefield to execute Onoki''s order. The battlefield is messed as always. Dead corpses and screaming were everywhere.


    I went down and started to group up roughly 100 elite Iwa Jounins secretly and started to order them around. All 100 elite shinobi didn''t believe me first. But when I showed Onoki''s Tsuchikage-hat, they all agreed to follow my orders.


    "Okay, this is Tsuchikage-sama''s order. I want all of you to go to the Northwest 5 km away and prepare for a large-scale Earth style: Mobile core jutsu combination. The scale should be enough to fit the whole Iwa shinobi force.


    When you hear Eagle cry for 3 times, I want you all to raise the ground level to at least 50m. Then your jobs are done. Tsuchikage-sama will take care of the rest."


    Obviously, the next step will be Onoki carrying the land by his one hand, showing off his power, and escape to Iwa. Just like how he did to turtle island during the fourth great ninja war. I am sure everyone already got the idea, so I didn''t explain further.


    After every 100 elite Jounins were gone to their job, I hopped on the Boss and flew high.


    5 minutes later, I cleared my voice a bit and started to shout at every Iwa shinobi on the battlefield.


    "ATTENTION, ATTENTION!! TO EVERY IWA SHINOBI. THIS IS TSUCHIKAGE-SAMA''S DIRECT ORDER. ALL IWA SHINOBI ARE TO GATHER AT TO NORTHWEST 5 KM AWAY AND WAIT THERE. DOENS''T MATTER WHETHER ENEMY CHASES YOU OR NEEDS TO TAKE A DUMP OR INJURED, YOU MUST MAKE IT THERE WITHIN 15 MINUTES.


    I REPEAT, I REPEAT. GATHER AT NORTHWEST 5 KM AWAY WITHIN 15 MINUTES."


    I then showed Onoki''s Tsuchikage hat to prove Iwa shinobi that this really is Onoki''s direct order.


    Soon massive waves of Iwa shinobi could be seen, heading towards Northwest. Seeing this Konoha, and Ame shinobi didn''t know whether they should chase or not.


    After roughly 20 minutes, I saw almost every survived Iwa shinobi has gathered to the location. I decided to start the next part of the plan. We didn''t have the luxury to wait for all Iwa shinobi.


    "Boss, do it now!" I requested Boss Eagle


    "Alright!" answering me, Boss Eagle cried 3 times in a row. Signals were sent.


    Immediately, I heard 100 Elite Jounins shouting at the same time.


    "" Earth Style: Mobile Cote Jutsu!!! ""


    Then the spacious wide ground area where survived Iwa shinobi force were standing started to move upward. It kept rising and rising until its elevation was around 100 meters tall.


    ''It seems those elite shinobi listened to me well. Now is time to clear out the few pests who managed to sneak into the area.''


    Some of Konoha and Ame shinobi were chasing our Iwa shinobi and got into the mobile core area. Before, it was our Iwa shinobi force who got trapped like a rat. But now it was those of them who got trapped.


    Well, I didn''t have to say it as our Iwa shinobi already started hunting down those who got into the area.


    I went back to Onoki to tell him the plan is successful and only need him now. Onoki, who was stalling Hanzo and Hiruzen at the same time, grinned widely after hearing my words.


    "Listen well, Hiruzen. I may have lost this time, but next time I will definitely crush Konoha. Hanzo, I will remember this debt and return it a hundred folds!!!!"


    After saying goodbye, Onoki flew away with me at dashing speed.


    We arrived at the 100m elevated land where our Iwa shinobi was on top, while Konoha and Ame shinobi were at the below, staring up until their neck gets broken.


    Onoki didn''t hesitate and used his infamous Particle style: Atomic Dismantling Jutsu and cut off elevated land in half.


    Then he used Earth Style: Light-Weight Rock jutsu to hold the top half of elevated land with his one hand.


    [A/N: this is just like how Onoki carried that massive Turtle island during the fourth World War. He is now holding a large chunk of land where most of the Iwa shinobi were on it.]


    ''I really envy Onoki''s ability to control the mass and weight. It is exceedingly useful and powerful, but not everyone can learn it. You need to born with a unique connection with Earth release to use. It is also not a bloodline ability.


    This is why the second Tsuchikage or Onoki''s kids couldn''t fly. However, I haven''t lost hope yet. Because I have a system!! It might reward me this ability as a reward in the future, hehehe.''


    I was ordered to tail him behind in case of something unexpected.


    Thus Iwagakure force has successfully escaped from the trap set by Konoha and Ame.

 Chapter 60 - End of War

    Iwa 6000 invasion force has successfully escaped from the trap set by Konoha and Ame. But it does not mean we suffered lightly. Out of 6000 shinobi, we lost around 2500 shinobi, and the other 2000 shinobi were heavily injured. If I didn''t come finding Onoki, we would have likely suffered more. We also lost all the rations and food we brought for the Konoha invasion, wasting a lot of resources and money. In the end, it does not change the fact that we lost this campaign.


    I could say this battle was one of the toughest and hardest ones I have ever faced so far. One of my squad members Gin, lost his eye while Kan was heavily wounded in his ?h?st.


    But that was not the worst. When I heard the rumor that Uncle Masashi was killed, I couldn''t believe it. It was too absurd.


    ''Uncle Masashi was strong enough to go par with Kazekage! How could he die in the battle so easily?? His defense jutsu is one of the toughest in this world! His death rumor has to be bullshit!! ''


    However, as I kept denying the rumor, more witnesses came and told us that Uncle Masashi. Later, Iwa retrieved Uncle Masashi''s corpse from Konoha, which confirmed his death entirely.


    Uncle Masashi was killed in action by Sakumo Hatake. Suddenly the guilty I made him fighting with Sakumo come rushed at me. Uncle Masashi was like the teacher to me. He taught me taijutsu and agreed on any of my requests. I felt like I indirectly killed my teacher.


    I didn''t know how to face Shuji and his family, but I still went to give them my deepest condolences. Gari and I went together to Uncle Masashi''s house, then we saw Onoki slowly going out from Uncle Masashi''s residence. Apparently, Onoki also visited Uncle Masashi''s household to give his condolence.


    This shows how much valuable Uncle Masashi was to Iwagakure. It is the highest loss we had during the war.


    "Damn, Damn, Damn, I will fuking that Hatake bastard!! I promise! I will avenge my father!!"


    Shuji was shouting about avenging his father and killing Sakumo. We tried to calm him down but was stopped by his mother.


    "Genji, Gari. Just let him blow up his stream. I believe that is the best for him currently. Now come inside. You two must have come to pay respect, right?"


    Although she lost her husband, she still smiled at us. We went inside the room and paid respect to Uncle Masashi''s picture. I couldn''t hold on to the guilt and told everything about how Uncle Masashi saved me and forced to face Sakumo to her.


    Well, Shuji''s mother didn''t seem to be angry. She instead patted my head, saying she was glad that Uncle Masashi''s sacrifice wasn''t for nothing. I just broke down there and regretted not summoning the Boss Eagle to escape. That way, Uncle Masashi didn''t have to come to save me, and he might be alive. But it''s all too late.


    We went out of the mansion, and Shuji was still screaming. But his mother finally couldn''t take it anymore. She went up to Shuji and punched on the face.


    "Shut up!! You are annoying the neighbors. If you just want to cry all day long, then just go to the forest. I am sure your dad doesn''t d?s?r? your annoying screaming at his funeral. Let him have a peaceful day, at least today.


    Also, if you are a man, don''t just stand here cry all day like a fu?k?n? girl. Get up and deal with it! Become stronger and protect me and everyone dear to you!!"


    ''Ahhh, there is a cliche line.''


    ----------------------


    In the end, Onoki is forced to sign the peace treaty with Konoha and Ame after a humiliating loss. We already lost a lot of resources and money, can''t afford to continue this reckless war.


    We had to give back Hyuga Hizashi and the previous Konoha land we took during the war to Konoha as part of the agreement. At first, I thought all those efforts to bring that Hyuga kid to Iwa all became nothing. But Onoki didn''t let me down.


    Onoki, at first, extracted all of Hizashi''s spe*ms and completely disabled him, so he won''t be a shinobi in the future. He also lied that we never had Sharingan and Byakugan in the first place. Very cruel, but a good move.


    Although we lost this ninja war, Iwa still has plenty of Shinobi left. Among the three Great villages who participated in the war, Suna had the most casualties. While Iwa and Konoha both had it small.


    -------


    I was awarded for my performance during my battle, 1 million ryo. Even dumb idiot would know who was the MVP shinobi during the last battle. If it wasn''t me, then Iwa might have lost the entire 6000 shinobi.


    My bounty also increased by 10 million ryo more. I also got a shinobi nickname: Eagle Boy. Although it is not that cool and powerful nickname, I still happy that I got one. Hope I get a cool nickname during the third ninja war where I would be already powerful as S-rank, hehe.


    The third Great Ninja war is about around 8-10 years from now. I know in the canon, the third great ninja war is won by Konoha, mostly thanks to Minato.

 Chapter 61 - Plans for powering up

    Since the second great ninja war has ended, the peace that everyone wanted has come back. Although I could hear some people still mourning for deaths, it literally was time to move on.


    Due to my good performances in the last battle of the second great ninja war, I got more well-known. Also, lots of shinobi recognized me as a proper Jounin despite my age.


    After the second great ninja war ended, I didn''t do anything for one month. I thought to myself, I needed to give myself reward and rest for surviving that hectic war.


    During the war, I had to battle against enemies literally 8 hours a day. I almost died while fighting during the Uzushiogakure invasion, had to deal with patriotic but also an idiot and delusional Kento(ex-Iwa invasion force commander) and battled with Rasa.


    Not only that, I fought and killed Dan and fought against a bunch of elite geniuses of Konoha. I ran away from the whole bunch of Konoha Anbu and clan members while carrying three innocent kids and Hizashi. I successfully escaped from Hanzo, answering the stupid Eagle test, fought with both Tsunade and Sakumo, tricked Jiraiya into retreating, and contributed heavily to Iwa force retreatment.


    ''God, now that I think about it, I freaking almost died shit tons of times. If I didn''t have a system, I might have drop-dead within the first 2 months of the war. Thanks to the various useful rewards that the System gave out, I managed to survive this chaos war safely.''


    I had a bit number of scars and the wounds on my body, but the biggest one was the big blade scar on the ?h?st, which I received on the day of the first battle. But I never tried to hide it, because it looked way cool.


    Currently, I am reviewing what I should do first in order to get stronger. I asked the System what A-rank and S-rank ninjutsu scrolls I had in its database now. Since my sword got broken by Sakumo, so I am in search of my new partners. I decided to focus on ninjutsu until I buy new matching bu??erfly swords.


    The System placed out the list of A-rank and S-rank jutsu from its database. Well, there were b?r?ly only two S-rank jutsu scrolls.


    Lightning release: Lighting Chakra Mode armor(cloak) jutsu


    Earth release: Earth Hardening jutsu


    I got the Lightning chakra mode armor(cloak) jutsu as a reward for my first battle in the war. I almost forgot that I had this jutsu scroll since it was impossible for me to learn it at that time.


    Since both jutsu are S-rank, it would probably take more than 5 years to master them for me, which was a bit too long. But I was sure I can beat up Sakumo if I had these two jutsus in my arsenal.


    I also had to develop my signature jutsu to complete my long-ass quest and get that chakra increasing pill as a reward.


    Besides those two S-rank jutsus, System has a ton of scrolls about Sealing, which most of them are likely stolen during the Uzushiogakure invasion.


    Among them were the Five Elements Seal, Five Elements Unseal, Purple Blossom seal [A/N: Jinchuriki seal I made up], and many more useful seals. There were not many sealing masters in Iwagakure, and they might come in handy when dealing with Jinchurikis.


    I also want to learn a few of Iryo(Medical) ninjutsu. I not too sure as to whether my mother prepared some sort of inheritance for me when I was in her belly. But I am sure any Iryo shinobi will teach a few tricks due to my mother''s influence.


    I can''t forget about training with the Eagles. I need to get familiar with other Eagles, including Boss, and study their fighting styles. I am not too sure if I can get their sage mode within the next great ninja war. I just don''t have time to learn all that.


    ''Oh my god, I sure have a ton of shits to learn. Becoming S-rank shinobi sure is hard. I still have a long way to go.''


    After careful thinking, this was the list I decided to master in order.


    Signature jutsu


    Chidori or Raikiri


    Lightning cloak


    Earth Hardenin armor


    Sealings


    Medical jutsu


    Sage mode


    For now, these were my aims. I was not sure if I can master all these within the next war, but I decided to try my best.


    ''Since I successfully survived the 2nd great ninja war, my next object is now to lead the Iwa to victory and let the world know my name in the 3rd great ninja war.''


    -----------------


    The previous 5 divisions of the Explosion corps are now reduced to 2 divisions, the trainee and main. Also, Gin left the explosion corps.


    Gin had lost his left eye, but for some reason, Onoki decided to transplant Byakugan to him. In return, Gin had to leave the explosion corps and serve ROCK division until the end.


    As for myself, I am planning to quit the explosion corps also. Since I became Jounin, I can earn a stable income and get a house myself. There was simply no reason for me to stay in the Explosion corps, where I most likely to get A-rank difficulty missions daily.


    I want to have a peaceful day, so I can train nonstop. I will leave Gari and Kan to look after the explosion corps. I hope Captain Ishika let me leave without making any ruckus.

 Chapter 62 - Quick poll (not a chapter)

    Hey guys, I just want a quick poll to know how I should write the next few chapters.


    Option 1: time skip right away (about 3 years) and become Jounin sensei of certain kids, we all know who they are.


    Option 2: narrate Genji''s jounin life and his missions for a couple of chapters and then time skip.


    I originally was about to do option 1 but also felt that I am too rushing.


    As for the previous chapter, I wanted to give you guys a clear direction of how Genji becomes stronger. That''s why it is short.


    Also for this volume, I see that many of you guys ?ssume that Mc will infiltrate to other great villages as a spy. But you all wrong.


    Genji won''t be a spy but will be the mastermind of spies, kinda like Jiraiya. He will either plant the spies or turn people into his spies.


    That''s about it. I will delete this poll when I upload the new chapter.

 Chapter 62 - Assigned as Jounin Sensei

    [A/N: About the last poll, you guys chose the option 1 most. I will try to add a bit of romance here and there but don''t expect much.]


    I begged Captain Ishika to let me out of Explosion corps. I know that he wants to keep a highly talented, intelligent, knowledgeable, authoritative, brave, and strong kid like me. But he really gotta consider my feeling too.


    I thought about going to Onoki to help me persuade Captain Ishika, but I decided not to. I would rather eat shit than owing him a favor. I don''t know what kind of slave work he might give me.


    After endless begging to Captain Ishika, he finally gave up, and I have become full-fledged Jounin. But as a condition to letting me out, I would sometimes do the demanding missions of explosion corps as there are only a few of them left.


    -----------(3 years passed. Boom!)-----------


    3 years have passed since the Second Great ninja war. A lot of things happened during those 3 years.


    My status as the greatest genius of Iwagaure is no more, as I turned into an ?du?t. I have to leave the title for the next generations.


    Kitsuchi and Kimiko aren''t ROCK members anymore. They left the ROCK division and became part of the regular Jounin circle. I guess Onoki deemed Kitsuchi as no longer kid. Of course, it is super hard to leave the ROCK division and most likely retire there.


    But Kitsuchi is the only son of Onoki, and that stubborn old man can bend the rules anytime, anywhere, and anyhow he wants.


    We three sometimes do the missions together, which I really don''t enjoy since I was just third-wheeling. Really annoying! I wish they break up.


    Speaking about the mission, Tsunade left the Konoha to capture me when I randomly go on for missions. In fact, I meet her quite often whenever I go on the mission. As usual, I would annoy her to death and ran away riding on an eagle. I don''t know how she knows about my mission, maybe Jiraiya''s connection, but it is starting to become my daily mission routine to encounter her.


    Also, Onoki chose 7 years old Han as a five-tailed Jinchuriki as expected and sealed the revived 5-tailed beast on him. Then, just like every Jinchuriki, villages started to give their utmost hatred to Han.


    But he didn''t get lonely or sad as Naruto went through. Because Gari, Gin, Kan, and I was there for him. Han was Tonja''s child, who sacrificed his life to save our ?ss during Konoha''s pursuit. And we all still feeling guilty over that, especially Gari.


    So although Han lost his dad, in return, he got 4 powerful big brothers with him. Besides Nagato, Konon, and Yahiko often come to play with him.


    He is living with me currently since I am the only one living independently. Since I am well known, no one dared to barge over my house to harass Han. Whenever I had a mission, I would ask either Gari or Kan to look after him.


    --


    One of the most shockest things which happened is that Gin got himself a girlfriend while doing his ROCK duty. That ?sshole broke our bro code and abandoned us.


    What''s worse is, Gin''s girlfriend is none other than Karin''s mom, the last Uzumaki survivor in Iwagakure. After completely brainwashing her, Onoki ordered Gin to escort and guard her until she gets used to life in Iwagakure.


    And that sneaky Gin bastard took this incredible opportunity and managed to seduce the rare red-haired girl. Gari looked disturbed the most when he found out Gin is in relationships with her.


    Karen (name of Karin''s mom) is now working as trainee Iryo shinobi under General Hospital. Maybe I could use her to teach me some Iryo jutsu. But that''s for later.


    [A/N: I decided to name Karin''s name as Karen. Considering how bitch Karin was, she probably inherited from her mother. Also, Karin''s mom hairstyle is kinda similar to Karen''s hair. But I am willing to fix it if you guys suggest a better name.]


    Ever since losing Uncle Masashi, Shuji trained hard and harder. He is now special-Jounin (Tokubetsu Jounin). His taijutsu is very powerful, as he mostly focused on that field since the academy. We hang out to spar our taijutsu all the time.


    I asked Shuji for good quality bu??erfly swords, as his mother owned the Weapon factory in Iwagakure. I shamelessly get weapons from him with huge discounts. I gotta say, having a friend who owned weapon factories really is convenient and comfortable.


    As for my training, it is going pretty well. Last year, I finally created my signature move and mastered Raiki with no side effects. Thus completing my long quest, I got Chakra increasing pill as a reward. With that, my chakra reserve is about Kage-level or more, muhahaha!


    I have also mastered Earth Style: Earth Hardening Jutsu, which took me about 1 year. But with this jutsu, no offense can get me readily.


    I am still halfway to master Raikage''s signature jutsu: Lighting Chakra Mode cloak. According to System, I need to shape up my whole body to a chunk of muscles to endure the pain using this jutsu. No wonder why those Raikages are all muscles.


    -------------


    Currently, I am walking with Shuji, Gari, and Kan. Our destination is the place where we all dreamed of. Since we all turned into 17, we have legally become ?du?ts.


    We are heading to the Red district, aka paradise of Iwagakure. They didn''t allow anyone under 17, but since all four of us have turned 17. it was no problem for us to enter.


    We didn''t invite Kitsuchi and Gin as those bastards are traitors. Honestly, I thought I would be popular, but it was just delusions.


    We are just planning to take a peek, only to look at paradise. We are not gonna do our deeds here. Just to take a quick look to widen our horizon.


    I thought Shuji might reject our invitation, but he got more eager than any of us. Guess he also secretly admired paradise.


    Ahead of us was a big, tall, and bright temple gate, which is the entrance to the red district. Just as we were about to enter, one ROCK member appeared and stopped me from going into paradise. Others also stopped due to sudden interruption.


    ''Ahh, who the fu?k is stopping me from entering the paradise? I will kill you!!!''


    I looked behind and realized it was Gin who stopped me.


    "Motherfucker, why did you stop me? Besides, how did you find us that we are here?" I asked Gin.


    "Hey, I can''t believe you all are leaving me out on this one. You all should know that I can find anything with this Byakugan. Anyway, Genji, Tsuchikage-sama is calling you. He wants you to go to his office right now."


    "What does that old man want now at this time? God!" I cussed Onoki.


    "I don''t know. Just go, you know how much Tsuchikage-sama can get angry if you let him wait." Gin told me.


    While spitting out saliva to show my discomfort, I reluctantly turned around and headed to Onoki''s office.


    "I will definitely kill that Onoki in future if he called me just for a half-ass reason. Ahh, my paradise!!"


    ---------


    I entered Onoki''s office and saw no one except, Onoki on the chair.


    "Why did you call me, old man?"


    I started to drop the honorific to Onoki since last year. I hanged out with Kitsuchi a lot that I begin to call Onoki as an "old man" just like Kitsuchi. At first, Onoki got a bit annoyed, but eventually, he got used to me calling him "Old man."


    "Tch, you are late! I sent Gin to find you 30 minutes ago, and what took you so long?"


    "Hey, don''t get mad at me. Gin just told me 5 minutes ago, and I came rushing here as fast as I could.


    If you want to blame, then blame on that Gin. I bet he stopped for Karen on the way."


    "Enough! I didn''t call you here to hear the stupid kid''s whining. Here take a look. I called you that."


    "Hey~ Aren''t they Nagato, Konan, and Yahiko''s documents? I took them to a sushi shop last week to celebrate their graduation. So what is the deal?"


    "Genji, you have been Jounin for almost 3 years now. Don''t you think it is time for you to become Jounin sensei and teach the young generation of Iwagakure? Therefore I decided to ?ssign you as Jounin teacher of those three."


    "What?? NO! Can I refuse? I am still young and have so many things to do. We have a lot of Jounin, and why choose me, old man?"


    "Shut your whining. I already ?ssigned you as Jounin sensei. Our Iwagakure is still short on manpower from war. We need to raise our young generations to quickly grow. Also, you are the one who took them into Iwagakure, so take responsibility until the end!"


    "But..."


    "Enough, end of discussion!!! Gather at the academy tomorrow morning to pick up your students. If you don''t come, I will personally drag your n?k?d body there." Onoki interrupted me and ended the discussion.


    I slowly walked out of the office while grudging on Onoki. It''s not like I hated teaching those three kids, but rather it was too early for me to sensei. At my age, I should be chasing around girls and find spring, not teaching kids all day long. *Sigh*


    I didn''t feel like going to Paradise anymore and went back home to rest.

 Chapter 63 - Lecturing kids

    I woke early in the morning and prepared myself to go to the Academy. I didn''t want Onoki to barge in and drag my ?ss all the way.


    I went to Han''s room to wake him up. But turns out he already woke up. Han looked at me and greeted me with a bit of a smile.


    "Good morning, Genji-nii!"


    "Hey, good morning! I am surprised you woke up early. Wash your face and come to the kitchen."


    "Are we having Ramen again? I am so sick of it. Can''t you make any different food, at least for breakfast?"


    "Shut it. You can''t cook. I can''t cook. Ramen is easy to make, and on top of that, it is super delicious. So deal with it."


    "But it is unhealthy for us! My teacher told me that we need to have a good breakfast in order to become stronger!" Han retorted me.


    "Listen here, Han. Let me tell you a story. A long time ago, there was a guy who was an orphan and very lonely. Everybody thought he is just a troublemaker and loser and didn''t hang with him.


    That guy''s dream was big and grand, to become the boss of the trash-collecting company. No one believed he would achieve this big dream, but he didn''t give up on his dream. He started as a trash collector and worked his ?ss over to the CEO''s place. 10 years later, he had so much authority that he could fu?k up other trash-collecting companies by just lifting his finger.


    Now here is a question. Do you know what that guy ate every morning, lunch, and dinner to replenish his strength and determination?


    It''s RAMEN!!! On top of that, PORK RAMEN!!!"


    Han didn''t know Naruto''s true strength came from Ramen, so I gave him a bit of a lecture. Han, who was just a kid, believed everything I said.


    "Wow, I didn''t know Ramen has such strength. I guess my teacher lied to me. Genji-nii, I want to have Ramen every day from now on."


    I nodded my head wisely and smiled a bit.


    "Good, that''s more like it. I am glad that you gained enlightenment, that Ramen is the best nutritional food there is. Now go wash your face."


    "Alright."


    Han went out of his room to wash his face. Han''s personality has changed a lot ever since we took him. When I first saw him, he had cold eyes and ready to fight back at everything. Now he changed completely. He is no longer an aloof loner and cold-looking kid anymore.


    After having Ramen, I told Han not to eat lunch. I will bring him to have lunch with Nagato and others at the Barbecue shop.


    -----------


    I arrived at the Academy at the exact time. I headed to the Teachers'' lounge and to see several Jounins waiting. I knew most of them as I worked with them together a couple of times.


    Onoki wasn''t here yet, which gave me time to interact with others.


    "So how many graduates are becoming Genins this year?" I asked.


    "30. The whole class passed the exam.


    Well, it doesn''t matter how many passed anymore. Even if kids did fail the exam, they could become Genin after taking supplementary lessons for 3 months. Tsuchikage-sama ordered to raise academy students to Genin as fast as possible." Random shinobi answered me.


    "So Genji, you came, after all. I am glad I didn''t have to go and drag your ?ss over here.


    Hmph, Alright! It seems like everyone is here. I would like to announce something first.


    Do not fail or send back any academy students you ?ssigned to. We still lack a lot of shinobi compared to other villages. We can''t afford to pick only elites right now. Does everyone understand?"


    """"Understood, sir!!""""


    Onoki then went to the academy students'' room to give congratulation and inspirational speech about the will of stone. We are allowed to pick out students after he finished.


    After Onoki finished, he left the room right away. Other jounins were quietly observing their students in order to gauge them. But I knew Yahiko, Konan, and Nagato pretty well, so I didn''t bother to inspect like others instead went straight to the room.


    I opened the room, and the whole class''s eye was on me. Nagato and others looked surprised to see me here.


    Instantly the whole class started whispering to each other.


    "Who is that? He doesn''t look much older than us."


    "He looks familiar, though."


    "He is young but jounin. I bet he become Jounin by the backdoor."


    "Well, but can he teach us anything cool?"


    "Blah blah..."


    As the sounds of whispering got louder, the homeroom teacher tapped the table to shut down everyone.


    "Be quiet, quiet, Everyone. When did I allow you to talk? Bunch of kids as ever.


    Sorry about that, Genji. Did you come here to pick your team?" Homeroom teacher Fuze-sensei asked me.


    He was also my homeroom back then. I transformed into him to steal jutsu scrolls in the Great library without fearing anything. He looked scary as always.


    I am happy that he survived the war.


    "Yes, no problem, Fuze-sensei. Alright, team 19! Stand up and follow me to the park."


    Yahiko, Konan, and Nagato were more surprised that I was their Jounin sensei. It didn''t take them to wake up from stupor and follow me.


    -------


    After Konan, Yahiko, and Nagato left, the class started to raise their hands to ask questions to Fuze.


    "Teacher, who is that person just now? Is he really Jounin?" One boy stood up and asked. Several kids nodded as they also wanted to know.


    Fuze just sighed at the ignorance of his class students. Now other Jounins who are watching would think he taught the class poorly that they don''t even know who Genji was.


    "I can''t believe you all don''t know who Genji is. He is someone who you all should look up to.


    He graduated from the Academy within just two years, while the rest of you managed in 4 years. He is regarded as the greatest genius in Iwagakure. He even got himself the highest bounty for Konoha Bingo''s book during the war.


    I will be glad if any of you can even do a tenth of that Genji did. Also, stop disrespecting Jounin, whether they are older or younger."


    Fuze-sensei quickly taught a lesson to mindless kids. And he just walked away before getting questioned more from kids.


    He didn''t want these stupid kids to say one more wrong thing when other jounins are watching. Even he valued his reputation.


    I waited at the park for roughly 5 minutes and saw three kids running towards me.


    "Bro!!! Why didn''t you tell us that you were our sensei last week?"


    Yahiko came running in the first place while shouting happily. Konan followed second, then Nagato last. They seem pretty happy that I am their sensei.


    "First of all, Yahiko. When we are training or on duty, call me sensei, alright? And also, you must learn how to keep secrets even from your friend if you had to."


    "Okay, okay, Genji-sensei," Yahiko said while smiling all over.


    It felt weird hearing someone call me ''Sensei,'' but I guess I have to get used to it.


    "Alright, I will be your Jounin-sensei until you are strong enough to go on an independent mission. You guys already know me well, so I will skip my introduction. But I want you three to tell me about yourself, your dreams, likes, etc. Even I know it all."


    "Why? Isn''t that wasting time? Instead, why don''t bro teach us som..."


    Before Yahiko say more, I punched his head lightly for punishment. Yahiko then rolled over and shouted loudly. Konan and Nagato just smiled at Yahiko''s overreaction.


    ''Yoh, this shit acts like he received Saitama''s punch from me. This shit acting way worse than Neymar.''


    I cracked my bones and told Yahiko to stand up in 2 seconds, or I will kill him. Yahiko knew I was not joking and soon stood up and apologized while smiling.


    "Sorry, Genji-sensei. Hehehe. Well, my name is Yahiko. I lived at the Orphanage with Nagato and Konan until last week and moved to an independent dorm for shinobi.


    My favorite food is a riceball, and I like my friends and brothers and sister who saved us from hell. My dream is to become Tsuchikage and make the world in peace someday."


    Yahiko''s speech was all I expected him to say. His dream to become Tsuchikage was news to me, though. It is probably either Kitsuchi or Kimiko''s doing.


    "My name is Konan. I like playing with my friends. My favorite food is eggs. My hobby is origami, and my dream is to help Yahiko achieve his dream."


    "My name is Nagato. I also like playing with friends. I hate when friends start fighting each other. My favorite food is Ramen. I would also like to help Yahiko to achieve his dream."


    Konan and Nagato''s introduction came right after. If I have to judge, then Yahiko was okay. But Konan and Nagato had big problems.


    "Alright, I think Yahiko''s intro was the best one among you. Konan, Nagato, I would be honest. To me, it seems like you two don''t have a clear idea about what you want to do in the future.


    It''s okay to help Yahiko for your friendship, but you gotta need another specific goal that is just for you. We are humans who have unlimited wants. I won''t believe shits about you two have no dreams except helping Yahiko.


    In order to become stronger, you need something that you truly want for yourself. I will give you one day.


    So think carefully, and tell me what you truly want to do, besides helping your friend to achieve their dream. Or otherwise no training for you all."


    Nagato and Konan lowered their heads and thought of what I said. Those two just depend on Yahiko too much. They follow Yahiko like lackeys.


    "Alright, since we have done our introductions, let''s wrap it up with me asking one simple question to you all," I told the kids.


    "Wait, you are not training us? That''s so not cool, Genji-sensei." Yahiko complained.


    "Are you an idiot or what? Did you not hear what I just say, Yahiko? Until Konan and Nagato find their dream, I won''t train you all.


    Also, don''t worry about falling behind with your classmates. On the first day, none of the genin teams will get training."


    "Alright, alright. Shoot your question, Genji-nii, I mean Genji-sensei." Yahiko asked brightly, probably trying to cheer up his other two teammates.


    "Here is the question. What do you think the most important thing in this world is?"


    -----------------


    [A/N: Answer is your damn life, not friends.


    Here is what I truly wanted to write in their introduction. (Omake) This is completely unrelated to the book.


    Yahiko: "I like s?xy bitches, especially Konan. She will be my bride in the future. I would like to fu?k up the whole world by destroying Konoha and Ame with one almighty push!


    My hobby is to make stupid facial expressions that do not make any shit sense. Currently, I am trying to make my mouth goes up to the forehead. While my eyes below down to the chin.


    My dream is to unify the world and become a demon king."


    Konan: "I am s?xy and hot. Don''t pretend you don''t know. I am a top waifu material and you all know it. I would like to make a realistic river with origami and blow it on someone''s ?ss.


    It will be fun to see their face saying ''OH! I fu?k?d up.''


    My dream is to become an angel and look down on every species from below."


    Nagato: "I would like to control everything from the shadow. I want everyone to know I am the real underground boss. I am in love with the tailed beast. I want to trap every one of them to status and fu?k the wold with that toy.


    I wanna have a lot of money, so I can have better diets, haircuts, and do plastic surgery. I too skinny and ugly. My dream is to be a perfect human being with a 900 IQ big brain! Zehahaha!"


    Please don''t ask me why I made this omake. I just got high, that''s it.


    Also, don''t get angry. It makes me sad to see hate comments, ahahahahaha!


    peace, everyone!]

 Chapter 64 - Lecturing Kids 2

    "Here is the question. What do you think the most important thing in this world is?"


    "Friends!"


    At my last question, Yahiko didn''t even hesitate to answer. Nagato and Konan appeared to think for minutes and agreed with Yahiko''s answer.


    I kinda knew they would answer like that. But I just shook my heads and acted as I was hugely disappointed at them.


    "Listen here, you three inexperienced noobs. I get that friends are valuable, but they are not the most important in the world.


    It''s your damn life. No matter what, prioritize your life first more than anything!! Once you are dead, then that is it. Even if you lost your hope, as long as you live, it is possible to get up and fight back.


    Friends are there to support you, make you stronger, give your life more enjoyable. They are not there to sacrifice your damn lives.


    Here is the test: Yahiko, you are facing 100 elite jounins, and Nagato got caught. You have no allies or whatsoever that would help you. What would you do?"


    "I will charge and save Nagato, of course. I am sure I can do it if I try hard. I definitely won''t abandon Nagato and flee."


    "Wrong, If anything can be done just by trying hard, then the peace would be already achieved, you idiot. I am not telling you all to abandon your friend when you are in crisis, either."


    "Then what is the answer, Genji-sensei?" Konan, who was quiet for a while, asked me.


    "If you are confident in beating all enemies and save your friend, then I don''t mind you charge ahead. But if you are not, there are still tons of methods to try and rescue your friend while not sacrificing your life, like dragging time or negotiating or bribing.


    Just don''t do anything that can result in your death quickly, such as becoming hostage instead of your friend or suicide bombing. It will only create more problems for your friend and others."


    All my new three students became quiet. They are still young and don''t know how does this cruel world work yet. I need to change their global perspective a bit, so they won''t become too crazy after losing their friend in case.


    "Alright, enough with a life lesson. Let''s go have a barbecue as a celebration. You can order as much as you want." I laughed and tried to change the mood.


    "Oh, yea? Awesome! Konan, Nagato, we are getting free food!! Let''s try our best to empty Genji-nii''s savings, hehehe." Yahiko quickly recovered from a heavy mood and got cheerful again.


    Konan and Nagato also followed Yahiko and joined laughing. I told them to go ahead as I had to go back to my house to bring Han too. I was worried that if he walked alone in the street, something might happen to him.


    ---------------


    I waited for Yahiko, Konan, and Nagato to arrive at the park in the morning. I don''t know if Konan and Nagato found their dream within one day, but as long as they don''t give me some friends'' related bullshit dream, I am okay with it.


    My three students soon arrived at the park and greeted me. I greeted them back and asked Konan and Nagato if they found their goal or dream.


    Konan and Nagato happily smiled and answered me.


    "I want to build charity orphanage all over the world. So that all the orphans and lost children still can get basic needs for food, shelter, and clothing and be happy," Konan answered happily.


    ''What the heck, if that is your dream, then you chose the wrong profession. But since Konan is also an orphan without any support, I guess being shinobi would be the only way to achieve her dream.''


    "I want to become strong and bring the old glory of my clan in Iwagakure. I will try my best to make the Uzumaki clan as number one in Iwagakure." This was Nagato''s saying.


    ''Umm, Nagato knows Iwa participated in his village destruction, right? If other people hear him, they will think our little boy Nagato is planning the coup. I don''t know how Onoki will think of this, but I think it''s okay.''


    I nodded my head in approval of their answers. Well, at least now, those two have their proper goals and won''t mindlessly follow others and do the job for them.


    "Alright, since Konan and Nagato have their own goals, you will train us right now, ya?" Yahiko asked me.


    "Well actually, not today. I will first measure each of your strengths and teach you little tricks that can give you immense strength boost during battle today. Your training and mission will start tomorrow."


    "Oh man, I have to wait again? Come on, can you just teach us some cool jutsu first?" Yahiko kept complaining. But I just ignored him.


    "How will you test out strength?" Nagato asked me. I smiled at Nagato''s questions and took a bell from my pocket.


    "I am glad you asked, Nagato. Here is the bell which I will attach to my belt. I will give you 3 hours. If you three managed to get this bell from me, then I will cancel all my today''s schedule and focus sorely to teach you 3 A-rank jutsu right away. Well, if you can do that is.


    You can do whatever you want to get the bell, including using Kunai. While you all try to get the bell, I will access your strength and mind."


    "What if we don''t get the bell in the time?" Konan asked me.


    "We will just stick with my old schedule and train tomorrow," I answered Konan.


    "Alright, I will definitely get that bell in 5 minutes. It''s going to be a piece of cake. Konan, Nagato, let''s do this." Yahiko pumped up and started shouting.


    "Yahiko, I highly doubt we can even get close to Genji-sensei with our current strength. We should retreat and come up with a strategy." Konan tried to calm Yahiko.


    "No, we have plenty of time. We will first gauge Genji nii''s power and then come up with an idea." Yahiko, while saying this, charge at me.


    I didn''t know which facts to be amazed at, Yahiko being brave and an idiot on a whole new level or how Yahiko acts similar to Naruto.


    I then shunshined in front of him. Yahiko got shocked but still attacked me. I easily dodged his attacks and flicked my finger on Yahiko''s forehead as hard as I could.


    "AHHHHHHHHHHH~~~~~~~~~~~~"


    Yahiko fu?k?d up by my finger flick and sent flying to somewhere over the rainbow. Nagato and Konan just stood still, amazed by my raw power.


    "What are you two doing? Go find and help Yahiko." I spoke to them.


    Then they woke up from stupor and ran in the direction Yahiko flew away.


    -------------------------


    (3 hours later)


    In the end, Yahiko and others couldn''t take a bell, much less touch the bell from me.


    "And times out. You three are failed to take the bell. I gave you 3 hours to take the bell from me, but you all couldn''t. I was not even serious and only used one hand. I also never went on offense.


    Despite all the advantages I gave you, you three still lost. Your weakness disgusts me!!"


    Yahiko, Konan, and Nagato all looked desperate and lowered their heads in shame. I didn''t expect they would listen to my words seriously. I guess I beat them a bit too hard.


    "Hahaha, that was just my little joke. Don''t take it to your hearts, my little students. There is no way group of Genins can beat Jounins on their first try. Don''t worry too much. I was just like you guys at your age, getting my ?ss kicked a lot.


    Alright, I have evaluated all your strength. Starting tomorrow, I will organize training schedules for each of you."


    "Hehehe, I will train hard. And someday, I will kick your ?ss, Genji-nii!! Just watch me." Yahiko got up and loudly shouted while smiling like an idiot.


    "Ya, Ya. I am looking forward to the day you challenge me.


    Before we call the day off, let me tell you the little tricks that can make you slightly stronger during battle.


    The first trick is..... Screaming!!!!"


    "Eh?"


    "What?"


    "Nani?"


    Yahiko and others'' eyes were like ''what the hell did he just say?''


    "Okay, screaming might sounds ridiculous to you all. But you gotta believe me. Screaming saved my ?ss during the war. Just trust you dear brother Sensei. Shouting out makes you stronger.


    Alright, the second trick to say one simple phrase.


    "I need to become stronger in order to protect my friends and those dear to me."


    Don''t look at me like that. I am teaching you guys a real cheat here. I have seen tons of people getting immense power right after saying this phrase. You just have to say it with your feeling. Trust me, this will give you a big power jump. Only works for one time though."


    I gave the super cheats, but these little 3 kids seem like they are doubting my word. How dare they!!


    "Genji-nii, I mean Genji-sensei. I didn''t know you could tell us such jokes with a serious expression. You wasted our time to tell that stupid tricks?" Yahiko complained to me.


    "Hey, I am dead serious. I just know it that there would be a day when you would come crying thanking to me for giving you those tricks."


    "haha, like that''s going to happen, right guys?" Yahiko just kept treated as jokes.


    I just sighed and called the day off. These kids are still way young to understand my theory and research.

 Chapter 65 - Hans birthday party

    [A/N: this chapter is more like an interlude.]


    It''s been 2 weeks since I became Jounin sensei to Yahiko, Nagato, and Konan. To be honest, it feels good to see them adoring me whenever I use cool jutsu.


    Yahiko''s nature types are fire, water, and wind, which are the natural types that I am not familiar with. So, I decided to teach Yahiko Wing Chun style, including its swords style. I thought it was time for someone else to appreciate and learn Wing Chun style. Besides, this was also System''s quest with a reward being Shadow Clone jutsu, so two birds in one stone for me.


    Nagato has a huge charka reserve, just like any Uzumaki. His chakra control is excellent compared to his age children. Not only that, he was a sensor, which I found out after System''s telling. His nature affinities are wind and lightning.


    I taught Nagato several C-rank jutsu, which he mastered in no time. To sums up, he was a genius. As expected of future Akatsuki leader. I mainly teach him ninjutsu, mostly long-range ones.


    I am planning to teach him Rasengan. I haven''t mastered it yet, but it should be easy to master as anime already showed how to master it in detail. Hehe, since Rasengan and Raikiri haven''t known, I shall become their inventor. It truly feels good to steal someone''s good work.


    As for Konan, she has the best charka control in the team, better than Nagato. She is currently learning how to control the papers more precisely.


    Later, I am planning to teach her about the seals, especially the explosion tag seal. I have been studying seals quietly alone so far and realized seals are quite similar to coding languages. As a former computer programmer, I soon got a grasp on how they work. Also, I will let her study Eagles'' wings so she can fly using papers.


    We have done several D-rank missions so far. I honestly never done D-rank missions in my life before. Explosion corps division never gives out half-assed missions like D-rank.


    I think it is almost time for them to try on C-rank or B-rank mission to get familiar with killings.


    ----------------------------------


    Yahiko, Nagato, and Konan gathered around at Nagato''s room after intense training from Genji. However, they were all dressed up neatly and readied to go out anytime.


    It was Han''s birthday. Genji and Gari hosted a celebration dinner party at the barbecue restaurant, and they are preparing themselves to go to dinner.


    "Alright, I am done. Let''s go!" Nagato told his two friends after doing the final check-up on him.


    Three friends got out of their dorm and started walking while chatting with each other. However, the usual chatterbox Yahiko didn''t talk at all for some reason. Nagato got worried and asked Yahiko.


    "Hey, Yahiko. Are you okay? You haven''t chat for a while. Is something bothering you?"


    Yahiko then looked at Nagato and smiled back.


    "Nagato, you remember how I told Genji-nii that I would beat his ?ss someday, right? When we had first team-battle against him?"


    "Yeah, he beat us pretty bad with only using one hand at that time," Nagato said.


    "Well, I highly doubt your promise would come anytime soon, Yahiko. You are currently far too weak compared to Genji-nii." Konan jumped in, stating the facts to Yahiko.


    "I know that. But I would definitely surpass Genji-nii someday, and that got me thinking. Just how strong Genji-nii is. We all know he is strong, but how specifically?


    We don''t know his strong or weak points or how big chakra reserve or what nature types he affiliated or many more."


    Konan and Nagato just looked at each other after hearing Yahiko''s problem.


    "You should relax, Yahiko. It''s not like you can beat him even if you know it now. Also, we can figure them out while training under him. Don''t be too hurry, Yahiko." Nagato just smiled and advised Yahiko.


    "But still, I at least want to know how strong he is. Is he A-rank shinobi or S-rank shinobi? hmm?"


    "Then, if you are so upset, how about we ask Gari-nii or Shuji-nii? They should at least know how strong Genji-nii is since I heard them having spar each other often. Besides, Genji-nii will be arriving late to the party to accompany Han. So it is a perfect chance to ask them." Konan kindly suggested Yahiko.


    "Yeah, yeah!! That! We should do that. Konan, you are so clever! This is why I like you... I mean, I also like Nagato. Thanks for trying to help me, hahaha."


    Silent enveloped the three. Konan and Nagato looked at awkward Yahiko. Konan was blushing a bit while Nagato looked with disgust. Finally, Yahiko couldn''t handle the awkwardness and urged them to go fast.


    [A/N: I am hinting to you guys that Genji won''t end up with Konan! Genji''s reputation will hit bottom rock if he dates his own student or under-aged girl. If Genji really wants to date Konan, she has to at least become 17 (5 years later). And there is no way our healthy young youth mc will wait that long.]


    ----------------------


    Yahiko and the other two arrived at the party. They looked around and saw almost everyone is here except Genji and Han. Three nodded to each other and commenced their plans to dig out Genji''s information.


    Their first target was Gari. They knew Gari and Genji hanged out and trained together for over almost a decade now. Those three were sure Gari had an answer to Genji''s strength.


    "Gari-nii, we have questions to ask. Would you please answer us?" Konan was the one asked.


    Gari, who was in a good mood, smiled and told them to ask anything,


    "Does Gari-nii know how strong Genji-nii is? Like can he beat A-rank shinobi?"


    "Well, Genji is indeed powerful. If I have to be honest, he can beat me without using his full power. I am not sure if he can beat all A-rank shinobi, but I know he sure can hold S-rank shinobi on his own." Gari spoke honestly about what he thought about Genji''s power.


    "Woah! Genji-nii is more powerful than you and can hold on against S-rank shinobi?? Damn, I knew Genji-nii was powerful, but not this powerful." Yahiko couldn''t help but be shocked by Genji''s power.


    Konan and Nagato patted Yahiko to console him. Gari got curious why these three would suddenly ask about Genji to him. Soon, three told about what happened and Yahiko''s worry.


    "Hahaha, so you want to beat Genji, huh? Then you gotta train 100 times harder than ever. Genji was the best-talented genius in Iwagkure, and I never saw him slack off training during the war."


    "Gari-nii. Do you believe that I can surpass Genji-nii?" Yahiko asked without any confidence.


    "To be honest, I don''t think you can beat Genji, even in the future. He created his own unique taijutsu at the age of 8 and have powerful giant summonings. And top of that, he has an explosion release. He has achieved something impossible for his generation. Even I admire him sometimes for his intelligence and power.


    But I am not telling you all these to discourage you. Know your enemy before you challenge him. Nobody knows about the future. Maybe you could become super powerful too. So don''t give up early, and keep challenging on Genji." Gari kindly spoke to Yahiko to boose his confidence back.


    Yahiko cheered up again and thanked Gari.


    ''Oh god, Yahiko is so easy to manipulate, just like Genji told me. Maybe I can use him to get close to Karen. How dare that Gin stole Karen from me! But I still haven''t given up. I have Kan and Genji''s backing.''


    While Gari was plotting to steal the Karen, a small trio went around to ask everyone, including Shuji, Kitsuchi, Kimiko, and Gin, about Genji''s power level, possible weakness, etc.


    They all gave the same or more praising answer than Gari. Genji is a powerful shinobi, taijutsu genius, strong kekkei Genkai user, A-rank shinobi who can hold ground against S-rank shinobi, cunning as a fox, well known in Iwagakure for his talents and strength, and powerful enough to be in top ten criminal records in Konohagakure. To make it worse for Yahiko, Genji is young 17 and still growing his power.


    The more Yahiko hears, the more he regretted to dig out Genji''s power level. But he still hasn''t given up and approached the final target, Karen.


    Karen is the newest to join the gang. It was around 2 years that she started to hang out with Genji''s gang. But since she works in Hospital and does regular health check-ups on everyone here, Yahiko thought she might know some weakness of Genji.


    "Hey there, Karen-nee. How are you doing? We have questions to ask..."


    "I know you are going to ask about Genji, right? You have been bothering everyone to ask about him. I was wondering when you would actually come and ask me." Karen sharply interrupted Yahiko.


    "Hahaha, as expected of Karen-nee, quick-witted as ever. So could you please tell us anything about Genji-nii, if you know?"


    "I am not too sure about that. When I first joined the group, I thought Genji was just an ordinary pervert whom you can find in any street, and Gari was the leader. But I was wrong to ?ssume like that.


    Although he acts like an idiot and pervert sometimes, whenever some sort of trouble occurs, he steps up and commands everyone to solve the problem. Everyone also relies on him heavily.


    He already established himself as the leader of the group before I joined the group. Later I realized he parti-"


    "No, no! Stop! Karen-nee, I don''t want to hear what your thoughts about Genji-nee anymore. I heard that probably 100 times already!! What I want to know is if you know anything about Genji''s power or his weakness."


    As Karen was going on, Yahiko interrupted her. Karen got pissed off for little brat to interrupt her speaking.


    "Hey, listen, you brat. In the first place, it is forbidden to give out info about someone else''s weakness or power level. Every shinobi has their secret and weakness that they don''t want others to find out. I have it, Genji has it, and I bet you have one too.


    I am sure everyone won''t tell you about Genji''s weakness, even if they know. Why? Because it''s rude and an act of betraying their friendship. Besides, you are his students. Students shouldn''t go around and ask about their master''s weakness and power level!!!"


    Karen, who got pissed easily, started to severe lecture on Yahiko and the other two for being inconsiderate and rude to Genji. Gin and others quickly came up and stopped Karen.


    They soon calmed Karen, and the trio apologized to Karen and everyone for the disturbance. Karen, who also felt bad for criticizing them, and apologized also.


    "Just now I went too far on lecturing you three. I am sorry. I kinda feel bad now that it happened. Alright, as compensation, I will give you a piece of info about Genji''s power. It is well known to other shinobi, so I guess it doesn''t count as a secret." Karen told trios.


    "Really? Karen-nee! what is it?" Yahiko, who still hasn''t learned the lesson, asked happily.


    "It''s about his chakra reserve. He has about a Kage-level charka reserve. Last year, he came to measure his chakra reserve suddenly.


    I personally measured him and confirmed that he had more chakra than me. As Uzumaki, I kinda felt humiliation for the same generation to have more chakra than me."


    Just as Karen finished, Genji and Han showed up at the party. It was honestly excellent timing to change the mood. Since they all gathered for Han''s birthday, they all quickly showed their smile and congratulated Han while giving presents.

 Chapter 66 - Pick-up Lines

    I was reading my premier magazine with my ultimate guide book called "100 pick-up lines to get girls" in the park. I was planning to do a social experiment on how accurate this book was. If this book turns out to be a scam, then I will burn down the whole magazine shop.


    I gave a break to my three students today. So I could be free all day. I am desperate to get a girl at this point. I couldn''t tell this to Kan and Gari, or they would murder me.


    Just as my one eye was memorizing the pick-up lines while the other was looking through s?xy premier magazines, someone tapped me in the back.


    "Genji-nii. I never imagined that you are into this dirty stuff. Also, you are reading it brazenly on the outside!! I knew nii had a big ball but not this ballsy. You know you are dead if Kimiko-nee or Karen-nee finds you here, right?"


    It was Yahiko who was strolling around and found me. He wanted to greet me, but it seems he was shocked by what I was reading. What an innocent kid he is. But I can''t risk him to tell either of those two demons.


    "Listen here, Yahiko. It seems like you are misunderstanding something. What I am currently doing is important research. And these books are essential for the research." I told Yahiko calmly.


    "How are these dirty book will help your research? You think I''m stupid, nii?" Yahiko just didn''t believe me at all.


    "Yahiko, your dream is to create peace and harmony among people, am I right?" I asked Yahiko.


    "Yeah, to create peace and no more wars. But what does that have to do with you reading dirty things and research?"


    "Oh, it has a big connection. What I am currently doing is research on women. In order to create peace, you need to understand humans. There are two types of gender in the world, Male and Female. Comprehend both these genders and ground them together wisely, then peace will come easily.


    Since you are male, let''s just say you know a lot about males, but what about women? Do you dare to say that you understand what they think or how they want to create a future for them?


    This is why my research on women is also important to achieving your dream, Yahiko. I suggest you should also research them." I started my bullshitting skills to fool Yahiko.


    "Oh, I understand now, nii!! I can''t believe I suspected you as a pervert. Sorry nii! From now on, I will also join your study to achieve my dreams closer!!" Yahiko has successfully fallen into my bullshit.


    "Ok, that''s the spirit. But no one can easily join my research team. I shall give you a test and see whether you pass or not.


    Memorize these pick-up lines and say it to flirt with that little girl over there. She seems to be around the same age as you. Let''s see if she blushes or not."


    "But Genji-nii. This line is just way too m?tur? for me or that girl, don''t you think?" Yahiko got embarrassed and hesitated for a bit.


    "Is this your dream all amount to? Are you going to give up because of some stupid embarrassing line??"


    "No!! Alright, watch me properly, nii. I will make her blush instantly."


    Yahiko then walked up to the girl with determination face. The girl saw Yahiko approaching to him.


    "Hello, there. You know what? I was blinded by your beauty. I''m going to need your name and address for insurance purposes."


    Yahiko smoothly spoke the pick-up line. Yahiko was so red and embarrassed to even look at the girl''s eye, but for me, I felt a whole new level of cringe. I also felt bad for Yahiko to put on this kind of situation.


    The girl bushed a bit but refused Yahiko.


    "Sorry, I appreciate your effort, but I already have a boyfriend!"


    ''Boyfriend? Boyfriend?!! Damn, this girl ruthlessly cut off Yahiko. I guess pick-up line no.37 is a failure.''


    Yahiko got panicked and eye-contacted me instinctively. His eyes were saying: ''Help me, Genji-nii. What should I do? Retreat?''


    I looked back at him to tell him my intention.


    ''No! A MAN should never retreat, Yahiko. Don''t give up on stepping closer to your dream. If you are a MAN, then go right in and steal her from her boyfriend!!!! Use Pickup lines no.42 and 45!!''


    ''EEHH?? That''s impossible, Genji-nii. Stealing her from her boyfriend? Isn''t that illegal? Besides, I don''t think I can even seduce her!!''


    ''That''s why I am telling you to use pickup lines no.42 and 45. Advance now! Don''t let that girl beat your determination to reach your dream!!''


    ''Ok, I will try, nii. Just help me out when it''s getting out of control.''


    Now all of their eye conversations happened in just a few blinks. Nobody noticed that we were conversing just now.


    Yahiko got my intentions and thumbed up a bit to show that he is a man.


    "Oh, you got a boyfriend? That is a bit sad for you. Because on a scale of 1 to 10, you are 9. And I am the 1 you need, not your boyfriend." Yahiko tried pickup line no.42.


    The girl definitely blushed hard, but at the same time, she pointed her fingers at Yahiko and started to cussing at him. I have no idea whether pickup line no.42 was working or not. She was blushing, but at the same time, mad?


    What is this, good and bad effects coming together?


    I tried asking the system, but that useless did not answer as expected.


    After cussing, the girl just turned around and walked away. But Yahiko didn''t give up and chased her. He still had one pickup line in his sleeve.


    "I told you I have a boyfriend. Stop chasing me!" The girl spoke.


    "I am following you because my parents always told me to follow my dreams." Yahiko pulled out his trump card.


    I guess both lines no.42 and 45 are fake, not working. Yahiko just came back to me dejected. I kind of felt sorry for Yahiko to put up on this ridiculous act, so I promised to teach him A-rank ninjutsu and take him to have lunch together.


    This was how Yahiko entered the world of h?nt??.


    ------------------


    (next day)


    I was called by Onoki with my Genin team. By judging the Onoki''s face, we are getting mission.


    "Tschikage-sama, Can you give us some C-rank or B-rank mission? I am sick of D-rank mission." Yahiko complained before Onoki hands out the mission.


    "So I heard that you guys are getting bored with the constant D-rank missions. Don''t worry, Yahiko. You guys have been Genin for 3 months already. This time I have prepared a B-rank mission just for your team." Onoki replied to Yahiko.


    Hearing this, Yahiko jumped out, cheering. Konan and Nagato also showed smiles as they were also starting to get sick of doing D-rank missions.


    But for me, I realized what Onoki was trying to say to me. He wants me to get my team used to killings since they are Genins now. They were no longer innocent kids.


    "So what is the mission about, old man?" I asked.


    "Not a hard one. Kill all the bandits that are disturbing the village near Sunagakure. They would regularly ask the request to Suna, but since they are asking for a higher price in this one, they came to us instead. Just do not cause any trouble in the Suna border, and they will not disturb you." Onoki explained the mission while handing me the map to travel the village.


    "You are to leave today afternoon. So be prepared."


    """Yes, Tsuchikage-sama!!!"


    -----------------------------------


    (Mizugakure)


    In the Mizukage''s office, there was Mizukage and Mei Terumi.


    "There is a small mine in the village near Sunagakure. Inside that mine, thousands of tons of chakra metal are found there according to a reliable source. Luckily those Suna bastards haven''t noticed yet.


    Since our village is the poorest, we need that mine desperately more than anyone. You can bring anyone with you if they are trusted. Your job is to make sure none of Suna or other great village shinobi to know mine existence until we empty those chakra metal. Also, protect bandits, as they will be the ones to excavate the mine."


    "Yes, Mizukage-sama!"


    "This is a secrete mission, so make sure others won''t find about you and others!"


    ---------------------------


    (Sunagakure)


    "Jukan betrayed Sunagakure and ran away from Sunagakure. We can not let Jukan alive. He knows about Suna secret way too much. Pakura, take 10 shinobi and chase him right away. He was seen heading to the small village outside the Suna border. I want him dead and do not even think of returning until you kill him."


    "Yes, Kazekage-sama. I will definitely accomplish the mission." Pakure answered.


    ------------------------


    (somewhere over the rainbow)


    "Hahaha, I see that annoying bastard finally got the mission, outside Iwagakure. On top of that, he is going along with his genin teams. It''s perfect for sweer revenge, don''t you think, Shizune?"


    Tsunade laughed after receiving the information from Jiraiya''s spy.


    "Tsunade-sama, please take care of your health. You have been drinking since morning." Shizune spoke.


    "I don''t care! Pack the stuff. This time, I am definitely going to capture that brat."


    -----------------------------


    [A/N: This won''t be a harem, I swear on that.]

 Chapter 67 - Conflicted Quest

    After receiving the mission from Onoki, I told my students to go home and be prepared to leave the village this afternoon.


    My three students went back immediately after saying farewell to Onoki. Now there were only Onoki and me in the room.


    "You know what you should do, right? Make sure they are the one to kill bandits. Only interfere when their life is in danger." Onoki told me.


    "Yea, Yea. But still, I think it''s too soon for them to know the dark side of shinobi. It''s just been a few months since they became shinobi."


    Onoki looked like he was in deep thinking after listening to me. Other fresh Genins get this kind of mission 5 or 6 months later, but for Nagato, Konan and Yahiko, they only had 3 months.


    "Genji, I will be honest with you. I was very disappointed and upset with the current genin generation in our village."


    "Was? Not anymore?"


    "Yes. Compared to your generation, where there were full of geniuses, such as you, Kitsuchi, Gari, and many more, all the after and current generations are just lacking talents.


    But then those three came and restored my hope in the current generation. For now, I can say they are the most talented kid in Iwagakure."


    "It seems like you have high expectations of those three. I guess there is no choice then."


    Since they caught Onoki''s eye, Onoki would probably do everything to toughen them from now. I feel pity for them.


    "But old man, I have one puzzle. If they are the most talented kids in Iwagakure, then why did you ?ssign them to me? Wouldn''t it better if you, Captain Ishika, or other better shinobi to take care of them?"


    Onoki quietly pulled out his drawer and passed me the document inside it. Since Onoki was giving me to read, I didn''t hesitate and skimmed it through.


    "This is ROCK''s secret observation report on those three?"


    "Yes. As you can see, it is stated that those three didn''t get along with any other kids in their classroom. In fact, some of their classmates have never interacted with those three.


    They are from outside Iwagakure. I originally wanted them to make friends in the academy to create more bonds with Iwagakure. But since it failed, rather than creating new bonds, I decided to deepen the existing bond with them and Iwagakure, in other words, you and your other 4 friends.


    Also, I thought it was time for you to be responsible as jounin too."


    Onoki just didn''t trust outsiders. I am sure this old man would believe a criminal in Iwagakure rather than an honest man from outside.


    "Alright, I get that you ?ssigned them to me. But you know that there is a certain powerful vixen who would chase me until the end of the world. What if I encounter that bitch on this mission like usual?"


    "Well, we are currently doing our best to find the spy who sends intel to her. Now we rounded up to only 5 suspects. If you encounter her on this mission, then we will definitely know who this spy is.


    So just survive this mission, then you and your students won''t confront her during the mission ever again."


    After acquiring answers to my questions, we just talked briefly more until I left his office.


    -------------------------


    "Alright, are you guys ready to depart?"


    """Yes, Genji-sensei!!!"""


    My students sure were excited to go outside Iwagakure. Yahiko was the most excited one to do the B-rank mission.


    "Did you prepare enough Kunai, Shuriken, paper bombs, food pills, and spare clothes?"


    """Yes!"""


    "What about chakra pill, emergency bandages, or smoke bombs?"


    "Yeah, we all prepared them. You worry too much, Genji-sensei." Yahiko ?ssured me.


    "Listen, there is nothing wrong with overpreparation except gains and interests. Alright, let''s go."


    Just as all of us went step outside of Iwagakure, I heard the system ring in my mind.


    System: "This is the first official shinobi mission with host and host''s three students. It is time to deepen master-student relationships.


    Quest: Please complete the mission by eradicating every bandit and find a charka metal mine in 2 weeks and protect host''s students from other villages shinobi.


    Reward: Unbreakable, indestructible, sharp chakra bu??erfly swords.


    Failure: Yahiko''s death."


    I immediately stopped for a second. My focus was entirely on failure punishment. It''s been a long time since I received the quest, and this stupid system straight up gave some serious failure punishment mission.


    ''What''s up with this abnormal quest? Rewards and failure punishment are way high and harsh.


    Can the system physically kill someone? No, it''s impossible. So it means if I fail the mission, someone will come and kill Yahiko accidentally or purposely.


    Also, other villageS shinobi? That''s plural!! And what the fu?k is charka metal mine. This is the first time I am hearing that shit. Did that fu?k?n? Onoki shrimp mess up the mission''s rank again?


    System! Can you tell me more information about this mission?''


    System: "System refuses to tell any intel. Please find out yourself."


    ''Oh, come on. You are stingy like Onoki. I really have a bad feeling about this mission, just like when Konoha and Ame ambushed us. I can''t stop the journey and cancel the mission now. I will fail the quest immediately.''


    "Guys, gather around. I have a bad feeling about this mission. But I am going to continue anyway. Just remember those two little tricks I taught you whenever you are in danger. I am being serious."


    "What?? Genji-sensei. Are you afraid of bad feelings? That''s a bit laughable." Yahiko mocked me.


    "Listen, you over-excited idiot. As experienced and strong shinobi, I trust my gut and feelings more than anything. Bad feelings don''t come randomly. They are coming because you sense danger.


    So stay as a group and don''t separate from each other. This is an order."


    Seeing my serious face, Yahiko and the other two nodded their head.


    After getting their promise, we continued our journey.


    ----------------


    3 days passed since we left Iwagakure. I didn''t summon on the eagle to get to our destination. I wanted to explain Yahiko and others outside Iwagakure territories while walking.


    I am still worried about the system''s quest. There is definitely more than just eradicating bandits.


    On the journey, Yahiko kept annoying me to teach him A-rank jutsu. Since just walking was boring, I decided to teach him and Nagato, a Rasengan.


    I learned it with ease with the system''s cannon flashbacks. I didn''t teach Rasengan to Konan. Instead, I taught how to make paper clones.


    Currently, Yahiko is still in the first stage, while Nagato already in the second stage of Rasengan. They didn''t have to worry about the ballons as I asked eagles to bring them from Iwagakure.


    As we were walking, we saw a small Dango shop ahead of us. Since Yahiko, Nagato, and Konan all were tired of training and walking, they literally begged me to rest at the shop.


    I agreed to my cute student''s request and decided to have a little snack break there.


    As we get closer, I noticed there were several customers in the shop. But Yahiko didn''t mind it and went inside first, without any care.


    When I entered the shop, Yahiko already sat at the table and ordering the food.


    ''This rude brat, I should teach him about manner when we finish the mission.''


    There was a group of hooded people with one lady at the other corner of the shop. I looked curiously at them and left beyond shocked.


    ''Woah!!! What the fu?k is she doing here? That is Mei Terumi!!! What is she doing here, far away from Kirigakure? Is she also doing her mission?


    But most importantly, damn that smoking figure. If I have to rate, that''s Some Shit Serious, aka sss-rank quality. As expected of Mei Terumi. Sexy, round, fine body.


    Okay, I am not a man if I don''t use this chance to flirt.''


    "Hey, Yahiko. You see that lady over there? Watch and learn how your Sensei here does his research." I told Yahiko.


    Yahiko looked at Mei and was also stunned by her beauty.


    "Oh my god! I never saw someone that can match her beauty!! Alright, I will definitely watch and learn from you, Genji-nii."


    "Hehehe, since we are doing research, call me professor."


    "Yes, Genji-professor!"


    Konan showed her disgusting expression at our antics. But she also looked at Mei out of curiosity and left amazed by her beauty too. Nagato wasn''t interested and looked more interested in passing the second stage of Rasengan.


    I slowly and confidently walked up to Mei and the group of people.


    "Hello, gentlemen and beautiful lady. I just want to ask, did you just come out of the oven? Because you are super hot."


    I tried pickup line no.49 right off the bat.


    -----------------------------------


    [A/N: I saw some of you suggested Samui in this gathering. Yea, I admit she will be perfect for Genji. But she is just a toddler at this timeline!!! I know you all fell head over heels for her massive racks, but try to put logic first, you perverts.]

 Chapter 68 - Telling secrets

    "Hello, gentlemen and beautiful lady. I just want to ask, did you just come out of the oven? Because you are super hot."


    For some reason, as soon as I said the pickup line, everyone just shook their head, except Yahiko. He just had no idea why everyone looks disappointed.


    Even though I knew my pickup line was lame, I still kept a straight face.


    "Where did this idiot come from?" One of the hooded men spoke at me with a deep voice.


    Although it was a deep rough voice, I instantly discerned that it was the voice of a woman. I didn''t know why that woman was pretending to have a deep man''s voice, but it sure was not a convincing act.


    I looked at Mei to see her reaction. I didn''t care much less about these pubic opinions, but rather only for this lady.


    "Oh my, You are such a gentleman. Thank you very much.


    I am very flatted by your words. My name is Tsuko, just your average rice trader. Nice to meet you, shinobi-san." Mei gave off a natural smile and introduced herself.


    Anyone will fall into her lovely smile and fully trust her words without any suspicions, but she can''t fool this big brain me.


    She clearly gave off an air that she didn''t enjoy my flirting, but she still kept a polite smile and introduced herself with a fake name and fake job.


    Since Kirigakure always kept everything in secret, she was probably confident that I wouldn''t know anything about her. Little did she know, not only I knew her real name, I even knew her damn future and her forever single status.


    ''Is she hiding her info because of her possible secret mission, or do every Kiri shinobi just lie whenever they speak to foreigners?


    There are 13 hooded men. If I add Mei, that would be 14 shinobi on a mission. This is definitely not a simple mission, that''s for sure. I just hope they aren''t related to our mission?''


    "Nice to meet you too, Mrs.Tsuko. My name is Genji, an Iwa shinobi. I am currently on a mission with my 3 students.


    If I''m not being rude, are these hooded gentlemen your bodyguards? I am just a bit surprised cause this is the first time I saw a merchant hire this many bodyguards."


    I asked Mei, but for some reason, that deep-voice hooded woman is the one to became restless and replied back instead of her.


    "What do we have to do with you? Just mind your own damn business! Also, I know you are trying to flir..."


    Before she goes anymore further, her fellow people quickly covered her mouth and reprimanded her.


    "I am very sorry about that. As Genji-san predicted, they are indeed my bodyguards. I am heading to Kenta Village to sell rice to them. But I heard that bandits around that place are very fierce and scary. Since I am just a weak woman, I hired as many bodyguards as I could." Mei answered me faithfully.


    '' Cat MountVillage? Isn''t that also our mission village? Oh god, they are definitely involved with our mission, alright.''


    "Oh my. What a coincidence. Cat Mount Village is on the way to our mission. We are planning to rest there for nights and continue our way to the mission. Maybe we could accompany each other?"


    "I am very grateful for your offer, but as a person in the line of business, I don''t trust people easily, even Shinobi! I am afraid I have to decline Genji-san''s offer. Maybe next time."


    Mei politely declined my offer without sparing any second to consider. I knew she would decline the offer, but I still wanted to ask to find out more about their mission.


    As I kept pestering Mei with more questions, annoyed Mei had no choice but to give signal others to prepare for departure to leave me as fast as she could.


    "Well, Genji-san. I wish we chat more, but it''s time for us to leave. It''s been a p???sur? meeting you and your students. Goodbye." Mei gave us farewell.


    I gave her a polite farewell speech in response. My students also waved their hands to farewell Mei and her bodyguards.


    After they are gone, I returned to my seat and started to eat Dango, which Yahiko ordered.


    "Sensei, I didn''t know you were so desperate to find a girl. Just because that merchant nee-san is very beautiful, how could you even ask to accompany her during the mission? I am a bit disappointed in you, Sensei." Konan spoke to me first.


    "Yeah. I could feel that you were being too forceful to that nee-san. You kept asking those useless questions. Hahaha." Nagato also spoke.


    "Well, I knew Genji-nii''s research was hard, but I never knew it would be this difficult. But that merchant nee-san sure was beautiful. She might be the prettiest woman I have ever seen in my life." Yahiko also blabbered.


    I stopped eating and looked carefully at my students. I didn''t expect them to be this innocent and easy to fool. As their teacher, I decided to lecture them a bit.


    "Did you three honestly think that pretty lady is a merchant? Did you all think I approached them with that pickup-line without knowing it is lame?"


    To my question, all three of my students looked at each other conflicted.


    "As your master, here is a life-saving lesson. Do not trust anyone easily!! That pretty lady said she is a merchant, but did you actually see her selling rice? Unless you are sure, don''t blindly trust anyone.


    For my information, that pretty lady is Kiri shinobi, and all her bodyguards could be said the same."


    All of my students seemed shocked at my words.


    "Are you really serious? That pretty nee-san is Kirigakure shinobi???" Yahiko asked loudly.


    I quickly hit his head to warn him. This kid is just too similar to loud-mouth Naruto.


    "Merchants are the people who always greedy about money. The number of that bodyguards is just too much. Even if there are ferocious bandits, she could just go to another place to do her business. Her story had just too many holes." I answered them logically.


    "Then, you used that lame pickup line to approach and get intel from her? But does that mean you already knew she is a Shinobi before she introduces herself?" Nagato asked me.


    "Yes, you are correct. You are still young to know this secret, but since you all are my first cute students, I don''t mind telling. That pretty lady''s real name is Mei Terumi, and she has 2 Kekkei Genkai, which are lava and boil. So don''t get into a long-range fight with her in case you fight her. She might be the next Mizukage candidate."


    "But if she is Mizukage candidate, then she should be quite famous. Why didn''t she hide her face or something, then?" Konan asked this time.


    "To answer your question, it''s because of current Mizukage has this mental problem where he literally hides everything about their village from others. He even announced a policy to isolate Kirigakure from the rest of the world just to keep all kinds of secrets in Kirigakure.


    I am sure Mei trusted this Kiriagkure secret policy too much and never thought about other village shinobi would actually know her. It was definitely a mistake on her part."


    "Wait, then how do you know all bout this, Genji-sensei?" Yahiko asked me innocently.


    I just told an S-rank secret to them, and he wants to know more? Even Onoki doesn''t know about Mei at all.


    "Now, that''s enough for secrets. The rest is for you to find out by yourself. Also, don''t tell anyone about secrets I told you here, even to that old man Tsuchikage."


    I am sure these kids won''t ever betray me. If I tell them not to disclose, they will definitely bring it to their tomb. That''s how much trust I had in them.


    ----------------------------


    "Oh my god, that Iwa shinobi was annoying as hell. How dare he try to flirt with Mei-nee with his shitty skill! Why didn''t we kill him and his pests there?"


    It was the deep-voice female who spoke out. Since there was no one around them, she talked with her real voice.


    "Shut it, Ringo!!! You almost ruined out us there. Just because you are promoted to one of seven swordsmen, don''t get too ???ky. Do you even know who that shinobi is??


    He is Genji!! Top A-rank shinobi and soon to be S-rank!!


    He even stands the same ground with Konoha''s S-rank shinobi, Tsunade. I am not too sure if we can even kill him with all of us together." one of the hooded men warned Ringo.


    "Who cares about his rank? As long as Kiba (Twin blades) is with me, then I won''t be defeated." Ringo was full of confidence.


    "No! Kinhu is right. Current you would just be butchered by him. I heard that he already has the S-rank ability. But other villages just aren''t willing to acknowledge him due to jealousy.


    Also, even if we can defeat him, Mizukage-sama told us not to make any commotion. Now is not time to fight him." Mei informed Ringo, so she won''t get too complacent. Besides, she was speaking the truth.


    "Anyway, enough about him. Focus on our mission for now."


    """"Yes, miss!!!!""""


    --------------------


    After filling our belly at the Dango shop, I ordered them to move. But rather than walking, I decided to summon Eagle. It was not because I was lazy, but since Mei and her underlings have the same destination as us. I was worried they might interfere with our mission.


    That''s why I decided to reach there first and complete our mission before Mei and others might interfere. After finishing our mission, I will see what Kiri shinobi are up to.


    I didn''t summon Boss Eagle this time. I can''t just summon him just for transportation. He is the boss of eagles, I had to give him face too. I summoned an eagle named Biller. He is a speedy eagle who has absolutely 0 attacks but faster than any other eagles.


    We quickly rode on his back and flew to Cat Mountain Village. On the way, I told Biller to fly at high altitude, so Mei and others won''t find us.


    It didn''t take long for us to reach Cat Mountain Village. But rather than a small peaceful village, what greeted us were a large number of Suna shinobi encircling it.


    "What the heck? This isn''t even part of Suna territory, and why the hell there are large platoons of Suna shinobi here? Now, how am I suppose to do our mission?"


    ----------------------------


    [A/N: Sorry for not posting lately. I had to fix my computer since it had a few problems. Also, I was searching for good pick up lines madly, but no luck at all. So spam me, that is if you have good ones. hahahaha]

 Chapter 69 - Meeting Acquaintance

    I could tell there were around 90-100 Suna shinobi in the village. Cat Mountain village isn''t in Suna territory, not it''s Iwa territory. They don''t belong to any Shinobi village''s faction nor land. It is just a small and peaceful village in a tiny nation.


    This is why I never expected the whole hunch of Suna shinobi would be here. Since they are here, no matter how much I want to deny, it''s clear as day that they will be involved in our mission no matter what.


    "Why are there so many shinobi here? Where did they come from?" Yahiko asked.


    "According to their uniform, they should be Suna shinobi," Konan answered Yahiko.


    "Cat Mountian village is close to Suna territory, but it doesn''t belong to them. Are they trying to f?r??b?? occupy it?" Nagato gave his thoughts.


    ''According to mission detail, Cat Mountain village is reported to have no natural resources. They have only a few shut-down mines due to unsafe. They rely on selling average medicine plants found in the mountain.


    With these all mediocre attributes, I don''t think Suna is interested in this village unless they found chakra metal mines. For now, I shouldn''t ?ssume things yet without evidence.''


    "Alright, here is the order. You three will stay far away from here. It will be better if you find a cave to stay there temporarily. I will leave Biller with you guys in case of an emergency."


    "What? No way! We are in the mission, but why we had to hide? Besides, how come Genji-nii can go while we have to stay?" Yahiko complained as expected.


    "Because I am your superior, and I have the strength to escape if a fight breaks out, but you three don''t. Your mission is just to eradicate bandits. It''s too early for you three to confront chunins or Jounin level shinobi."


    "Genji-sensei is right, Yahiko. He is worried about our safety. You can see there are hundreds of Suna shinobi. We will just drag down sensei if we accompany him. I am sure sensei will call us when it''s time to hunt down bandits."


    Being Yahiko''s best friend, Nagato smoothly persuaded Yahiko with ease. There were possibilities Yahiko dying during this mission, so I was not taking any risky chances here.


    I ordered Biller to lead three kids to somewhere safe in the mountain. He can contact me by his cry since I had an understanding of Eagle''s language.


    After sending off Yahiko and the other two on Biller, I slowly walked to the Cat Mountain village. 3 years have passed since the war, but there is no way Suna and Iwa''s hatred for each other will diminish during that short period. We tend to battle out each other rather than ignore it during the encounter.


    As soon as Suna shinobi saw me, the Iwa shinobi, they all got tensed and surrounded me with no time to spare. However, they weren''t foolish enough to attack me on sight. I applauded for their correct judgment, or else I would have to kill them, which makes things complicated.


    "Tell Pakura-san that there is Iwa bug here now. We will stay here and watch under him."


    ''Oh, Pakura is here too? So is she the commander of Suna units? It''s been a long time since I saw her. I wonder if she can recognize me?''


    The one seems to be the leader of a small platoon ordered. I looked around to realize there were 9 Chunin-level shinobi.


    "Hey, what''s with this tension. I don''t know why there are so many Suna shinobi here, but I am just here to do my mission. No need to be so tense. I promise I won''t interfere with whatever the business you are doing, so would you mind letting me enter the village?"


    I politely asked them with a smile. But no matter how much I wait, there was no response to my question. Suna shinobi just kept battle stances and didn''t move or answer me at all.


    ''Am I talking to robots or something? What am I suppose to do now? Wait or retreat?'' additional


    Just as I didn''t know what to do, I saw a few more Suna shinobi group, including Pakura coming here.


    ''Woah! Would you look at that beautiful lady!! In terms of face, she definitely won''t lose out to Mei or Tsunade. Definitely one of the top 10 beauties in Naruto series.''


    "Pakura-san, please come and look. We find suspicious Iwa shinobi. He said he is here for the mission, but I am not too sure."


    While I was appreciating Pakura''s beauty, the leader of the small unit reported to Pakura. As expected, Pakura was surprised to see me. Seeing Pakura''s face, Suna chunin asked her.


    "Pakura-san, do you know him?"


    "Oh, since you all are Chunins, you might not know his face well. But he is quite famous in the Jounin circle. He is the one who beat Rasa and played quite a heavy role in defeating Ebizo-san''s force during the war. Now he is one of the top Jounins in Iwagakure."


    "Wait, you mean he is that Genji? The one who beat Rasa-san? Why is high-rank like him here then?"


    "That''s what we are going to find out. So would you mind telling us why you here?" Pakura asked.


    "As I said before, I am here for a simple mission. This village has few terrible bandits, so they asked us to eradicate them. Since this is the first B-rank mission with my Genin team, I was hoping nothing would happen. But that turned out to be my just wishful thinking."


    "Oh, really? Then where is your genin team?"


    "I hid them first before coming here. I don''t know what would happen if a possible fight breaks out." I told them truthfully.


    "mission? Sunagakure is the closest to this village. If they want something, then why would they ask for help to far away Iwagakure?"


    "It''s because you damn greedy Suna is charing a lot for their service. That''s why they had to come to our village.


    Enough about me, what the hell you lot doing here?"


    Suna shinobi and Pakura got a bit annoyed after hearing my explanation.


    "Hmph, you don''t need to know that. However, I will be grateful if you abandon your mission and go back to Iwagakure. It''s just a B-rank mission after all."


    ''OK, something is definitely going around here. Also, this girl has the nerve to ask me to halt the mission? Just because she is beautiful and a bit strong and thinks she can order me around? Well, the answer is yes if she is willing to kiss me though.''


    "Pakura, we have known each other since the war. Your face has changed a lot to beauty, but your coldness is still the same as ever. You know what will happen to shinobi if they abandon their mission.


    Besides, I am here for an official mission while you all just intruded without any permission of the village whatsoever. So basically, I have more right to enter this village than you lots."


    Pakura seems to think for a bit and came out with an unfair and ridiculous suggestion.


    "Alright. Let''s do this. We will take care of bandits for you, so you can get out here now."


    "What? Then what about the payment? Will you give me the payment for this mission?"


    "Since we will be the one to kill bandits, why do we have to share the payment?" Pakura asked me like it''s a natural thing to steal missions and payments from other villages.


    ''Do you think I''m an idiot? I felt seriously offended by this bitch.''


    "I appreciate your help, but this mission is quite momentous for my Genins growth, so no thanks.


    But I promise you, I won''t interfere with your business. Just let me enter the village and have a talk with the village elder."


    "Hey, we are being nice to you. Pakura-san told you that we will even do your mission for you, so why bother staying? Get lost now, or you are going down!" The leader of the small unit spoke.


    "Oh, little pesky thing here is fearless. I really don''t want to do this, but you leave me with no choice. Either you let me pass, or I knock you all out and enter by force."


    Saying the word, I grabbed my bu??erfly swords in my back and ready to draw them for battle. Suna shinobi also did the same and went to battle stance. They were eager to jump out and butchered by me if Pakura sends her signal.


    "Put your weapon down. It won''t do us any good to battle with him. Genji, you win this one. I will let you enter, but not too long. We also have our own business here. Since you told us you won''t interfere, I hope you understand us."


    "Sure, as long as I get the information of bandits location from a village elder, I will leave. Don''t worry." I smiled at Pakura.


    With Pakura''s word, Suna shinobi no longer disturbed me. I made it my way to the head of the village house without any trouble.


    -------------------------


    "Pakura-san, why didn''t we send him away by force? Although I understand we can''t beat him. But with our advantage on the number, we can at least chase him away, no?"


    "It''s indeed possible, but if we fight him now, there would be trouble and commotions everywhere. I was afraid Jukan might escape while all of our attention is on Genji. He is definitely in this mountain or village area.


    Remember, our job is to capture traitor Jukan, not worsening our relationship with Iwagakure."


    "But what if Jukan is related to Iwagakure and Iwagakure sent Genji to help him escape from us?"


    "That''s also possible. That''s why pick 2 elite shinobi to follow him. Don''t let him escape from your sight. Also, we need to search harder to find that traitor."


    "Yes, Pakura-san."


    -----------------------


    I could someone is following me. Probably Pakura ordered a few shinobi to keep an eye on me. Well, I already expected this, so I didn''t mind at all.


    I got to the village head house and entered right away. I told them I came from Iwagakure to eliminate the bandits for the village. Thankfully, the Village head didn''t mind me intruding without any prior notice, instead welcomed me with a smile.


    He led me to his living room to discuss the mission.


    "Hello, Genji-San. Thank you for coming all the way from Iwagakure. Recently bandits have been too active around this area, and villagers are quite worried about it. I hope you can find and eliminate them as soon as you could."


    "Don''t worry, sir. Few questions. When and where was the last time bandits appear?"


    "Well, the last time we spotted bandits were at the east side of Cat Mountain 2 days ago."


    We talked quite for a long time until I decided it''s time to leave. I already got the information about bandits. But as I about to leave, the village head suddenly stopped me from going out and asked to stay for a bit.


    Then he went outside to see as to check if there is anyone eavesdropping. It kinda looked stupid since he is just an ordinary civilian it was impossible for him to spot shinobi no matter how he checks.


    It seems like he doesn''t want others to hear our next conversation, so I put on a sound seal around the room, so no shinobi could listen. I already know there are two Suna shinobi on the roof, trying to listen to our conversation. But with my sound seal, they no longer can hear us.


    The village head came back after checking outside and locked the door. If others see his weird behavior, they will think he will fu?k me or something.


    "Umm, Genji-san. Would you mind fulfilling my other quest?"


    ''The hell! The way he acts around is like he is going to **** me or something. Disgusting!!''


    "Tell me what your other quest is quick. You are giving me a creep vibe."


    "Sorry, Genji-san. Besides Bandits, I also want you to drive away Suna shinobi from this village too!"


    I was stunned to hear this old senile man impossible quest.


    "Old man, you know that there are around 100 Suna shinobi here. How in the freaking world do you seriously expect me to drive them all? Also, even if I managed to drive them away, what''s in for me?"


    The village head then showed something that took my interest greatly. It was a sack of bag, full of chakra metal ore.


    ''Wait, this village is reported not to have any natural resources such as Charka metal. Does that mean that the village head already knew about the chakra metal mine and hid from everyone?''

 Chapter 70 - Village Secrect

    "If Genji-san drives away Suna shinobi away, then I am willing to give these charka metal ores to you, sir."


    "Where did you get all these ores? I heard that this village has scarce resources, b?r?ly living off by selling herbal plants."


    I asked the village leader. Since he exposed himself, I planned to make him spill out everything he knew. rare


    "Oh, 2 years ago, our village found some hard-to-find expensive medicinal herbs at Cat Mountain. At that time, the merchant wanted to buy those herbs from us, but since he didn''t have enough money on him, he optioned to pay with chakra metal ores he had.


    That''s how our village has these chakra metal ores, but since it''s a huge bundle, we decided to keep these in my house and use it for village renovation."


    ''I gotta say this senile old man sure comes out with damn pretty good lies on the spot. But he is dealing the mighty smart me!


    What kind of merchant has chakra metal on himself? He will get robbed by other shinobi before he can even explain himself.''


    It seemed like the village head won''t planning to tell me the truth. He gave me no choice but to use the forced way. I walked around and made sure the door is locked and enhanced the sound seal.


    The village head was curious about my action but didn''t interrupt me. Just as he is about to ask me, he felt the sharp-long blade forcing on his neck.


    "He..he... What''s the meaning... of this, Genji-san?"


    The village head spoke with panic while frightened to shit.


    "Hey, old man. Do you think I am an idiot who can be tricked by your stupid ?ss shit lie? Bought Chakra metal ore, my ?ss! I already know that chakra metal mine, so you better spill everything out!!"


    I pressed my blade on his neck harder. He locked the door and told everyone in the mansion not to disturb us. I made a sound seal, so Suna shinobi won''t hear anything. So basically, he just dug his own grave.


    No matter how resolved the village head is, he still valued his life. Soon later, the village head begged for his life and spilled everything he knew.


    "During the second great shinobi war, our village economy has immensely suffered as we are closed to Suna land. Since just selling herbs can''t no longer feed our mouth, we started the mining industry despite having little hope.


    But two years ago, one of the villagers working as a miner found chakra metal inside mines in Cat Mountain. We decided to explore more and found out that bundles of chakra metal ore are in Cat mountain underground.


    I immediately saw it as an opportunity for us to survive this economic downfall. Since chakra metal ore is expensive and rare, we could sell them. Villagers agreed not to tell about this fortune, including Sunagakure. We knew they will just f?r??b?? drive us away and take the chakra metal all themselves.


    Bandits then monopolized the mine for themselves, even killing villagers if we go any near."


    I didn''t expect this whole village to already know about the existence of chakra metal and kept secret from the whole world, especially Sunagakure for almost 2 years. They sure knew how to survive.


    "I see, so you filed bandit extermination mission. But how did you exchange chakra metal ore? Does anyone aside from the village know about the mine?"


    "We sell secretly to the black market, sir. I am sure no one has discovered about our mine except bandits."


    "Then why is there a large platoon of Suna shinobi? Didn''t they come here to investigate mine f?r??b???"


    "No, sir. They currently chasing their mission-nin, apparently high-ranking to be exact. He fled to this village and escaped to the mountain. I told Suna shinobi that we only gave him food and let him rest for one night before he escaped since we didn''t know he was a fugitive. But Suna shinobi force just won''t believe our words at all.


    I am afraid at this rate, they might accidentally come across chakra metal mine information. So in a panic, I decided to borrow Iwa shinobi, Genji-san''s help to drive them away which led to current us"


    Unexpectedly, I got the intel on why Suna force is here. To release 100 shinobi to capture one single traitor, that traitor must be a big shot in Sunagakure.


    "One more question. Have you or any other villagers ever contacted with Kirigakure?"


    Mei and Kiri shinobi''s objective was clearly in this village, what else could it be other than mine. But I asked just to make sure.


    "No, sir. Why would we contact other great shinobi villages? They will just monopolize the mine themselves, leaving us with nothing. Also, that could result in international conflict.


    Even if we did contact, why would we share intel with Kirigakure, the poorest village among Great shinobi villages? I would rather choose the richest villages such as Iwagakure or Konoha, hehehe."


    ''Haiyoo, Iwagakure is one of the richest villages? I didn''t expect him to bootlick me at this timing. But I kinda feel good to hear it.''


    Since villages didn''t contact Kiri, then who else but bandits, contact Kiri. I was sure bandits already predicted villagers will hire shinobi to eliminate them. Bandits already knew they can''t win against shinobi, so they also hired Kiri shinobi to protect them


    Among the Great ninja villages, only Kirigakure accepts mission even from criminals like bandits.


    Now I started to see the overall situation and factions here.


    ''Kiri sided with bandits, while Suna here to capture the traitor while I am here to kill bandits. Now, how to make this situation benefit me? I will definitely take Mine to Iwa''s. In order to do that, I have to eliminate every Kiri shinobi and Suna shinobi, except Mei and Pakura of course. hehe.''


    After thinking for quite a while, I came up with a strategy to defeat Suna and Kiri shinobi while having Iwa control the mine. For now, I have to get out of this place and make sure my students are in a safe place or not.


    I knew he won''t tell Suna shinobi, but just to make sure I threatened the village head to shut his mouth about what happened here.


    "I did let you two follow me inside the village, but believe me, I will kill you if you keep following me outside the village. Tell Pakura that I thank her for passing me to the village. As a gift, tell her that she will have some company later on today, very suspicious one."


    After saying, I walked away. Also, those two Suna shinobi didn''t follow me. They must have realized I was serious about killing them.

 Chapter 71 - Killing Bandits

    After visiting the village, I went to find my students. There are currently 5 factors involved in this farce, Suna, Kiri, bandits, Suna-missing nin, and us with villagers. Since there are many factors, I decided to cut them down a bit, starting with bandits.


    I already got the approximate location for the bandits'' route from the village head. Next, I just have to release several eagles to find their hideout from above, one of the many perks of having eagles summons.


    Following Biller''s instruction cry, I managed to find the hiding place of Yahiko and others. It is located deep inside the mountain, a pretty safe place. Three of them were patiently waiting for my arrival.


    "Hey, brats. Did you miss me? I see you have found a nice place to hide."


    Three of them immediately turned their heads to me after hearing my voice. Even though we separate for only 2 -3 hours, it seems they were a bit afraid. Well, since it is their first time outside of Iwagakure as shinobi, I didn''t blame them.


    "Genji-sensei, you finally showed up. I thought you have forgotten about us and enjoy yourself. Did you bring anything delicious?" Yahiko asked me while running around me.


    "Why would I bring something to eat when I went there to collect intel? Stop thinking only about food. If you are hungry, then eat a food pill."


    "Tch, I bet you ate all the delicacy village provided, hmph."


    "Enough about this, get ready for battle. When my eagles find bandits'' hideout, we will go and wipe them out."


    "Finally, some action, cool!! We going to kick their ?ss, right Nagato?"


    "No, Yahiko. You three are not just going to kick their ?ss. You three gonna kill them. This is also a test for you to see if you have what it takes to be proper shinobi. Listen, KILL them!!! Don''t you dare spare or mercy any bandits!! Am I clear?"


    Hearing my words, three of them all immediately became quiet. I could see their face is full of worriedness. Killing might be too harsh for them, but since they chose the shinobi way, they can''t exactly complain.


    "I know you all are afraid to end someone else''s life, but it is your job as shinobi. You have to get used to this all the time."


    "But can we just beat them up and teach not to do ever again?" Yahiko naively asked.


    "Listen, Yahiko. Human nature does not change simply like that. If you let your enemy go, one day they will come and bite you, unless you have special talk no jutsu."


    Since the atmosphere was heavy, I tried to close the killing conversation off from them. Luckily it worked as my innocent students got curious about talk no jutsu.


    "What is talk no jutsu? Some kind of S-rank jutsu?" Nagato asked me. Yahiko and Konan also looked at me for an answer.


    "Talk no jutsu is the very powerful jutsu that can persuade your enemies into allies and increase the power of your allies. It''s literally motivational speech with powerful effects."


    "What''s that? Motivational speech? Can we turn enemies into allies, just by talking? What the heck, you must be joking!" Yahiko told me.


    "If you master this jutsu, you can persuade Kage-level shinobi or even more powerful shinobi to your side. But this jutsu is not something that you can learn. It is something you naturally possess.


    Iwagakure had that person who could use this jutsu. But unfortunately, he was ?ssassinated by enemies due to his jutsu. It''s up to you to believe me or not."


    ''Hehe, ''unfortunately'' my ?ss! I am just glad he drop dead earlier.''


    "Wow!! I didn''t know such powerful jutsu existed. How can we check if we possess such jutsu, Genji-sensei?" Konan asked me.


    Just as Konan asked, the eagles sent to search for bandits'' hideout arrived. They successfully found the bandit base. However, they couldn''t find the mine no matter how they searched. It seemed like the bandits have done well in concealing the mine location.


    "Alright enough about talk no jutsu. It''s time to head out and hunt bandits. I won''t come with you guys. It''s solely up to you three to hunt down the bandits. For the 3 months, what I taught you should be enough to deal with mere bandits. But don''t let your guard down.


    Follow the eagles to bandit base. Now go!"


    Yahiko and others seemed to be relaxed a bit and head out to kill bandits. I said I won''t follow them, but of course, that was lying.


    ''I sent eagles to search for three targets, which is bandit base, mine and finally that Suna missing-nin. According to the village head, he should be on this mountain somewhere.


    But eagles couldn''t find him after 3 hours of searching. To be able to hide from eagles'' eye, not bad!''


    I summoned 20 more regular-sized eagles.


    "I want you all to find Suna missing-nin. He should be somewhere in this mountain. Find him!! Whether he is inside the cave or under the ground, I want you all to find him.


    Biller, you also join the search. You can use ''mighty eagle''s cry'' to control all the birds to help you search for missing-nin."


    "Alright, Genji. It''s been a long time since I played hide and seek. It should be fun, hehe! Alright, all of you eagles, follow me!" Biller ordered eagles.


    I needed to find that missing-nin to sow discord between Kiri and Suna. Since their mission targets are different, this is the only way to create conflict between them. I must find that missing-nin before Pakura and Suna shinobi do.


    After sending eagles for search, I started to follow my students sneakily.


    -----------------------


    Yahiko and Nagato transformed into those guards while Konan used genjutsu on captured guards to get info about the hideout.


    After obtaining the intel from those two guards, all that left is to kill them. Three of them looked at each other with awkward eyes. They were all hesitated... NO, they were scared to kill.


    But after some time, I finally saw Nagato resolved eye and took out Kunai and slashed one of the guard''s neck, thus killing him. It didn''t even take 1 second.


    ''Oh my, I didn''t expect Nagato to be the one to kill first. Damn, where did the kind Nagato go? Man, Iwa brainwashing is no joke at all.''


    Yahiko and Konan were all stunned by sudden Nagato''s killing.


    "What are you doing, Nagato? At least tell us before you gonna kill him."


    Nagato was shaking, but he still showed his resolved his eyes to Yahiko and answered him.


    "Yahiko, we don''t have time for this. We will eventually have to kill. We are lucky that our killing targets are mere bandits. I decided to restore my clan and become a strong shinobi. I can''t drag myself just for killing!


    Yahiko, you should also resolve up. Are you just gonna let her do the killing for you?" Nagato said while indicating Konan.


    Yahiko instantly looked at Konan to see her shaking as well. As gentlemen, he can''t let the girl kill. He clenched his sword hard and slowly walked up to the other bandit.


    He hesitated for a long time, but he finally managed to strike down his sword to bandit''s head. He was shaking a lot until he decided to throw up. Nagato and Konan also couldn''t hold it and threw up. I ordered the eagle, which guided them to the base, to console them secretly.


    After rounds of vomit, they eventually got better and started to plan to kill bandits in the base.


    Yahiko and Nagato transformed into bandits and went inside the base to steal the goods and cause ruckus inside. Then, they lured the bandits to ambushed location and blow them up with explosion tags, set up by Konan.


    After the ambush, they went to kill the remaining bandits in the base. Although the feeling of kill is still new to them, they did quite well in controlling their emotion.


    While they were busy hunting down the remaining bandits, I sneakily captured the bandit head to question him later. But before that, I need to congratulate my students on stepping into the real shinobi world.


    -------------------------------


    "So what is the plan, Mei-nee?" Ringo asked Mei while walking towards the Cat Mountain Village.


    "We are just going to pretend as regular rice merchant and stay at the village for a few days. We will contact the bandit spy in the village and get the location of the bandit and mine hideout. After that, we just have to stay at the bandit base and protect them until they excavate the mine."


    "Ahh, what a boring mission. Just protect bandit? Why not kill them?"


    "Mei-san, trouble!! There is at least over 70 Suna shinobi encircled the village!!"


    "What?? But how? Did they figure it out chakra metal mine?" No one answered Ringo as they all didn''t know.


    "Calm down. We don''t know that yet. We will stick to the original plan and see if we can go in." Mei ordered.

 Chapter 72 - Capturing Missing-Nin

    "Calm down. We don''t know that yet. We will stick to the original plan and see if we can go inside the village." Mei ordered.


    "No, I highly doubt that. As we went scouting, I realized Suna seems to be searching for something in the village. They weren''t let anyone enter the village. At most, they surely won''t let us go with these numbers." One of Kiri scout spoke.


    "Then, we will split our numbers. No matter what, we have to enter the village to know the location of the bandit hideout. I will take only 3 people with me: Ringo, Kudo, and Hajo.


    The rest of you will hide in the mountain and try searching bandit base until we get back." Mei issued another quick order.


    This time, everyone agreed to Mei and split their force. 11 Kiri Shinobi immediately departed to the mountain while Mei and her 3 guards headed to the village.


    Not long after they reached close near to the village, they were stopped by Suna shinobi.


    "Stop! State your name and purpose to visit this village!"


    "Hello, Shinobi-san. My name is Tsuko. I am a rice merchant and here to sell rice in this village. These 3 people with me are my bodyguards. I heard bandits here are quite notorious."


    Mei introduced herself and others while showing off her s?xiness. Suna shinobi were stunned by her beauty and s?xiness but still managed to wake themselves up.


    "Sorry, lady. I am afraid you can not pass this area. Please go back!"


    Seeing this, Ringo got angry and shouted at Suna shinobi.


    "Hey, you first asked our names and purpose to here and telling us to go back instantly? If you gonna send us away, why bother asking my info, you fuc..."


    Of course, Ringo has been immediately put down by the other two Kiri shinobi, and Mei quickly apologized to Suna shinobi.


    "I am really sorry he is just hot-tempered. Shinobi-san, is there any way for us to enter the village? Honestly, this village is a bit isolated and far away from the next towns. We almost out of money, and this is our last batch of rice to sell."


    Mei winked at them, trying her best to persuade them to enter the village. Suna shinobi felt pity for Mei. They hesitated and decided to ask Pakura for her order.


    Not long after, Pakura arrived and got the current sad and fake situation of Mei. Two beauties in one place sure made blessings in males'' eyes.


    Pakura raised her eyebrow in suspicions. She checked all Mei''s belongings


    Mei and others thought Pakura would reject them no matter what. But unexpected for them, Pakura agreed to let them enter the village.


    "I got your situation. We Suna shinobi are not that cruel to ignore the weak merchant''s plea. But you all can stay at most 2 days and leave the village. Also, don''t interrupt our investigation, or else I have to lock you all down. Got it?" Pakura spoke to Mei.


    "Ahh... Thank you very much, shinobi-san. Yes, of course, we won''t stay there for more than 2 days. We will do our best not to get in your way, shinobi-san. Let''s go, you guys." Mei thanked Pakura and ordered others to follow her.


    But when Ringo and her two Kiri bodyguards were about to pass, they were stopped by Suna shinobi.


    "I forgot to mention, please leave the weapons here! That''s the only way we can let you pass. You can fetch them back when you leave the village." Pakura explained before Ringo fight back.


    While Mei''s bodyguards were okay, but Ringo wasn''t. Her weapon is one of seven swords of Kirigakure, Kiba. It''s one of the most precious weapons in this entire world.


    "No way! This weapon is our family heirloom. I can''t let it apart with me. Besides, I don''t trust you all, Suna shinobi!" Ringo spoke as expected.


    "Then I am afraid you can''t pass," Pakura spoke as it wasn''t none of her business.


    Mei quickly hinted Ringo to give up on her swords, so they can pass. If she sends Ringo back now, Pakura and Suna shinobi would be hella suspicious of them.


    Seeing her superior order, Ringo had no choice but to submit her weapon to Suna shinobi and follow Mei and others to the village.


    --------------


    After Mei and her bodyguards are gone, Pakura gestured her face to Suna shinobi to follow Mei.


    "They are a bit suspicious. Follow those people closely. They might be related to Jukan, that traitor."


    "Pakura-san, if they are suspicious, then why did you let them pass?"


    "Jukan has the unique ability to hide from any sensory skills, which is why I didn''t bring any sensors. Huge mistake on my part.


    It is already incredibly hard to find him as he went to hiding now. If they happen to be related to Jukan, I wanted to use them to lure Jukan from hiding."


    "Ahh, as expected of Pakura-san. I will do as you say."


    ----------------------------


    (Bandit base)


    I was very proud of my students to overcome the fear of killing. They have successfully managed to kill every bandit except the leader who I captured.


    They still had nasty feelings, but I was sure they will get used to it soon. As a reward for their bravery, I promised them to teach one forbidden jutsu when we get back to Iwagakure.


    Their tension rose up a bit after hearing my promise. Yahiko, Nagato, and Konan were all tired from battling with bandits, and the night was coming. I told them to go rest at their hiding spot.


    After sending them back, it was time for torture and interrogation. I tied up the bandit leader and started questioning him. He was quite brave at first, but after experiencing some real shit pain and torture, he soon became an obedient dog.


    "Alright, so did you ask Kirigakure for help?"


    "Yes. Please don''t kill me! I don''t want to die here!!"


    "Now, now, I will let you live if you answer every question. So how did you find out there was chakra metal mine in this mountain?"


    "It was one of the villagers. He approached us and asked to seize the chakra metal mine and split the profit between him and us. He also told us about the village head issuing the bandit extermination mission to Iwagakure. That''s how I decided to ask for Kiri''s help."


    "I see, so there was the mole in the village. I didn''t know that. So tell me who this mole is."


    "His name is Pik. According to him, he is the one who found out about chakra metal in the mountain. He secretly went for help to the village head. But the village head decided to share with everyone."


    "Ahh, I get it now. I didn''t know such a complicated scheme was going around even in this small village. So, where is the chakra metal mine? Do you also know someone Suna shinobi are searching for?"


    "It is located at the 9km northeast away from our base. I didn''t even know Suna shinobi are searching for someone. Suna''s appearance was unexpected for us too, sir. You have to believe, sir. I have told you everything I know. So please spare my life."


    "Yes, you have done splendidly. But unfortunately, you have no use for me, and I am afraid you might spill everything about me to Kiri shinobi. So DIE!!!"


    I snapped his neck and killed him instantly.


    ''What an idiot, he shouldn''t have trusted shinobi. Did he never think bout Kiri will kill him and take over the mine? Anyway, it''s better for him to die.''


    While I was getting rid of the corpse, the search eagles I sent previously returned. They seemed very tired and exhausted, but they figured out the Suna missing-nin.


    Suna missing-nin was found at northeast 8 km away, which is very close to chakra metal mine.


    Eagles also brought news about 11 unknowns. According to Biller''s description, they should be Kiri shinobi. But no beautiful woman among them, which meant they split up.


    ''Mei probably realized about Suna force and decided to split up. Hehe, all according to my plan. For now, I will leave them be. My current objective is to capture that Suna missing-nin.''


    "Alright, good job. You guys can return back now. Here is the deer I caught. You can take it." I sent Eagles back.


    -----------------------


    I arrived at the place Suna missing-nin was last seen. He shouldn''t have gone too far away.


    Suddenly I saw 5 Kunai flying at me. I quickly intercepted one Kunai and blocked 4 other Kunai using it. Suna''s missing-nin showed himself in front of me.


    I thought I managed to block his sneaky attack, but Suan missing-nin kept smiling. Soon I felt my body going numb and paralyzed with intense pain in my hand.


    "Hehehe, you fool. You thought I would just throw a few simple Kunai? They are full of poisons that can paralyze you by a simple touch. I don''t know why Iwa shinobi is here, but you chose the wrong place to come!"


    Saying the word, Missing-nin threw Wind Slasher jutsu at me. But instead of panic, it was me who smiled this time. After the wind slasher sliced me, I was turned to mud.


    "Earth clone? But when?" Missing-nin was surprised and asked.


    "From the start, you idiot. You have been fighting with my clone whole this time."


    I replied to him while showing up on the top of a tree branch.


    "Hoh! It seems you have some skills. But doesn''t matter cause you are going to die anyway."


    ''Well, he can''t see my face properly since it''s dark. If he knew me, then he would be running away like there is no tomorrow, hehe.''


    "Hahahaha, you killing me?? Many Suna shits spoke the same, and they all dropped dead. Why you idiots won''t learn the lesson from the past?"


    "I am no longer part of those Suna idiots anymore. Now die!!"


    "Unfortunately, I don''t have time to entertain you. I will end this quickly with the signature move that I have developed for so long. Be honored!"


    "Earth Style: Earth Exploding Bloody Spikes"


    "What?? Don''t tell me that''s...."


    Instantly thousands of spikes popped out of the ground.


    ----------------------


    After the fight, which I obviously won, I approached to lying missing-nin.


    "Hey, stop pretending to die. Or else I will really kill you!"


    As soon as I spoke, missing-nin got up and begged for mercy.


    "Sorry, Genji-sama. I didn''t know I was battling with infamous Iwagakure''s best genius. I was very foolish. Please spare my life."


    I wasn''t planning to kill him. He was vital to my plan. So I kept him alive.


    "Don''t worry. I won''t kill you. I know you are being chased by Suna shinobi. As long as you do what I say, I can save you and even accept you as Iwa shinobi."


    "Of course, thank you very much for sparing me!!"


    There was no way I trusted his words, so I put on the seal on his neck to keep him loyal to me. I also summoned a small eagle to keep an eye on him.


    "Alright, I want you to stay and keep a low profile until I order you. Also, there are 3 of my students in the southwest from here. Touch them, and I will make sure you won''t even have a body to bury!!!"


    "Yes, yes, yes. Got it, sir."


    After making Suna missing-nin, Jukan as my puppet, I went back.


    ''Now all the pieces are gathered except that crazy stalker. I just have to wait for her to come and fall into my trap.''

 Chapter 73 - Sowing Discord

    There was no doubt that Tsunade would come for me. This was a 100% win-rate bet. Now since I was going to create chaos both to Kiri and Suna side, I need someone to frame. Tsunade was acting on her own after leaving the Konoha, so she was perfect for my scapegoat.


    I summoned Eagles for the morning, afternoon, and night check-up on Kiri Shinobi, Missing-nin (Jukan), and Suna shinobi. Also to see if Tsunade had reached near the village or not.


    One day after I beat up Jukan (Missing-nin), eagles on the afternoon shift check reported me about Tsunade''s whereabout. It seems she tried to hide as soon as she saw eagles, but unluckily for her, Shizune wasn''t fast enough and seen by dozens of eagles.


    Trying to be sneaky but failed miserably, as usual of Tsunade. According to the eagle, she should arrive at the village in 5 hours of walking. I decided it''s was it was time to get started.


    I went to where Jukan was and told me what to do. He was extremely reluctant to do, but he had no choice as I threatened him with the seal I put on.


    "Genji-san, can I follow you to Iwagakure after doing this? Honestly, I feel not safe anymore now that Suna dispatched more than 50 shinobi to hunt me down."


    "Of course. I can make you Iwa citizenship, and you can live there without any fear of danger. So just do as I say now."


    I was kind of curious why Suna sent so many shinobi to hunt down this weakling. He only had an ordinary Jounin prowess level. Barely passable as A-rank shinobi.


    Turns out, he has a unique ability to erase his presence from any sensors, which made him an expert spy. He worked as a spy and gathered considerable info about other villages, including Suna village.


    Now, this was until some stupid cliche drama kicked in and leading to his current escape. He fell in love with the random girl in Kumogakure!!!!! He wanted to quit his shinobi life and live quietly with her.


    Very unprofessional, I had to say. Not only that, he even returned to Sunagakure to announce to them that he would end shinobi''s life!!!


    What a dumbass.


    Suna obviously didn''t allow this and decided to erase his memory in secret. Somehow this idiot managed to get this intel and ran away.


    ''I feel sorry for the girl fell in love with this idiot. But what irritates me the most is that even this idiot can get girl, but why can I??????"


    [A/N: Because I am not letting you anytime sooner, bitch!!]


    After telling him what to do, I took some of his blood and drew summoning inscriptions on empty scrolls, so I can summon him anytime.


    Before I head to Cat Mountain village, I ordered Yahiko and the other two to never run around. For some reason, I feel like Yahiko will cause trouble when I am gone.


    ---------------


    I reached the mouth of the village and stopped by the same Suna Chunin captain and its small platoon, who stopped me last time.


    "Who goes there?"


    "Hey, it''s you guys. Now that makes things much easier. Can you let me enter the village?"


    "Yesterday, you entered, no? Why did you come back again?"


    "Yesterday, I went out to exterminate bandits. Since I finished them off just now, I have come to notify the village head and receive mission rewards. So just let me pass like you did last time."


    Suna shinobi still hesitated. They didn''t know what to do. Just like last time, awkward silence enveloped us. I felt like we might drag this until the next day morning, so I suggested them.


    "Hey, since you are not so sure, why not you lead me to your leader, Pakura? I will convince her, alright?"


    Suna shinobi captain thought for a moment and agreed to my idea.


    "Alright, 10 of you stay here and keep patrol. Genji-san, follow us. If I see you trying any weird movements, then we will sound the alarm."


    "Sure, sure."


    We walked inside the village to find Pakura. But she wasn''t in her tent, so we had to go around the village and ask where she was.


    When we found her, I saw she was greeting a few people on the street. They were Mei and her 3 bodyguards!!


    "Thanks for letting us stay here, Pakura-san. Tomorrow we will leave early. Here is a small gift from us."


    "Ah, thank you for the gift, Tsuko-san. I was just doing my job."


    Pakura thanked Mei and took the gift. I was a bit shocked by her shameless.


    ''Usually, won''t people pretend to refuse first and then take? But this Suna girl just took it right away. Besides doing her job, my ?ss. This is not even Suna territory, and she is f?r??b?? managing it.''


    "By the way, since we are leaving tomorrow, can I have my bodyguards'' weapons back?" Mei asked.


    "For that matter, I am sorry that I can''t. Since you are staying here for another night, I can''t let you have it until the time you leave." Pakura answered while maintaining her smile.


    ''Wow, even despite receiving the gift, Pakura refused the request.''


    Before their conversation end, I decided to bu?? in.


    "Oh, hello there, Tsuko-san. I see that you are here, as expected."


    "Genji-san?"


    "Genji?? What? Why are you here, Genji? Tatsu, why are you with him?" Pakura asked with a bit of anger.


    Suna shinobi Captain (Tatsu) then whispered the situation to Pakura. Pakura looked at me with doubt.


    "Come on, pakura. I am just gonna report to Village head and rest here for 2 or 3 hours and will go back. Don''t look at me like that. My heart can not bear a sharp look from a beautiful lady."


    "Hmph, suit yourself. But if you do anything funny, you know the consequences."


    "Yes, mam. By the way, Tsuko-san? Where are the rest of your bodyguards? If I remember correctly, there were around 12 or 13 bodyguards? Why are there only 3 now?"


    I casually asked Mei, which caused everyone to tensed up. Exact Reactions I wanted. I pretended to ask casually, but of course, it was clearly meant to sow discord between Pakura and Mei.


    "Ahahaha... Well, along the way, we encountered fierce bandits. Although they didn''t manage to harm my resources, 10 of my bodyguards lost their life.


    What about your students, Genji-san? Why are you all alone?"


    Mei clearly panicked but managed to spew some bullshit. Impressive, but it seems she forgot about my mission.


    "Well, since there are Suna shinobi everywhere, I can''t just throw my dear students to danger, can I? So I hide them in the mountain. I am really sorry for your loss. Tsuko-san, you should have accepted my accompanying offer at that time. Did you give your bodyguard proper burial because I didn''t see any bodies along the way?"


    Seeing I keep leading to the tricky conversation, the bodyguard behind Mei showed her face and changed the subject.


    "Ahh, you bastard! How come you still have your dual swords inside the village while ours were confiscated?"


    I was a bit stunned that this deep-voiced girl was Ameyuri Ringo. I didn''t expect to be her.


    "Well, unlike you, I have some sort of connection with this Suna lady here. Also, unlike you guys'' ordinary weapons, my weapons are unique."


    I knew the reason why Pakura didn''t confiscate mine. She just didn''t want me to create a large-scale battle commotion and let her target escape whilst.


    ''So Ringo''s weapons are confiscated by Suna. System, which sword of seven swords of Mist does Ringo hold?''


    System: "It''s dual swords called Kiba. The swords have been imbued with lightning, granting enhanced cutting power in a manner similar to the high-frequency vibrations of lightning-based chakra flow. It is this capability that has resulted in these ''Kiba'' being claimed as the sharpest swords in existence."


    "Alright, ladies. I am tired of finishing the mission, so I will head to the village head first. Pakura, I am sure you don''t mind me staying for a while, right?"


    I thought it was enough for sowing the discord. I asked Pakura, and she didn''t answer. She was very focused on Mei and her bodyguards. I just took it as yes and walk away silently.


    ''Kiba, huh? Why don''t I gift it to Yahiko for his next birthday?''


    ------------------


    I arrived at the village head house and told the village head that all bandits are dead. I took out the bandit leader''s corpse head as proof.


    "Now, hand me the mission reward. Also, put a good review in the mission log."


    "Yes, yes, Genji-san. Well, how about the driving away Sun..."


    I covered the village head''s mouth quickly, telling him to be quiet. I was sure there were still Suna spies followed me here. This old idiot saying such a thing without checking around.


    I immediately used a sound seal.


    "There are Suna shinobi around here, trying to eavesdrop on us. Always look around. As for your other request, I can drive away all Suna shinobi from here within tomorrow morning. But I don''t want your sack of charka metal ore."


    "Then, what do you want, Genji-san?"


    "Here is what I want.... ..... ..... (*Whispering*)"


    After listening to my condition, the old man in front of me hesitated. But I didn''t give him time to think. He had no choice from the start but accept me.


    "You better decide to hurry up. Either Suna takes all from you or takes 10% and lets Iwa protects your village from anyone. Not only that, you can reopen numerous mines you closed previously, which increases your output."


    ''Of course, in truth, Iwa won''t take all 90%. Since Kiri also knows, Iwa just had to negotiate with them and probably let them have 20 or 30%. I will just leave that to Onoki.''


    In the end, he accepted the condition. I think I give him a pretty good deal, to be honest. I put the seal on the village head on the neck and threatened him that it would kill him if he betrays me or involve another village.


    Although it was just an empty seal that I bluffed, it was enough to put fear in him. Next, I told him what he should do to drive away Suna shinobi.


    ''Alright, time to destroy Kiri and Suna shinobi!!!''

 Chapter 74 - Conflict begins

    The village head went to find Pakura to follow my instruction. Right after that, I summoned Jukan (missing-nin) with the summoning scroll containing his blood.


    "You know what to do, right? You are currently in the house of the village head. Your targets are resting at the guesthouse west side."


    "Yes, Genji-san. I have to make Kiri shinobi involved in the hide-seek game between Suna and me, right?"


    "Just to let you know, Pakura will surely bring most of her troops and barge in there to capture you. Make sure she will have firm misunderstandings between you and Kiri. Here is the tip. The leader of Kiri shinobi is a beautiful woman called Mei Terumi. Use that intel wisely."


    "Alright, but right after Pakura barges in, how do I escape? Even with my unique skill, I can''t avoid so many eyes."


    "No, you will let them chase you and bait them to the mountain where remaining Kiri shinobi are. Thus causing Suna and Kiri to fight each other while you retreat slowly. Here is the smoke bomb so you can escape when they barge into the room. Don''t worry about Pakura. I am sure she will stay behind and battle with Kiri leader."


    "Alright, Genji-san. Just promise to keep me safe from Suna after this."


    "Yea, yea. The village head should be informing Pakura anytime soon. I will distract the Suna spies in this building, go hurry. With your unique skill, you won''t get caught before reaching the guesthouse of Kiri shinobi."


    Jukan nodded to me and was about head out.


    "One more thing! If there is any chance of you betraying me or not following my plan, remember that I can summon you anytime anywhere and chop your head off."


    I could see the sweat dripping on Jukan''s face when he heard my threatening. After warning him, I left the mansion and went out to lure Suna shinobi into the village head house.


    I made sure they watch me going out of the village clearly, so they could be great witnesses that I am not involved in the chaos that''s going to happen.


    I summoned several eagles and ordered them to supervise the Kiri shinobi in the mountain and notify me immediately if something happens.


    ''Hehehe, now I just have to wait for my pawns to deliver the result. I will just lie down somewhere and wait.''


    -------------------


    Jukan sneakily reached in front of the Guesthouse of Mei and Kiri shinobi. He knew there were Suna shinobi somewhere, spying on Kiri shinobi.


    Jukan walked up and knocked at Mei''s room. He was awed by Mei''s beauty, just like any other males, when Mei opened the door to see who it was.


    "Who might you be?"


    "Could we please talk inside? Talk in the corridor is a bit..."


    "Sorry, I don''t let strangers inside my room. Now, if that is what you have to come, then sorry."


    Mei interrupted Jukan and was about to close the door just before Jukan spoke about mine.


    "Wait a bit. I know you are Kiri shinobi and are here to find chakra metal ore. Don''t even bother trying to deny. I have come to make a deal."


    Mei sharply looked back at Jukan. She then checked around if anyone was near to eavesdrop and let Jukan in. Jukan didn''t hesitate and entered immediately.


    But as soon as Jukan entered, he was quickly pinned down by Ringo. Mei locked the door.


    "Tell me, where did you get that intel? Who told you? Now spit it!!" Ringo urged.


    But Jukan, who already expected this rough treatment, didn''t panic and just smiled a bit. Ringo tried to punch Jukan, but Jukan also dodged and escaped from her clutch.


    "Hehe, I have come to help you guys, but is this how you treat your guest?"


    "Oh, we don''t need your shitty help. Just tell told you about us!!" Ringo said.


    "Hehe, you naive idiots. If you are looking for a bandit hideout, then it''s too late. They are all dead by Iwa shinobi, who are here for a bandit extermination mission. So even if you go to their camp, you can''t find the location of mine at all."


    "Bullshit, stop lying. Mei-nee, let''s capture and torture him now." Ringo excitedly asked Mei.


    Unlike Ringo, Mei and her other bodyguards stayed quiet after hearing Jukan. They definitely heard that Genji finished his mission during Genji and Pakura''s conversation. Mei thought for a second and spoke to Jukan.


    "It seems like you know the location of mine. I don''t know how you got that intel, but even if you want to help us, we can''t trust you."


    "My name is Jukan, an ex-Suna shinobi. Currently, Suna shinobi are stationed here to capture me. But I didn''t expect Suna will send this many shinobi, So I need you all to help me escape, in return I will tell you the location of mine."


    "So it was all your damn fault that Suna shinobi are everywhere. Piece of shit, we don''t need your help. We can find it by ourselves fine. Instead, we can capture you and send you to Suna." Ringo replied back.


    "He~Try it! Then. I will tell Suna about you all."


    Jukan was obviously bluffing. He was currently stalling time for Pakura and her Suna force to come.


    "Stop it, Ringo. Jukan-san, I will trust you for now. But unless you tell how you knew about us, I am afraid our deal is off." Mei asked Jukan. She wasn''t going to let him off until she knew the answer.


    "Well..."


    Jukan had trouble answering Mei. He couldn''t just tell it was Genji. Genji didn''t give him an answer to this unexpected answer. Just as every Kiri shinobi started to show suspicion on him, the lady of lucky saved Jukan.


    *Bang* (Sound of the door, f?r??b?? opening)


    Without loud noise, the door of the room broke. Pakura and a whole bunch of Suna shinobi could be seen.


    "We finally found you, Jukan! I knew something was up with this strange merchant." Pakura spoke.


    Pakura honestly didn''t believe the village head''s words about spotting Jukan at first. But she ?ssumed there was no benefit of the village head lying at her, so she decided to check it out, in which she was very glad that she did.


    Jukan thought it was time for him to bail out now. If he couldn''t now, he wasn''t sure when.


    "Shit, Suna found us. For now, I will escape. Let''s regroup at rendezvous point D, Mei Terumi-sama. Hope you three bodyguards protect her carefully. She is the future of Kirigakure." Jukan spoke the bullshits.


    After bullshitting, he pulled out a smoke bomb and threw it to the ground. Mei and Kiri Shinobi also used this chance to escape. While Suna shinobi were all panicked and searched for Jukan, Pakura''s eyes were on Mei''s.


    "Mei Terumi-sama? Kirigakure? I didn''t know Kiri is involved with Jukan. Damn, should have looked into further."


    Due to the numbers of Suna shinobi, they quickly spotted Jukan, Mei, and Kiri shinobi after the smoke cleared. But Jukan was going the opposite direction of Mei''s.


    "Alright, listen. 10 jounins with me to chase Kiri shinobi. I will personally go and catch Kiri bastards. The remaining of all the Suna shinobi is to pursuit Jukan. We need a large number to counter his unique jutsu."


    Since Jukan referred to Mei as ''sama,'' Pakura naturally thought Mei is the mastermind and strongest. Every Suna shinobi obeyed Pakura''s decision.


    ----------------------


    I was lying down when one of the eagles came down to notify me about the chasing game between Jukan and Suna shinobi.


    Just as I expected, Pakura chase after Mei and Kiri shinobi instead of Jukan. She knew about the strength of Jukan, but she didn''t know anything about Kiri shinobi. I was sure she won''t send her underlings to people with unknown powers.


    After 5 more minutes, the second eagle came down to tell me that Jukan has successfully lured the Suna shinobi to the remaining 11 Kiri shinobi. Jukan just had said, "Kiri-shinobi senpai," then fights broke out. 11 Kiri shinobi were all confused, why Suna attacking them, but they still battled against Suna shinobi, roughly size about 70.


    Another eagle came down and reported that fights were getting intense. None of them paid attention to Junko''s slow disappearance due to his unique skill. On top of that, it was night.


    I thought it was time for me to act now. I summoned Jukan to my place with the scroll. Jukan looked confused for a second but realized he got summoned quickly.


    "Genji-san, I completed your plan flawlessly. Currently, Suna and Kiri are fighting each other to death. Now, you can vouch for me as Iwa shinobi, right?"


    "Yes, yes, you have done a great job. Your task is finished, so go back to hiding. When I go back to Iwagakure, I will summon you."


    "Alright, thank you very much, Genji-san."


    Jukan turned around and was ready to leave, but suddenly felt a blade piercing his heart. His head turned around and looked at me furiously.


    "YoU, bastard.... you promised to protect me...."


    With that as his final words, he dropped dead, by my sword piercing his heart.


    "What a naive idiot you are. There was no way I am going to accept shinobi who betrayed it''s home. Besides, your loyalty is in Kumogakure for the girl. Onoki will kill me before he kills you if I bring you.


    I also need your dead corpse as a gift to Suna."


    I searched around his body and to see if he has something useful. Then I have found his diary inside his ?h?st pocket. I could see that he recorded almost every his spy activity in this diary. Suna is probably searching for this one too.


    If I was an ordinary person, then I would take the diary with me. But I wasn''t your average joe. I asked System to take down every his diary info to its'' database. Next, left it back to the original place.


    ''Perfect crime, hehehe! Now it''s time to clear out remaining Suna shinobi and blame on Tsunade.''

 Chapter 75 - Killing Suna shinobi

    After killing Jukan, I waited for Suna and Kiri shinobi''s battle to end. I wasn''t foolish to enter and battle against both sides. Kiri shinobi are all Jounins, while most of Suna were Chunins. Despite this, I was sure Suna would emerge victorious due to their number.


    I mean, the battle is 70 VS 11. Unless Kiri were given cheat skills or the main protagonist, there was no way Kiri will wipe out the whole 70 shinobi with just a mere number of 11.


    A few moments later, the eagle scout came down and reported me about the battle situation. As I expected, all 11 Kiri shinobi are dead. Even if Suna shinobi tried to capture them alive, they all just suicided. Kiri shinobi''s loyalty was really something else.


    Now there are 42 Suna shinobi remained in the battle, frantically searching for Jukan. It was time for my grand entrance to finish them off.


    Regarding Pakura and Mei, they were still doing chasing game. According to Eagle, there weren''t going to finish it anytime soon.


    --------------------------


    "Shit, we lost 28 of our shinobi during the battle with Kiri. Damn, who knew Kiri will send 11 Jounins!! What''s worse, we lost Jukan in amid of battle!"


    "That sneaky bastard!"


    "We need 3 people to take injured ones to base, while the rest of us will keep searching for that traitor. He shouldn''t have gone too far."


    "Sounds good."


    Suna shinobi all agreed to the plan to spare few shinobi take their injured comrades while the rest will search for Jukan. But just then, they heard the unknown voice from the top of the tree.


    "Well, well, well. What brilliant plan you all got there. But it is not needed as I killed Jukan already. He is long gone already." I shunshined at the tree and spoke to them.


    "Genji from Iwa! Why are you here? What do you mean you killed Jukan?"


    "Yea! How do we know you actually killed Jukan? Give us the evidence!"


    Suna shinobi obviously doubted me and asked a series of questions.


    "Evidence? I don''t have any. But I have a way to prove to you all that he is dead. How about I kill you all here, and if you meet him at hell, that counts as proof, right?"


    I gave them the evilest smile I can make. After hearing me, Suna shinobi all understood that I came here to kill them. They weren''t just gonna down without resisting.


    "Shit, first Kiri and now Iwa?!! Damn, how dare you look down Suna shinobi!! The enemy is just one. Attack all together and kill him!" One of Suna platoon captain spoke.


    "Yes, you all better put up a good fight. After this, I will have a session with S-rank shinobi, so you all could serve as warm-ups."


    Suna shinobi crossed his arms to rampart my punch. But unfortunately, stone fist jutsu increased my punch strength to 5 times, and with lightning boost, Suna shinobi just went flying.


    "Wind Style: wind bullet jutsu!"


    Several Suna shinobi simultaneously shot out fast air bullets from their mouth.


    "Earth Style: Earth wall!"


    I blocked the wind bullets by creating my earth wall. These Suna shinobi didn''t give me any time to breathe and kept charging. I didn''t want to use my swords as I needed to blame their death on Tsunade, and she doesn''t use blades. This was also the reason I refrained from using my earth and explosion release.


    17 Suna shinobi were having taijutsu bout with me while the other 15 shinobi were pulling mid-range ninjutsu on me. The rest of Suna shinobi were injured from Kiri and slowly retreating to report to Pakura.


    I quickly stomped the ground hard to channel my charka to perform Earth style: Mud wave jutsu. Soon the surface area around me started to move akin to a wave. All taijutsu Suna shinobi lost balance and fell down or either retreated few jumps.


    I used this chance to perform jutsu before other mid-range Suna shinobi to attack me.


    "Lightning Style: Lightning devil snake bolts!"


    30 lightning bolts, shaped like snakes, flew at the group of injured Suna shinobi who were escaping from the battlefield to report Pakura. I couldn''t let them escape here, no matter what.


    Those Suna shinobi struck by lightning snakes were electrified and tied by it. Those who were heavily injured before immediately drop dead without any struggles.


    ''Damn, it''s a bit hard for me to wipe them out without using my explosion or earth release. I need to kill the annoying mid-range ninjutsu Suna shinobi first. I better finish it hurry.''


    "Earth Style: Earth clone!"


    I created 5 clones to keep taijutsu Suna shinobi busy. I performed several hand seals and concentrated lightning chakra in the hand while producing the sound of birds chirping.


    "I didn''t want to use it, but since I need to hurry, I shall let you all have quick deaths. Have a taste of this lighting, fu?kers, Raikiri!!"


    I immediately dashed and pierced all mid-rage and tied Suna shinobi''s heart consecutively. All their hearts were ripped off and had big holes in the ?h?sts. Killing them just took b?r?ly 1 minute.


    Raikiri definitely is a powerful jutsu, indeed worthy of A-rank jutsu. I gotta thanks Kakashi if I meet him in the future.


    Now I only have remaining taijutsu Suna shinobi to kill. With my 5 clones, stone fist jutsu, and mighty Wing Chun style, I managed knocked them out.


    I su?k?d their chakra dry by Earth Style Barrier: Prison Dome before I punched them to death.


    I decided it was time to go back to the village and steal Ringo''s swords, Kiba. But just as I was heading to the village, I saw Biller (eagle) flying towards me with incredible speed.


    "Genji, emergency!! Your students are in trouble. Your crazy stalker found your students!! She is currently battling no... she is toying with them right now. You need to go save now!"


    "What? Tsunade already is near? That''s faster than I predicted. And how the heck did she find Yahiko and others. I made sure they stay at the cave!!"


    "I don''t know. I was just scouting and accidentally saw them. Since I have zero attack power, I flew to you immediately."


    "Shit, those troublesome kids! Change of plans!"


    I created the earth clones and ordered them to fetch the Kiba while I rode on Biller and went on to save my students from that blondie zombie.

 Chapter 76 - Power of Flashback

    ----------------------------


    (A few hours ago)


    Genji told Yahiko and the other 2 to stay quiet and left to sow discord between Mei and Pakura. He didn''t add eagles to look after them as he needed all of the eagles to scout and update the situation.


    Yahiko, who already recovered from killing bandits, was starting to get bored. With his energy, he really couldn''t stay still. He decided to go out and explore the mountain a bit.


    "Hey, you guys, wanna explore the mountain for a bit?"


    "Genji-sensei told us not to venture anywhere. Are you going against his order, Yahiko?"


    "Come one, Konan. It''s just for stretching. We won''t go too far. Besides, Genji-nii won''t find out anything if we keep it silent."


    "But still..."


    "You know, if you two don''t want, then I will just go by myself, humph." Yahiko snorted and went out to explore the mountain.


    "Hey, Yahiko! Yahiko!" Nagato yelled to stop Yahiko. But Yahiko just didn''t listen.


    Compared to Gari or Genji, who is brutal enough to kick the ball of their friend to knock him out, Nagato and Konan were just too kind and pure. With no choice, Nagato and Konan went to chase Yahiko.


    "Hey, it''s getting late. We should head back now." Nagato told Yahiko after hours of exploring.


    "Yea, Nagato is right. If we keep going further, we might get lost. Genji-sensei might also come back. Let''s get back." Konan supported Nagato.


    Yahiko immediately agreed as soon as he heard Genji was coming back. But then, as they were about to retreat, they overheard the female voice.


    ---


    "Hurry up, Shizune. We were spotted by that bastard''s eagle. He might run away anytime."


    "But Tsunade-sama, we have been running for hours straight. I''m just 9 years old. Let me get a break."


    To Shizune''s begging, Tsunade couldn''t just heartlessly reject it. Tsunade paused for a moment and suddenly looked around the area.


    "Tch, alright. You are right, Shizune. I was too harsh on you. Let''s have a rest then. While you are resting, I will clean out some rats who like to eavesdrop!!"


    Tsunade then picked up the rocks and threw at the Yahiko and the other 2''s side. Yahiko, Konan, and Nagato managed to dodge the rocks but were forced to show themselves at Tsunade.


    "Woah, pretty lady. No need to be aggressive. We were just exploring the mountain and heard the voice. Well, curiosity got better of us." Nagato calmly explained the situation to Tsunade.


    But for Tsunade, when she saw the three of them, her grin was threatening to split her face. Next, she started to laugh like a mad scientist.


    "UheheheheheheeBwhahahahahahahahahaMwhahahahaha~~~"


    Yahiko just looked at Tsunade strangely and asked Shizune.


    "Hey, did she hit her head? Is she mental? Just break out from the mental hospital?"


    Shizune couldn''t reply to Yahiko as she also thought Tsunade suddenly became crazy. She had no idea why Tsunade was laughing.


    Then Tsunade suddenly stopped laughing and questioned Yahiko.


    "You three are wearing Iwa headbands, so I already you three are Genin team. Can you do me a favor and tell your Sensei name?"


    Konan and Nagato tried to sop Yahiko, but it was too late.


    "Our Sensei? Sure. He is called Genji!" Yahiko spoke without any thoughts.


    "Yahiko! What are you doing? Didn''t our Sensei tell us not to trust any outsiders a few days ago?" Konan quickly warned Yahiko.


    But it was too late as Tsunade confirmed these three were students of Genji. Thinking she is going to have her revenge finally, she couldn''t stop laughing.


    "Hey, miss. Do you know our Sensei?" Nagato asked carefully.


    "Oh, definitely. I know your Sensei. We have known each other for 5 years now. How could I forget him so easily when he killed my lover and brother!!!!!!"


    Tsunade then launched the straight jab at Nagato. She was too fast for three genins, and Nagato went flying. Konan immediately went to Nagato to save him while Yahiko was too shocked to move. Shizune immediately ran away far away to avoid.


    "What the hell are you doing, bitch!!! We didn''t hurt you!! How dare you hurt my friend!!"


    "As long as I capture you 3 shits, I am sure that Genji bastard will come to me himself. Then, I will kill him to fulfill my revenge."


    Yahiko angrily took out his two swords and went for Wing Chun sword style.


    "Bitch, I will kill you now!"


    "Oh, that style. So you really are Genji''s student. Hehehe."


    Yahiko could open his eyes but couldn''t move at all. He never faced such a terrifying opponent in his life. Just one punch was enough to put him down. There he realized how weak he was and regretted how deeply for nor listening to Genji.


    ''If only I hadn''t suggested going out, none of this would happen. I am sorry, Nagato, Konan. I made all of us die! Damn it, I am so weak!!


    Suddenly Yahiko started to get a series of the flashback. Yes, Yahiko has finally activated the condition of anime flashback power!!!


    He eventually remembered the 2 tricks taught by Genji. Since he is already messed shit, he decided to try it out no matter how idiotic they were.


    With his will and SCREAM, he managed to stand up from Tsunade''s blow slowly. He slowly breathed in and shouted at Tsunade.


    "Hey, bitch!! Where the fu?k are you going? I am still standing. Your punch tickles me!"


    Tsunade got surprised that Yahiko managed to stand up after receiving her punch. But that was it.


    "Oh, so you stood up? Seems like I underestimated you a bit. But it doesn''t matter as you will go down again."


    But Yahiko just ignored her and spoke the magic words.


    "I need to become stronger to protect my friends and those dear to me!!!! Come on, give me strength!!"


    Yahiko could feel the power of friendship entering his body. Without a second thought, Yahiko coated the wind chakra on his swords and channeled lightning on his legs. He then stomped the smoke bomb.


    "Wind Style: Wind slash!"


    Yahiko created wind slash from his swords while charging out from the smoke. Tsunade just jumped to dodge the Yahiko''s wind slash.


    Yahiko then immediately struck Tsunade from her side, but Tsunade dodged and counterpunched Yahiko.


    She thought it was over until she saw Yahiko managed to block her punch with his swords. Yahiko then kept attacking Tsunade consecutively.


    Yahiko somehow managed to block Tsunade''s further 3 attacks successively. But no matter how he tried, Tsunade and his gap were too large.


    Tsunade''s next punch finally connected to Yahiko''s face, or that''s what she thought until Yahiko turned into a log. Just as Tsunade was about to praise Yahiko, she saw there was an explosion paper attached to the log.


    She immediately jumped out of its range. Just as she thought she was safe, the surface below her cracked, and Yahiko jumped out of it.


    Yahiko didn''t hesitate and slashed towards Tsunade. Although Tsunade managed to evade, Yahiko managed to slice a few bits of her hair. This time, Tsunade was really surprised.


    "Oh my! I really did underestimate you. You really are Genji''s student. If you are from Konoha, then you are definitely considered as Genius. But that''s all what if. Enough playing around. Since you are Iwa shinobi and Genji''s student, I will end your life here. Just blame your worse fate!"


    This time Tsunade moved with insane speed for Yahiko and punched him with all her 50%. Yahiko took a direct hit and broke all his ribs. He instantly coughed blood without stopping.


    Tsunade stood in front of Yahiko and ready to give him one final death punch.


    "Farewell, this will be my first revenge on Genji. Blame your damn fate for having rotten Sensei."


    But Yahiko didn''t back out and screamed at Tsunade.


    "Fuck you, Crazy bitch!! I will definitely become a ghost and haunt your life forever!!"


    "Sorry, my life is already haunted. Now die!"


    Tsunade struck the last punch on Yahiko.


    *BAAAANNNNGGGG*


    Yahiko thought he was dead, but he didn''t feel any pain from her attack. When he opened his eye, he saw familiar back in front of him.


    "So how was it, Yahiko. I told you those 2 tricks will definitely help you, didn''t I? You did a great job of stalling her until now. Don''t worry about Konan and Nagato. Just rest and leave everything to me now." Genji smiled at Yahiko.


    Yahiko shed tears of happiness and relief. The next moment, he immediately fell unconscious.


    "So you finally showed up, huh? Genji!!"


    "It seems like you have done a great deal of beating my students, you crazy bitch. Usually, I would avoid fighting you, but this time, it seems like I have to give you some proper teaching."


    Genji pushed Tsunade away and summoned eagles to take Yahiko to a safe place.


    "Now, I am ready. Come at me, you bitch!"


    --------------------------------------


    [A/N: Next chapter will only be about Tsunade vs Genji]

 Chapter 77 - Genji vs Tsunade

    "Finally!! I have been waiting for this moment all my life. I get to revenge my brother and Dan!!"


    "Hey, didn''t you say that last time we met? This is like the 20th times you spoke that phrase, and I am still alive kicking. How about you change your phrase next time?"


    "Shut it! I will definitely kill you this time!"


    "You also said that. Seriously, I advise you to speak something else, instead of spouting the same bullshits over and over again. Be creative, Tsunade! "


    "It seems your ability to annoying people is still top-notch. Now die!!"


    Tsunade threw punches at me while screaming. I gracefully dodged and retreated a few steps, several steps more, and slowly turned it to running away.


    "HOW DARE YOU RUN AWAY!!!"


    Tsunade realized I wasn''t keeping distance for battle, rather I was running away from her. Without thinking, She started to chase me.


    ''For now, I can''t fight her here. I will lure her there, hehe.''


    Our little game of tag was getting close to 20 minutes. At this moment, Tsunade couldn''t take anymore and started to use lightning chakra to speed up.


    I first thought Tsunade was not the master of nature releases. But during our last encounter, she surprised me by using lightning release jutsus to suppress my lightning.


    ''According to System, this bitch not only had talents for nature releases, but she can also fully utilize four nature releases. Tsunade was a master of Fire, Water, Earth, and Lightning elemental ninjutsu.''


    She used lightning chakra on her legs and boosted her speed to catch me. She seemed to get close to me until I also used my lightning chakra to increase my pace.


    Not long after, I finally lured her to the place I wanted. It was the place where I fought the Suna shinobi. There still were Kiri and Suna shinobi''s corpse all over the place.


    "Alright, Tsunade! Let''s get our battle started."


    "What? How come there are Suna and Kiri corpses here? Judging from corpses, they died not too long ago. Genji, did you kill all of them?"


    "Haha, what do you mean? I wouldn''t leave any traces if I killed them. Besides, when did you worry about other village shinobi? Enough with your terrible depressed acting!"


    Tsunade glared at me angrily, but she seemed to agree with my response. She knew I am not the type to leave any evidence. Also, their corpses were not any of her business.


    "AHH! I will stitch that annoying mouth of yours after I beat you!!"


    She came at me with all her mighty punches. Instead of dodging her attack, I bent over the ground. I grabbed the lying corpse and used it as a meatshield against Tsunade''s blow.


    Although I used meatshield, Tsunade''s punch sure was powerful to impact me a bit.


    "You think that meatshield is going to protect you from my fury punch?? Haha, let''s see how long it can last!"


    ''This idiot fully knows I can dodge that punch, but I still chose to use the corpse as a shield, and she suspects nothing??? Revenge sure made people blind as hell!!''


    I threw several Kunai at her and pretended to move forward at her. Seeing this, She raised her leg to axe kick me. I immediately used substitution jutsu to switch place with a nearby Suna corpse.


    ''Hehe, yes. Keep leaving your marks on Suna shinobi. You will be framed without knowing how you did.''


    "Earth Style: Stone Fist!"


    I encased my arms with rocks and charged at Tsunade. She didn''t back down on my attack and threw her punch. Our punches clashed with a loud sound, but we didn''t bother and kept exchanging our kicks and punches.


    Although my strength was multiplied 10 times, I was dealing with a physical prowess monster. Therefore I relied on my superior speed and forced her attacks to land on corpses.


    This continues for a while until Tsunade finally frustrated for not hitting me once. She continuously threw her punches and kicks for 20 minutes, only to miss.


    "AHHHH!!!"


    She thrust her punch to the ground with all her strength to relieve her stress. Instantly 50m around her landscape were destroyed into the crater.


    ''Alright, it''s time to pull out from here. This crazy girl might even destroy all the corpse to ashes.''


    I deemed all those marks and crater was enough to prove Tsunade''s horrifying massacre on Suna shinobi.


    I immediately left the area, and Tsunade promptly followed me. After another 10 minutes of her yelling at me from behind, I thought it was time to fight her seriously.


    I stopped and pulled out my bu??erfly swords from the sheath on my back. Seeing me holding the swords, Tsunade knew I was dead serious about fighting her this time. She couldn''t help smiling and charge immediately.


    I charged lightning to my swords and dashed at her too. I dodged her kick first and spun my blades around to cut her face. She retreated a few steps to avoid and immediately jumped front to give a dropkick.


    Even though she missed her dropkick, the surface started to vibrate due to her immense strength. I quickly strike one sword to the ground firmly and jumped on top of it, not to lose balance.


    I used another sword to strike down on Tsunade from the top.


    But Tsunade didn''t damn give a shit about my sword and just threw a fist at it. Sword clashes against Fist, only Tsuande can survive with her hand attached to her arm due to her medical healing.


    Side-kick...Jump...Slice.....Punch...Pierce....Drop Kick...Substitution.....Shunshin...Block.....Strike.....


    Tsunade had several small slash marks on her while I also had bruises on me even though I was blocking her attacks with swords. Our Taijutsu was pretty much even until my blades ultimately gave in and broken by Tsunade''s brute force.


    ''Ohh, shit. My swords got broken again. This is why I don''t want to fight Tsunade. I am sorry precious swords!''


    Without my swords, I knew I wasn''t matched with Tsunade in pure Taijutsu. I decided to gain distance and shoot her with ninjutsu.


    "Earth Style: Mudslide"


    Four large spikes came out from different directions to pierce Tsunade. But Tsunade immediately used her Earth wall to block them.


    "Earth Style: Stone Impending Waves"


    I touched the ground, and a series of spiky rocks popping out in front of each other, coming at Tsunade.


    "Water Style: Water Impending Waves"


    Tsunade delivered a similar jutsu as mine but in the Water version. Both jutsu clashed and canceled each other. This time, it was Tsunade who launched offense at me.


    "Fire stye: Fire dragon jutsu"


    She was charging at me while breathing gigantic fire dragons from her mouth. I knew she was using fire jutsu as a decoy, and she will launch her punch when I dodge it.


    "Earth Style: Great Stone Wall"


    I created a more robust and better version of the Earth wall. It managed to blocked fire dragons, but it only managed to withstand Tsunade''s punch for 3 seconds and collapsed. However, it was enough time for me to escape and perform jutsu.


    "Lightning Style: Lightning Snake Devil Bolts"


    I shot out 30 snake bolts at her. She kicked the ground to pull out a large chunk of land to use it as a shield.


    "Lightning Style: Lightning Dragon"


    Tsunade performed a powerful offensive jutsu. So I used the same jutsu to cancel it out.


    "Lightning Style: Lightning Dragon"


    I didn''t waste any time and used Earth Style: Moutain Sandwich jutsu on her. The two enormous rock formations that close in on the Tsunade from opposing sides with tremendous force, smashing everything caught in between.


    Seeing Tsuande was being squeezed between the rocks, I used explosion release to blow them up. Of course, I knew Tsunade was alive with her miraculous healing, but at least she used a large amount of chakra.


    After healing, Tsunade didn''t come to attack me. Instead, she stared at me intensely. She looked like she was determinant. She bit her thumbs and did similar hand signs.


    I instantly it was Summoning jutsu. I didn''t lose out and also bit my thumbs to summon Boss Eagle.


    "Summoning Jutsu!!"


    "Summoning Jutsu!!"


    With the sound of massive smokes, two giant creatures appeared on the command of each respective summoner.


    "Hmm, what is this interesting battle you having, Genji?"


    "Tsunade-sama, do you need any of my help?"


    Boss Eagle and Katsuyu asked at their summoners.


    "Boss, I am fighting with quite a troublesome opponent. Can you take care of that Slug until my fight ends with that woman?"


    "You summoned me to fight with Slug?" Boss Eagle asked like I was joking with him.


    "Yes, I am dead serious, Boss. Slug can heal almost any injuries and breathe corrosive liquid. I need your help, Boss."


    "Hmm, alright. I didn''t have dinner yet. I will just eat that Slug for an appetizer."


    "Katsuyu, can you give me one of your small Slug on me. I need it''s healing. Also, deal that huge eagle for me."


    "Yes, Tsunade-sama."


    Katsuyu managed to give out her small Slug to Tsunade before Boss Eagle flapped his wing and clutched Katsuyu with its claws. However, Katsuyu handily freed herself by transforming into thousands of smaller clones.


    "Oh, what an interesting bug! Can even split to hundreds?"


    Boss Eagle seemed to surprise but calmed down quickly and shot out his lightning feathers at Katsuyu divisions.


    While Boss Eagle was fighting, I decided to end our battle with my signature move.


    "Earth Style: Earth Exploding Bloody Spikes!!!" spike


    Within a matter of seconds, thousands of large earth spikes shot up, covering 50m area. Tsunade was the center of my spike fields. Her left arm was penetrated by my spikes, while she had large scratches all over her body.


    She was healing along with the help of little Katsuyu. I didn''t hesitate and used Earth Style: Earth Travel jutsu to travel through spikes at her.


    My upper half emerged on the tip of the earth spike near Tsunade and slashed her with Kunai. Although Tsunade noticed my incoming, if she moved even a bit, she would be stabbed by other spikes around her.


    But she still blocked my Kunai with her right arm. I retreated to the spike field and traveled to the other spike in order to strike her from behind.


    Whether she blocked my attacks, I would just disappear to spikes and appear on other spike''s tip and slash her. This kept for a bit until Tsunade unleashed all her 100% strength punch on the ground, destroying all the spikes nearby with impact.


    I was also forced to come out from the ground and cough blood due to the impact.


    "Hmm, your signature jutsu isn''t that strong. *pant* *pant* Just one punch from me, and it''s gone. Hehe." Tsunade laughed a bit after seeing me coughing blood.


    I looked at Tsunade.


    "Bitch, who said my jutsu is gone? Watch this!"


    I snapped my fingers, and thousands of spikes rose again, piercing Tsunade''s feet and her skin.


    "I can create spike as much as I want enough with chakra. Even it is destroyed, I can recreate them. I will end this here now, bitch."


    I touched the ground to channel my chakra on spikes. Soon, thousands of spikes started to move and pointed at Tsunade''s direction. spike


    "Taste this!"


    With my signal, all thousands of spikes mounted at Tsunade, penetrating through all over her body. Next, I exploded all the spikes.


    *BOOM*


    It was definitely one big explosion. Even Boss Eagle and Katsuyu stopped fighting after hearing the explosion. I could see freaking Tsunade''s arm was flying over from the explosion.


    Just then, I saw a green light shining. I knew what this was. The last time I saw this was 3 years ago. Tsunade has undone her Strength of a Hundred Seal. It was D¨¦j¨¤ vu indeed.


    ''What a pain the ?ss. I knew she would do this.


    Strength of a Hundred Seal, which can increase her already physical strength and heal almost from anything.


    I once thought of using the Five Elements Unseal technique to deal with her seal. But System told me all the Sannins, including her, are able to use the Five Elements Unseal technique. Seriously if she had so many strength that she didn''t show in cannon, for god sake.''


    Tsunade''s face was covered with straps of black lines, and her body was quickly healing from the explosion. She slowly walked over to find her missing arm and just attached it on her shoulder as simple as eating.


    "Hehe, you are indeed strong, Genji. But you must know that today is the day you die!!"


    ''*Sigh* Since she used her trump card, I guess I have to use mine to beat her up then.''


    I performed several long hand signs as quickly as I could.


    "Earth Style: Earth Hardening Armor!!!"


    Suddenly, the ground shook violently. Surrounding rocks and stones moved around me, encasing my whole body to create an ultimate defense armor. When I use this armor, I could change my physical appearance to any form using stone and rocks, such as turning hands into giant axes. Also, this was super tough to crack.


    I spent the whole of my 2.5 years solely learn this S-rank jutsu without any break. It is still considered fast due to my high earth affinity and almost impeccable chakra control.


    I didn''t say anything and just gestured Tsuande to come at me. Tsunade didn''t even need my gesture as she was already dashing at me.


    "HYAA!!!"


    She punched with all her strength. I crossed my arms and readied to block her.


    *BAAAMMM*


    Tsunade smiled as her punch landed successfully. But soon shocked to see me only retreated to a few steps behind. Also, she didn''t even manage to break a hole in my armor, only a few cracks.


    "Hehehe, is that all you got. Tsunade!!! Hahaha, here I go!"


    I took advantage of Tsunade''s shock and changed my hands to giant hammers and pounded from top and side hammered her.


    Tsunade coughed blood and flew away. But she soon stood up angrily, while healing her injuries.


    "Tsunade-sama, let''s retreat for now. This man is clearly powerful." small Katsuyu suggested to Tsunade.


    Of course, Tsunade just got angry at Katsuyu.


    "I refuse to believe his armor is unbreakable. It already has a few cracks. Just several more punch, and it will break. Then he has nothing up his sleeves."


    Tsunade again rushed at me. I changed my arm to a giant fly swatter and slapped her from the top. But she blocked it with her arms on top and kept advancing.


    She used her lightning to speed up and reached me. She punched with all her strength again. But my armor didn''t break. I just smiled and let her try all she wants.


    After her 9th consecutive all her punches, my armor finally broke. Seeing this, Tsunade laughed. But for some reason, she heard another laughing voice next to her.


    "Hahahaha, Tsunade. Thank you for participating in my experiment. So it took your total of 10 punches to break this armor. Haha, this armor sure is tough."


    "Tough, my ?ss. Now it is gone, you have nothing to block my punch!!"


    "Gone? What do you mean? I never said my armor is gone, did I?"


    Just as Tsunade was about to retort, the Earth hardening armor regenerated, encasing my body again.


    "This armor can regenerate by itself as long as there is earth and stones when it is broken. So no matter how many you break my armor, you can''t hurt me, bitch!!"


    I punched her face directly, and she flew further this time. Tsunade stood up again, speaking angrily.


    "NO, I refuse to believe this. There must be a way to undo that armor. I will definitely undo your jutsu and rip you into pieces!!"


    She dashed a third time at me. I didn''t let her punch me and fought back seriously.


    The cycles of Tsunade healing and my armor reforming repeated throughout 30 minutes. There was no definite winner as she kept backing up no matter how serious injury she had.


    Although it was not decided, I felt as I was the one short end of the stick as my chakra reserves were getting small and small. Earth Hardening Armor was powerful and also consumed chakra matching its power level.


    I decided to end the fight with Tsunade. Boss Eagle seemed to finish up his battle too.


    "Wait, Tsunade. Could you hear me out?"


    "What? Are you begging to spare your life? Too bad, no one can save you!"


    "What are you talking about? You know if we keep this long, there won''t be a winner between us. We both will just only suffer. So I suggest we end the fight here."


    "Ha, I knew it. You are scared. It seems your chakra is running out, huh?"


    "Please, I can keep this for another hour. But I am pretty worried about my students. Come to think of it, where is that little student girl of yours?"


    Hearing me, Tsunade suddenly thought of Shizune.


    "Oh, don''t tell me you left her alone somewhere deep inside this mountain? My, my, what a terrible teacher you are. Maybe with my eagles, I might find her faster than you~!"


    This was clearly warning to Tsunade that if she didn''t back down, I would use my eagles to capture her.


    "Tsunade-sama, let''s retreat. We need to hurry and find Shizune-chan." Little Katsuyu voiced her opinion to Tsunade.


    Tsunade seemed to hesitate for a minute and finally decided to retreat. There were many times she can face me in the future, but if she loses Shizune now, she will forever live in guilt.


    "Alright, consider it lucky, Genji. Next time I will kill you. I promise!"


    Then, she went back with Katsuyu to find Shizune. Boss Eagle came to me.


    "Aren''t you going to hinder them?"


    "Nah, I am too tired fighting that monster, Boss. Thanks for the help, by the way."


    "No problem. That Slug was an interesting creature to battle. Then I am going back, goodbye!"


    Boss Eagle went back. I sat down and pulled out chakra pills from the pocket. I lost 80% chakra from that fight. I needed to replenish quickly.


    Just then, Biller (eagle) came down to me for a report.


    "Genji, we took out every sword from the Suna base, as you asked. Also, three brats are delivered to the cave safely."


    "Ahh, good. What about Pakura and Mei?"


    "Well, their fight ended already. One of Kiri shinobi self bombed to kill the Suna shinobi. While another Suna shinobi also did the same to damage Mei and others.


    Mei and Pakura both are unconscious while the rest are all dead except one small Kiri girl (Ringo). But she is also in a coma state."


    ''Umm, two beauties Unconcious outside while there is no one around. Isn''t this perfect chance to do this, do that and do everything?? Holy Molly, I am not a man if I waster this god opportunity.''


    "Hehehe, Hurry up, take me to that place before they awake. Pakura and Mei, huh? Haiyaa! It''s so hard to choose who to grope first, hehehe."

 Chapter 78 - Choose one girl

    Genji rode on Biller and asked him to lead the way to Pakura and Mei''s place. All the males are dead. Only Pakura, Mei, and Ringo are alive unconscious. Not to mention, two survived ones could be considered as the fairies of Suna and Kiri.


    Genji couldn''t help himself but smile all the way. He couldn''t believe even he had this kind of luck. It was as heaven was telling him to do the deed now.


    ''Hehehe, I will definitely brag this to Kitsuchi. Both Mei and Pakura is 10 times beautiful than that fiery Kimiko.''


    Just a few minutes ago, Genji was pretty dead tired from fighting with Tsunade. But with several words from Biller, his tension went from 0 to off the chart. Genji hurried Biller to fly faster as he couldn''t contain his excitement.


    "Genji, Aren''t you going to see your students first? They went through life death situation after all." Biller suggested something ridiculous.


    "Don''t worry, Kata (eagle) is with them. Also, it was their fault for not obeying my order and led to their current situation. I will just reprimand those brats after this trip."


    "But Genji, I think we should visit them fir..."


    "Hey, Biller! If you say any more useless damn shit, I will seal your damn egg and make you eternal impotent."


    "EH?!!"


    Few sweats started to drop on Biller''s face. Hearing Genji, Biller knew Genji was being dead serious here. Biller immediately shut his mouth and focused on flight.


    --------------------------


    I finally arrived!!! Even though there was the smell of deaths and blood lingering around, it didn''t matter. Because I saw the two beauties lying down with tattered clothes that I could see some of their b?r? skins.


    ''Oh god, praise the Lord!!''


    Pakura and Mei were lied down very s?xily. If people were passing by, I was sure they couldn''t hold themselves.


    Then I noticed something about them. I guess I was really in the anime world. Although Pakura and Mei''s clothes were tattered and holed fiercely, it still covered their private part.


    "Whenever girls suffered some sort of slash or blast, for some shit reason, their clothes are protecting the private areas. Even if they receive much more heavy attacks, privates are thoroughly covered.


    Are their clothes made of adamantine or what?"


    As I was wondering if these clothes could be torn off by a man''s hand, I heard someone grumbling, disrupting my thoughts. I looked behind to see who it was.


    Turns out, it was Ringo who b?r?ly survived the explosion. She seemed to regaining her consciousness and opening her eyes.


    ''Oh, Did I spoke out loud? I didn''t expect Ringo would awake from it. Now, this is a problem. What should I do with her? Just knock her out and continue to my newfound experiment on girls or kill her to remove any danger?''


    Ringo opened her eyes and looked around the surroundings. When she saw both Mei and Pakura lying down, she was relaxed a bit. But it came to an abrupt end as she saw me right next. Her face turned full of surprise and shock.


    "What? How come you are here? God damn it! What have you done to Mei-nee and me? I knew it! All men are scum."


    ''For someone who waked up just now, she sure speaks loud. And did this girl shamelessly said her body was enough to attract boys? Her washboard was flatter than asphalt road.''


    I quickly ran up to her and stomped my feet on her face to shut her up.


    "Be quiet. What are you going to do if you wake up sleeping beauties??"


    I asked the system for its opinion to deal with this brat.


    System: "Host. System suggests Host kill Ringo to remove future troubles. As Host got hold of her weapons, she certainly would hold grudges and pester Host until the end, just as current Tsunade.


    Besides, she will die within a few years due to her unknown illness. She has no use for the Host even for the future. There are also chances she stays her rest of life in prison for losing her weapon as well."


    ''Oh, once in a while, the system actually made sense. Since Ringo no longer has her weapons, she is just useless to me. I better kill her.''


    Ringo was still trying to remove my feet from her face, but to no avail, as she has no strength left.


    I decided to kill her quickly while Mei and Pakura are still knocked out.


    I didn''t use my Kunai to kill her. Instead, I twisted her neck and killed her. With this, Mei will just suspect she died during the explosion. However, I made some slip and caused Ringo to scream for a second.


    I immediately looked back to check Pakura and Mei. They showed signs of waking up. Seeing this, I cursed Ringo a thousand times.


    ''NO!! How could I make such a mistake!! This is the biggest I ever made in my entire life! I should have just crushed her head with a rock or something.''


    Option 1: They might see me, but still knock them out and do the deed.


    Option 2: Do nothing and give the image of true gentlemen. Strike when you see the openings.


    Any greedy people without any thought about the future would choose option 1. But still better than anime harem mc who won''t do shit.


    Any patient and delusional greedy people with a slight bit of thinking would choose option 2. It might sound like a good plan, but it was simply impossible to handle these 2 girls at the same time.


    That''s why a big brain like me will choose secret option 3, to abandon one girl to get the other girl.


    This was a tactic: discard one to earn the trust of others. If I pull it out nicely, I might even build the ground base for a long relationship.


    For option 4, I do the things with them and kill those two immediately. But I am not fond of killing beauties. Also, if these two dead, Kiri and Suna will obviously suspect me.


    I immediately disappeared and re-showed up again when Pakura and Mei waked up, pretending I just got here. Luckily, Pakura and Mei waked up at the same time and soon realized their pathetic situation.


    They couldn''t move much and still in exhausted states. As much as Pakura wanted to stand and capture Mei, her body didn''t listen at all. Mei looked sad when she saw Ringo''s dead corpse.


    "Oh my, what a fascinating scene I am witnessing! Two beauties almost n?k?d, and staring me for help, hehe."


    Pakura looked at like I was an animal while trying her best to cover her body.


    "What are you doing here, Genji?"


    "Well, while I was spending the night with my students on the mountain, I saw the battle sound nearby. I went to check up on it and saw both Ms. Tsuko''s bodyguards and Suna shinobi are fighting. Honestly, I thought they were dead, but I guess Ms.Tsuko lied to me. This saddens my heart."


    I grabbed my ?h?st and looked sad.


    "And who won?" It was Mei who asked. Pakura was sure Suna won but still wanted to confirm.


    "Well, unfortunately for you two, neither side came out the victory as they all massacred by crazy bitch, Tsunade. Apparently, she followed me all the way to here to avenge her loved ones.


    She thought your men knew where I was, so she started to beat the crap out of both sides and killed them all. Unluckily since I was near, I was found by her and battled with her until now. But at the last moment, she ended the fight and went on a search for her students.


    I was chasing her but got lost and ended up here. That''s it for my story, haha."


    "Now, how can I help you, 2 ladies? If you pay me right now, I might help one of you out here, hehe."


    Hearing my words, Pakura and Mei both understood my intention. I was telling them I can help one of them if they can do the naughty thing.


    "Hey, darling. As long as you can help me kill that girl and escape, I don''t mind playing with you." Mei started initiation and even winked at her. With her half-naked body and seducing voice, it really tempted me.


    I looked at Pakura next, but she just sat there and did nothing. She would rather die than beg for mercy to Genji. Her pride won''t let her do such shameless things.


    I nodded and declared.


    "It seems it is decided to who I should help."


    Mei thought I was going to help her as Pakura didn''t say anything. But instead, she received a slap from me.


    "You s?ut! You lied to me 5 times already. You are shinobi, aren''t you! You even dared to reject my advance at the bar! How can I trust you if you lie to me all the time?? I am honorable gentlemen, and I despise bitch like you!"


    After slandering Mei, I walked up to the surprised Pakura. I took out the jacket from the scroll and clothed her. Before Pakura could say anything, I didn''t spare any effort, and the princess carried her.


    Pakura''s face became a bit red as this was the first time someone princess carried her. Mei looked as her spirit was leaving out her body.


    I spat some saliva near Mei and spoke to her.


    "Listen, you s?ut. I warn you, don''t ever come here again, or I will mince you and feed you to the pig I raise."


    This further shocked and angered Mei as she was never treated like this by the opposite gender. I didn''t consider looking back at Mei and left while still princess carrying Pakura.


    -----------------------


    "Let me go, you! What are you doing this? What are your motives?" Pakura tried to make the distance, but my hands firmly hold onto her.


    I pondered how I should answer Pakura. Pick-up line or direct confession or slow melting...


    "Well, it''s because I like you more than that girl. Also, to be honest, I fell in love with you when we first met in the war. Since the lady I like is in an unfortunate predicament, how could I just stand there and not help?"


    "Bullshit!" Pakura only spoke one word.


    I decided with a direct approach. Pakura''s face was a bit pink but soon maintained her cold face. At least she stopped asking me after that.


    "Where are you taking me? Don''t tell me you are..." Before Pakura gets misunderstand, I cleared her.


    "To the place where your dead comrades are. You didn''t seem to believe me just now, so I will take you to verify yourself."


    Pakura went quiet again after hearing me. After 20 minutes, we reached the place our destination.


    There was a giant crater and massive corpse around the crater. Anyone could deduce pit was created from a powerful physical blow.


    Pakura soon found the rest of her Suna shinobi, who showed signs of receiving heavy punches and kicks.


    As expected, Pakura deduced as they were killed by Tsunade as she was the only one who could pull this. She wanted to bring all of his dead comrades to Sunagakure.


    Since I was quick-witted, I immediately pulled out several storage scrolls and started to seal all Suna corpses. After that, I just passed to Pakura. Although Pakura was still suspicious, she thanked me.


    "Don''t worry. I told you I love you. I won''t ever harm the people I like even if they are from a different village. That''s why I chose to save you instead of that s?ut." I reassured her.


    But she just didn''t trust me. I mean, I would do the same if I was in her shoes.


    "Hmph, I still don''t trust you. Besides, I didn''t need your help! Who knows you just killed all my men and blamed on Tsunade!"


    The woman sure had frightening intuition.


    "Come to think of it, I really might have killed one of your men accidentally. I mean, he was attacking my students, so I had no choice. I even warned him several times, but he didn''t back down."


    Pakura then glared at me as she was going to eat me alive.


    "I am really sorry. It was so for my student''s safety. He had a lot of swords on him but had 0 skill on them. I don''t know why he even had them. Come, I will take you to his corpse. You can identify if he is your side or not."


    I took her to Jukan''s corpse. I ordered eagles to put all the swords they stole from Suna base to Jukan''s corpse beforehand. Of course, Kiba wasn''t included.


    When Pakura saw Jukan, she was surprised. She couldn''t believe the man she was searching for a month would be here, dead.


    Then Pakura started to pull some impressive acting. She acted as Jukan was one of her precious Suna shinobi. She started to show tears and got close to his corpse. She was mourning for his death while her hands were going through on his body to find his diary.


    ''Heh, Pakura. Your acting sure is up to Hollywood. But you can''t fool me. You may be smart, but I am 100 steps ahead of you. Hehehe, I will play along with your little game this time.''


    After seeing that diary was still in Jukan''s corpse, Pakura started to trust me a bit.


    "Pakura, I didn''t know he was close to you. I am very sorry. Would you like me to seal his corpse to scroll too? I hope this won''t make you anger me, haha."


    While saying, I sealed the Jukan to the storage seal and handed it to Pakura. Pakura still acted as she was angry at me, but I knew she was breathing a sigh of relief for completing her mission.


    I was sure Pakura''s impression of me changed quite a lot by now.


    "What are you going to do now?"


    "That''s none of your business. Why do you care!"


    "I told you I like you. Also if you are planning to go rest at the village, then you better stop."


    "Why?"


    "Tsunade is there. She is probably pissed off as hell right now as I gave her few punches on the face. Also, I advise you to go back and try to kill Ms.Tsuko. I am sure she already ran away by now."


    After hearing me, Pakura just frowned her face. She didn''t know what to do currently. She was too weak to go back to Sunagakure.


    "How about you spend the night with me and my students. Like I told you, you have nowhere to go. I think I already proved to you that I like you and won''t hurt you."


    Pakura refused me first, but after I didn''t take no as an answer. I f?r??b?? grabbed her hand, and the princess carried her again to the cave.


    ---------------------------


    Mei was in a daze for 10 minutes straight. She failed spectacularly in this mission. She lost all her men, one of seven swords, even lost in the beauty contest. Never in her life saw a man like Genji, calling her s?ut and reject her.


    After thinking hard, Mei realized something and started to laugh crazily.


    "Hehehehe, this was the first time man rejected my charm and even called me s?ut. How interesting, Genji, hahaha!! However, no one in this world can not reject me!


    I shall follow you around until I make you fall in love with me and crush your heart ruthlessly."


    At that night, Genji gained another stalker.


    -------------------------


    [A/N: There you have it, guys. Pakura is the winner!!!]

 Chapter 79 - Report to Onoki

    I took Pakura to the cave where Yahiko, Konan, and Nagato were resting. Despite Pakura being forced to come, she didn''t stop me much at all.


    When two of them reached the cave, one of my summoned eagle came out and reported to me about my dear three students'' progress.


    According to him, Yahiko broke all of his damn ribs while Nagato broke some of his shoulder bones. Damn, that Tsunade didn''t go easy on even kids at all.


    Then I heard the loud laughing noises coming from the cave. It seems Yahiko woke up and being loud as usual. Konan and Nagato also seemed relaxed a bit than before.


    ''Tch, they sure are relaxed even after disobeying my order. For now, I won''t lecture you, brats. But after Pakura is gone, you all dead.''


    Pakura and I entered the cave. Yahiko and others also noticed us.


    At first, they seemed to feel guilty when seeing me, but as soon as they saw Pakura next to me, they all acted like hyenas hungry for some love drama.


    "Woah, Genji! Who is this pretty lady?"


    "Is she your girlfriend? When did you meet her?"


    "Is this result of your research, Genji-nii?"


    They sure were trying their best to make me forget about their punishments. Anyway, it was a bit annoying, so I quickly shut them up.


    "Quite down, you brats. There is a guest with us, at least act proper as Iwa shinobi. Her name is Pakura, and because of a certain situation, she will be staying with us for a night. Just make sure you don''t disturb her or even I can''t protect you when she wants to kill you."


    After hearing my words, they all looked at Pakura suspiciously. I was telling them not to let their guard down. Pakura just pissed that I was using her to scare the kids.


    "Anyway, you should just stay here. With the kids here, you don''t have to worry about me doing something to you, right? Here are the chakra pills."


    I smiled at Pakura and reassured her that I won''t do anything. Pakura seemed to believe a bit, but still, she kept a 5ft distance from my students and me.


    Yahiko tried to converse with her but failed numerously. Eventually, they gave up talking and went to sleep. 2 hours later, Pakura also fell into sleep or maybe just pretended to sleep, I didn''t know.


    I quietly woke up and made sure no one noticed me. I created an earth clone to deal with a certain lady. She has been following and spying on us for a while now.


    "You can come out, Ms. Tsuko. No, Mei!"


    "Fufufu, I didn''t expect you to even know my real name, Genji-san. As expected, you are a bit different from other guys."


    "..."


    ''I just called out her real name, and she thinks I am special? Don''t tell me she hit her head during battle?''


    "Anyway, I don''t know why you are following me, but I suggest you retreat. If Pakura sees you again, I can''t guarantee if you can make it to Kiri or not."


    "Ara, are you worrying about me despite reject and slapping me?"


    "*Sigh* Just get out here, Mei. This is my last warning, or I will kill you personally."


    "Fufu, alright. This time I will retreat, but next time be prepared to become mine."


    "Before you go, tell that Mizukage not to send any shinobi more unless if he wants war. Iwa will soon send delegates to negotiate about the chakra metal mine here. I know you came here for that, so don''t ask me useless things. I won''t answer it."


    Mei was surprised that I knew her names, her village, and even her mission detail.


    "Wow, I didn''t know you had such a spy network. I am more interested in you. Hehe. Thanks for the info. See you in the future!"


    -----------------------


    Pakura sneakily tried to leave early morning before my students or I wake up. But she failed as I already woke up before her.


    "Are you going without saying any goodbye? Wow, that hurts me so much."


    "Well, thank you for taking care of me last night. I won''t forget this favor and will pay you back definitely. Goodbye."


    "Haha, no need to pay back. Just give me your heart is enough, haha."


    Pakura just ignored me and left the cave to Sunagakure.


    ''It sure is hard to get a woman''s heart.''


    I am sure Pakura would be punished for losing more than 80 shinobi when she gets back, but not too harsh as she accomplished her mission.


    To me, Suna won''t send any more shinobi here as there was no need. I already collect Suna shinobi and Jukan corpses to scroll. Pakura also got hold of Jukan''s diary, so there was no need to send shinobi to investigate further.


    Therefore Suna won''t dare to send shinobi here. It was also to buy time to arrange Iwa shinobi to negotiate with Kiri and ?ssign people here.


    "Just entertain her, bring her to bar, keep playing games, do festivals, become drink buddy. Whatever you do, just rope her in for a month if you want to survive. She will be the key to drive away more Suna shinobi from here.


    After I get back, I will send capable Iwa shinobi to disguise as farmers here. Then you don''t have to worry about anything and excavate mines all you want."


    "Yes, Genji-sama. I will do my best to keep her in the village as much as I can."


    Since I put the seal on the village head, he was listening to me obediently, even though it was an empty seal. He believed that I could kill him anytime as long as he has my seal.


    He also knew he was beneficial to work under me, so he became a loyal dog to me totally.


    ----


    After ordering, I went back to the cave. I saw my students still lying down.


    "Stop pretending to sleep. I know you all wake up. Now time for your punishments. You dare to disobey me?!!!"


    Yahiko quickly opened his eyes and begged. Nagato and Konan also lowered their face for punishments.


    "Genji-nii. It was me who suggested. Those two just tried to stop and followed me. I will take full blame. Nagato and Konan have done nothing."


    "Don''t say those bullshit to me. It''s team punishments whether you solely did wrong or not. What did you learn from yesterday?


    Yahiko, if this was war, you would have been deemed as a traitor!! Because of your selfish action, you put yourself and your dear friend teammates to danger. Not only that, you almost ruined my plan!!!


    Also, Nagato and Konan! You two didn''t manage to stop Yahiko. You 2 have the same faults as Yahiko. When I was your age, I even kicked my best friend''s ball to stop him from doing a reckless thing. Now he is very grateful to me for that!!"


    I spent the whole morning lecturing these brats so they won''t do anything more foolish in the future.


    ------------------


    (In Tsuchikage office)


    "... and that was all about my mission, old man," I reported to Onoki.


    "Haha, very good. Very good! Genji, you are the pride of Iwagakure. Haha. I really didn''t see wrong in you."


    "What are you laughing, you old man. This is the second time you mistook C-rank into S-rank mission!! Thanks to that, my students almost drop dead!"


    "Calm down. It''s not bad for youngsters to experience death situation in a while. As for the rewards, what do you want?"


    "I don''t need anything. I just want the Kiba (Kiri sword)."


    Onoki looked at unhappy that I was demanding the treasure sword.


    "Don''t be too stingy, old man. I was the one to get it, so naturally, it belongs to me. Besides, I am one of the top sword users in Iwa. It is going to be useless if you just keep it in some dark storage."


    Onoki thought for a moment and agreed to give Kiba to me.


    "Fine, but you know that never to show it in front of Kiri, right?"


    "Of course, I am not an idiot. Anyway, I have done my part. It''s your job now to send someone to Kiri to negotiate. Also, don''t be too stingy and give them 1% or something like that. I don''t want them to report about mines to Suna and make it much complicated than now."


    Onoki frowned his face and clicked his tongue. I knew this old man is too greedy.


    "Well, I told you what I had to say. I am out of this now. Goodbye!" I told him and went out.


    After going out, I went back to my room to check my newly awarded unbreakable bu??erfly swords given by the system. It truly looked cool and sharp.


    ''Finally, I have weapons against Sakumo''s white saber. Also, it won''t break to Tsunade''s blows. originally


    I first was planning to give Kiba to Yahiko''s next birthday. But he just had to ruin my expectation of him. I will give him when he masted Wing Chun sword arts.''


    ------------


    [A/N: Next chapters will be about spy networks and chunin exams in Konoha!!]

 Chapter 80 - Chasing acquainted scammer

    It''s been one week since I returned from the Cat Mountian village mission. Yahiko and Nagato are in the hospital right now. According to Karen, Yahiko will take at least a month to heal his injury. While Nagato will have two weeks hospitalized. Konan also needs some time to relax.


    Since it was their first-ever S-rank mission despite doing nothing but causing trouble, I gave them one and a half months to rest.


    I went to hang out with Gari and others, but it seems they all went out for missions. Gari, Kitsuchi, and Kimiko formed a team and went out for an A-rank mission.


    Kan especially became super busy ever since in charge of Explosion kids training. As for Gin and Karen, I didn''t want to third wheel them. They should have their private time.


    Only Shuji was in the village, resting in the home. I decided to drop by and hang out with him while also showing off my super awesome unbreakable swords and Kiba.


    ''Maybe I could also ask Aunt Ami to appraise the swords for me as she is the number one expert in the weapon industry in Iwagakure.''


    Thinking I headed to Shuji''s rich big mansion.


    ------------------


    "Oh my! These are good swords, indeed. Its quality and sharpness are top-notch and also very durable. I am sure not even our factory can make such quality swords. You really are lucky to have them, Genji."


    Aunt Ami spoke to me with a full smile while wearing glasses to look carefully at my new swords. She has always treated me as her other son, and I was very grateful for that.


    Shuji picked up the swords and test swung them. He was also impressed by them.


    "Damn, what''s up with your luck? Not only you got top-quality swords, you even got Kiba, one of the seven swords of Kiri?


    Hey, why don''t you give me one of them? You are not using the all, are you?" Shuji spoke.


    "Why do you even need swords when you are not even a sword user? Besides, I already decided to present Kiba to my student when he mastered the Wing Chun arts."


    "Tch, so your student over the best friend, huh? You ungrateful bastard." Shuji complained as leaning his hand on my shoulder.


    Just then, the maid came in and notified Aunt Ami that her business partner arrived and waiting for her. Aunt Ami excused herself and went out to greet her business partner.


    I didn''t pay too much attention and kept goofing around with Shuji.


    Aunt Ami returned to the room 30 minutes later. It seemed like she took care of her business well. I was curious and asked her.


    "How did the meeting go, Aunt Ami?"


    "It went very well. The business partner is selling massive war weapons he collected during the war to us at low prices. Although weapons are a bit rusty, with good polish, they will be good as new."


    "Oh, weapons he collected during war!? I thought weapons accumulated during wars had to send back to Shinobi Weapon storage, no?" I asked.


    "Yes, it is only for shinobi. But after collecting the weapons, he immediately quit being shinobi and turned all of them into his ?ssets.


    Although he sold most of the weapons to me, I am sure he still has some of them even now."


    "So he is a coward! To resign as shinobi just for money." Shuji said with disdain.


    "What''s his name, Aunt Ami?"


    "Normally, I won''t tell others, but who am I going to keep secret from my family? His name is Tonton. He is quite fat but quite agile compared to his size,"


    "Tonton? I think I heard it before but can''t remember. That name sounds really familiar."


    Just then, System''s voice rang in my head.


    System: "Tonton is the person who scammed the Host into buying vulnerable Kunai during the second ninja war. He immediately ran away to avoid the Host''s wrath."


    ''AHH, so it''s that fat pig. Because of that bastard, I was shamed in front of Rasa, Pakura, and even Gari. Hehehehe, nice nice nice. To think I find him here.


    Now I am not a man called Genji if I don''t find and torture you. Just you wait, I will come and barbecue your damn fat.''


    I thanked Aunt Ami and asked for the direction he went. Then I ran out quick to catch him.


    "Ara, What''s gotten into him?"


    "Well, Genji always acts on his whim. It''s his usual stuff. Don''t worry about him, mom."


    "Fufu, I guess you are right."


    ------------------


    I searched for that fat bastard tirelessly. I even created earth clones to search for him. I would definitely catch him and see his begging.


    It took almost 20 minutes to finally find that fat bastard. He was leisurely walking while smiling to himself. He seemed to be so happy that he even whistled.


    ''Yea, bastard. Enjoy all while you can. Because a bit later, your life is going to be as miserable as hell.''


    I ordered my clones to capture him. Soon 5 of my clones dashed at him. Fat bastard quickly sensed something and turned around just to see my clones were madly rushing at him with looks of murderers.


    He got scared and ran for his life. But no matter how fast he was, he couldn''t outrun the top-level Jounin as me. Seeing he couldn''t outrun me, he did something unexpected and shocked me quite a bit.


    He bit off his fingers and performed summoning jutsu in the middle of the street. Then a horse-sized pig appeared. He rode on it and urged it to gallop.


    I was mostly shocked by the pig summoning. Never ever have I seen one until now. But I quickly got out of it and summoned Biller.


    Biller didn''t take a minute to catch up to pig and Tonton and grabbed them with his claws. Then I took them to the deepest corner of the Iwagakure where no one can disturb us.


    "What do you want, mister? I haven''t done anything to you, have I? I am just a regular law-abiding weapon merchant. If you don''t release me, I will...I .. will...."


    Tonton stopped talking as he saw my face and realized who he was dealing with. Tonton clearly remembered as he scammed Genji when he was just 12 years old kid.


    At that time, he didn''t know Genji will become famous and powerful as he is now and dared to scam him without any worry. Now he was going to pay consequences.


    "You will do what, huh? You sure have the gut to say that you haven''t done anything after scamming me!"


    "I am sorry, Genji-sama. But I think you have mistaken with someone. I have never scammed you, sir. Maybe you are mistaking with my twin brother?"


    "Shut up! Do you think I will be fooled by you again?" I slapped his thick skin to shut him up.


    ''This fatass still trying to deny! There is no way system will make mistakes. But does he really have a twin brother or something? If he does, then he is one hell of the mean brother. ''


    System: "Host, he doesn''t. In canon, he has no siblings, only one daughter, and opened weapon store in Konoha."


    ''Wait, what? Konoha? Weapon store? Daughter? System, don''t tell me he is Tenten''s dad??''


    System: "Yes, he had a late child due to some problems in his manliness."


    ''So Tenten''s dad is Tonton, who was formerly Iwa shinobi?! Then how the fu?k did he able to live and even set up a store in Konoha? Did he bribe the entire Yamanaka clan and Anbu or what?''


    System: "He had Tsunade''s special letter of guarantee and settled in Konoha without any inspection."


    ''Letter of guarantee of Tsunade? How the heck...''


    I paused for a second and finally connected the dot. I remembered he has pig summons, and the current Tsunade still doesn''t have her pig pet TonTon yet. I was sure this guy bribed Tsunade along with Tonton(pig) as a present.


    ''Hehehehe, if that is the case, then...''


    "Hey you, get up. I won''t kill you for scamming and lying at me. You should be grateful. If I report to the council about your cowardly actions in the war, you will be sent to jail immediately." I kindly spoke to him.


    "Thank you, thank you very much."


    "But I can''t just let you go free either. After all, I was almost got killed because of your damn fragile Kunai that time."


    "I will do anything you ask for, Genji-sama. Please just don''t report me to the council."


    "Haha, alright. Here is what I want you to do. I want you to infiltrate Konoha and open up the weapon store there. You will be acting as my spy there and only report directly to me."


    Then Tonton looked at me as he was waiting for me to say it was joking. But I really was planning to make him not Iwa''s, but my personal spy.


    "Please, Genji-sama. I would rather stay in jail than infiltrate Konoha. Genji-sama should know that staying there is the same as death to Iwa shinobi like us!!"


    "Don''t worry. I already have a smooth and safe plan to get you to Konoha without any mind **** inspection or suspicion. All you gotta do is to give your little baby pig as a gift and bribe someone. Just follow my every instruction, and you will settle into Konoha without any problem."


    "But still..."


    "Also, not even Tsuchikage won''t know about you. Only me. I am not even going to give you an impossible mission, just a monthly update on Konoha and nothing more.


    On top of that, if you raise one of my eagle summonings as a pet, you don''t have to worry about stuff like transmitting intel. I will get it automatically through eagles. Literally, you wouldn''t face any danger at all."


    Tonton still hesitated. It seemed like I had to use a bit of threatening.


    "Hey, pig! You seemed to have forgotten about your place. Either totally safe and happy weapon merchant spy life, or you get beaten up by me, send to jail, and wait for your execution! Now choose!"


    "Yes, yes, I will become a spy and infiltrate Konoha!!" He hurriedly agreed to be my spy.


    "Good. Alright, let''s go someplace to eat and celebrate. Just trust my orders, then Konoha won''t suspect a thing. I will also give you a monthly allowance of 100k ryo as spy remuneration. Hahaha!"


    Tonton was dragged by me f?r??b?? to celebrate his newly attained spy title.


    ''Why did I scam him in the past? I wish I go back to the past and kick the past me real hard.'' Tonton thought.

 Chapter 81 - Arguing with Onoki

    It has been 3 days since I captured Tonton and forced him to be my slave. I didn''t feel bad as he was the one who scammed me first. He should have prepared for consequences when scamming me.


    I visited Onoki to get permission to leave Iwagakure for a nice relaxing vacation outside the world. But in truth, I was going to Cat Mountain village with Tonton to fool Tsunade again.


    "Going on vacation? You can still relax in the village plenty. Why bother going outside full of danger?"


    "Old man! I just finished the S-rank mission and need some break. All of my close friends are either busy or on missions. My students will be in the hospital for months. There is literally no fun here in the village anymore.


    Besides, I feel like you will give me a ton of missions even if I take a break in the Iwgakure. So I am going outside vacation no matter what."


    "Tch, you selfish bastard, never think about dedicating to your village, do you? At least tell me where and when you will come back."


    ''not dedicating? I have contributed to Iwagakure most in my generation!''


    "For now, I don''t know where I will head, but I will send you my location from time to time. I will probably come back in 3-4 weeks later. If I don''t come back by then, you can dispatch a search party or something."


    "Anyone bring with you?"


    "Nope, just me alone."


    "Alright, I will permit you to go outside Iwagakure for vacation. But if you don''t come back within next month, you better prepare for a shit ton of mission waiting for you."


    "Yes, yes. It''s enough for me."


    Onoki knew I will never betray Iwagakure. He was quite proud of his Will of stone teaching. Since I was his Will of stone philosophy lecture student, he had this arrogance, which made him think I am immersed with this Will of stone.


    I was sure this was the reason how Deidara escaped easily from Iwagakure and Onoki.


    "Alright, see you next month, old man. Bye, bye."


    ------------------------


    Our first destination was Pig land, where holy pigs are living. Our reason was to bring the Tsunade''s future pig, Tonton with us. We need that pig hog to bribe Shizune.


    It took us around one week to get to the Pig land despite riding on Biller (eagle) continuously. Pig Land sure was far away.


    I found the Tsunade''s future pet Tonton was an orphan there. He or she or it lost his or her or its parents. To be honest, I didn''t know which gender that hog is, and I didn''t want to know.


    Anyway, it was easy for us to bring him with us. Pigs elders that denied us first but just a bit of money, those fat pigs all became my pigs.


    Then we straight went to Cat Mountain village where Tsunade was. I am sure she is still roped down by the village head there, following my order.


    ''So here was my plan: Alcohol, money, and hog. That was it.


    First, Tonton (fat guy) COINCIDENTALLY meets Tsunade and gets along with her by playing poker. He will intentionally lose to her and leave a good impression.


    Next step, when I perceive their relationship is close and positive, I will order the village head to make Tsunade drunk.


    Then, Tonton will take advantage of this and fuc... I mean, ask for her recommendation letter to stay in Konoha.


    If Tsunade hesitates a bit, then there comes the money. ChaChing* For the final push, he will present that hog to Tsunade. He or she or it can be her watchdog from debtors.''


    Tonton(Fat ?ss) exactly did as my plan. And it worked. Tsunade immediately gave her a letter of recommendation after hearing Tonton (hog)''s ability.


    I knew I was a genius. Tsunade was such an easy opponent for me.


    This all took 3 weeks since I left the Iwagakure for the excuse of vacation. There I just let Tonton (Fat guy) head to Konoha by himself.


    ''He has the recommendation letter, so I am sure he would be safe from Anbu or Yamanaka''s inspection. This was how much of Senju''s authority had in Konoha.''


    Before he goes on his spy journey, I gave him a spy eagle to pet and also as a transmitter between us. I knew he won''t betray me to Konoha because he knew Konoha was fu?k?d up place for spies and criminals.


    I spent the remaining one-week enjoying nature and practicing Lightning armor jutsu. It was quite inconvenient to hide my Lightning armor jutsu training in Iwagakure. They might speculate that I could be related to Kumo.


    When I came back to Iwagakure, Tonton (Fat guy) sent me a report that he successfully infiltrated to Konoha. He met Hiruzen, who confirmed Tsunade''s vouching letter.


    He reported that he changed his name to Tuntun as Tsunade messed up his name while writing her recommendation letter because she was drunk at that time. Typical Tsunade.


    I ordered Tuntun to just stay low for now, and he didn''t have to send the monthly report to me for the first year in Konoha. Although I had to give him 100k ryo every month, it was worth it.


    Besides, I am rich due to System''s quests.


    ---------------------------------


    (2 years later... Boom!!!!!)


    "FUCK YOU, OLD MAN! I AM DEFINITELY NOT GOING THERE!"


    "Ahem, Genji. You are being rude to Tsuchikage-sama."


    "Oh, I am sorry, Shuji. But I don''t see why I should be polite to the deluded old man who is sending me to death!!"


    "Genji, you brat. Just because you are an S-rank ninja now doesn''t mean you have the right to yell at me, the Tsuchikage!!


    You are supposed to be a role-model for Iwa shinobi, but how can you be afraid of death? Besides, I am not even sending you to death."


    "Oh, you know full well how much I am hated in Konoha. And you are sending me there for the next Chunin exam! HOW IS THIS NOT EQUAL TO SEND ME TO DEATH??"


    "Well, I mean, your students are almost 15 and still Genins. I thought it was the perfect time for them to be Chunin. As their jounin sensei, it''s your responsibility to accompany them."


    "Old man, how can you be so shameless!! If it wasn''t for your relentless forced disapprovals until now, my students should be already Chunin last year.


    You have deliberately led them to join the Chunin exam. How dirty can you be?"


    "Listen, Genji! You should also know the current situation between each great village is not very good, especially Iwa and Konoha."


    ''Yea, mostly because of you. You locked down every Konoha''s emissaries.''


    "Konoha is getting a bit arrogant for now. That''s why I decided to humiliate them during the Chunin exam by destroying their Genin team. That''s why I delayed your student''s promotion. They are the bright stars for Iwa. I gotta say you really raised them strong."


    ''All of because of your damn ego, you are sending me and my dear students to hell?''


    "Still no way I am going, old man. Tsunade will still try to kill me. You know she doesn''t give a shit about the rule."


    "Genji, you are S-rank and pride of Iwa. You also beat her 2 years ago, so why afraid? Also, are you just gonna tell your students that you won''t go with them cause you are a coward?"


    I knew Onoki was adopting a phycology strategy on my pride, and I hate to admit that it''s working on me well.


    "Also, Genji. You will be in overall charge of shinobi sending to Chunin exam. Shuji will be the vice commander."


    "Why me? It is such a pain in the ?ss!"


    "Because you are the only S-rank shinobi in delegates. Also, your eagles are useful to run away in case of emergency.


    Honestly, I still have no idea how the hell you passed their test!!" Onoki asked.


    "Yes, Genji. I took the eagles'' test, but it was complete nonsense. I am starting to question your sanity since then." Shuji also asked.


    "Shut up. You all just don''t get the deep meaning behind its test."


    "Alright, you two shut up!!


    Anyway, Genji, you have to go to Konoha''s Chunin exam as Iwa''s head of delegates. This is an order!! You can''t refuse me. Dismiss!!"


    Onoki gestured his hands, telling us to get lost. Shuji and I went out of his office with frowning faces.


    After some time, I started to complain to Shuji.


    "Did you see that old stingy shorty man? He appointed me as head of delegates, and he didn''t even tell me who is going to be Iwa''s Chunin exam squad!! That old man sure went senile!!"


    "Haha, calm down. Calm down, Genji. It''s not like you to blow up. How about we grab dinner or something?"


    "Yea, you are right. I just hope my students will be safe in the Chunin exam."

 Chapter 82 - To the Konohagakure

    I woke up early this morning as today was the time we depart the Iwagakure to Konoha for the upcoming Chunin Exam.


    When I first heard from Onoki, I tried my best to argue against him to change his mind. But any Iwa shinobi knew that shorty old man''s temper and stubbornness are off the chart.


    This was my first time as the leader of delegates sent to another village. Although I am worried, at least knowing Shuji was accompanying me lessened my burden.


    Since I was leaving for a lengthy period, I asked Kitsuchi, who had the freest time among us, to take care of Han. Han was now 9 years old and lively as ever.


    He was still a child, but his chakra reserve was twice as Jounin-level. To be frank, I was a bit jealous of Jinchuriki''s massive chakra.


    I have trained my ?ss off and risked countless dangers to reach Jounin-level reserves, while this brat only needed to eat and sleep.


    Onoki deemed Han is eligible to train and prepared the training schedule for him. Onoki wanted Han to achieve at least a bit of control over the beast inside, so he won''t go rampage inside Iwagakure.


    Roshi was the teacher for Han. I clearly remembered that Roshi messed up the previous 5-tailed beast Jinchuriki''s training on the day I was born and caused me to die once more.


    But this time, Gin was added for Han''s training. With his now flawless Byakugan, he can tell when Han is overwhelmed by the beast''s chakra and act quickly.


    Come to think of Gin, Gin and Karen broke up about a year ago. Well, the reason was that Karen was being literally Karen herself. Whenever they went out, they would attract a lot of attention due to Karen''s picking fight on literally every shop there was.


    Gin also couldn''t hang out with her as he was busy as a ROCK member. Karen couldn''t hold anymore and decided to end their relationship.


    Gari was the most excited one to hear the news that he opened the party immediately. He even invited Onoki to a party for such a happy occasion. Despite all these farces, Gin and Gari are still buddies.


    Gari was now one of three vice heads of Explosion corps, right below Captain Ishika. He had immense authority over the explosion corps no, along with Kan.


    Gari has been wooing Karen ever since she broke up with Gin. Honestly, I don''t see any charm in her to make my best friends fell head over the heel for her.


    *Sigh* They really had a low standard, unlike me.


    Kan was still captain of the amateur training division but, he was one of the candidates to be the head of the explosion corps if Captain Ishika resigns.


    I was sure Kan would be the one to teach explosion release to Deidara in the cannon.


    Unlike Gin and Karen, Kitsuchi and Kimiko were still lovey-dovey and going strong. We all ?ssumed that they already did it. That was how much affections we felt from them.


    I entered Onoki''s office to notify that my delegate was going to leave now.


    "Old man. Just dropped by to inform ya that we will leave now."


    "Okay, Genji. Make sure you and others show the pride and dignity of Iwa to other villages.


    I am not too sure who will escort welcome you to Konoha. But I believe in your ability."


    "Yea, yea. Just don''t forget to send messenger birds to Konoha that we are going. I don''t want them to think we are intruding without any permission and provoke trouble."


    "Mhm, don''t worry."


    After a quick chat with Onoki, I went to the entrance/exit gate of Iwagakure. I could see several people were waiting for my appearance.


    For the upcoming Chunin exam, there are a total of 4 Iwa teams joining, including my Genin team. Also, there were 2 Iryo (medic) shinobi, 1 sensor, and 2 Chunins joining the journey. I was quite familiar with most of them.


    So, including me, Shuji, and 3 other Jounin-senseis, there were 22 people. That seemed a lot, but it was far little when visiting the enemy village.


    "Yoh, is everyone gathered?"


    "Yes, Genji. Everyone was waiting for your arrival. I know you are still not happy about this mission, but to be late for the first gathering as the leader is a bit too much." Shuji replied to me.


    "Sorry, I was running here, but on the way, I saw beauty *Cough* *Cough* I mean...I saw a person just perfect for my research. So I took some time to chat with her."


    Shuji just shook his head while Nagato and Konan looked embarrassed in front of other Genin teams and Shinobi. But Yahiko seemed excited and even asked ridiculous things.


    "Oh really, Genji-sensei? What were her three sizes? Is she prettier than last time onee-san??"


    "..."


    I gave out a deep breath of disappointment. When I first opened Yahiko''s eye to the world of Hentai, it was just to seal his lip from Kimiko and Karen.


    But I didn''t expect this rascal to grow more infatuated than me about women later. If he doesn''t read the Hentai every 2 days, he would sometimes go crazy acts like Brook, boldly asks for the color of und?rw??r when he sees beautiful girls.


    What monster have I created...


    I punched Yahiko''s head for asking idiot questions.


    "Alright, since everyone is here, let''s head out. We would do an introduction while traveling.


    It will be a long journey to Konoha, but don''t let your guard down.


    Depart!!"


    """Yes, sir!"""


    ------------------


    After 2 weeks of the journey, we entered Konoha''s territory. I gave orders to proceed in care. The sensor was to be in the middle of our formation and alert me if he picks up any chakra signals.


    Along the way, I gauged the combat prowess of Genins. They were all excellent as all of them were above low-Chunin level.


    Of course, my Genin were the strongest. Yahiko successfully learned Wing Chun sword art, which tremendously improved his taijutsu. Since he learned the art, System gave Shadow-clone jutsu scroll as a reward.


    With shadow-clone jutsu, the training of my three students progressed rapidly, also mine as well.


    Yahiko also learned several powerful earth defense jutsu.


    ''Konan now could fly by making paper wings. She also learned the explosion seal and could make her papers into the bomb quickly.


    She even knew a bit of Iryo jutsu, learned from Karen. Her main weakness was the chakra reserve. She had a bit too low reserve compared to all the jutsu she learned.


    Nagato is far most the strongest in the team. He has powerful lightning, fire, earth, wind offense, and defense jutsu. He also knows a lot about Seals. Along with Yahiko, he could use Rasengan!!''


    With all these accounts, Nagato and Yahiko were low-Jounin levels while Konan was high-Chunin level.


    ----


    It was one day after we crossed into Konoha territory. The sensor picked up several chakra signals and alerted me immediately. This caused the group to tense up.


    A few minutes later, I saw Konoha''s Anbu squad fronted us. Anbu leader stepped up.


    "State your purpose for entering Konoha territory."


    "Hello, we are Iwa shinobi to participate in the upcoming Chunin exam in Konoha. Here is the Emblem of Tsuchikage."


    "Emblem confirmed. Hello Iwa shinobi-san, we are the Anbu squad tasked to escort you guys to Konoha.


    Please follow us from now on. We suggest not to stray behind or set unnecessary actions. Please understand it as this is Konoha." Anbu squad leader politely spoke to us.


    ''Oyaa?!! Konoha Anbu polite to Iwa shinobi?? Now, this is something I didn''t expect. Probably Hiruzen''s doing. Even though I could sense their hostile eyes, they spoke a polite tone to me.


    That peace loving fool must have thought that we would find fault with the attitude of Konoha shinobi and use it to create trouble.''


    "Ah, thank you for coming to escort us. Everyone, make sure to follow the Anbu squad closely." I politely answered the Anbu squad leader.


    Since they were polite to us, I also didn''t mind polite to them. Just like Hiruzen, I also hated trouble as much as him.


    ----------------------


    After 2 more days, we finally arrived at our destination. A big giant Konoha gate greeted us.


    "We arrived, Genji-san. Please wait as we would inform Hokage-sama."


    Anbu squad immediately left after seeing Konohagakure. I guess they reached their limit for staying with us, Iwa shinobi, and speak a polite tone for 2 days straight.


    We waited for roughly 30 minutes and someone finally came to greet us. But I was surprised to see who it was. Shuji was trembling to even see him.


    It was Sakumo Hatake. The one who killed Uncle Masashi, Shuji''s father.


    "Hello, everyone. My name is Hatake Sakumo. I will be your guide in Konohagakure until you depart for Iwagakure." Sakumo remained his political smile.


    "Please take care of us, Sakumo-san. I am Genji, the leader of the Iwa delegate."


    Just then, Sakumo and I sensed the slight killing intent coming directly from Shuji. Luckily only two of us picked it up. I quickly sent a glare at Shuji to warn him.


    I couldn''t afford to let him create trouble when we are not even entered Konohagakure.


    "Sorry for my subordinate. It just that he has a slight hatred for the Konoha. I will punish him next time he does this again."


    "Haha, no problem. I also understand. Now, how about we go to your hotel and tour around the Konohagakure?"


    "That will be very nice, Hatake-san."


    We both maintained professional smiles and introduced ourselves. Pretending as we previously had never met despite knowing we faced each other during the war.

 Chapter 83 - 3 S-rank shinobi

    ----------------------------------------


    (1 week ago)


    In Konoha''s conference room...


    "Iwagakure finally sent us the list of their shinobi coming for Chunin Exam," Hiruzen spoke to elders and clan leaders in the conference.


    "So that confirmes all Great shinobi villages, exclude Kiri, sent their shinobi to Chunin exam, huh?"


    "So they finally sent the list to us now? Hmph, paranoid idiots."


    "How many of them are coming, Hokage-sama?"


    "Is there anyone we should be careful of?"


    "When will they arrive here, Hokage-sama?"


    "Everyone, calm down a bit. I will let my secretary report." Hiruzen spoke.


    Hiruzen''s secretary stepped up to the conference and started reporting.


    "According to Iwa, they sent 22 shinobi total, including 4 Genin teams, 2 Iryo shinobi, 1 Sensor, 2 Chunin, and 5 Jounins.


    Here is our Bingo book intel on them.


    Genji is an S-rank shinobi (promoted one year ago). He is known as an Eagle-Lightning Bomber and one of the top genius ever seen in Iwagakure.


    He is excelled in Earth release, Lightning release, and Explosion release. It is confirmed as he mastered and created several powerful ninjutsu such as Rasengan, Earth bloody spikes. In Taijutsu, he is one of the best swordsmen in Iwagakure, creating his own style at an early age.


    His Genjutsu, Iryojutsu abilities are unknown. But we suspect he has decent skill in Iryojutsu due to his mother''s influence, who is ex-head of Iwa General hospital.


    He contributed heavily to Iwa''s escape on the final battle in the Last Great ninja war. He is mainly responsible for Dan and Nawaki Senju''s death. He has fought several powerful A-rank Shinobi and came out victorious.


    2 years ago, he and Tsunade-Hime (princess) had a direct clash. During the battle, Tsunade-Hime confirmed that she went all out. She even used the Strength of Hundred-seal and her Summoning animal.


    Despite all of her effort, she only dealt a bit of damage to him and ended in a draw as Tsunade-Hime retreated to find her student, Shizune. We ?ssume that he has become much stronger now.


    On to the next one is Shuji. He is A-rank Iwa shinobi, whose specialty is Taijutsu. His primary weapons are Knucklers. He is also excellent in Earth release, Water release, and Wind release. We have confirmed that he is a bit weak in Genjutsu. We have no info about his Iryo skills.


    He has a deep hatred for Konoha as his father Masashi is killed by our Hatake clan head Sakumo Hatake in the Last Great Ninja war. We ?ssume this was a trigger for his frightening power raise.


    He killed several A-rank such as ......."


    Hiruzen''s secretary continued to report about other remaining Iwa shinobi''s intel to the members of the conference. None of them made any noise and quietly listened to the secretary with grim faces.


    After the secretary finished his report, Hiruzen looked around to ask for their opinions on Iwa''s motive.


    "Well, their motive should be the same as other Great Shinobi villages. Iwa wants to show their superiority and their powerful talents to wealthy nations and merchants. I think this is why Onoki sent Genji, a young-powerful S-rank youth, as head of the delegate." Nara clan head gave his view.


    "Tsk! I can''t believe another monster is coming to our village. I don''t like this at all. We already have our hands full to deal with two S-rank shinobi, and now there comes another one.


    Rasa from Suna, A from Kumo, and now Genji from Iwa!!


    Letting these 3 S-rank enemies to our Konoha is too dangerous, Hokage-sama."


    "This is why I warned you not to invite other villages, Hokage-sama! Because of your foolish peace ideology, you let Konoha in danger!" Danzo spoke his mind.


    Although Danzo was rude to Hiruzen, nobody said anything to him as he was correct. They never let 3 S-rank enemies into Konoha before. This was the first time ever.


    "Enough with blaming. We can''t turn back now. Shall we discuss who to keep watch on Iwa delegates?" Homura spoke.


    "Since they have S-rank, we need the same S-rank shinobi to keep an eye on them. How about Orochimaru-sama?" monitor


    "No, he is tasked to monitor Suna delegate, especially Rasa. Forcing him to watch on Iwa shinobi is too much." Hiruzen''s secretary told.


    "Then how about Jiraiya-sama?"


    "Jiraiya-sama is currently not in Konoha. He should probably arrive in 2 days later to watch the Kumo delegates. So he is also not available."


    They didn''t even think about suggesting Tsunade. They were not an idiot and knew all too well what kind of consequences it will be if Tsunade hosted Iwa delegate.


    "Danzo, how about you do your old friend here a favor and watch on Iwa shinobi?" Hiruzen asked Danzo.


    "Heck no. I am not here to clean your mess. Also, I don''t want to entertain some young brats." Danzo quickly refused.


    He had his own problem with creating Root. There was no way he would waste his valuable time on such things.


    Since Danzo refused, all members turned their eyes on another S-rank shinobi participating in the conference.


    "Well, that leaves... Sakumo-san, can you do it?"


    "If it is your order, I won''t mind keep an eye on them, Hokage-sama." Sakumo accepted politely.


    Seeing this, Hiruzen gave out a breath of relief and glad that he had Sakumo on his side.


    "Alright, with this, Sakumo will monitor Iwa shinobi. I will end the meeting now. Any last question before the end?" Hiruzen asked one last time.


    "Well, Hokage-sama. Since Suna, Kumo, and Iwa all sent shinobi, is there any chance Kiri will also send their shinobi?" one of the members asked.


    "I don''t know, but I doubt a secretive village, like Kiri will send someone. I will gather you all if Kiri does send people for the Chunin exam later.


    Also, I know that I don''t need to mention this, but don''t inform Tsunade about Genji or Iwa delegate! You all know what will happen next then, so I am not going to say any further. Dismiss!!"


    With Hiruzen''s word, everyone started to leave.


    ---------------------


    (Presently)


    Sakumo Hatake was guiding me and the delegate to our hotel and show around Konoha.


    Although Konoha citizens didn''t react much when seeing us, Konoha Shinobi acted complete shit opposite to their citizens.


    They openly glared at us with eyes of caution. Some spit their saliva out while another even grabbed Kunai pocket for battle.


    ''What a bunch of idiots. Do they think we will really attack them or what? It really feels uncomfortable to be stared at by old ?ss men. I want girls to look at me, not your idiot males!''


    "Man, these people sure staring at us a lot. Can you do something about this, Konoha shinobi-san? I feel like they are violating me." Yahiko didn''t hold back and straight up confessed his discomfort.


    Soon everyone looked at Yahiko as he has some screw in his head. ''Did he even know about what the word ''violating'' is'' was what they had in mind.


    Unlike other innocent kids, Yahiko is m?tur? a lot in a s?xu?? way due to the Hentai world.


    Sakumo just laughed at Yahiko and apologized to him for the inconvenience. He just told surrounding Konoha shinobi to quit staring politely.


    ''Wow, what a polite tone from S-rank shinobi. If it were me, I would have shouted to mind their own shit. Such a huge difference.''


    It didn''t take long for us to reach our hotel.


    "Here is your hotel. By the way, other villages of shinobi are also staying here. So please don''t cause any trouble or ruckus fighting them.


    First, unpack your belongings. Then I will give you a quick tour of Konoha. After that, you guys can do whatever you want." Sakumo told us the schedule for today.


    "Alright. Thank you, Hatake-san." I replied Sakumo.


    Then I ordered everyone to go to their own room and unpack their belongings for 10 minutes.


    My room was on the highest floor, which was the third. And I was the only one to reside on the third floor, which was a bit weird.


    ''Are they trying to separate me and delegate? But for what?''


    When I go up, there were only 5 rooms on the third floor. On the first and second floors, I saw a shit ton of rooms. But to have only 5 rooms on the third floor got me curious.


    Suddenly I heard my 2 neighbor rooms open simultaneously.


    "What the fu?k is this!!!"


    I was too shocked by my neighbors and accidentally said it out loud. It was Rasa and A from Kumo. These two future Kage monsters were my hotel neighbors.


    Hearing me, they also looked around and were visibly shocked to see me, especially Rasa. 3 S-rank shinobi from different villages all staying next to each other''s room.


    ''God damn it. I see what those Konoha fu?kers are trying to do. They want us to be wary of each other and stay low. Also, by grouping us together, it is easy to keep track of us.


    But I really didn''t expect A and Rasa to be here for the Chunin exam. Oh man, I can already feel troubles are coming to me. What a pain in the ?ss.''


    ---------------------


    (Somewhere over the rainbow)


    "Oh shit, I am late, I am late, I am late!! The old man will lecture me a lot when I come back. But it is worth it as I took 3 days more for my research. Heheheh." Jiraiya was on his way to Konoha.


    But Jiraiya stopped his movement and went to a nearby town to have a delicious meal.


    He entered the shop and then immediately captivated by the beauty of the waitress. Just as he was about to ask her something, he heard someone calling his name.


    "Hey, Jiraiya. Long time no see. What are you doing here?"


    Jiraiya turned around and was surprised that it was Tsunade who called him. He immediately went to sit at her table.


    "Yoh, Tsunade-Hime. I also didn''t expect to see you here. I was on my way to Konoha and stopped here for the meal."


    "Konoha? So you are finally ended your journey?"


    "No, the old man contacted me for help. For the upcoming Chunin exam, other Great Ninja villages sent S-rank shinobi as head delegates. He asked me to come to Konoha and keep an eye on the Kumo delegate.


    How about it, Tsunade-Hime? Do you want to come with me? It''s been a long time since we left Konoha, and it should be refreshing to watch the Chunin exam."


    Jiraiya asked as he didn''t know Genji was there in Konoha.

 Chapter 84 - In Konoha 1

    I looked at Rasa and A while both of them sized me up cautiously. It seemed like they also didn''t expect me to appear here.


    Rasa, an S-rank shinobi from Suna. A, an S-rank shinobi from Kumo, and me, an S-rank shinobi from Iwa. We are all staying in one hotel on the same floor.


    We were all silent. The atmosphere was getting awkward as it could be. I couldn''t stand anymore and was the first one to break the silence by speaking to Rasa.


    "Hey, Rasa! Long time no see, huh? I didn''t expect you will be here?"


    This was not the first time I met him after I beat him in the Last Great Ninja war. I met Rasa again during the mission a few years ago. Though rather than meet, it was more like passing each and exchange b?r?ly a few sentences.


    "Tsk, I also didn''t expect you to be here. Well then, if you excuse me."


    Rasa only spoke a few words and left the floor. Now it was only me and A. He had huge muscles build up just like cannon.


    "What''s up with him? He is such an unsocial guy, isn''t he? By the way, you are A-san, right?. Nice to meet you." I spoke to A.


    "Hello, Genji-san. I also heard about you."


    A politely replied to me. Ever since the Great Ninja villages were established, Iwa and Kumo had less hatred than we had for other Great villages.


    Iwa and Kumo didn''t interfere with each other''s work or caused some serious accident between us. It was very neutral between us. I think this was why A politely answered me.


    But it didn''t mean he wasn''t cautious of me. We just exchanged a few bits and left.


    -----------------


    Before Sakumo takes us to meet Hokage, I gathered up the delegate members privately and gave a few mindful people that they should be aware of in Konoha.


    "There are two most people you should avoid or be careful of in Konoha. First is Orochimaru. He is a student of current Hokage and S-rank shinobi, especially you kids.


    He is a massive snake pedophile and genderless.


    Furthermore, he is okay with all kinds of gender; male, female, or even homo is no problem for him to s?x. "


    Genins all shivered in fear knowing there is such a massive pervert here in Konoha.


    "On to the next one you should be warry is Danzo. He is an old crook acting like he is on the justice side, but he is just a greedy and jealous bastard.


    He won''t hesitate to kill someone who he deems as a danger for Konoha. So it''s better you don''t even see him.


    Here is the picture of both Orochimaru and Danzo. Remember is clearly and once you see them, go away from them as far as you can. Dismiss!"


    """Yes, we got it. Sir."""


    But after they went, I asked Shuji to stay alone.


    "Alright, Shuji. I am glad that you are doing well in holding yourself. For now, don''t think about your father''s death. We can''t let you go blast in Konoha, at least not now.


    However, I can promise you that one year later, we will go and kill Sakumo in secret to avenge Uncle Masashi!!"


    Shuji, who seemed to bit down, looked at me shockingly after hearing my words.


    "Are you serious, Genji? You really promise?"


    "When did I lie to you? I also want to avenge Uncle Masashi, but now is not the time or place. I promise you one year later, we will privately go for a journey and kill Sakumo when he goes for the mission."


    Shuji seemed excited about killing Sakumo and reassured me that he will do his best to stay down.


    ------------------


    Sakumo took us to Hokage''s office. We just shared simple greetings and passed him Onoki''s letter to him. Hiruzen scanned our Genins a bit. He expressly focused on Nagato.


    Well, I already expected as Nagato has red hair, which is dead give away that he is Uzumaki.


    But Hiruzen didn''t ask me anything, just smiled and wished us to have a great time in Konoha.


    ''Tui* You have the nerve to wish us to have a great time in this hell, you geezer. ''


    Sakumo then guided us to famous tourist attractions, such as hot spring, Akimichi Barbecue restaurant, training section, etc.


    I had to knock out Yahiko when visiting the hot spring as I knew far too well what this little uncontrollable beast would do.


    Kids were running and playing around with loud noises as they didn''t care about anything. While we were watching them quietly, I heard someone calling up his dad.


    "Dad! How come you are here?"


    We looked at who it was. Sakumo apologized to us and patted his running son. Kakashi''s face was bloomed with smiles when he saw his father.


    "Excuse me, this is my son Kakashi. He is such a troublesome kid, haha. Kakashi, I am currently busy. Go play with other kids." Sakumo pushed Kakashi away with a light smile.


    ''Are you blind or what? There is no way this aloof Kakashi even has friends to play, you dumb Sakumo.'' I internally thought.


    Suddenly, another loud voice came from Kakashi''s voice.


    "Kakashi, let''s have a showdown who can run faster. If I lose to you, I will run around the playground 100 times!!"


    It was stupid looking young Guy. His eyes were burning with fire to have a duel with Kakashi.


    "I already won yesterday. Why should I do it again? I am not doing it." Kakashi immediately refused him.


    "Remember that green-clothed kid well. In the future, he will be one of the most powerful shinobi in Konoha, maybe in the entire world. My intuition says so. So don''t look down on him if you battle him in the future. This applies to even Jounins."


    "You mean that Green kid? Not Konoha''s white fang''s child, Genji-san?"


    "Yes, that Green kid is special. Don''t look down on him just because of his dumb-ass looks."


    Everyone stared at Guy immediately. Intuitions from S-rank shinobi are mostly true no matter how foolish they sounded. Yahiko especially learned this from his death experience.


    "If he has such frightening potential, shouldn''t we kill him now for Iwa''s future?" Shuji asked me. Others all nodded to Shuji''s question as they were agreeing with him.


    "No. We are not here to ?ssassinate someone. Just getting info is already plenty.


    Umm?! Where is Yahiko? I thought he was listening to me..."


    To my question, everyone noticed Yahiko was not with us. We looked around and found him handing a bouquet to Konoha Female Academy sensei.


    "Ohh, Se?orita... Do you believe in love at first sight - or should I walk by again? Here are the roses expressing my 100% love to you."


    "..."


    "Why are you not replying to me? I was feeling a little off today, but you''ve turned me on again. Please accept my love!"


    ''Oh, I can''t take this anymore. This brat is using my research material like his own and dares to flirt with Konoha shinobi just because she has a huge rack. He brings shame to Iwagakure and his sensei, me!!!''


    "Konan, terminate him."


    "Roger."


    Konan immediately controlled her papers to fly at Yahiko and mummified Yahiko completely. Then she took him somewhere who knows where to bury him.


    Sakumo and Konoha academy students were all watching this quietly. Sakumo seemed to bit curious about how Konan could control paper while kids were just awed by Yahiko''s braveness to confess his love right away.


    "Ahem, sorry for showing such a shameful act. I couldn''t teach my student properly and caused trouble to Konoha Academy sensei." I pretended to look sorry at Sakumo.


    "Ahaha, no worry, Genji-san. I am sure he is just in his rebellious phase." Sakumo spoke.


    -----------------


    After visiting the academy, Sakumo told us that his guide is ended and we could wander anywhere in Konohagakure. He just reminded us to follow Konoha''s public regulations. But we all fully knew the dozens of Anbu would follow us to even the toilet.


    "Alright, everyone. Gather up! I will form pair groups now. Always travel with your group whenever you go somewhere. This is an order.


    First group: Me and Nagato


    Second group: Shuji, Yahiko, Konan, Jito (Iryo shinobi)


    Third group: Genin team 12 with their Jounin-sensei


    Fourth group: Genin team 18 with their Jounin-sensei


    Fifth group: Genin team 9 with their Jounin-sensei


    Sixth group: leftovers (2 Chunins, Sensor, and other Iryo shinobi)


    Also, don''t question my decision on pairing. I have something to do with Nagato. Okay, split up!"


    Everyone grouped according to my pairings and left to do their own things.


    After everyone is gone, Nagato, who was quiet the whole time, asked me.


    "Genji-sensei. What do you want me to do?"


    "Hehe, come on. Follow me. I will tell you as we go."


    "Where are we going, Genji-sensei?"


    "Oh, I will take you to the most delicious Ramen shop in the world. It is an unforgivable sin not to go to the Ichiraku Ramen shop if you come to Konoha. Remember that carefully, Nagato."


    "I will remember it, Genji-sensei. But I didn''t know you like Ramen, sensei?"


    I smiled at Nagato. Going to Ichiraku for tasting was just curiosity. My real reason was to make Nagato and Kushina meet.


    ''I am sure Kushina has some of the Uzumaki clan''s seals. Although Iwagakure stole plenty when we invaded Uzushiogakure, human''s greediness is endless.


    Now I''m not an idiot to barge in their house secretly while the whole freaking Anbu division is keeping an eye on me. The best way to do this is to use Nagato. He can persuade Kushina to hand them over to rebuild their clan.


    For the back-up plan, I will f?r??b?? declare Nagato as clan head of the Uzumaki clan. Konoha has only one lady, while Iwa has 2 Uzumaki shinobi (Nagato and Karen) and a ton of ?du?t Uzumaki civilians throughout Iwa territory. It is obvious who has more right to claim Uzumaki seals.


    I am such a genius, muhahahahaha.''


    "Nagato, do you know what your clan is feared for?"


    "Sealing, sensei."


    "Yes, but Konoha is using your clan''s sealing jutsu like theirs. All because they have just one Uzumaki lady residing here."


    Nagato clenched his fist. Konoha killed his parents, and with Iwa''s brainwashing, he has grown Konoha more than anyone on his team.


    "How dare they, using my clan''s legacy!!"


    "Now now, calm down, Nagato. Angry won''t solve anything but trouble. You must be manipulative in order to get what you want.


    I am going to give you a test now. You can always find that Uzumaki girl in the Ichiraku Ramen shop. Her name is Kushina. Use that brain of yours to persuade Kushina to teach you Uzumaki clan seals.


    I don''t care what method or how you do it. It''s also okay to fail as I know how hard this test is. So just try your best."


    Nagato looked determined to complete this test.

 Chapter 85 - Not a chapter

Guys, I won''t be able to write any chapters this week. So don''t wait for any new ones. Maybe if I have time next week, I will start writing it.